CONTENTS

B. G. Forses: Magnesite of the Adelaide System: Petrography and De-

seriptive Stratigraphy 9, care eae

H. K. Fry: Classificatory Systems of Kinship... 2. nes

H. Womers.ey: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paraphagic

upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family

RASSALA RC ee aa | acta | Rw gas re atte

H. Womers.tey: New Records of Species of Leptolaelaps (Acarina, Meso-

stigmata) from Australia and New Zealand __..... AP fea Ws

H. Womerstey: A New Genus and Species Laelaptoseius novae-

zelandiae from New Zealand (Acarina, Aceosejidae) 0000 ae

H. Womerstey: A Second Species of Pristolaelaps (Acarina, Laelaptidae )

Lome SUSKAlio ee § SEN OP cake De eee ere = ue

A. F, Wizson: The Charnockitic Granites and Aseqrintes Granites of

GentralAvistrattay” ve Fos. aed. ame wae ua

ME tvi.Le: An Aberrant Species of Eclipta from Australia was

H. Fintayson: Nomenclature of Notomys (Muridae) in the Lake Eyre

Dos we eee oe Le a ee RT.

J. N. Buacx: The Relationship between I]lumination and Global Radiation

S. J. EpmMonns: Some Australian Echiuroids (Echiuroidea ) ect, ies

D. Kinc: The Sand Ridge Deserts of South Australia and Related Aeolian

Landforms of the Quaternary Arid Cycles 00 ass

Bernarp C. Corron: Distorted Cowries 9s, te

M. J. TyLEeR: Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of Amphibolurus

adelaidensis (Gray) (Reptilia, Agamidae) on the Nullarbor Plain ....

I. A. Mumme: Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the

Summits of a Number of Prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges

H. H. Fintayson: On Rattus greyi Gray and its Derivatives =...

R. V. Sourncotr: Notes on the Genus Sphaerotarsus (Acarina, Smarididae )

Paut G. Wirson: A Consideration of the Species Previously Included

within Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.) DC. 2.0 te

H. Worrner: On Some Structural Development in the Central Part of the

Great Australian Artesian Basin 0.0000 eee ete

C. D. Boomsma: Notes on the Genus Eucalyptus in South Australia _.....

G. CurrrenDALe: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 1 .....

Henry Kenneth Fry, pD.s.0., M.D., B.S., B.SC., DIP.P-H., 1886-1959 __......

List of Lectures, 1958-1959 __..... i a Tee, i

Balincessheet mee ieee tee Ga Wis tesa aes me ie:

Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal and List of Fellows, 1959 . Sco

Index ee eos © GS. tt oie ae

PAGE

MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM: PETROGRAPHY AND

DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY

BY B. G. FORBES

Summary

A dolomite-magnesite sequence, the Montacute Dolomite formation, occurs at scattered points

northward from Adelaide at a constant stratigraphic level within the Adelaide System. The

formation is richest in magnesite and contains very little arkose at Copley, while near Beetaloo it is

rich in arkose, is thickest and contains much less magnesite. Individual units show little facies

change over a few miles. The most common rock is dark grey dolomite, chiefly massive, but also

laminated. Magnesite rock is generally a conglomerate, pale grey in colour. Dolomitic arkose forms

a significant part of the succession in certain regions. Ripple marks, mud cracks, slump bedding

and, in magnesite conglomerate, reverse graded bedding are common structures. Flow direction is

indicated by sedimentary structures and by preferred orientation of grains.

MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM: PETROGRAPHY AND

DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY

by B. G. Forsrs*

[Read 9 April 1959]

SUMMARY

A dolomite-magnesite scquence, the Montacute Dolomite formation, uccurs

at scattered poinls northward from Adelaide at a constant stratigraphie Jevel

within the Adelaide System.

The formation is richest in magnesite and contains very little arkose. at

Copley, while near Beetalov it is rich in arkose, is thickest and contains much

less maxznesite. Individual units show little facies change over a few imiles.

The most common rock is dark grey dolomite, chielly massive, but also

laminated. Mugnesite: rock is Binet a couzlomerate, pale grey in colour.

Dolomiti¢c arkose forms a significant part of the succession in certam regions.

Ripple marks, mud cracks, slump bedding and, in magnesite conglomerate,

“reverse” graded bedding ure common structures. Flow direction is indicated

by sedimentary structures and by preferred orientation of grains.

INTRODUCTION

The Proterozvie rocks of South Australia have for some time been known

to contain deposits of magnesite, but the great extent and sedimentary nature

of these deposits have been recognized only in recent years.

This paper covers the petrography and stratigraphy of the most notable

formation containing these beds, A discussion of their origins is reserved for

a later paper.

METHODS

At most of the fourteen localities examined stratigraphic sections were

measured from the top of the Aldgate Sandstones to the base of the Sturt Tillite

of the Adelaide System. In addition, detailed examinations were carried out

of that part of the section equivalent to the Montacute Dolomite formation, a

collection made of oriented and other specimens, together with a record of

directed sedimemary structures and the mapping of selected units.

Size distribution and preferred form orientation of grains in detrital rocks

were determined both in thin section and on flat surfaces in the laboratory.

Laboratory procedures included chemica] analysis and qualitative tests, refrac-

tive index determinations, insoluble residue studies and routine examination of

thin sections,

DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY

GENERAT,

Magnesite of the Adelaide System is confined largely (but not entirely) to

the Montacute Dolomite or its equivalent, in the Torrensian Serics, this forma-

tion in most arcas being easily identified by its distinctive lithology and its

stratigraphic position between the Aldgate Sandstones and the Sturt Tillite.

The composition and thickness of the formation at various localities are

shown in Table 1, The positions of the localities appear in Fig. 1, which also

* Department of Geology, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Koy. Soc. S. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83.

2 Bb. G. FORBES

shows contours of thickness and sand-content. The table and figure are based

on my own stratigraphic sections and those of Spry (1952), Wilson (1952) and

Wymond (1950) at Hawker, Rhynie and Clare respectively. Fig. 1 is necessarily

in part hypothetical.

TABLE TJ.

Properties of tha Montacute Dolomite

Locality Thickness Porrentage thickness of

(ft.) magnesite Sand Shale Carbonate

1. Adelaide (Torrens Gorge ) 5ag 2 14 3 83

2. Rhynive 100? oY 07 little? | much

3. Clare 1008 OF “7 little? much

4. Rabertstown \ 470 0 0 little? mutch

6, Bundaleer 45tt 1 25 7 66

6. Crystal Brook 1400 I 40 7 53

7. Beetaloo 2800 1 16 t4 70

&. Pt. Germein 2900 1 22 28 ft

%. Mundallio Creek pon 5 5 33 42

10. Depot Creek 00 6 9 23 68

lt, Johnburg 600? 8? 127 437 an?

12. Hawker 1420 10 1 31 68

13. Copley 2000 17 bi | 56 42

14. Arkaroola 2300 7 6 6 88

15, Witchelina 1600-2800 I 35 21 44

The greatest percentage thickness of magnesite is present in the northern

Copley region, The formation itself is thickest in the Beetaloo region, where

also there is a great thickness of sand of arkose composition, These associated

facts suggest that near Beetaloo the area of accumulation was of the nature

of 2 zeugogeosyncline (a basin of subsidence with complementary highlands

nearby), to use Kay’s (1951) terminology, It has not been found possible to

correlate units between distant localities. However, diagrams showing per-

centage composition of various constituents per 50 or 100 feet have revealed

general tendencies common to most sections. These are (1) a low proportion

of dolamite near the middle of the succession and, in the same place, a high

proportion of sand; (2) a high proportion of magnesite near the top of the

succession.

Locat. VARIATION

Local facies changes in individual units could only be evaluated along the

strike of outcrops. This study in particular is made ‘difficult by the poor ex-

posure of most carbonate racks.

The Montacute Dolomite has not been recognized as such by the S.A,

Department of Mines on either the Gawler or Echunga map sheets (respec-

tively north and south of the Adelaide sheet). On the Adelaide sheet this

formation shows rather rapid facies changes, expressed mainly in its disappear-

ance to the north and east.

Thin magnesite beds at localities further north show little change where

examined over one mile or more. The magnesite beds once worked by the

B.1.P. Company at Mundallio Creek wedge out a little north of the Cardassis

workings, but extend north for at least five miles from this point, Dolomitic

MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 3

arkose beds at Beetaloo, Port Cermein Gorge and Witchelina commonly thin

ont after being followed a mile or so along the strike.

It thus appears that magnesite beds are thin lenses of great extent (at least

five miles diameter; perhaps 10-30 miles), Dolomite beds reach a greater thick-

ness, and aré probably more extensive. Dolomitic arkose beds are probably

not as extensive as magnesite.

PETROGRAPHY

GENERAL

Rocks of the magnesitic succession are varicd both in composition and

fabric. The chief mineral component is dolomite, which forms a dark blue-

grey dolomite rock or may be mixed with detrital quartz and feldspar, magne-

site or argillaceous material. No calcite, even as a vein mineral, has been found

in the magnesitic succession.

Magnesite and dolomite were distinguished by determining refractive index

or a rapid turbidimetric determination of calcium, where special tests were

necessary.

Contrasting properties of magnesite and dolomite rock are tabulated below:

Magmesite rock Dolomite rock

1, Colour geuerally pale prey to white. 1. Calour generally dark blue-grey.

2. Occurs chicly as a conglomerate, 3. Oceurs chiefly in the massive or laminu-

rarely as a breccia or massive. ated form. When fragmental it is a

3. Individual beds are thin, breevia, rarely « conglomerate.

4, Occurs chiefly as pebbles when in 3. Average thickness of beds greater than

rocks of mixed compesition, for magnesite.

4, Occurs chielly as matrix when in

rocks of mixed coriposition.

Macnesirr Rock

Components of magnesite rock ure magnesite, talc, dolomite, authigenic

albite, carbon, and detrital quartz and feldspar. Most magnesite rocks contain

between 5 and 10 per cent. acid insoluble material.

Authigenic albite las been encountered only in a few specimens of mag-

nesite conglomerate or arenite, Crystals are in most cases significantly located

just inside the borders of magnesite pebbles. The idiomorphic albite has prob-

ably been derived by solution within the matrix of the conglomerate and deposi-

tion within magnesite pebbles, Detrital quartz and albite both show peripheral

solution.

Dolomite is intimately mixed with magnesite or appears as detrital frag-

ments in the matrix. It forms idivblastic rhombs more commonly than mag-

nesite, and is gencrally coarser-grained than magnesite crystals, which are about

0-002 mm. in diameter. The term “crystal” is used to avoid confusion with

detrital magnesite, such as magnesite pebbles which are aggregates of crystals,

as also is massive magnesite rock.

Magnesite weathers to a white or cream colour irrespective of the colour

of a fresh surface. This is a useful guide in distinguishing the rare dark varicties

of magnesite from the normal grey dolomite.

Magnesite conglomerate and arenite are composed of rounded magnesite

pebbles in a matrix of chiefly magnesite and dolomite. Individual pebbles range

in diameter up to about 12 cm.

The size distribution of pebble long diameters in section has been studied

4 B. G, FORBES

on a number-frequency basis. Results for six fine-grained conglomerates from

Copley have been recalculated by Greenman’s (1951) method to give cumu-

lative curves. The following data were thus derived (Table 2);

TABLE 2.

Size Distribution of Magnesite Pebbles,

OC: kerr

Specimen A77 Median diameter Sorting coefficiuat

mm. (Md) (Sa)

40 2-3 1-20

16] 0-94 L338

175A 0-65 146

185 2:3 1+33

193 9:57 1-29

277A 1-7 1-53

The conglomerates are all well-sorted.

The average of maximum pebble sizes for some Incalities, together with

the average thickness of a magnesite bed for that locality is shown in Table 3,

TABLE 2.

Properties of Magnesite Conglomerate Beds.

Locality Nonher in Average largest Averupe Bed

' Sample pehble, mm. | thickness, feat

Adelaide d4 } 23 O-4

Port Germein Gorge 4 5 I

Muudallio Creek 25 18 1-6

Depot Creek 25 26 1-7

Copley 28 3) 2-1

Arkaroola 23 8 l-4

Witchelina (rough estimate) 3

It was possible to collect at Copley individual magnesite pebbles which

had weathered out of the conglomerate matrix, Sphericity has been calculated

and shape plotted according to Zingg’s method by determining for each pebble

its volume and its largest, intermediate and shortest intercepts (a, b and c¢

respectively). For 50 pebbles there is a preponderance of dises with b/a about

0-8 and c/b about 0-4. Average sphericity is about 0:65.

Certain characteristics of the pebbles—such as pinched or contorted margins,

central depressed areas and curvature—cannot be represented numerically.

Magnesite pebbles show no internal structure. Most conglomerates show pre-

ferred orientation of magnesite pebbles, This feature has been studied in

sections parallel to bedding and in the vertical section parallel to the direction

of preferred orientation. A distinction may be made between groups of low

and high matrix content in the preferred orientation data, Rocks of low

matrix content possess « larger number of pebbles at a high angle to the bedding

than those of high matrix content. This is perhaps due to mutual interference

of pebbles during deposition,

Magnesite breccia at Montacute cecurs chiefly as thin zones of fragments

which are lath-shaped in section. At Copley the breccias are thicker (up to

MAGNESITE OF ‘JHE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 5

4 feet) and compnsed of a poorly-sorted mixture of dolomite and magnesite

fragments in a-dolomitic matrix. This matrix sometimes forms valy a small pro-

portion of the rock and may be crowded with small magnesite fracments, Large

magnesite fragments are chiefly disc-shaped, hnt are traversed by cracks and

passess irregular boundaries, Many plates have been bent, Others, in the

section offered by the rock face are completely wrapped around portions of

fhe matrix, Fragments show preferred orientation.

Massive or laminated magnesite occurs in thin beds, often at the base uf

magnesite conglomerate and has much the same composition as maguesite

pebbles.

DoroemitTr Rock

Dolomites of the magnesitic succession are nat chemically distinguishable

from dolomite rock of other formations. Most of the analyzed dolomites. are

the common massive or laminated variety. They centain abuut the same pro-

portion of insoluble material as non-fragmental magnesite, but less than that

of the average magnesite rock,

Individual dolomite crystals are about 0-004 mm. diameter, Irregular dark

chert nodules or lenses occur within some dolomite beds,

Mussive or laminated dolomite varies between medium and dark grey,

This is bused on comparison with the chart of the Rock Colour Chart Committee

(1951), The colour depends largely on carbon content and shows no systematic

variation. Weathered surfaces of dolomite are pale blnish grey.

Dolomite hreecia is very common in the Crystal Brook-Beetaloo region,

The composition of angular dolomite fragments is the same as that of massive

dolomite. Dolumite fragments are chicHy lath-shaped in section, and up to

about 3 cm. long, Many laths are curved and arranged with their long axis

parallel to the bedding. The rock contains about 70 per cent. volume of

areniceous matrix. Bedding planes are undisturbed.

Dotomire-Quarrz Rocks

This group forms an important part of the magnesitic succession at Torrens

Gorge, between Crystal Brook and Depot Creek, und at Witehelina, ‘The term

dolumitic arkose is applied to quartz-feldspar-dolomite rocks containing up to

50 per cent. dolomite. The majority of these rocks have 20 to 40 per eent-

dolomite. Their fresh surface is very pale grey to dark grey and they weather

tu a pale brown.

Some atkeses show lamination due to alternation of fine and coarse layers.

Imperfect graded bedding was scen in only one specimen.

Large quartz and feldspar grams are chiefly rounded to sub-rounded, while

most grains (particularly quarts) are irregular in shape- Irsegularity if shape

is partly due ta recrystallization and peripheral reaction with the carbonate

matrix. Tiny cubes of pyrile are freyuenlly present in the heavy fraction.

Zircon deeurs chiefly as well-rounded elongate grains whose size is proportional

ta the mean diameter for the rock, The predominant variety of tourmaline is

brown and crystallized.

Magnesite js present in small wnount either as matrix ur detwital particles in

some dolomite-quartz rocks, Dolomite, whether as matrix or discrete fruyments,

is most commouly very fine-grained, Some spherical dolomite particles possess

at their centre an angular grain of quarts, A few rocks contain large patebes of

reerystallized dolamite as well as the normal fine-grained. variety. The dolumite

matrix may be completely recrystallized where there has been dynamic meéta-

morphism. This is so at ‘Yorrens Gorge, Arcnaceous dolomites are of wide

6 B, G. FORBES

occurrence, At Torrens Gorge they are associated with matmesite breccia and

at Crystal Brook with dolomite breccia.

Dolomitic arkose possesses a significant regional variation in properties,

Table 4 below shows that, with the exception of Torrens Gorge, there aré two

petrographic “provinces”,

TABLE 4.

Properties of ucid-insoluble residues of Nolomitic Arkosé

Place Feidspar®, Feldspar Heavy Minerals {Moan size (mm)

‘Torrens Gorge 11-38 acid plagioclase pink zircon 0-09 —

0-76

Crystal Brook 31-37 mirroline tourmaline 0-24 —

; (piak zircon) 0-43

Port Garmein Gorge 37-47 mitraling pink zircon and (22 —

tourmaline 0-41

Mundalio Creel 36-48 microlina tourmaline Q.22—

(pink wirvou) 0-42

Copley 35 acid plagioclase =| enlourless zircon 0-10

Arkuroola 51-30 atid plagioclase colourless zircon 0-07

and tourmaling

Witchelina 25(—) acid plagioclase culourless zi‘con 07

and tourmaline

a a

In the northern (Copley-Witchelina) province arkeses are finer-grained,

contain acid plagioclase with little or no microcline, and colourless zircon as

the chief heavy mineral. The mid-northern region (Crystal Brook-Mundallio

Creek) is characterized by a larger mean size, microcline and pink zircon. The

feldspar content is a little lower in the Copley-Farina group.

Cent

Two main kinds of chert may be recognized. One represents the silici-

fication of separate fragmental carbonate beds while the other occurs as lenses

and nodules within dolomite rock.

At Copley some thin chert beds extend for several miles. Other beds of

similar fabric and composition occur as lenses within magnesite conglomerates.

The cherts are dark-coloured, show a relict conglomerate or arenite fabric and

are composed largely of fine-grained quartz and medium-grained dolomite,

together with an extremely fine-grained muterial, possibly carbon.

Nodular chert within dolomite rock occurs as black or greyish lenses parallel

to bedding. Short extensions of the nodules cut across the bedding. Sometimes

lamination in the dolomite is diverted around the nodules.

Of four nodules exatnined in the laboratory, one showed lamination parallel

to that of the enclosing dolomite, while the other three showed outlines of srnall

elongate and rounded fragments.

It would seem that most chert was formed by the preferential silicification

of fragmental carbonates either as distinct and separate beds of fragmental

carbonates or as lenses of fragrnental carbonates intercalated in massive rocks,

ARGILLITE

Rocks of this gronp have been given little attention in the laboratory.

Slates or siltstones de not form a significant part of the succession except ut

Witchelina. Colour is commonly dark grey or shades of blue- and preen-grey.

A reddish variant was noted at Copley.

MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM

STRUCTURES

Ripple marks are common at Witchelina and are observed at the five

northernmost localities. They are chiefly regular, with parallel ridges of low

relief, They are found mainly on dolomitic arkuses and arenaceous rocks, but

HAWKER

fo e

DEPOT ‘Ck.

e os

MUNDALLIO cK. | #JOHNBURGH

ARE

QR OBERTSTOWN

® RHYNIE N

ADELAIDE, +s

SO MILES

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Fig. 1—Hypothetical lithofacies and isopach map of the Montacute Dolomite. Propartion

af sand is shown by stippling: light stippling, 10-30 per cent.; dense stippling, greater than

30 per cent. Heavy lines are contours of thickness: figures indicate thousands of feet.

Fig, 2.—Flow directions as shown by sedimentary structnres in the Montacute Dolomite.

For explanation see text.

are also found in dolomite rock. About one-third of the ripple marks observed

are slightly asymmetrical, Compound and arcuate ripples are much less

common.

kK 5. G. FORBES

Mud cracks were noted in largest number at Copley and Arkaroola, They

are present also at Depot Creek, Mundallio Creek and Witchelina. The struc-

ture is found in dolomite rock (paler-coloured varieties), dolomitic arkose and

inixed rocks, Cracks range in size up-to about half an inch across, and generally

contain detritus (including small magnesite fragments) contrastingly coarser

than the cracked layer. Polygons are up to ten inches in diameter, and are

sometimes superimposed on ripple marks, The presence of cvarse detritus

within cracks indicates formation before burial of the cracked layer.

Slump structures are found in fine-yrained sediments such as mugnesite

(iaseye and dolomite rock, The vertical thickness disturbed is generally only

a few inches, Brecciation duc to slamping was scen only once, Both the slump-

ing and brecciation were on a minute scale, Crests of slump folds are occa-

sionally truncated by layers above.

_ Wavy bedding is a feature of laminated dolomite and some dolomitic

arkoses. Irregularities in most places are only slight, In the sequence of

arenacccus dolomites near Crystal Brook the amplitude of the crumpling is

about 15 mm. Some of the folds are slightly overturned, At Torrens Gorge

the structure is very common in banded dolomites. In some contorted panes

the crests were several inches high, broke under pressure and allowed material

to pass upward from the lower bed. Differential pressures during compaction

of soft sediment would therefore appear to be an important factor here in the

production of wavy bedding.

“Reverse” graded bedding is a persistent feature of magnesite conglomerate

heds, Not all magnesite conglumerate beds shaw vertical trading, but when

ivading is present it is normally from fine-grained at the base to coarser-grained

ut the top. Beds showing reverse grading are from about 2 éo 4 feet thick.

Both normal grading and current bedding are rare, Clay-pellet impres-

sions are common in the siltstones and fine-grained arkoses of Witchelina.

SuMMaRY oF Drmectionan STRUCTURES

Results obtained by various authors (e.g, Brett. 1955; McKee, 1954) shaw

the palaeogeographic value of measuring numerous directional structures of

sedimentary rocks. In the present study it is unfortunate that in most lodalities

information of this kind is meagre. However, what is available is fairly con-

eorlant for each locality, and therefore significant, In Fig, 2 is a geographic

summary of flow directions interpreted mainly from asymmetric ripple marks.

Sufficient data were obtainable at Witchelina, Arkaroola and Depot Creek for

representalion by an orientation diagram, In other localities dicections ate

indicated by arrows with a letter showing whether the inference is based on

symmetric or asymmetric ripple marks (S$ or R), measurement in magnesite or

quartzite of preferred orientation of grains (M or Q), or current bedding (CG),

The downwards tilt of the depositional surface causing slumping is indicated

by a bene line,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Acknowledgment is due to many people and organizations for their assist-

ance during the period of research. I am particularly grateful for the kind

advice of Professor 4. R. Alderman and the friendly atmosphere of the Geology

Departments of the University of Adelaide.

This study has heen financed by University of Adelaide Senior Research

Scholarships and a James Barrans Scholarship.

MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 9

REFERENCES

Bretr, G. Wen ante Cross-bedding in the Baraboo quartzite of Wisconsin, J. Geology, 63,

pp. 143-148.

Greenman, N. N., 1951, The mechanical analysis of sediments from thin-section data, J.

Geology, 59, pp. 447-462.

Kay, M,, 1951. North American Geosynclines, Mem. geol, Soc. Amer,., 48.

McKer, E. D,, 1954. Stratigraphy and history of the Moenkopi formation of Triassic age,

Mem. geol. Soc. Amer., 61.

Rock Cotour Cuart Commarrer, 1951. Rock colour chart, Geol. Soc. Amer., New York.

Spry, A. H., 1952. Sediments of the Adelaide System in the Mount Plantagenet area, South

Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, pp. 164-180,

Wiuson, A. F., 1952, The Adelaide System as developed in the Riverton-Clare region,

northern Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, pp. 131-149.

Wvmonp, A. P., 1950. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of Adelaide.

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSHIP

BY H. K. FRY

Summary

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSILUP

By H. K. Pry

[Read 9 April 1959]

Nearly a century ago Morgan published (1871) his monumental work on

Systeins of Consanguinity and Affinity. He had discovered that in many parts

of the world every person in a society was included in one of several great

clusses of kinship terms. He deduced that systems of kinship could be ex

plained “on the assumption of the antecedent existence of u series of customs

und institutions, one reformatory of the other, commencing with promiscuous

intercourse, and ending with the larnily as now constituted”.

This hypothesis has not becn sustained. It is now generally conceded that.

the family has always been the fundamental unit in human societies, and that

kinship systems are correlated most significantly with cxisting social structures.

However, Morgan's separation of kinship systems into the two divisions of the

descriptive and the classificatory still holds good, and his tables of kinship terms

of the classificatury systems include examples of toost of the types recognised

ticlay.

There has beeu much coutroversy concerning the significunce of these

various types of classificatory kinship systems. McLennan (1876), who intro-

duced the term exogumy, claimed that kinship terms were only terms of address,

Kohler (1897) postulated that systems of the Omaha type were derived [rom a

custum of marriages with the daughters of a wife’s brother, and that systems

of the Crow type were based on a custom of marriage with the wife of the

mother’s brother, Further observations luye shown that Omaha-type systems

ure associated consistently with patrilineal societies, and Crow-type systems

nstially associated with mutrilineal sucieties. Kroeber (1909) insisted that kin-

ship terminology was not determined hy, nor indicative ot, a partieular social

organisation, but that linguistic aud psyebological factors were of primary, or

at least equal, importance. Rivers (191+) strongly supported Kohlor’s hypo-

thesis, aud considered that social organisation was all-important in the deter-

mination of a system of kinship terminology. Radetitte Brown developed the

method of tracing the genealogical sequences of kinships, which later (1941)

he termed the method of suciological analysis, He emphasised the importance of

tie structure of socielies, and considered that the classificatory terminologies

caild he interpreted by reference to the principles of the anity of the sibling

vrowp and the unity of the linvave group, :

For many years I haye been using what may be termed a synoptic method

in studying kinship systems, The basis of this method, whieh has been pre:

sented in previous papers (1931, 1934, 1950, 1957), is a set of symbuls expressing

in a marriage diagram the dominant custom of marriayes between the social

units of a society, and in a genealogical pattern the framework of the social

structure emerging from such a system of marriages.

These symbols are based on the letters A a and Bb representing male and

female members respectively of family social units which intetmarry, These

are usually representatives of exogumous moieties A and B. Additional letters

an be used when the more wumerous primary divisions of phratries are in

question, Numerals as prefixes are added to these letters ta indicate member

‘Trans, Roy. Sec. S, Aust. (1960), Vol 83.

{2 ff. K. ¥RY

ship of successive generations. Numerals as suffixes are added tu the letters to

identify members of lines of descent differentiated by the kinship system. Mar-

riages hetween members of these social units in each generation are {ndicated

by the linkage = in the diagrams of marriage. The genealogical patterns are

built up by arranging the symbols for all the representatives of one generation

ina horizontal line, and plotting the symbols for sons below thase of their respec-

tive fathers, aud those of daughters below their respective mothers, in accord-

ance with the appropriate diagram of marriages. Moiety or phratry identifica-

Hon of these children will le that of the father in a patrilineal society, that of

the mother in a matrincal society,

The marriage diagrams und genealogical patterns can be simplified usually

by relegating the prefixed numerals to the commencement of the series of

symbols appropriate tu each particular generation. Shonld this be done, any

reference to any individual unit should include this numeral prefix; ¢.g., an

individual unit of a serfes 1, Al al B1 bl should be referred ta as 1A1, Jal,

1HI, or Ibl.

Genealogical sequences can be followed readily in these patterns. By iden-

tifying brother and sister in one generation lme, fother and mother can be

located in the line above, and are also husbend and wife in that generation.

In a society with a classificatory kinship system, if all the genealogical inter.

pretatiims of eyery kinship term be plotted on an appropriate genealogical

pattern from the basis of a brother and a sister in one generation line as Egos,

each af these terms will be found to be associated significantly with one recur-

ring unit in the pattern.

This is a demonstration of the correlation of social structure and kinship

termindlogy, It is more reasonable to postulate that a system of customary

marriages between family groups determined social structure and therefore

kinship terminology. than the alternative improbability that the members vf

a society elaborated a system of kinships to enable the obligations and privileges

of certain social functions to be allocated to certain individuals and so deter-

mined their social structure.

Also, in primitive societies. it is most improbable that the acquisition of

wives was limited by principles of eugenics; nor does it seem possible that

abstract ideas of the unity of the sibling and the lineage groups were compelling

farees in determining He sexual associations of men and women,

It is suggested that three general principles have applied with paramount

imypovtanee to all classificatory kinship systems:

1. Although the fundamental social unit of the family is based on sexual

ass@ciation, sexual compstitiun is the most disrupting force which social asso-

ciatlons can experience. Therefere the elimination of sexual competition within

the Family unit must have been always a basic principle in shaping the de-

velopment of human societies. It is the most obvious reason for the institution

of exogamy.

2. The avoidance of sexual competition between father and son is of mujor

inpertynce in maintaining the integrity of the local family group,

3. The third principle is that in the homan mind prohibitory ideas tend ty

radiate and involve associated concepts. Kinship terms, which have the signi-

fiewnce uf warning labels against sexual competition within the family, tend

to be applied to families of associated or collateral lineages. The operation uf

this principle is fostered by the institution of totemism, —

The first of these principles is axiomatic, evidence ifi support of the seconsd

and the third will be given in this paper.

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSHIP 13

Classificatory systems reached their most complete development in Aus-

tralian aboriginal societies, which also exhibited many hallmarks of primitiveness

owing to the isolation which they shared with their native fauna. Their systems,

therefore, provide an exceptionally appropriate field for investigation. The

members of all these societies were organised in totemic clans and family groups,

and the clans were usually combined in two exogamous moieties. (Exact tribal

boundaries are detailed in Tindale’s (1940) map.)

Throughout Australia, with few exceptions, a man could marry only women

of his own or his grandson's generation, and kinship terms alternated in and

with alternate generations. Moieties were a feature of most Australian socicties,

and the sineital function of the moiety is the demarcation of the clans, whose

women the father or the mother's brother could marry, from those which the

son or the sister's son could marry. The socictics which divided moieties into

named classes (sections) made the first division emphasise this distinction of

alternate generations. In the Kamilaroi tribes of New South Wales marriage

customs sometimes ignored the usual prohibition of marriage within the moiety

and named class division of the same generation, but the class divisions defined

sharply the prohibition of marriage between ulternate generations as is shown

in Figs. 1] and 2.

Dilbt Aupathin

1. A a B b

MURRI maths KUMBO butha

2. B a A b

IPPALE kubbitha KUBRBI ippotha

1, A a B b

MURKL matha KUMBO butha

Fig. L

Lili Kuputhin

1. A a B b

MURRT matha KUMBO butha

8, A a B b

KUBBI kubbitha TPPAL ippatha

1, A a B b

MURRI maths KUMBO butha

Fig. 2

Over a large region in South and Western Australia alternate generations

were distinguished as named groups. Many of these societies were even with-

out moieties, but where the western peoples adopted conflicting systems of class

nomenclature. these were so adjusted that a mother’s class never hecame that

of a wife (Elkin, 1940, p. 326).

All these facts seem to be significant in relation to the second principle

mentioned above.

The prevalent custom throughout Australia, with the exception of some

northern coastal districts, was that women were exchanged in marriage (a

primitive feature ), and that the marrying pairs were cousins “not too close up”,

in other words, that the women should not be of the men’s father's or mother’s

clans, The marriage diagram expressing the simplest form of such a custom

is that of Fig, 3.

1. Al=bl A2=h2 2, Ail=b2 AZ=bl

Tig. 3

i if. K. FRY

The genealogical pattern corresponding to this marriage Eras in a palri-

lineal society is illustrated in Fig, 4, which is also the genealogical puttern typical

of a system of marriages between second cousins,

AY Al wd hl AZ az B2 h2

Al hl RI wl Ag b2 B2 ol

Al n2 Bh b2 A2 al B2 bl

Al he BI a2 Az bt B? ul

Al ot BL bl Az a2 Bh b2

Fig. 4

om eS

This pattern is asvmmetrical in regard to male and female lineages. Matri-

lineal and patrilineal forms of this pattern appear to represent the basic social

struatnre of the majority of aboriginal societies; that is, they are systems of the

Iroquois type, with sister exchange, and with the wife's clan distinguished from

that of first cousins. This is known in Anstralia as the Aranda type.

Aboriginal kinship systems can be grouped under two headings, those asso-

cinted with the inland tribes, and those asseciated with the marginal coastal

tribes (cf. Davidson, 1926),

The inland systems were matrilineal in the eastern half of the continent,

patrilineal in the western half. They were characterised by division into moieties

aml usnally also into named classes (sections ).

‘The marginal coastal tribes often had no miviety divisions. They were

usually patrilineal, but matrilineal regions existed in recent times in the Swan

River district of Western Australia and in the north-western corner of Arnhem

Land, A former larger extension of these matrilineal arcas is suggested by the

facts that kinship terms such as kemi, kaka, neandri, nupa, and wmnali, or their

analogues, are common to the matrilineal tribes of South Australia and the tribes

of southern Western Australia: also in northern Western Australia the class af

the child of an irregular marriage was determined by that of the mother.

The norma] genealogical pattern of Tig. 4 being asymmetrical in regard to

male and female lines of descent, the pattern of kinship terms tukes a sume-

what different form in matrilineal and patrilineal societies. It is reasonable to

expect some simpler forms of kinship terminology as a compromise when trihal

unils inlermarry across the borders of these zones (Fry, 1934),

Iti the inland patrilineal regions of the Northern Territory and Western

Australia where inhospitable conditions could support only a sparse pupula-

tion, which made every individual important, the lanship terminologies conform

most accurately to the Aranda pattern. Further, kinships in those areas were

stabilised and pin-poimted by the development of systems af eight named sub-

classes which conform completely with the pattern of Fig, 4, Marriage rules,

therefore, in these societies can he described in positive terms related to all

of the four male bneages of the Aranda genealogical pattern, e.g., mother's-

mother’s-brother's-danghter's-danghter marriage, and so on. The usual condi-

tion, as Firth (1930) has painted ont, is “the kinship principle enters not as 2

determinant but merely as w barrier against the union of close relatives”.

The marginal coastal tribes were often of wu stockier build than the inland

peoples, which might be a racial feature or related to a better food supply. They

usudly did not practice circumcision. The clan organisation at times wns

emphasised by the application of one kinship term to all the members of the clan

irrespective of generation. This again could be @ racial feature, or dependent

upon a denser population due to a better food supply. U exemplifies Radcliffe

Brown's principle of the unity of the lineage proup, but as a result rather than

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTRMS OF KINSIINT bb

as a cause of the social structure. Another possible featuce of these systems was

the maximal extension of marriage prohibition to any known relative by bluod,

exemplifying the third principle suggested earlier in this paper. Under these

circumstances the significance of the distinction hetween the children of brother

and sister diminished aud wis reflected in the kinship terminulogy, The kinship

terrainology of mast of these marginal tribes was basically of the Aranda type

with the exception of some northern tribes who did not practice sister exchange

in marriage. But this tendency to fail to distinguish between the children of

brother and sister meant that cross-cousins could be equated with siblings.

Consequently, the kinship system approximated to the Ilawaiian type. Flkin

(1939, p. 215) drew attention to this feature in deserilring the kinship system

of the tribes between the Bight and the Musgrave and Petermann Ranges, andl

suggested that these systems be known as the Aluridja type. Other examples

of systems of the Aluridju type are the Bardi (EJkin, 1938a), the Daly River

Tribes (Stanner, 1933, 1936), the Kattang (Elkin, 1992b), and the Kurnai

(Howitt, 1904). The Yaralde (Radcliffe Brown, 1918) emphasised the clan

organisation in their terminology, bat did not adopt the Aluridja-type charae-

teristics.

ladeliffe Brawn described the Karieva kinship system (1913), as the type

uf a system based on a dominant custom of marriages of first cousins, and (1936,

p. 452) as the norm of am earlier form of sociely in the evolutionary sense than

the systems af second-cousin marriages typified hy the Aranda, If, however,

lis male- and female-speaking kinship terms be integrated in one table (Fry,

1950), the Karlera kinship system conforms basically to the Aranda type but

with Aluridja-type characteristics. The Kariera class system is frankly of Aranda

type,

P AL the time of white colonisation the western and northern marginal trihes

were apparently in the process of adapting named totemic groupings (phratries )

te the named class (section) kinship divisions which were diffusing from Central

Australia. fhe Swan River tribes (Grey, 1941; Salvado, 1866), Ingarda (Rad-

cliffe Brown, 1930, p. 213), Bardi (Elkin, 19322), Iwaidja (Wilson, 1835; Spencer,

1914), and the Melville Tslanders (Spencer, 1914; Hart, 1930) may be cited

us examples uf tribes with a phratry organisation uninfluenced by the innovation

uf classes, and the Mardudhunera, Kariera (Radcliffe Brown, 1913), Karadjevi,

Nyul-Nvul, and Lunga (Elkin, 19324) as examples of comprornise systems.

Unfortunately, tie coastal tribes bore the brunt of the earliest conflict with

colonisation with consequent detribalisation in most cases hefore adequate re-

words of their social systems were atternpted.

As mentioned previously, some of the marginal tribes on the northern coasts

of Australia practised unilateral marriages and sister-exchange, if aecurring, was

rather complicated, Miss McConnel (1934, 1940, 1950) recorded the Wik-

nyunkan system of this type which is based on marriage with the muther's

younger brother's daugliter, and mirriage forbidden with the father’s sister’s

daughter, Miss McConnel recognised six lineages in the social structure of this

tribe, distinguished by their relative seniorities, The kinship tenminology, huw-

ever was relatively simple. The Yir-Yoront was an analogous system (Sharp,

1934).

Warner (1930) described the Murnyin system based on marriages unilaber-

ally with the mother’s brother's dapghter. This kinship terminology is very

complicated. I published (1950) a marriage diagram expressing a eyele of

marriages between cight clans. the genealogical pattern of which confurmed

accurately with Warner's complex Murngin Kinship terminology.

16 It. K, FRY

This marriage diagram is illustrated in Fig. 5, and the corresponding genea-

logical pattern in Fig. 6,

b?:B2=22;A2—b3;B3

lL I

Al ad

al AS

I ll

Bl:bl —A4d:ad4 =P sh4

in all generations.

Fig, 5

Al al Bl bl AZ a2 B2 b2 AB’ ad LBB bB At at BS bt

Al bl Bl ad AS b2 B2 ol AS bS BB a2 Ad bt HA ad

Al a4 BI bt A? al B2 BI AS a2 BS b2 At vB BA bF

Al b+ Bl aB AQ bl B2 at AB b2 BI al At LB BA v2

: b4 AS al BS bl At w2 Bt b2

Al b38 Ri a2 AZ bt BR2 a8 AB bl BS at At BY BS al

Al a2 Bl b2 A® a8 B2 b3 AB ad BS be Ad wl Bt Dl

Al b2 Bi wl AZ b3 B2 a3 AB b4 BS ad At Hl BA at

Al al Bl b1 A a2 B2 b2 AS ad BS b3 At ad4 BA bs

Fig, 6.—The prefixed numerals refer to the olass system.

et ee Oe

TREE?

I did not recognise the significance of this pattern, but later (1957) realised

that it could be explained by the Wikmunkan system, but that the seniority

principle had been extended a stage beyond that of the Wikmumkan.

Subsequently I learned that Laurence and Murdock (1949) had preceded

me in publishing a description of the Murngin system as the expression of a

cycle of marriages between eight clans. Radcliffe Brown (1951) strongly op-

posed this interpretation, claiming that it demanded a system of marriages with

a father’s father’s sisters dauyhter’s daughter's husband's sister's husband's sister's

husband's sister's husband’s sister's hushand’s sister, which Warner failed to

observe. This genealogical sequence can be followed readily in Diagram 6 and

the woman in question will be found to be also a mother’s brother's daughter

who is the normal marriage partner observed by Warner. Radcliffe Brown's

pci is therefore evidence in support of the interpretation which he sought

to. refute.

If the male and female symbols of the marriage diagram of Fig. 5 be trans-

posed as in Fig. 7, the corresponding genealogical pattern wil] take a slightly

different form from that of Fig. 6, but will present identical characteristics.

B2ibY=Azw2—BIib3

al A3

Al a3

{ |

i ;Bl=ad;A4 =)4:Bd

Fig. 7

These junior marriage systems provide another mechanism whereby sexual

compétition between father and son is avoided. Also, Miss McConnel recorded

that when a man marries a woman of his grandson's generation, she must be of

senior lineage in that generation.

If the marriages of Fig. 5 and 7 take place in alternate generations, father

and son marry into alternate clans as in the Aranda system. The genealogical

pattern corresponding to such a marriage diagram is of a type expressing a

system of marriages with the father’s sister's daughter but not with the mother’s

brother's daughter. Miss McConnel (1950) has descrihed the Kandyu, neigh-

bours of the Wikmunkan, as a society based on marriages with the father’s

younger sister's daughter,

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSIIY 17

It is interesting to note in these last two systems, where a man marries

unilaterally a cross-cousin of junior status, that the forbidden cross-cousin is

termed cousin-mother, and that her hushand by the Wikmunkan is called father,

and by the Kandyu elma, which is a term applied to a senior lineage, There is

a hint here of the characteristics of the Omaha-Crow systems.

Sharp (1935) has noted the kinship system of the tribes on Mornington

Island and the near-by coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria. Their marriages and

kinship terminology normally follow the patrilineal Aranda pattern. Iowever,

three types of irregular marriages are permitted. The first is marriage with the

mather's brother’s daughter. The second is marriage with the daughter of the

mother’s brother's son and is associated with the use of the term cousin-mother

far the mother’s brother's daughter, As mother's brother's son's daughter is

normally son's wife and te:med mother, the term mother may be applied to three

successive generations of women in the mother’s brother’s clan, The third

form of irregular marriage is with a wife's father’s sister or with a wife's brother's

daughter, In the first and third types of irregular marriages the children are

classified in the semi-moiety alternate to that of the father (e.g. A2 instead of

Al). The first and second types entail members of the mother’s brother's clan

being termed wife's father in two successive generations if both types of may-

riage are contracted with that clan. The husband of cousin-mother is termed

father. The kinship system of these tribes therefore inclucles several charac-

teristics of an Omaha system in association with their irregular marriages.

The Kandyu marriage diagram exhibits one form of a permutation of uni-

Jateral marriages in alternate generations. Another type is that of Fig. 8.

b2:HI=a2:A2—hsiBs h4:54=02:A2=bliBl

: | | |

ool a3 a Al a3

al At al As

ll \ | |

Bisbl—Atnds=RP4;ba B3:b9—Adint— BBs bY

Pig, &.

The genealogical pattern of a patrilineal system corresponding to this mar-

riage diagram is illustrated in Fig. 9.

Love (1941, 1950) has supplied data which provide sixty-five gencalogical

placements of kinship terms for the Worora tribe, a neighbour of the Ungarinyin

and with the same organisation (Elkin, 19322). The pattem of Fig, 9 con-

forms to all of these complex placements, which is reasonable evidenve far its

validity as a graphic representation of the Worora social structure.

The Worora, like other systems of the Omaha type, have a marriage custom

whereby “a man may, and among the older men often has done so, marry an-

other man’s sister and his daughter” (Love, 1950). The Worora also apply

nue term, waid, to all the male members of the wife's clan irrespective of gencra-

tion, which is a characteristic of the Omaha-Crow systems, The Worora also

AL al BI b) A2 av Be b2 AD w8 BS b3 As at BA ht

Al bl Bl at A2 b2 KB2 al AK bS TBS af Ad bt Bt wB

Al az Bl bY A2 43 B2 b3 AB ad BR D4 Ad oT BY bl

Al bY Bl al AZ bé B2 wf AS bt BB aS Ad HI Bt at

Al oo8 Bl bd 42 at Be bt Ad «al BS bt Ad v2 Bt D2

Al 63 Bt s® 42 bt BY aX® AS bL BS ot Ad 2 Ba al

Al at Bl bt AP al BE bt AS a2 EB b3 Ad nv BA ho

Atobd Bi a® AY bl BE at AS b2 BS sl At bB Rt az

Al al BI bi A® a2 Be b? AZ ad BI bS At ad BS bad

Fiv, 9

HBO RSE oHS

H, K, FRY

apply the same terms (ibaia and ibanga) to paternal eross-cousins and tu nephew

and niece, again an Omaha feature. The kinship terms of the mother’s father’s

clan, however, alternate in alternate generations, and the maternal cross-

eonsins are equated with Egos generation, although the wives uf a mother's

brother, his son, and his son's son are all termed mother's mother ( kadjanja).

The Ungarinyin apply the terms kandingi, mother's brother, and ngadzi, mother,

to all members of the mother’s, father's clan irrespective of generation. Con-

sequently, maternal cross-cousins are equated with mother’s brother and mother,

the paternal erass-cousins (malengi) again being equated with nephew and

niece. The Ungarinyin kinship system therefore comes into full conformity

with the type examples of an Omaha system.

There js one point in Elkin’s description (1932a) of the Ungarinyin kin-

ship system which can be challenged, He states that as the mother’s mother

(keiingt) is the mother of ngadzi, mother’s mother’s brothers daughter cannot

be « wife's mother. But actually ngadst is of the clan kandingi, which is no

reason why a woman of the clan toolmingi could not be a wife’s mother, Elkin

dues nut give the term for mother’s mother’s brother, but by analogy with the

Worpra system it should be wolmingi,

The uvoidanve vf sexual competition between father and son is particularly

interesting in these Jast-mentianed tribes. [f Egu be 1AL his wives are Ib?

arid 2b2, whose sons respectively are 2Al and 1A3. The wives of 2A1 are 2b4

and Ib4; the wives of 1A3 are lh4 and 2b,

The clans of many American Indian tribes were much more numerous than

thase of Australia, It is interesting to note that if the kinship terms of the Fux

tribe (Tax, 1955), which is of the Omuha type, be plotted on the Worora

genealogical pattern, all the lineages noted by Radcliffe Brown (1941) and many

mare will be found to be aligned with the clan lineages of Fig. 9.

Nu examples of the Crow type of system have been described in Aus-

tralia. Spencer (1914) recorded marriages with the widow of a futher and

the widow of a mother’s brother in the Kakadu tribe, but there is no evidence

that these were customary practices or that they influenced the social structure.

Probably these marriages were of no more signficance than the information

given to me by members of the detribalised Wailpi people that marriage with

the lather's sister was in ordet.

Kinship terminologies of the Crow Lype, such as thase of the Banks

Islanders (Codrington, 1891) or the Cherokee (Gilbert, 1955), da not conform

toa matrilineal version of the Mutnyin pattern, but fall into neat lincages when

charted on a matrilineal form of the Worora pattern, This suggests that although

the Kinship terminology may be influenced by marriage with the tmother’s

brather’s widow or xite, yet the social structure on which the terminology is

founded is determmed by marriages with women of clans which are more

distantly related, This suggestion is supperted by a stutement of Codrington

(1891, p. 244) concerning the Banks Islanders: “a woman when once the proper

payment has heen made for her, belongs to those that have paid, the family

generally: hence a man, as In the story of Ganaviris, will set up his sister's son

in lite by handing over to him one uf his wives. not because the young mar

has a right to his uncle’s wives, but because the woman is already in the Emily”.

The coastal tribes of Cape York Peninsula apparently exhibited another

exaniple of the operation uf the principle of the radiation of prohibitory ideus,

Miss MeConnel (1950) las described the Kinship systems of the Yaraidyana

and Nggamiti tribes. These systems are apparently dependent upon the mar

riage of women of one lineage in three successive generations to men of different

lineawes (Fry, 1957).

CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KENSITIP 19

REFERENCES

Comuneron, R. H,, 1891. The Melanesians, Oxford,

Davey 0. §., 1926. The Basis of Suuial Organization in Australia, Amer, Anthropologist,

28 +P, 033, ;

Tiatn, A. P., 19328. Social Organisation in the Kiraberley District, North Western Australia,

Oceania, 2 (3). p, 296.

Fram, A. P., 1939b. Notes on the Social Organisation of the Worimi, a Kattany-spenkiny

people, Oceaniu, 2 (3), p. 359, ‘

Eves, A. P., 1938-1940, Kinship in South Australia, Oceunia, 8 (4), 9 (1), 10 (2), (3), (4).

Finvn, H., 1930, Marriage and the Classificatory System of Relationship, J,K, Auth, Inst.,

60, p. 235.

Fay, H. K., 1931. A ‘Table Showing the Class Relations of the Aranda, Trans, Roy. Soc. S.

Aust, 55, pp. 12-19.

Fry, H. K., £934. Kimship and Descent among the Australian Aborigines, Trans, Roy, Soc.

S. Aust., 58, pp. 14-21.

Fay, H. K.. 1950, Aboriginal Social Systems, Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust.. 73, pp, 282-294,

Fnv, If. K., pet Concerning Aboriginal Marriage and Kinship, ‘Iraus, Mey, Soc. S. Aust,

80. pp. 1-16,

Givver, W. H., 1955. Eastern Cherokee Social Oryanisation, in Serial Anthropology vf North

American Tribes, ed. F. Eggan, Chicago.

Gary, G., 1841, Journals of Two Expeditions in North West and Western Australia, London,

Haar, G. W.M,, 1990. The Tiwi of Melville and Bathurst Islands, Ocenia, 1 (2), p, 167.

Keita, t4 1897, Zur Urgeschichte der Khe. Zeitschrift fii Vergleichende Rechtswissen-

achaft, 12, p. 187. (Quoted from Rivers, 1414.)

Knorunn, A. L,, 1909. Classifieatory Systems af Relationship, JA, Anus, Tnst., 89, p. 58,

Launenou, W. E., anp Murnocr, GC. P., 1949, Murngio Social Organisation, Amer, Anthito-

nologint, 51, p. 58.

Love, J. BR. B., 1941. Worora Kinship Gestires, Trims. Roy. See. $. Aust. 65, pp, 108-109,

Lovy, J. BK. B,, 1950, Worora Kinships, ‘Trans, Roy. Soe, S. Aust., 78, pp. 260-281.

Mcdoesnet, U. H., 1934. The Wikmunkun and Allied Tribes of Cape York Periusula,

Oceunia, 4 (3), yp. 20.

McCants U. > emis Social Organisation of the Tribes of Cape York Peninsula, Oceania,

10 . pb 434.

SECON NED ag 1950, Junior Marriage Systems: A Comparative Survey, Oceania, 2b

2), p. 107.

McLennan, J. F., I876. Studies in Ancient History, Lumlon

Moncan, L. H., 1871. The Systems of Consangninity and Affinity, Smithsontua Contrilen-

tions to Knowledee, 17, New York, pp, 12, 143.

Tancurre Buown, A. R., 1913, Three Tribes of Western Australia, J-R, Anth. Inst, 43, p, 143.

Rapcuurre Baown, A. R., 1918. Notes on the Sacial Organisation of Austrslian Tribes, )-R.

Anth. lnst., 48, p. 222.

Rape ge Soya i R., 1930, The Sacial Organisation of Australian Trihes, Ocrania, |

1), (2), (3), (4).

Hasicctte Beawae AS ., 1941, ‘Yhe Study of Kinship Systems, JW. Anth. Inst. Tl, p. L.

Naneaacre Brown, A. KR. 1951. Murngin Social Organisation, Amer, Anthrupologist, 53, p, 57.

Rivexs, W, H. R., 1914. Kinship and Social Organisation, Tendon.

Sauwapno, K,, 1886. New Norcia and Leschenault Bay; in The Australian Race, el, E, M.

Curr, Melbourne, Val, 1, p. 320,

Snapp, L., 1934. The Social Organisation of the Yir-Yuront Tribe, Cape York Peninsula,

Oceania, 4 (4), p. 404,

Snare, L,, 1935. Semi-Moietios in North Western Queensland, Oceania, 6 (2), p. 158

Spencer, B., 1914. Native 'Pribesx of the Northern Territory of Austratia, London,

Svanner, W. EB. H,. 1933. The Daly River Tribes, Oceana, 3 (4), p. S77.

Siannen, W. E, H., 1936. Murinbata Kinship and Totemism, Oceania, 7 (2), p. Lob.

Tax, §., 1955. The Social Organisation of the Fox Indians; in Sueia! Anthropology of North

American Tribes, cd, F. Meggan, Chicago. ’

Yirpare, N. B., 1940, Distribution of Australian Aboriginal Tribes; A Pield Survey, ‘Tras.

Roy. Soc. $ Aust., 64, pp. 140-231,

Wannen, W. L., 1930. Morphology and Function of the Australian Murngin ‘ype af Kinship,

Amer, Anthropolopist, N.S., 82, p, 207.

Winson, T. B., 1835. Narrative of a Voyage Rownd the Warld, Landon, p. 163.

CORRIGENDUM

Tn my paper Trans. Roy. Soe. &. Aust, 1957, 80, p. 4, line 3, instead of refovenee

(Matthews and Biveritt, 1900), substitute (Matthews, iguay, the latter reference im full being:

Mat rucws, A, H., P00, Marriage und Descent umong the Australian Aborigines, Journ.

Roy. Sov. N.S.W., 34, p. 126,

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON

BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

A new species of the genus Heterocheylus Lombardini, 1926, H. lombardinii sp. nov., is described

from under the elytra of a Passalid beetle from Mt. Lamington, Queensland. This is the first record

of the genus from Australia. The only other two described species are H. fusiformis Lomb., 1926,

from Brazil and H. lomani Tragardh, 1950, from Africa. A key to the three species is given.

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON

BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE

By H. Womerstey*

[Read 9 July 1959]

SUMMARY

A new species of the genus Heterocheylus Lombardini, 1926, H. lombar-

dinii sp. noy., is described from under the clytra of a Passalid beetle from Mt.

Lamington, Queensland. ‘This is the first record of the genus from Australia,

The only other two described species ure H. fusiformis. Lomb., 1926, from

Brazil and H, lomant Triigardh, 1950, from Africa. A key to the three species

is given.

Pt. 3.—-The faurnily Heterocheylidae

(Acarina-Trombidiformes )

Family PSEUDOCHEYLIDAE Oudemans, 1909.

Oudemans, A. C,, 1909, ‘Lijds. y. Entom,, 52 (1-2): pp. 19-61.

Subfamily Herrrocieyiar Triigardh, 1950,

Tragardh, I., 1950, Entom. Tidsk,, 71 (2), p: 109,

Genus ITETEROCHEYLUS Lombardini, 1926,

Lombardini, G., 1926, Boll. Soc. Entom. ltal., 57 (1), pp. 160-1.

Type Heterocheylus fusiformis Lom., 1926.

In 1926 Lombardini erected this genus for H, fusiformis n. sp. found on a

Passalid beetle from Brazil. In this paper he described and figured only the

female, but later (Mem. Soc, Entom. Ital, 17 (1), p. 120, 1938) he briefly de-

seer and figured what he regarded as the nymphal male, also from a Brazilian

assalid.

In 1950 Tragardh described and figured a second species H. lomuni n, sp.

from a single specimen from a Passalid trom the Belgian Congo. Trigardh

placed fusiformis in the subfamily Heterocheyletinae, a mis-spelling for Hetero-

cheylinae, now. raised to family rank as the Heterocheylidae. In my present

studies of the Acarina paraphagic on Passalid beetles, millipedes, etc., from

Australia and New Gninea, a third species, I. lombardinii sp. nov., has been

found on a Passalid (Mastochilus sp.) from Mt. Lamington, Queensland,

December, 1948 (eoll. H.W.), Lt is represented by three females and three

nymphs (? males), now in the South Australian Museum collections,

Heterncheylus lombardinii sp. nov.

Text Fig, 1, AJ

Holotype female.—Fig. A-H. Shape as figured and as in other species.

Length overall 638, of idivosoma 5222; width of idiosoma 278).

Dorsal—Gnathosoma somewhat triangular, but slightly swollen apically just

behind the mandibles, with a pair of minute setae immediately behind the

chelicerae. Propodosoma anteriorly with two pairs of widely separated minute

* South Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, (1960), Vol. &3.

22 I. WOMERSLEY

setae, the posterior pair slightly nearer together than the anterior pair, posteriorly

and near to the posterior margin with a pair of closely adjacent conspicuous

clavate papilliform setae. Hysterosoma with four segments, the anterior (J)

somewhat hexagonal in shape, as long as wide, with a long 150, lateral seta at

Fig. 4

Heterocheylus lombardinii sp. nov. A-T1. Mernale; A, dorsal view; B, ventral view;

C, chelicerae; D, palp; FE, leg I: F, tibia and tarsus leg I; G, tibia and tarsis

Ieg IV; HW, genitalia. [-J. Nymph: I, dorsal view; J, ventral view.

the lateral angles; slightly in front of these and 132, apart is a pair of minute

setae and midway between these and the posterior end of the segment is an-

other pair equally distant apart; segment Il is rather collar-like, slightly more

than three times as wide as lony, with a long setae 127, in each posterior angle

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GLINEA 23

and with a minute seta in front of each of these; segment UI is about twice

as long as LL, with tapering sides and with two pairs of long setae, a mid-lateral

one on each side 130) long and a submedian subposterior pair 108, long: segment

IV is more iviangular, hilohed with a longitudinal incision, a pair of lateral

setze 127 long and a pair of apical setac 66, long sitnated one on the tip of

each lobe,

The mandibles are smalt with the chelicerac outwardly curved und edentate,

Falpi as figured, curved inwards and forceps like; femoral segment large, as

broad as Jong with a long 62). dorsal seta reaching to tip of palp; next segment

as long as broad at its base with a finer dorsal seta 33, long; the apreal seyment

is a strong edentate claw wilh an inner basal aceessory tooth and 2 pair of

minute sctae,

Ventral.—Gnathosome with a pair of minute setae just behind the chelicerae

ind a longer one on each side at the base of the palpi. Prepodosomue withiut

cepimera to leg T, but with a seta just behind the basal segment of the leg;

epimera of leg TL soughly rectangular, its inner margins confluent with each

other in the medial lme for about three-fourths of the length, the posterior

mirgins are outwardly oblique a little in front of the propodosomal suture

and not confluent therewith, there is .a short seta on each side placed medially

and near to the inner margins and not on shicldlets. Hysierosoma with the

epimera of legs ILL and IV coalesced to form Jong shiclds separated medially

by a strip of enticle only slightly narrower than the shields, cach shield is fue-

nished with one seta near the anterior margin and ane in the middle of epimera

ILI, near the posterior end of the intervening, yentral strip is another pair of

sumtll setae: posterior of legs TV, segnuenis 1, TE and FV are confluent to Porn

a single unit, which is tapering, and which bears the elongate genital orifice,

Legs—All 7-seemented, short, fairly stout and tapering, I-IV of equal

length L974; I is antennaetorm, somewhat more slender than the others, and the

tarsus without carnncle or claws; U-LY ave much stouter, the tarsi ending in a

strong small claw-like spine which is much larger on IL than om IIT and TV. each

tarsus also with a cdistinet carmmele, pack and a pir of fine minute claws.

Nymph, Pig. T-J. As figured. Length entire 5800p, of ieiasoms (BAp,

width idiosoma 278).

Dorsal —Gnathosomy as in adult. Prapodesoma with shield completely

covering dorsally, with two pairs of widely separated minute setae anteriorly

as in adult, without the median posterior clavate setae of the adult but with

a pair of long simple setae 108 long, $9. apart and 36. from the posterior

margin. Hysterosume with four dorsal shields indicating the four segments as

in the adult, but these shields except the fourth do not nearly cover the dorsal

surface of the segment being surcounded laterally by longitudinal striations

and separated from each other by transverse striations, the large shicld of

sepment T, however, is divided medially into lwe parts, of which the anterior

is reetangular, wider than long, and slightly longcr than the posterior part, Il ts

furnished with one pair of minute setae situated in the anteru-lateral angles;

the posterior part of this shicld tapers posteriorly to a margin of about half the

wrilth of the anterior margin, ib is wider thau long and also furnished with wo

pair of minute setae in the antero-lateral angles, the pair of long lateral setae,

1i8u long, are situated on small shields on the extreme margins of the hedy

away from the shicld itself; the shield on segment LL is rather transversely oval,

nol extending right across the segment and furnished with one pair af sub-

lateral long 1044 setae; the shield of segment U1 is similar hut narrower, with

one pair ob lateral setac 75 Tong and a pair of subposterior setae T3y long;

24 H. WOMERSLEY

the shield of segment IV covers the whole segment, is bilobed with a longi-

tudinal fissure as in the adult and with two pairs of long setae 56 and 33u.

Legs.—As in the adult, all 1744 long: the claw-like spine on tarsi is small

und of equal size on legs U-LY.

Veniral—No epimera to leg I. Epimera of Jeg IT roughly rectangular, not

touching in the medial line and the posterior margin not confluent with the

propodosomal suture, with one small scta in the medial angles, Epimera of

legs {11 and [V confluent as in the adult forming two wide longitudinal shields

separated hy a narrower strip of the venter with distinct longitudinal striations,

each shield has one small seta in the epimeral area of leg IU, and there is an-

other pair at the posterior end of the intervening striated strip. There is only

a single roughly quadrate shield on segments I] and III together which is

furnished with one pair of small subposterior sctae, this shield is encircled by

striations. Seyment [V is as figured, bilobed as in the adult.

Remarks.—This species is readily scparated in the adult from the type species

H. fusiformis Lomb. from Brazil in the pair of propodosomal clavate setae being

set close together, In his species H, lomani, Tragardh was unable to see these

setae, but this species differs from both fusiforniis and lombardinii in that the

posterior margins of the epimera of legs IJ are confluent with the propodosomal

suture,

Lombardini in his description of the nymph regards his specimen as a

“nympham maris”. This is somewhat hypothetical. In his figure he does not

delineate any shiclds dorsally on the segments of the hysterosoma, but as. he

probably failed to notice their outlines by the striations it cannot be assumed

that they were not present in his specics. He does not figure the ventral surface.

Modifying Tragardh’s key to. the species (fusiformis and lomani) the three

species now known may be separated in the adult stage as follows:

Key to the species of Heterocheylus,

1. Posterior margin of epimera I] wblique and not confluent with propodosomal

suture, 2

Posterior margin of epimera LI straight and contiguous with propodosarmal

suture, Ventral strip between epimera HT and IV of equal width throueh-

wut—Belgian Congo.

H, lomani Trig,, 1950.

2, Clivate setae on propodosoma closely adjacent. Ventral strip between

epimera TT and [V slightly narrower than width of epimnera and almost

equally wide throughout — Australia,

H. lombardinii sp. nov.

Clavate setae on propodosoma widely separated by about four diameters.

Ventral strip wider than epimera IIL and YV und much wider anteriorly

than posteriorly — Brazil.

HA. fustformis Soomb,, 1926,

It is a pleasure to name the above new species after the creator of the genus,

Prof, G, Lombardini of Florence, Italy.

REFERENCES

Topeeanianit, G., 1926. Duo neva Genera Acarorun:— Boll, Soc. Entom, ital., 38 (f-I0),

p. 160.

Lomaaroint, G., 1938. “Acari novi", Ment. Soe, Ent, ital. 17 (1), n. 44,

Tracanpn, I,, 1950. Description of a new species of Heteroeheylus Lomburdini from Afrier

van dd on the classification of the Psendocheyletidae —Entom. Tijds, Tl (2), pp.

04-110,

NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA,

MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The New Zealand species of Leptoluelaps, L. reticulatus Evans, 1957, is now recorded from moss

from S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Worn., 1937) is recorded from New Zealand. The hitherto

unknown male of macquariensis is described.

NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA,

MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

By H, Womersiry*

[Read 9 July 1959]

SUMMARY

The New Zealand species of Leptolaelaps, L. reticulstus Evans, 1957, is

now recorded from ynoss froin S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Wom., 1937)

is recorded from New Zealand, ‘The hitherto unknown male of macqyueartensis

is described.

The genus Leptolaelaps Berlese, 1918, has recently been revised by Evans,

1957, and a key given for the six known species. These are elegans Berl. (the

genotype ) from the Transvaal, lambda Evans from Knysna, capensis Evans

rom Cape Province, and lawrencei Evans from Natal, reticulatus Evans from

New Zealand and macquariensis (Womersley) from Macquarie Island.

All the known species are free living Mcsostigmata occurring in moss and

humus litter, except perhaps macquariensis which was recorded from “between

tide marks, West Coast, Macquarie Island, 1913”,

In the present paper two of the known species are recorded, namely,

Leptolaelaps reticulatus Evans from South Australia, and L. macquariensis

(Wom.) from New Zealand. Fresh drawings of these species are given, chiefly

for accessibility by Australian students.

Genus LurrotarLars Berlese, 1918

Leptolaelans (subgen. of Wypeaspis Can.) Berlese, 1918, Redia 13, p, 122; emend. Evans,

G. O., 1957, Ann. Natal Mus., 14 (1), p45. (Type Leptalaelaps elegans Berl,, 1918.)

Leptolaelaps reticulatus Evans

Fiw. 1, A-E

Leptolaelupa reticulatus Evans, 1957, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.. 14 (1), p, 45,

Specimens of this. New Zealand species have recently been obtained from

moss from Upper Sturt, S. Australia (3 females), 24/8/58 (G. F. Gross), and

moss from Myponga, $. Australia (3 females), 4/11/58 (H.W.).

A comparison of the accompanying figures of this Australian material with

the description and figures of Evans of the New Zealand specimens confirms the

specific identification. The only slight and unimportant differences are the

lighter reticulation of the ventral shiclds and the prolongation of the sternum

scarcely reaching the posterior margin of coxae Ill. Also the lateral selerites

of the genital shield, which in Evans’ description and figure project posteriorly

beyond the lateral margins of the shield as far as the posterior pair of adjacent

lateral cuticular setae, only reach as far as the first pair of these setae. The

male is still unknown.

The figures given here were made before a separate of Evans’ paper was

received when it was thought to be a new species of Leptolaelaps Berl.

* Sonth Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, (1960), Vol, 83.

H. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 1—Leptolaelans rveticulatus Evans, female: A, ventral view; B, dorsum; C,

chelicerae; D, seta of palpal tarsus; E, tectum.

NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES (He LEPTOLAELAS at

Leptolaelaps macquariensis (Womersley, 1937)

Mig. 2, A-T

Pachyloelans macquariensié Womersley, 1937, “Avaurine” in “Sel Kepts: Austrodasian Antaretiv

xpecitiom, 1911-1014".

Leptolaclaps macquariensis Evans, 1957, Ann. Nato) Mas, 14 (1). p46.

This species was originally described and figured from a single fenule

collected “Grom between tide marks, on the West Coast of Macquarie Is.", by

the Austrulasian Auturetic Expedition, 1911-1914, led by the late Sir Dotiglas

Mawson.

Tt was placed hy Womersley in the genus Pachylaelaps Berlese, 1888, but

Evans has shown that although closely allied to Pachylaelaps it is more properly

to he put into Leptolaelaps Berlese, 1918.

In the South Australian Museum are a female and a male specimen received

some years ago from an old correspondent, Mr. Bi. D. Pritchard, and collected

from moss fram Manurewa, New Zealand, 14th July, 1934.

These specimens have now been studied and found to be con-specifie wath

the specimen from Mueyuurie Island.

The male sex has not hitherto been knowm and is herewith described and.

figured, while the opportunity is taken to re-describe the female sex from the

additional specimens and to give fresh figures.

Re-description of female (trom the New Zealand specinien )-

Dorsal shield covering entire body and underlapping narrowly on to the

venter right around, with about 35 pairs of setue to 50p long, and some pares.

Ventrally—The sternal shield is strongly reticulate with a more strongly

marked median strip, auteriorly it is 178. wide and the median leugth ix 2028p,

it is furnished with the usual 3 pairs of sctac and 2 pairs of pores, it extends

posteriorly (o between coxae UL and TV; the pre-endopodal shields are trans-

versely elongate with concave anterior and convex posterior margins; the meta-

sternal shields are distinct. small und roughly oval with seta 50. long und at

pore; the genito-yentral shield is flask-shaped with broadly rounded posteriar,

and only slivbtly longer than broad, 188 by 164, it almost touches the anal

shield and is furnished with only one pair of setae (genital) 30; long, the

luteral sclerites are distinct and reach ta between the first and second of the

adjacent lateral setae; the anal shield is pyriform and as wide ag long, the anus

is situated unteriorly and the puranal setae are in line with its posterior edge;

the metapodal shields are small and roughly elliptical and lie in a line between

the two setae laterad of the fenito-ventral shield; on the cnticle between the

venito-ventral shield und the anal is ene pair of setae and on each side laterad

of the anal is anether paw of setae; the podal shields are well developed and

extend slightly beyond coxue LV, and ure coalesced with the exopodal shields;

the endopodal shiekls of voxsae UH und LI wre couleseed but separated by a fine

suture fram those of coxae IV; the stigma lies between voxac LIL and IV and

the peritreme extends te the level of voxae 1, the peritrermal shield is arrow

und extends postcriad tq middle of coxae IV and at the tip it is furnished with

a small pore, anteriorly the shield is coalescel with the underlapping edge af

the dorsal shield.

The base of the tritusternum is elongute and about 4 times as Wmg as

wide, it is furnished with the usual pair of ciliated laciniae. The gnathosima

is as figured with vormal arrangement of setae; the palpi are 5-segmented und

216, long with the specialised tarsal setae 2-tined; the cornicles are long und

slender, 94 long, and reach almost to the tip of palpal segment TT, they are

flanked by the cqually long and elongate salivary stylets. The tectum is as

figured with a short median mucro and abont Y denticles on cach side, The

28 H. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 2.—Leptolaelaps: macquariensis (Wom.). A-F, female: A, ventral view; B,

dorsum; C, gnathosoma; D, chelicerac; E, seta of palpal tarsus; F, tectum. G-1,

male; G, venter; H, mandibles; I, femur, genu and tibia leg I

NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS 29

chelae are as figured, the movable digit with two ile lg strong teeth be-

tween which is a number of minnte teeth, the fixed digit has two moderate

teeth and several smaller ones, with a short pilus dentalis.

The legs are generally slender, I and IV being longer than the idiosoma;

1 730. long, tarsus with slender geniculate caruncle and paired claws; IT rather

stouter 580» long with normal caruncle; ILL 4874 long; IV 696« long; ILL and

IV more slender than If and the setae on tarsi to 70 long.

Dimensions of idioyoma, length 6034, width 370...

Description of Male Allotype—General facies as in female. Dorsal shield

covering body and underlapping venter more than in female, especially postero-

laterally (see Fig. 2G),

Ventrally, the sternal, genital and ventral shields coalesced into a single

shield which is broadly rounded posteriad of coxae IV and almost reaches the

anal shield, anteriorly it is reticulate much as in the female, it is furnished with

9 pairs of setae and the usual pores, it is 376 long; the anal shield is 564 long

by 56, wide and shaped as in the female.

Gnathosoma as in female; palpi 211n long; cornicles S83. lung. The

cheliccrae as figured, movable digit 66). long with only one strong tooth and

furnished with a fairly thick and long spermatophoral process.

Legs as in female, except that femur and genu of IL with strong processes

as in Fig. 2 I, T 696, long, I 522, [I 452n, TV 626.

Dimensions of idiosoma, length 5224, width 324,,

Locality—One female and one male from moss, Manurewa, New Zealand,

14/7/34 (coll. E. D. Pritchard).

Type.—The male allotype and the female specimen are in the collection of

the South Australian Museum. The female has been dissected, the gnathosoma

and mandibles on one slide and the rest of the mite on another,

REFERENCES

Bervasr, A., 1918, “Centiria Quarta di Avari Nuovi", Redia, 13, p. 122.

Evans, G. O,, 1957. Annals Natal Mus., 14 (1), pp. 45-57.

NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA,

MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The New Zealand species of Leptoluelaps, L. reticulatus Evans, 1957, is now recorded from moss

from S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Worn., 1937) is recorded from New Zealand. The hitherto

unknown male of macquariensis is described.

A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES LAELAPTOSEIUS NOVAE-ZELANDIAE

FROM NEW ZEALAND (ACARINA, ACEOSEJIDAE)

By H. Womensiey*

[Read 9 July 1959]

SUMMARY

A new genus Luelaploseins and a new species Li noreeselandiac are

described from New Zealand.

Genus LAKLAPTOSEIUS DOV.

With entire dorsal shield with scabrous retirulations. Legs I and IV longer

than body. Pre-endopodal shields present. Sterna) shield with three pairs of

setae and reaching to middle of caxac II. Metasternal shields present with

seta and pore. Genital shield with truncate base. Peritreme on the inner

margin of well chitinised, strongly reticulated, wide, lateral shields which extend

posteriorly beyond coxae IV. Metapodal shields conspicuous and round. Tectum

denticulate,

Laelapltoseius novae-zelandixe sp. n.

Fig, A-I

Types—Two females collected from humus from Manurewa, New Zealand,

2/9/34 (coll. E. D. Pritchard).

Location—The holotype and one paratype are in the collection of the South

Australian Musenm.

Description—Female: A rather large, broadly oval, well sclerotised mite,

Idiosoma 1088, long, 760, wide.

Dorsum—Dorsal shield entire and covering the whole body with scale-like

reticulations and about 32 pairs of simple setae which are fairly thick basally

and tapering to a fine point to 70, long.

Venter—Pre-sternal shields present, transversely ovoid; tritosternum with

elungate base and a pair of ciliated lacinia; sternal shield as figured with lightly

concave anterior margin and somewhat Icss so posterior margin, anterior width

197, posteriorly across arms between coxae Il and HU 235,, length in median

line 188, furnished with rather strong reticulations especially medially, with

three pairs of sctae to 56» long and two pairs of pores; metastermal shields con-

spicuous with seta 47» long and a pore; genital shield about us long as wide,

with truncate posterior marvin, leugth 210,, width across base 210y, with one

pets of setae 47, long and 160, apart, with strong reticulations; immediately

ehind the posterior margin is a line of four transverse lentionlar small shield-

lets; the anal shield is well separated from the genital shield, it is roughly

triangular, about as wide as long with rounded anterior and on each side with a

conspicuous ontstanding pare on the margin; the cuticle carries about eight

setae on each of which two pairs lie between the genital and anal shields; the

metapodal shields are fairly conspicuous and round; the stigma lies between

coxae I and 1V and the peritreme runs forward to coxae I on the inner edge

of a large podal shield which extends laterally to the body margin and pos-

teriorly beyond coxae IV, laterally this shield is confluent with the body margin

to the shoulders, and is remarkably reticulate, length of shield 487), width 200;

* South Australian Museum,

Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust, (1960), Vol. 83,

33 H. WOMERSLEY

Gnathosoma as figured with four pairs of hypostomal setae, cornicles small:

palpi with 2-tined tarsal seta, and a pair of specialised setae (Fig. Hl) on

inside of genu. Chelicerae as figured, movable digit with two teeth, Fred digit

with two teeth. Tectum denticulate. Legs~Generally slender, tarsi with car-

uncle, a pair of claws and a pad; I and 1V as Jong as or longer than idiosoma,

1 1250p, U $49n, TIT 8394, TV 1110p,

Male—Unknown.

Remarks—In the form of the genital shield, and in the truncate. posterior

margin of that shield, this genus is provisionally in the absence of the male

placed in the family Aceosejidae Baker and Warton, 1952, as given in the key

to the families of the Mesostigmata-Parasitoidea by Evans, 1957,

~ ~SNNS B

(

)

Fig. 1

Luclaptoseius novae-selandiae g, et sp. WV. Female: A, ventral surface; B, lorsum;

C, chelicerae: D, pnathosoma from helow: FE, peritremal shield; F, tevtura: G, palpal

tarsal seta; H, seusitlye on gwenu of palp,

REFERENCES

Bakrx, E, W., and Wrartox, G. W., 1952. An Introduction to Acuralazy, New Yark.

Evans, G. O.. 1957, An Introduction to the British Mesostiymata (Acarina) with kevs to

families and yenera, J. Linn, Soc, London, 43 (291), pp, 203-259,

A SECOND SPECIES OF PRISTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, LAELAPTIDAE)

FROM AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The genus Pristolaelaps was described by Womersley, 1956, with P. tasmanicus sp. n. as genotype.

Further records of this species are here given for South Australia and a second species P. obovata

sp. n. is described from Victoria.

A SECOND SPECIES OF PRISTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, LAELAPTIDAE)

FROM AUSTRALIA

By H. Womrns_ey®

[Read 9 July 1959]

SUMMARY

The genus Pristoluelaps was described by Wornersley, 1956, with P. tas-

manicis sp. n. as genotype. Further records of this species are hete given for

South Australia and a second species P, obouata sp. nis described from Victoria,

The genus Pristoluelaps with P. tasmanicus sp, n. as the type was described

by the writer (1956) and the genus defined as follows:

“Female.—Elongate oval, with undivided dorsal shield entirely covering

dorsum, Palpal tarsus with 2-tined seta. Pre-endopadal shields present,

Sternal shield longer than wide with three pairs of setae. Metasternal shields

only represented by seta. Genital, ventral and anal shields coalesced, the

combined shield widened behind coxae IV. Exopodal shields fused and ex-

tending widely behind coxrae 1V. Peritremal shield separated from exopodal

by a narrow line of cuticle, ending opposite coxae IV and with stigma between

coxae IIT and IV. Legs slender, unarmed.

Male—Unknown,

Genotype—Pristolaclaps tasmanicus sp, nov.”

With the discovery of the following second species of the genus, the above

diagnosis requires amending in some minor details. The shape varies from

elongate oval to broadly oval and the sternal shicld may be about as long as

wide as well as longer than wide.

Genus Prisrotariars Womersley, 1956.

Pristolaglaps Womersley, 1956, “On some new Acarima-Mesostigmata from. Australia, New

Zealancl and New Guinea,” J. Linn. Sou, Loudon, Zoology, 42 (228), p. 571. (Type:

Pristolaelaps tasmanious sp. ney.)

Pristelaelaps oboyata sp, noy-

Fig: 1, A-E

Types.—Holotype female and one paratype female in the collectian of the

South Australian Museum. ;

Locality. —Koroit. Victoria, August 23rd, 1935 (coll, BR. 'l. M. Pescott).

Description of Female—A very strongly chitinised, dark brown species of

broadly oval shape.

PDorsum with entire dorsal shield which underlaps narrowly on to the venter,

surface smoath and apparently without sclae execpt for a few minute ones on

the underlapping strip.

Venter.—Generally as figured and us in the genus with the genital, ventral

and anal shields couleseed and expended behind coxsug LY. Pre-endopodal

shields present und transversely elongate; sternal shicld about as long as broad

with concave anterior margin and almost straight posterior margin, with 3 pairs

of setae 47, long and in almost straight oblique lines, with 2 pairs of pores,

* South Australian Museum.

Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust, (1960), Vol. 83.

34 H. WOMERSLEY

length of shield in median line 99, maximum width 197,; metasternal shields

absent and only represented by the setae; genito-ventri-anal shield large and

oceupying most of the venter behind coxac IV, anterior margin lightly rounded

and fibrillated, expanding behind coxae IV to 300y, then rounding to include

the anus, with 5 pairs of setae besides the 3 anal setac, surface faintly reticulate;

endopodal shields of coxae III and IV distinct; exopodal shields coalesced and

produced behind coxae IV as a triangular podal shield; metapodal shields

Pristolaclaps obowata sp, nay. Female; A, yenter; B, gnathosoma from bclow; C, chelicerae;

D, tined seta of palpal tarsus; F, tectum.

elongate oval. Stigma between coxae IIL and 1V and peritreme running for-

ward to coxae 1, on a distinct peritremal shield well separated from the exopodal

shields, rather widened in the region of the stigma and extending posteriad to

the margin of coxae IV. On the cuticle laterad of the genito-ventri-anal shield

with 3 long setae on each side. A pair of well chitinised spermatheca are clearly

to be seen (Fig. 1 A).

Gnathosoma. as figured; palpi and cornicles normal.

PRISTOLAELAPS FROM AUSTRALIA 35

Chelicerae as figured, movable digit with two small teeth, fixed digit with

a prominent subapical tooth and four smaller ones, two on each side of the pilus

dentilis. Tectum denticulate.

Legs all shorter than idiosoma, I 5984 long with normal ambulacral arrange-

ment, II 383y, III 360u, IV 4874; all without special armature. Dimensions of

idiosoma, length 580, width 464y.

Remarks.—This species differs from the genotype in the much greater sclero-

tisation, its broader shape and in the length and shape of the sternal shield.

Pristolaelaps tasmanicus Womersley, 1957

Pristolaelaps tasmanicus Womersley, 1957, J]. Linn, Soc. London, Zoology, 42 (228), p. 571.

New Records—Originally described from Burnley, Victoria, on strawberry

plants imported from Tasmania, this species has now been found in moss from:

Upper Sturt, S. Australia, 19/9/58 (G, F. Gross).

Naracoorte, S. Australia, 8/1/59 (P. Aitken),

THE CHARNOCKITIC GRANITES AND ASSOCIATED GRANITES

OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

BY ALLAN F. WILSON

Summary

Igneous rocks from a long E.-W. belt in Central Australia vary in type from orthopyroxene granites

in the Musgrave Ranges through augite-hornblende granites to hornblende granites and sphene-

biotite granites in the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills. Ferrohypersthene granites form large

meridionally-trending discordant masses in meridionally-trending synclinoria of hypersthene

granulites in the Musgrave Ranges. Field study indicates a fluid (or magmatic) emplacement of the

partly crystalline granite. In the Ayers Ranges similar pseudophacolithic granite masses are

hornblende-bearing (and devoid of orthopyroxene). The basement metamorphic rocks there are of

amphibolite facies. A regional deep-seated E.-W. downwarp (possibly associated with deepseated

E.-W. transcurrent shearing) may have been sufficient to have caused a thorough reconstitution of

the basement rocks (now represented by hypersthcne-bearing, or hornblende-bearing granulites of

many types), and the development of "pockets" of potential magma in favoured areas. It is further

postulated that subsequent emplacement of the resulting rheomorphic masses would have been

assisted by pre-existing weaknesses such as those due to the N.-S. attitude of many of the original

rocks. This may explain the apparent anomaly of E.-W.-trending granites which are often found

within rocks of N.-S. tectonic trend, and could throw light on some of the lineation problems in

parts of Central Australia. A superimposed metamorphism (initially more thermal than dynamic) of

already highly metamorphosed rocks could explain some of the "anomalous" mineralogic and

textural features of certain charnockitic granulites. Thus, in the Musgrave Ranges charnockitic

rocks of more than one origin have been found. The charnockitic granites, for which a part-fluid,

part-metasomatic origin is postulated, differ structurally from the charnockitic granulites of the

basement, for the granites have been magmatically emplaced. They also differ mineralogically, that

the mafic minerals of these granites are consistently more ferriferous (and otherwise different) than

the corresponding minerals of the basement rocks. This is well illustrated by the different trends of

compositional tie-lines of co-existing pyroxenes in the two groups of rocks. The Ernabella

Adamellite, the Ayers Ranges Adamellite, the Kulgera Adamelhte are formally named and

described. Eight new chemical analyses of granites (including three of orthopyroxenic granites),

much mineralogic and petrographic data, are included in this paper.

THE CHARNOCKITIC GRANITES AND ASSOCIATED GRANITES

OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

by Attan F. Witson®

[Read 9 July 1959]

SUMMARY

Igneous rocks. from a long E.-W. belt in Central Austealia vary in type frum

orthopyroxene granites in the Musgrave Ranges through sugite-hornblende

granites to hornblende granites and sphene-biotite granites in the Ayers Rauges

aud Kulgera Hills, Ferrohypersthene granites form large metidionally-trending

discordant masscs in meridionally4trending synelinoria_ of hypersthene granu-

lites i the Musgrave Ranges, Wield study indicates « fluid (or magmatic) em-

placement of the partly erystalline granite. In the Ayers Ranges similar pseudo-

phacolithic grauite masses are hornblende-bearing (and devoid of orthu-

pyroxenc). The basement metamorphic rocks there are of amphibolite facies.

A regional deep-scated E.-W. downwarp (possibly associated with deep-

seated E.-W, transcurrent shearing), may have been sulficient to have caused a

thorvngh reeunstitutiun of the basement rocks (now represunted by hypers-

thene-hearing, ot hornblende-hearing granulites of many types), and the de-

velopment of “pockets” of potential magia ui favoured areas. It is further

postulated that subsequent emplacement of the resulting rheomorphic masses

would have buen assisted by pre-existing weaknesses such as thase dne to the

N.-8. aititude of many of the original rocks. This may expluin the apparent

anomaly of E.-W.-trending granites wlich ure often fouml within rocks of

N.-S. tectonic trend, aod could throw light on some of the lineation problems

in parts of Central Australia. A superimpose) metamorphism (initially more

thermal than dynamic) of already highly metamorphosed roeks could explain

some of the “anomalous” mineralogic and lextural features of certain char-

nockitie granulites.

Thus, in the Musgrave Ranges charnockitic rocks of more than one origin

have been fmind. The charnockitic granites, for whiel: « part-fluid, part-meta-

somatic origin is postulated, differ structurally from the charnockitie granulites

of the basement, for the granites have been miagrmnatically emplaced, ‘Whey alsa

differ minéralogically, im that the mafic minerals of these granites are consistently

more ferriferous (and otherwise different) than the corresponding minerals of

the basement rocks. This is well ilustrated by the different trends of cor-

positional tie-lines of co-existing pyroxenes in the two groups of racks.

The Ernabella Adsinellite, the Ayers Runecy Adamellite, the Kulgera

Adamellite are formally named and described, Eight new chemical analyses

of granites (including three of orthopyroxenic granites), much mineralogie and

petrographiv duta, are included in this paper.

INTRODUCTION

Large masses Of granite occur throughout the arid mountainous country

which extends E.-\W. for 300 miles along the South Australian-Northern Territory

border in Centra] Australia (Fig. 1). In hand-specimen some of these granites

(especially the orlhupyroxenic) camut be distinguished from typical charnock-

ites of India, Others are angite-, or hornhlende-, or biotite-bearing granites, and

some are very coarsely porphyritic.

The granites cut a gneissic complex of granulite facies throughout much

of the Musgrave Ranges, and of high amphibolite facies in the Ayers Ranges. and

Kulgera Hills,

* Department of Geology, University of Queensland, Australia (formerly of the De-

partment of Geology, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Australia }.

Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83.

a5 ALLAN FL WILSON

Brie! mention of some of the ceomorphologie feaiures of this area has heen

made in other papers (Wilson, 19474, 1947b),

THE FIBLD WORK

The field work was done from Dee, 1943-Feb. 1944; Dec. 1945-Jan, 1946;

Dec, 1918-Feb. 1949. und Jan-Feb, 1952, The feld work was hampered by

bad seasons und summer heat, and by inadequate equipment and research funds.

Air-photographs were available only tor the Avers Ranges for the fourth ex-

redition (see foot hote, p. 39). Sone of the difficulties of mapping, this terrain

Lave been mentioned elsewhere ( Wilson, 1947b, p. 196),

PREVIOUS WORK

Although most of the early explorers remarked on the large expanses of

“granite” ovcurring in these regions, few geuloyvical details were given (eg,

Giles, 1874; Gosse, 1874; and Forrest, 1875), Brown (1890) and Streich (1893)

make brief mention of the coarse porphyritic granite of the Uverard Ranges, but

Basedow (1905) seems to have been the first geologist to attempt a structural

sytthesis of the granitic rocks of the Musgrave Block. His petrographic notes,

however, are scant, Robinson (1949) has since published good descriptions

of some of Basedow’s rocks.

Lockhart Jack (1915) made valuable structural observations of the granitic

rocks. especially of the Everard Ranges, and suggested that the granites of the

Musgrave Ranges were probably co-eval with the Everard Ranges granite

(p. 16), In 1947, the present author published the first of several papers dealing

with petrological and structural features of the main granitic rocks of the

Musgrave Ranges and the Kulgera Hills (see list of references). Sines this

paper was first written, maps of parts of the Musgrave Ranges (1 inch = 4 miles)

have been published (1955) by the Geological Survey of South Australia,

NOMENCLATURE

The classification used by Hatch, Wells and Wells (1949) is here largely

adopted, In addition, a prefix to the general name “granite", or to a mare

specific name (¢.g,, adamellite) is also used, thus—hypersthene adamellite, The

prefix “micro” denotes a mediam-graincd rock (thus, micro-adamellite ).

The term “charnockitic granite” is used here to draw attention lo the fact

that sume of these granites show important similarities to the echarnockitie rocks

al the type locality in Madras, India. The term has almost ontlived its usefulness.

Rueks of charnockitic type normally are very dark greasy bluish grey or

arevnish grey, medium-grained and coarse-grained racks with xenornorplic

texture ranging (in composition) from granite through norite to pyraxenite,

and characterized thronghout by the presence of orthopyroxene,

Fur purposes of general description the charneckites may be referred to as

acid, intermediate, basic and ultramafic in much the same way that igneous

rocks have been subdivided by Hatch, Wells and Wells (1949. p. 181). For

further details of characteristics of the acid and intermediate charnockites the

reader is referred to Holland (1900). Washington (1916), or Pichamuthu (1953),

In the type areas of India it would appear that the charnockites ( orisinally

considered to be igneous rocks) are rocks of diverse types (igneous and mefa-

morphic) which have suffered more than one metamorphism The metamor-

phism which has produced the charuovkitie rocks has produced at the same

tine khondalites aad other rocks which belune ta the cranulite facies, In

Western Australia charnockitic basic rocks appear to have formed in fone

different environments (Wilson, 1958b).

hy KULGERA

Ne ‘S \

hah

woes Gaby 30138

HILLS

VICTORY DOWNS ee:

nt ae a

Pa,

Ok ce CREEK

94 REGION

{ TIEYON

LEGEND

STRIKE AND DIRECTION OF DIP OF

aw GNEISSES & CHARNOCKITIC GRANULITES

DIRECTION OF PLUNGE OF LINEATION

MAJOR SHEAR ZONES

/ (MOSTLY SHALLOW DIP SSE.)

MOSTLY INTRUSIVE GRANITES

STRIKE AND DIRECTION OF DIP OF

MAJOR PLATY FLOW LAYERS IN GRANITES

SOME MAJOR GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES HOMESTEADS

OF THE SPECIMEN NUMBERS

MUSGRAVE AND AYERS RANGES 20 MILES

a a on Come,

Fig. 1

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 30

CENERAL FIELD CHARACTERS AND STRUCTURE

MAPS

A map showing the distribution of the major rock types, as known after

my first two expeditions into the Musgrave Ranges, has already been published

(Wilson, 1947b).

During two subsequent expeditions several weeks were spent re-stutlying

restricted areas and mapping certain new arvas in reconnaissance. In the

absence of air-photographs, only » xeconnaissance map, showing strike and dip

of the banding, and lineation of the basement rocks (the gneisses and srannlites )

and the contacts of the main intrusive masses, has been prepared.*

The attitude of dolerite dykes is not shown, but some dykes are plotted on

a previous map (Wilson, 1947b), and others appear on the new maps published

by the South Australian Mines Department, Another area of about 400 square

miles (the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills) has been mapped in reconnaissance

with the assistance of air photographs used in the field, This area will be de-

seribed in detail in later papers.

THE GNEISSES AND GRANULITES

The oldest rocks in the area are gneisses and granulites in which banding

appears to be parallel to bedding planes of original sedimentary rocks. De-

tailed petrological and structural descriptions of these rocks appear elsewhere

(Wilson, 1954b, vol. 2).

Fig, 1 shows that the trend of banding or foliation (= bedding) is roughly

meridional for about 150 miles across the strike, ic. Uironghout the central and

eastern Musgrave Ranges, In many places the gneisses have been thrown inlo

tolds, many of which are tight, and all of which are ornumented with minor

folds. The trend of the fold axes, and of » lineation is also sub-meridional.

There can scarcely be any doubt that the tectonic strike of the nviginal meta-

morphic rocks of the central and custern Musgrave Ranges is sub-meridional

(Wilson, 1953b, 1954a, and 1954b, vol. 2).

In the Ayers Ranges (particularly in the eastern half) the gneisses are

fulded on sub-tmeridional axes, and the lineation is sub-purallel to the fold axes.

In the Kulgera Hills the tectonic trend (as shown by tight fold axes and lines-

tion, and average strike-trends) is 330 deg. to 340 deg.

The basement rocks of the Musgrave Ranges ure mostly of geanulite facies,

but many of those of the castern portion of the Ayers Ranges and all of those

of the Kulgera Hills are typical of higher leyels of the amphibolite facies.

THE ORTHOPYROXENE-BEARING GRANITFS OF TITY MUSCRAVE RANGIES

(including the Frnahella Adamatlite)

The shape of the largest granite mass, which has been called the Ernabella

Adwmellite, is shown in Fig. 7. (For a4 more detailed map showing actual hills

anil extent of sand cover, see Wilson, 1947b,) tn the Ernabella and Alalka

regions it is meridionally-trending, and secms tu occupy the axis of a south-

plunging synclinorimm in the granulites. Notwithstanding its position within a

synclinal structure the granite rarely shows traly eanvordaut contacts (Pi. 1,

Fig. 1). Wherever studied, the transgressive contacts are marked by xenoliths

* Air-photograph mosaics of the Musgrave Ranwes were kindly forwarded by the Sonth

Australian Mines Department in 1954 but they arrivecl too Jate to allow any stanifcant addi-

tions to the map to be made. Subsequently, the Mines Department hus published geological

mups af part of tho Musvrave Ranyes based on the use of these air-photographs in the

fell, but these are also of reconnaissance type, Tor the gneissie complex has not bear

systematically subdivided, My map is published as completed iu 1054, for it shows inany

futures not included in the zaps of the Mines Department (and vice versa),

40 ALLAN. ik, WILSON

containing hornblende und biotite. The xenoliths are so alincd as to demon-

strate that the granite has moved into its present position, Angular xenutiths

freshly broken from the wall rocks have been found. Xenoliths are best seen

near Murris Springs in the vieinity of Mt, Carruthers, and ut the Alalka rock-holes.

In the Alalka region (sce p, 46) not only are Aow-banding and corroded

xenoliths of the country rocks aliued parallel to the sharp transgressive contacts,

lit « marked decrease in grain-size is evident close to the contact (PI. 1, Fig. 2).

‘The gneisses and granulites of the wall rocks have been rendered garnetiferous

by the intrusion,

At the eastern contact just N, of Aeroplane Well the granite shows some

metasomatic action on the granulites, but this is not a feature of the granite

asu whole. The contacts are usually sharp and distinct.

Newr Tiatja, about 5% miles S, of Ernabella, the granite mass appeurs

to swing in trend toward the SW. Insufficient field work hag been done fi

say whether or not this granite is related to the somewhat sheared granites suid

lo peeur between Upsan Downs and Possum Well (which is 5 or 6 miles 5,

of Upsan Downs).

Notwithstanding the presence of xenyliths near the main contacts, and a

weak alinement of rare plagioclase phenocrysts and mafic clots, these granites

are so massive that in many places no reliable structural data could be ahbtainel,

The oyerall dark greasy appearance of the rocks in field and hand-specimen

greatly hinders a macroscopic structural study, Such data as are avuilablo,

however, suggest that the intrusion is similar to several in the Ayers Ranges

and Kulgera Hills, where the granites tend te occupy synclinal positions in the

gneisses, These granites, however, do uot seem ta he true phacoliths, tor the

flow-layers, which are fairly shallow aud dip into the intrusion near the edges,

steepen to almost vertical near the uxis of the clongate structures (see Fig. 2),

Althouch the structure is fairly clear in the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills, it

is unwise to assume that the available data are suffivient to prove a similar

structure for the Ernahella Adamellite.

The occurrence in the Keli Koli and Tjakiaja regions of outcrops of rocks

almost identical with the Emabella Adamellite is difficult (a explain, The

assumption that they are cupolas on a yranite mass upon which the gneisses

“Hoat” is too great an extrapolation of the scanty fleld data. There is very strung

wvidence, however. that the granite of the Harris Springs area, which underlies

the: gneisses to the west, re-appears in the valley to the cast of the Koli Koli

ridge. In this area a hypothesis somewhat similar to that put forward for the

Kakamas charneckitic adamellite shoild be tested in the field. (This has not

yet been possible; field work in this area was dene in 1944.) At Kakainas the

adamellite (which petrographically is somewhat similar to the Eynabella

Adamellite) occurs xs a sheet which “generally oecupies the synelinal tronihs

of the folded terrain, while the crest of the anticlines kirm ridges within the

intrusion, “False windows’ of older rocks are a conspicuous feature throughout

the sheet. Contacts with the associated rocks often transevess across the foliation

at a low angle, but both non-transgressive and highly-transgressive contacts are

also observed . . - . It is thonght that the mugma spread out alone the

aynciines if the folded terrain...” (Poldervaart and ven Backstrim, 1949,

p. 453).

The development of some such hypothesis may thraw light on the problem

in Central Australia where there is the apparent contradiction of a lone K.-W,

string of petrologically closely related magmatie granites, many of which form

N.-S. bodies sub-parullel to the major fold structures of the basement rocks.

In the Sentinel Hill region (see p. 49) the trend of the granite intrusions

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA al

and associated granulites to the west is approximately meridional, but the

gneisses and granulites to the east have a north-west tectonic trend, In this

region the granite is orthopyroxene-bearing in most parts, but coarser burn-

blende facies are voranon, In the nearby Bald Hill, and elsewhere, the racks

are devoid of orthopyroxene, yet on petrographic evidence should he con-

sidered “co-magmuatic” with the orthopyroxenic rocks.

THE CLINOPYROXNENE-BEARING AND HORNBLENDE-BRARING GRANITRS

OF THE AYERS KBANGES “AND FASTRRAN OUTLIERS OF ‘THE

MUSGRAVE BRANGES

In the Alenrra Creek Region a group of low hills of coarse granite appears

la lorm petrographic anc geographic links belween the orthopyroxene-bearing

granites of the Musgrave Ranges to the west and the hornblende-rich granites

of the Ayers Hanges to the east, A stractural link hetween the two ranges, huw-

ever, is nat so abvious. No attempt hus been made to map this area of poor

outcrop. Keeonnaissance, however, has shawn that contacts with the eneisses

are rare. The available evidence (see p. 51) is that the granites have been

empliced as a (palingenetic) magma into meridionally-trending gneisses antl

granulites. Flow-structures are very weak except near contacts. The veneral

trend of platy-fow layers appears to be between 325 deg. and 335 dex. Althangh

random recording of platy-How layers may be dangerous and misleading, it seems

sigmificant that pluty-flow layers which trend K.-W. have not yet been found.

Ht would appear, then, that if the granites of the Musgrave and Ayers Ranges

are related, they are linked in a much more complicated fashion than by a

“normal” elongate mass of granite which extends westward from the Ayers

Ranges rons the Musgrave Ranges, and beyond.

In the Ayers Ranges the structure of the granite is more casily mapped, for

although xenoliths are uncommon, platy-flow layers are revealed in most places

hy the alinement of large K-feldspar phenocrysts, With the aid of air photo-

graphs the greater part of the Ayers Ranges was mapped in reconniissance.

Only the main structural features are mentioned in this paper.

As sbown on Fig. 1, the main pranite muss lies west and north-west of Mt,

Cavenagh Homestead, whereas to the cast major and minor folds and lineation

in. the gneisses are approximately meridional in Lend, The southern contact

with the gneisses was not mapped, hut near Victory Downs Homestead (which

lics clase La the WSW- contact of the main outerops of the granite of the Ayers

Hanges) the gneisses strike E-W., and are meridionally lincated. The attitude

uf the fow-layers of the granite shows what may be considered to be a large

curved structure, crescent-shaped in plun with shallow plunge m a narth-

weslerly direction. J

The structures of the granite ure swh-concordant with gametized gneisses

on parts of the castern side of the inteusion. Within the granite area no yneiss

has been found, but some may be covered by the sand through which the more

resistant hills of granite protrude. ‘The How-structurés of some of the hills (such

as Mt. Reynolds, and a smaller hill 3 miles lo the west) show that the mode of

emplacement of the granite was complicated within the main granite area. In

these hills the flow-structure presents the picture of a synclinal granite budy,

elosed on the eastern end and plunging ut a low angle to the west. These

granite buries can searcely be phacoliths, however, foc on the western end,

where snbhorizotal flow-layers could be expected to complete the syuclinal

atructnire, there are vertical or steep dips. A similar structure on a small seule

wus ure closely mappel in the Kulgera Hills, some 10 miles ENF, of Me.

Reynolds (sce Fig. 2). It appears that structural weaknesses in the basement

42 ALLAN TF, WILSON

GEoLoGicaL Sketch Map

AND SECTIONS OF

PINNACLE HILL

KutGeRAHILLs CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

vv Srrine, Dip of

30 GNEISS

—* Lineanion, Foup-

Axes oF GNEISS

==> Fiow Line oF

GRANITE

—w~ Flow Laver oF

GRANITE

C me A

SKETCH SECTIONS

Contorted

E> Gneiss

Cc.

Fig, 2—Ccological sketch map and sections of Pinnacle Hill, Kulgera Hills, Central

Australia,

GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 43

tocks (faults or fold-axial “planes”) have been utilized by upsurging palingenetic

magma, Insofar as it remains within old synclinal structures, the outer Huw-

structures appear to delineate a syncline, but the “feeder dyke", situated nearer

the axial “plane” of the fold, may well be steeply-dipping. By analogy with

the Kulgera Hills, it is concluded that gneisses may lie buried at shallow depths

bencath the sand from which protrude the more resistant granite masses.

The Kulgera Hills are separated from the Ayers Ranges by a westerly-

trending trough in which (?) Mesozvic sediments are the only outcrops. The

uranites of Kulgera Hills themselves may be considered to lie about 15 miles

NE. of the main granite area of the Ayers Ranges. Since a large manuscript

deseribing the gealogy of the region is awaiting publication, only a few of the

major structural features will be mentioned here,

Study of platy-Aow and linear-flow structures in the granites indicates thit,

notwithstanding marked local trausyressive structures, the general trend of the

yranite intrusions is sub-parallel to the fold axes and lineation of the gneisses,

Le., 330 deg. to 340 deg.

The most instructive granite intrusion is that seen at The Pinnacle, a small

pointed hill two miles BE. of Kulgera Homestead. In Fig, 2 the main structural

features are shown. The Pinnacle is the end of a granite body similar to some

of those in the Ayers Ranges. The contact with the contorted gneisses is sharp

and feldspathized only in places. It dips inwards on the S,, E, and N, contacts,

but near the middle of the stnicture the flow-luyers are vertical. On top of the

hill the bottom contact (which is here also the Li, contact) is found to dip about

30 deg. to the WNW. This dip is also the plunge of elongate plagioclase pheno

crysts, and represents the plunge of thie lincar-fow of the intrusion at that pofnt.

On top of the hill, although the intrusion is synclinal, the contorted meta-

sediments art’ not conformable with the intrusion. As one proceeds WNW.

along fhe “axis” of the structure the plunge appears to steepen, but the platy-

How layers rapidly steepen. At the bottom of the hill both granite contacts

dip into the granite but near the middle of the structure the dip of the flow

layers is vertical, not horizontal as would be expected if the body were synelinal

Ae Fig. 2, E-F). The granite body takes on the appearance of a wide, steeply-

ipping dyke as it is traced KNE. along the strike,

It thas appear that the intrusion at The Pinnacle is really a special type

of dyke. The mayms (which has given rise to a rock very similar to the Kulgera

Adamellite) has been forcibly injected up shears sub-parallel to the regional

structure, and in favourable structural positions has formed tension-controlled

gashes which are eresccnt-shaped in plan, The other granite masses of the

area appear to be of similar type. Microfacies of the main granite, and pegma-

tites, ucuur in the encisses, especially near the contacts of coarse granite and

gneiss.

PETROGRAPITY

ORTHOPYROXENE -BEARING GHANITES

ERNAHELLA TiRcron

In an earlier paper (Wilson, 1947b, p, 208) the heliet was expressed that

these rucks are probably mostly granodioritic in composition, Since subsequent

work has shown that in this region adamellite is more common than granodiorite,

the name Ernabetla Adamellite is thought to be suitable as a general term of

reference, notwithstanding the fact that the only available chemical analysis

from the immediate vicinity of Ernabella was carried out on a rock which has

44 ALLAN F, WILSON

been lound to lie between adamellite and granodiorite in composition, Two

related orthopyroxenic granites trom the Musgrave Ranges are adamellites,

according to chemical analyses (Table 2).

Ferrohypersthenc granodiorite (close ta adamellite) (30789).°—Collected

quarter mile due west of Ernabella water-hole; typical of arauitic rucks ip

viewity; 110 primary planar or linear flow structures noticed in Lhe field (Fig, 7),

In hand-specimen: massive coarse-grained greasy bluish dark wrey rock

composed of bluish grey feldspars, small bluish grey glassy quartz irregularl

distributed, and small ragyed clots of greasy datk hruwn mafic minerals: dat

nature of rock renders mafic minerals less conspicuous; rave pyrite; plagioclase

comninly shows albite-twins, and K-feldspar commouly contains numerous small

round {nalusions of quartz; phenocevsts of plagioclase rare, bat one well-twinned

urystal measuring 40 mm & 12 mm was found; common accessory zircon

fluuresves yellow; weathering commonly deeply penetrates boulders, rendering

collection of fresh material very difficult; tendency for uniform discolouration

to resinous brown very deceptive — cympare the “Brown Granites” of Mozam-

bique (Assiuicao and Pinto Coelho, 1955),

Tn thin-section: xenomorphie granular, with mafic minerals and quart~ fn

smaller grains than feldspars; average urain-sizc between 1-5 mm and 2 mm

(sec PJ, 2, Figs. 3 and 4),

Plagioclase (49%) —andesine, An 39, nun-zoncd; unhedral, mostly 2 mm

dium., well-ewinned on albite-periclino laws, but development of twinning ap-

prirs related to warping and shattering of many grains; cerroded on large

scule by K-feldspar especially where shearing has developed weaknesses in

grains, weakly micro-antiperthitie, with irregular inclusions of K-feldspar

apparently produced by K-feldspar corrosion rather than exsolution (Pl. 2,

Fiy. 3), inensions of sagenitic rutile common, and clouds of squat rutile rods

and distorted magnetite octahedra in some grains; apatite and zireon crystals

iy sume K-feldspar inclusions; quarts inchisions noglizible; extinction = 20 deg.

K-feldspar (24) gushoelass mictoperthite partly inverted to microcline as

shown by incipient shadowy eross-hatch extinction on (QOL), and Jarec, negative

optic axial angle (about 80 deg.); mostly 2 mm_diam.; moderately micro-

perthitic; round quartz inclusions about 0-2 mm diam, corrodes plapioelise,

and thns occurs as small irregular patehes of micro-antiperthite in playioclase;

needle inclusions very rare, smudges of iron ore dust plentiful.

Quartz (15%) — mostly ragged grains | mm diam; also small corroded

round grains (“millet seed" type) sBonut 0:2 mm diam. in K-feldspar (PI. 2.

Fie. 4); needle inclusions rare, smudges uf iron ore dust and bubbles plentiful;

somewhat shadowy extinetion.

Orthepyroxene (4%) —ferrohypersthene, Fe 644, neon-zoned: rounded an-

hedral; mostly 0-8 ram * 0:4 mim, commonly as core of irregular mafic clots

whieh are mostly 2mm 1 mm (but up to 20 mm * 10 mn, as seen in hend-

specimen), and in which it is closely associated with clinopyroxene, iran ores,

apatite and zircon; fine lamellar steucture (including some narrow clinopyroxene

exsolution lapel) // uptie plane (010); lamellae commonly bent und frac-

lured as in plagioclase, but clinapyroxene which is occasionally found corrod-

* Specimen numbers refer bo tHe mek collection of the University: of Western: Australia.

Duplicates are housed in the University of Adelaide. Tu onserve space the following con-

tractions ure used in this paper. ‘The extinction angle of plogioclase (always measnred as

a* AOL in sections Ja) is reserded thus: “extinetion = 20°70" Unless athenvise indicatest,

Thousurernnents of 2Yo sue correct ta + 2, deg. For pyrexenes and bietite and + 4 dey. for

amphibole, refractive indices to = 0-001, estinetion angles to 42 1 deg. Plevchtnie colones

are listed in the order a, 8, 4. ura. §- y and absorption iso <e<y for arthopyrovene,

By >e for anpbibole. Phrureseence is always as for 2537

ORANILES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 43

ing orthopyroxene shows no evidence of such (?) protoclastic stractures; alters

along irregular cracks and poor cleavages to dull light brown chloritic muller,

whereas associated clinopyroxene tends bo remain ynitltered: pleachroisin weak —

pale pinkish fawn, pale fawn, very pale greenish grey; A — 1'745; IV /a = 59°;

dispersion v > r, moderate.

Iron Ores (3-59) — apparently ilmenite and magnetite equally represented,

together with a few ywrains of pyrite; anhedral masses, about 0-3 mm diam.

mustly associated with orthopyroxene, apatite und zircon in mafic clots; several

graing corroded by hornblende or biotite; also. tiny distorted octahedra of magne-

tite and iron ore dust in several larger plagiocluse grains.

Clinopyroxene (2%) —ealcic angite, Cad0h Mg32@ Fe2?, non-zonel; an-

hedral grains mostly 0-4 mm diam.; commonly us geoups of two or (hree grains

associated with jron ores, or as irregular grains adjoining (and in some cases

apparently corroding) orthopyroxene; clear, unaltered and exceedingly weakly

pleachvoie (or not at all) in very pale greenish greys; (110) cleavage, promincat

partings // (100) and (001), and Icss prominent // (010); cleavage and parting

sutfaces not bent and fractured as are those of associated orthopyroxene; narrow

pyroxene lamellae // (100); 4= 1-726; 2V/y = 5l° > 1°; y Ne 42°.

Apatite (1-5%)—squat subhedral colourless grains (commonly 0-15 mm *

0-1 im) mostly associated with iron ores, zireon and hypersthene in mafic clots,

or as clonpute euhedval grains associated with K-feldspar inclusions in plagio-

clase; non-Huorescent; tubular inclusions //c; = 1:°635, indicating Huor-apatite.

Homblende (0:5%)—mostly small irvegular anheclral grains (syith rare

patches up to 3mm ¥ 1+5 mm) corroding iron ores: associated blebs of clear

quartz may be derived frow transformed pyroxene; maltered non-sheared, clear;

pleachraism strong — fawn, dark khaki-brown, greenish khaki; A= 1-701,

Zireon (0°3%)—mostly very pale pink eubedral crystals up te 0-3 mm

i}-2 mm, and usually associated with apatite and iron ores: yellow fiorescence,

Binlite—vave ragged flakes adjoining iron ores; pleochroism, light steaw-

vellow. chestnut-browr.

Calcite — very rare alteration prodnet of plagioclase.

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this ruck are set out as 10 in Table

3, and also in Table 2, fon percentazes are sct gut in Table 4, and further refer-

ence is made in Figs. 4 and 6, Discussion of these data is reserved for the

petrogenesis section.

Ferrohypersthene adamellite—(308)6)—Within a few feet of the summit

of Mt. Carruthers, a promiuent landmark 1-5 miles W. of Emabella, anc fied

tnile from the intrusive contact with the gneisses and grunulites; similar to

30789, but a nwre normal adamellite, and orthopyroxene much: less ferriferatts,

exsolution lamellae of clinopyroxene coarse, and there are no large plagioclase

phenocrysts, See Table 1.

Ferrohyperstheue microadamellite (close to adamellite )—(3U871)—At the

month of a gorge 2 miles WSW, of Erhabella, and (+4 miles SSW. of Mt, Cir

ruthers; aot far from. basernent granulites; considerably finer yrain-size than

most of the hypersthene granites of the area (feldspars average 0-6 mre diam.,

nroxenes averuge 0-2 mm diam. ); textures and mineral relations as for 30789,

mt plagioclase more micro-antiperthitie than in 30789; although pyroxenes

contain corroded masses of ivam ore, and the rock contains more iren ore (11

per cont.) than any other granite sa fur studied from the area, several rocks

in Muserave Ranges eoutain more ferriferuus pyvoxenes; iron ore alsa plentiful

as irregulur plates “healing” shears and gashes in mast minerals. See Yable 1.

Ferrohypersthene adamellite—( 30638 ),—About halfway down the SW- side

of the promient hill 3 miles NNE. of Ernabella; probably typical of cunsinler-

46 ALLAN I") WLLSON

able portions of the group of hills about 4 miles NNE. of Ermahella, although

amphibole-bearing variants may be present among some of the coarser-grained

yaeks in the area; although finer in grain-size, textures and mineral relations

as in 30789; calcite, apparently of late magmatic origin, as small irregular patches

mostly associated with biotite and rare chlorite. See Table 1.

ALALEA Recron

The largest masses of the Evnabella Adamellite are developed in the Alalka

region, about ten miles N, of Ernabella (Fig. 7). Where contacts were studied

(e.@,, at the Alalka rock-holes, and at Razor Hill) there is very gond evidence

of the maymatic emplacement of the Frnabella Adamellite. A typical contact

near Alalka is shown in Pl, 1, Fig, 2. Not only are fow-banding and corroiled

xenoliths of the country rocks alined parallel to the sharp transgressive: contact,

but a marked decrease in yrain-size is evident close to the contact. The yneisses

and gramulites of the wall rocks have been rendered garnetiferous by the

tntrusion.

Ferrohypersthene granocliorite (close to adamellite)—(30476)—Near the

contact with granulites 24 miles NNW. of Alalka rock-hole and 3 miles SE, of

Wardulka rock-hole, and also only a few yards from a small olivine dolerite

dyke; fawn in colour due to superficial weathering: dull dark brown mafic clots

only faintly oriented; texture and mineral relationships as for 30789, but mafic

clots somewhat more prominent, magnetite in the form of in-fillings of cracks

more common, quartz sagenitic apd with tendericy to be flattened parallel ta

weakly developed streakiness of mafic clots (Pl. 2, Figs. 1 and 2). See Table 1.

TyaTyA-Omaacunna Region

The map (Fig, 7) shows that the Ernabella Adamellite, as developed in the

Tjatja area, continues ENE. into the Ombagunda area. Mt, Ferdinand, how-

ever, which is midway between the two areas, is composed of banded acidic

pyruxene granulites, Jt is not known whether there is any visible link between

the igneous rocks of the two ureas. To the south of Mt. Ferdinand most af

the rocks appear to be gneisses and gramulites.

Ferrohypersthene adametlite—( 30385 ),—Typical of the granitic rocks about

ane mile SSE, of Ombagunda Well where they inject the acid pyroxene grann-

lites which make up the basement rocks of larye parts of the eastern Musgrave

Ranges; collected about 20 yards S. of the junction of a norite dyke which cuts

the granite; dull greasy brown, typical of incipient weathering of an iron-rich

rock,

In thin-section; similar to 30789 (p. 44) in texture and mineral relations,

but with following differences: mafic minerals notably less ferriferous and not

so obviously in clots: K-feldspar more microperthitie, and closcly associated with

yrotesquely poikilitie hormblende (pleachroism—fawn, brown, greenish khaki)

wd clear vermiform quartz where plagioclase is corroded; quartz mostly as

sagenitic “millet seed” inclusions 0-35 mm diam. in K-feldspar, apatite murky

light grcy duc to acicular inclusions // c; zircon pale fawn with dusty inclusions.

Details of minetal compositions are set out in Table 1,

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are sct out us 6 in Table 3,

and also in Table 2, ion percenlages are set out in Table 6, and further referenwe

is made in Figs, 4 and 6. A discussion of these data is reserved For the petro-

Henesis section,

Tyakunya Rectan

On the ENE. side of the prominent mountain, Tiakunja (about 9 miles

NW, of Ernabella), and a few hundred yards N, at a small pinnacle-shaped hill,

“STITH. ered (ny “TIA, ered gy ‘op Tawepr a7 y0Iq-apuarquaoA “gETOE

‘SUT SOA Y ‘PwaISOULOY YARUUAD IAT ANN BATU) Sp ‘aqyallepy apuatyuIoR ‘wooFE

"HOBIUY SA RIES PY SI WITNILY ‘dQ [SULEPR OpUsqosoy-apauy 'OTsos

“SORURTT OAUBSIUL “B[UQBUTG 10 Ey Salud LL “UA -dui p- ALOT: “Ba WIA-T UATE af ONy-eIA Yd s-apUayquIoRy BLEU!

“SHOMBY DAISBUTC “ILA PIA Teac ‘aqTSWepe apiarquaog, 'FOHOR

NTU UE: B aAnatarh TU, SOI g ‘Ap eEpY SUNY ss AqoLAT ‘Kecog

“saSUT yy AAS A CELIO SpAly, Say pacoupT auayysral yoda '1OL0e

“ROBUPY DATIDAN YT “VION YLT, Awall “ar TTaWEpE oUIyJeTAdAYyoIIayT “OOLOE

‘SOHNUY OARS “YPUNFYCIUg WHYPWepY UNoyjsuAd Aouad ‘oseug

“SaRUNYT JATIASN YL SURELY JO AANIN Bap fz ‘apUo(pouwsa suayysaad Aouad PLPOL

‘SOTUBY GARIZEN DY ‘VTAQCLIG JO ANN Sala 2 ‘ad Tfatepey auarpferactAyoriag “gong

‘SOHN, DABS ‘BPAQ GUAT JO AMABAA, SOL g ‘oR POLULEpKOTOIM OUOYIsIATAYOLIOT 'TLROR

“‘SOBULIT SATABEN YY ‘NIBIPPLIeD. “qn Cadpawwerpr aueygssedlAyoeT “TROL

SORUEY], DARIFENTY “BLIQRUAPL ‘aI WOMpOURIs sNysIOd AOI g ‘'BRLOE

“S ALLY, SUS "SIRATHU ITOLUTOD JOT»

g | nn ge [eu Int iLiss fa qe | qa [a [ar THe mw So. TOA says

4} pu qy q4 y | 0 a au Ya TOA MING

60 €'0 y 60 20 £0 en T qy | 0 eo <0 270 oo “a TOA WOoNg

AEs T LEAT | H89°L | SRE+T ese L Lk 1 at eng 1 GRA L f ™

aT 6'T ae @ 60 oT | eo & e L T 32 L ST eT TOA ayyedy

q's OE F z e | F € ¢ ¥ ¢ oe IL oF Ge thy “TOA. Sarg) WOly

0 Ore | $970 | STO 01 4 I 0 OT OL (>) Az

OFT MT! Net e971 Lea T | AFOTL spo’ RRO L >. STOUT

4 sai F UO 4 14 a ny H a ST uv 1} 8m “TOA

6T. gt RL aL | eL ap A Sax

Sg TL | _ BE é cs sb FL | Lh (- ) Az

aig OL | wee L | BBB LE | psy Lk oon 4 | Sa9°7 SOL'L LOA’ L 4 apap Urn Ay

o'r Cae g T 4 £ qu T I 4 oF re yy | eo “4 TOA,

ft OF tT ig aM rag op & Sugxq

eo 14 TS Te LF ¢ ae eg &¢ 1s (+) AE

669' 78) 062° 1 82" OFZ 0 |669° Ts) OFLT 62h 1 bal 7 BELT bel 7 te 4

bata TMS | BB ite Fz OF ite ts Lg Ot) ataxoAdout

$ng _fS fa tLe Fes aire 06 $e 4aR BIN Plo “LOW 'sodut0,)

SP iF 68 BE 8 £0F a et tOr ROU J

WwW ian ig (yu if f g g e or y a a | My WON

! | ‘

zg Te gE #8 és | (Az

cele orl: T Loh 68L°1 ord’ Ot2°T. | bl" SFL L ' 4 ataxotdulpag

gPe #90 Og ae rt oe eg 4t0 Od By WOT J Rodway

fu ih fu Tu wa & & 6 ¥ Q Gg 8 9 t So “TON

Sez LT ia OL 6. TL ST 6T OT aa fT 61 ta 0% OlOy 2 eT enyxg

96 cE ts 86 £8 ie 6 LE TE Tt TE 2g OF tit UV % “le tvoduio,) OREPOOLTET

Le TF Tr 6 ae ve oF 08 18 UP e 53a “8 6F Ya LON

St Le ae ne OG 16 1a IZ 1a ee | Fa Ye TOA redsplj-

Lg ta ae L1 0% a ral S20 Fa cL SL Th “TOK 2YIBO

‘RIPSTISNY TUIpWAD MOY sayuwy Jo WUC IBoperaMNyY Puy jypyyy

LOTavi

46 ALLAN F, WILSON

greasy bluish-grey ferrohypersthene adamellites geeur as intrusions into ucid

hypersthene granulites (Fig, 7). When the W, face was visited in 1944 it

seemed that the whole of Tjakunja was charnockitic gneiss, and it was mapped

as such, ty 1949, a traverse from Alalka enced at Tjakunja, and it was then

that the igneous rock so common in the Ernabella area was found to be present

(but ineonspicucns) near the ENE. base of the mountain. Abaut one mile

acrass the plain to the E, a minor intrusion of hypersthene adamellite of the

type developed at Wardulka makes a well-marked transgressive and intrusive

contuet with the acid hypersthene gramulites. No other “maymatic™ hypers-

thene granitic rocks are known from this region, but in view of the Jack of

detailed study of the mountains to the SE. of Tjakunja some may exist there

and thus provide a link with the Ernabella region.

Ferrohypersthene adamellite—(30700),—SE. side of the small pinnacle near

the NM. of Tjakunja; identical in appearance, and similay in texture and mineral

relations, to 30789, but with the following differenees; plentiful grotesque masses

of micro-antiperthite produced by intimate corrosion by K-feldspar (Pl. 4, Fig.

1), bnt sneh replacement most obvious where andesine grains shattered and

bent and where twinning best developed; undesine inclusions in iyperatane

not antiperthitic, tending to confirm that the antiperthite is result of corrosi¢m

of plugivelase by K-feldspar rather than of exsolulion af K-4teldspar from plagin-

clase; pvroxenes most ferrous yet recarded in Musgrave Ranges. Details of

mitieral composition ure set out in Tuble 1,

Terrohypersthene adameltite (close to granadiorite)—( 30701) —ENE. side

of ‘Tjakunjas mineral composition identical, and mineral relations similar to

SU700. but with the following differences: although andesine heavily corroded

by K-feldspar, the micra-antiperthite so formed is not as grotesque in appearance

(ef, Tl, 3, Figs. 1 and 2. Pl. 4. Fig. 1); in 30700 the K-feldspar is microperthitic

excopt where it oceurs as filaments and impregnating, bands in the andesine, bul

a me the impregnating K-feldspar itself is very finely perthitic (PL 3, Pigs.

und <).

Seisieex Hin Reewn

A small mass of ferrohypersthene adamellite appears to inject the sub-

meridionally-trending gneisses and granulite of Spinifex Hill, a promiment hill

about 6 miles NW. of Kenmore Park homestead (Fig. 7). No time was avuil-

able tu make a structural survey of the hill, but its relative case of access and

excellent outcrops should encoirage detailed study.

Ferroliypersthene adamellite—(30558),—Near the sumunit of Spinifex Hill;

meditin- to coarse-grained fresh greasy dark grey massive rack composed of

dark-columved feldspars and quartz, and subordinate greasy clots of mafic

minerals: in Chin-section, minerals roughly orieated, and quartz somewhat

elongate as is quartz of basement grannlites; features linking this rock more

with Ernahella Adamellite than with the (older) basement granulites are

appurént intrusive relations, typical and distinctive “charmockitic’ appearance tn

hund-specimen, distinctive mineralogy and similar chemical compesition; similar

tu 30789 in texture and mineral relations but with the following differences:

dignelase, much correded by K4eldspar, irregularly antiperthitic: hornblende

sheaths pyroxenes and iron ore; clinopyroxene corrodes orthopyroxene. Details

Ol mineral compositions in Table 1-

A chemical analysis, norm and niede of this rack are set out us 4 in Table 3,

and alsa in Table 2, ion purcentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference

is mude in Figs. 4 und 6. A disenssion of these data is reserved For the petro

genesis section,

CHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 44

Senwinwen Hint. Recroy

Sentinel Hill (also called Mt, Carnarvon) is a prominent monntain ol granite

which forms the NE. outpost of the Musgrave Ranges. Fig. 7 shows other

pranitic hills in the vicinity. Where contacts have been seen the igneous rocks

appear to have been emplaced! magmatically. The trend of the Sentinel Hill

intrusion and of the associated granulites to the W. is meridional, but the gneisses

and granulites to the Fi. have a NW. tectonic trend, The Sentinel Hill and

assuciated intrusions to the NW. were studied in reconnaissance only, but suffi-

cient was dane to show that the bulk of the igneous rocks are orthopyroxene-

bearing adamellites. Some of the coarser facies, however, are hornblende

adiumellites, which are devoid of hypersthenc, and may only contain a fow relics

of sucite.

One of the most striking features of the orthopyroxenc-bearing adamellites

at this cesion is the development of micro-antiperthitic musses by the heavy

currosion of plagioclase by K-feldspar. Moreover, the orthopyroxene is com-

monly corroded by clinopyroxene. Textural details (illustrated) are set out

elsewhere (Wilson, 1954b, Vol. 3).

CLINOPYROXENE-BEABING AND HORNBLENDE-BEARING CRANITES

Four rocks of this group have heen chemically analysed, and shew seme

striking similarities to the three analysed orthopyroxene-bearing granites.

Baro Hine Recon

Bald Uill is a sruall prominent bare hill about % mile NE. of Donald Well,

which is twelve miles ENE. of Ernabella (Pig. 7). Bald Hill and some of

the nearby hillocks are composed of a coarse hornblende adatnellite which is

cut by rare flat-lying microgranite dykes, The basement racks, whiel are ent by

these maymatically-emplaced adamellites, are mustly meridionally-trending acid

hypersthene granulites and acid hornblende granulites. On the N. side uf Tiet-

kin’s Creck at Donald Well, however, a remarkably contorted cordierite-silli-

tanite pneiss (30606) was found, This is the furthest west that this type of

rock (which is commonly developed sear intrusions of hornblende adamellite

in the Kulgera Hills which are 75 miles GNI. of Bald TLL) has leon found,

Owing to the difliculty of collecting sufficient I'esh rock trom Bald Hill Itself,

the specimen for analysis was taken from a nearby knoll. Tt is represeutative

of the region.

Hornblende adamellite (close to hornblende granodiorite )—( 30504). —l'rom

a knoll wbout hilfaway bebween Bald Aull and Donald Well, whieth is alnent 12

miles NE. of brnabella; coarse-grained, composed of fawn-grev feldspars

and dull black mafie clots of hornblende amd pyroxenc, very faintly oriented;

rare pale fawn andesine phenocrysts (up to 16 mm long); in thin-section, xeno-

morphic granular and similay to, but somewhat coarser than the lerro-hypers-

thene-hearing rocks of comparable cheraical composition (ew. 30789) from

Ernabella region; any of same replacement structures and rmincral associations

uppear, but absence of orthopyroxene, rarity of clinopyroxene, und coarse de-

velopment of hornblende, link the adamellites from Bald [ill with many of

those of Ayers Ranges.

Plagioclase (37%)—andesme., An 37; non-zoned; up to 9mm % 4 mm: albite—

pericline twin-lamellae cracked and curved; corrosion by K-Icldspar not as

obvious as in many similar rocks from the Musgrave Ranges (bol noble: curved

and shatlered twin-lamellae oceur in andesine which is strongly corroded by

Kileldspar in almost identical hornblende adamellite (30596) from W. face

50 ALLAN F. WILSON

of Bald Hill-see Pl 2, Fig. 5); plentiful inclusions of rutile needles, pink-

brownish dust, and some octahedra of maynetite as in some of the ferrohypers-

thene granodiorites neay Alalka; no lenticular micro-antiperthite inclusions, and

only a few ragged patches of currusive K-feldypar; extinction = 19 deg.

Quartz (27%)—teregular grains 1-5 mm diam., and as round grains 0:5 mm

diam. in K-feldspar; non-sagenitic.

Microcline microperthite (21%)—very fine cross-hatch twinning; irregular

masses up to 5 mm diam.; corrodes plagioclase to small degree; a few rutile

n¢ed]e-inclusions,

Hornblende (7%)—irregular masses up to 5 mm diam, encloses iron ore,

corroded pyroxene, apatite and zircon; pleochroism—pale fawn, khaki-gveen,

yellowish green; y =1-+682; y Ac=18° = 2°; 2V/u= 738°.

Iron ores (5%)—mainly as clots in hornblende.

Apatite (1-6%)—in mafic clots, and in plagiveluse, especially where K-feld-

spar has corroded plagioclase; tubular inclusions // ¢; w= 1-636, indicating

fluorapatite.

Clinopyroxene (1%) — similar to calcic augites of Ernabella region; corroded

relics in hornblende.

Zircon (0+3%) — mostly in mafic clots; yellow Huorescence.

Biotite (0-1%) —corrodes iron ores; strong pleochroism— fawn, chestnut-

brown, yellowish brown; y = 1-623; 2V/a = LO°-15°: dispersion strong, r < y,

Sphene and calcite absent.

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2,

ion percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs.

Sand 6. A discussion of these data is reserved for the petrogenesis section,

Sentivnew Hine Recon

Although the bulk of the acid instrusions of this region are orthopyroxene-

searing adamellites, some of the coarser facies of these are homblende adamel-

lites devoid of orthopyroxene (see page 49).

They differ in nu essential respect from the hornblende adamellite from

Bald Hill (30604),

Sroxtr-Jumr-Up Recor

A Jarge mass of hornblende-sphenc-biotite granite forms prominent hills

about une mile 8, of Stony-Jump-Up about 11 miles E. of Emabella (Fig. 7),

The eastern edge of what appears to be a large shallow-dipping dyke shows

well-marked intrusive features, but little is known of the western and southern

contacts. Micro-facies of this granite cut the gneisses on the S. side of the

Stouy-Jump-Up. The intruded rocks of the region are mostly acid hypersthene

pranilites, but in the vicinity of this non-pyroxenic granite the basement rocks

are biotite-hornblende gneisses and granulites which are apparently devoid of

lhyperstlene,

This is the only known granite irom the Musgrave Ranges which is devoid

of pyroxenes, and contains sphene, biotite and a bluish green hornblende,

Hornblende-sphene-hiotite alkali-granite — (30573).—About 100 feet W. of

the eastern contact of main granite mass about % mile 8. of Stony-Jump-Up; pale

bluish grey coarse even-grained granite, streaked irregularly with greasy dark

brown bfotite-rich mafic clots about 20 mm = 5 mm; in thin-section (supple-

menting Table 1):—microcline microperthite well twinned, abundant; quartz

non-sagenitic; oligoclase sagenitic; biotite, pleochroism— very pale straw, dark

chocolate: hornblende, pleochroism— dirty yellowish green, deep brownish

green, dirty bluish green; sphene corroding iron ores; zircon Huorescent.

GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA Nl

Tir Aucurka Creek Recton

(previously known as Bexfwinnt Cveek Regivn)

The Aleurra Creek, a tributary of the Alberga River near its source, rises

in a group of low hills which are composed almust wholly of coarse granites of

considerable interest (Fig. 1). Although devoid of hypersthone, must vf these

rocks are clinopyroxenc-bearing, and display features which suggest a_petro-

logical link between the granites nf the Ayers Ranges and the Musgrave Ranges,

As these hills have not been mapped, the major structure is unknown. More-

over, nost of the individual granite hills probably represent the more resistant

portions of a granite and gneiss basement. The gneissic components, have been

largely eroded away, are now mostly covered by a thin veneer of sand from

which they protrude in favaured positions. The available evidence (best seen

oo the track about 14 miles SW. of Victory Downs Homestead and 2-5 miles

WSW. of Aleurra Creek Crossing) is that the granites of this region lave been

emplaced as a magma into meridionally-trending gneisses and granulites,

In addition to outcrops near Aleurra Creek, several smal! granite hills near

the Marryat Creek about nine miles SW. of the Aleurra Creek Crossing have

heen included, for convenience, in the Aleurra Creek region.

Augite-hornblende adumellite—(30210) —At 1952 Crossing of Alcurra Creek

(Beefwooud Creek of earlier publications: Wilson, 1947b, p. 199, and 1950b, p,

23(1); no contacts with older rocks were found; rare xenvliths of coarse quartzite

and amphibolite; approximate trend of a poor flow-structure between 325° and

335°; fairly fresh coarse-grained pinkish Kxwn homogeneous ruck cumpused af

pink plagioclase (up to 15 mm tong), light fawn K-feldspar, very light grey

vitreous quartz, and non-oriented mafic clots containing shiny black hornblende

and greasy dull greenish yrey pyroxenc.

In thin-section (supplementing Table a ae ae -~ tabular grains, necdle

and plate inelusions common, patchy development of pinkish dusty inclusions

giving andesine pink colour (and fluorescence) in hand-specimen and pale pink

culour even in thin-section, grains shattered and twin-lamellae bent, most grains

extensively replaced by non-shattered micrucline microperthite; quartz — long

rutile needles oriented in three directions; hornblende — poikilitic anhedral

masses. enclosing corroded clinopyroxene and iron ores; pleochroism — fawn, dull

khaki-ereen, grass-vreep; caleic augite—clear pale greenish non-pleochroie

anhedral grains up to 1 mm diam,, (100) and (001) Jamellae and parting not

as common as in culcie wugites of Musgrave Ranges even though composition

apparently identical, heavily corroded by hornblende; biotite — assaciated with

iron ores, pleochroism — pale straw-yellaw, yellowish brown; zircon — fluorescent,

and similar to zircon of orthopyroxenic granites of Musgrave Ranges (Wilson,

1950b, p. 229); sphene — encrustrations on some ysaings of iron ore, Details of

mineral compositions in Table 1. :

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, ion

percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs. 5 and 6.

A discussion of these data ts reserved for the petruguncsis section,

Augile-hornblende adamellite—( 34598 ).—Typical of several low hills just 8,

of track about 8°5 miles WSW, of Victory Downs Homestead and 3 miles ENE,

of Aleurra Creek; flow-bunding not obvious, but the attitude of rare xenoliths

suggests trend of 335° and possible dip of How layers 40° NE. In outerop and

thin-section this rock is similay to that at the Aleurra Creek Crussing (30210);

plagioclase (47:2%, An 32) extensively replaced by microcline microperthite

(20°5%, see PL 2, Fic. 6): in addition to nurmal anhedral grains of sagenitic

quartz, some smaller euhedral grains of clear quartz occur with calcite, sphene

TABLE 2

Chemical Analyses, CIPW, Norms, and Mades of Granites from Central Anstratin.

30588 30135 30385 30397 30H04- 3078) | 30210 34568

66.96 66-20 65.92 69.7 G4 82 | 63 52 (13.44 61.48

0 97 0.84 8a 1,04 0 6Y 0 84 1.12 1.16

14,32 14 7) 14 38 It 43 13.27 16.76 15.28 16.07

1,78 2.70 1,81 232 2.68 0.96 2 97 3°08

3.85 2.72 4.16 402 3.50 3.97 3.78 3.20

0). 33 0.3% 0.16 0 24 O 2A 09 0.24 O.18

1.12 0.92 1,24 1.37 0.96 0,91 ie 1.38

2.06 3.24 3,23 3.16 4.42 4,51 4.37 4.77

O.16 O04 0 11 tr 0.12 6.04

2.73 3.18 3.33 2.66 2.34 B-RR 3.18 2.92

5 ut 4.50 4,16 4.34 3.71 4.01 | 3.488 3.A9

0.04 O15 O14 (ng 0.14 a 33 On5 0.2

0.18 nil 0 16 1.06 0.04 0 U6 () 05 0.24

0.33 0 56 0.38 0.46 0.76 0.52 O.55 0.85

99.87 9996 HH. 95% | 90.94 99. 86 100.544

100077

Let

Includes: *83=0.11, ZrO,=0.08, CL=0.07; CO,=nil; *CO,—mil,

CIPW. NORM

qu | 24.12) | 23,58 | 20,99 | 24 16 | 25 GO It 20 | 20 7% 20 93

or | 30.37 25,41 24,58 27 65 21.02 23.70 21,15 21.22

ab 23.10 26,91 28.18 22, 61 21 9 32.83 26.74 23 56

an 8.36 | 12.49 1201 12 82 | 16.97 L648 If H+ 18.10

cor 1.20 0.38 0.08 0 86 0.91

wo iis Lt it 0 Al

cdi 4 on 0, 24. 0, 36 O 2

fs 0,40 (BI 0 26

h en 2 78 2.29 2.84 3 41 U3 1.90 2.45 3 44

v {oF 4.42 1.97 409 | 4,19 aE | 4.24 277 1,17

mt 2.58 a 92 2.63 3 46 3_5t) 1,39 4 $1 3.77

il 1 84 1 Ag 1.67 1 ths L Sl 1,59 3.13 2.20

ap 0.78 1.32 O00 | 109 Pad | - 238 1 3 2.01

| qa

#441 gwrsv. 2, pyr) 20.

MODE 'Val. 3

{

Chunrtz 26 24 3 28 a7 15 21 19 7

K-teldapar 33 24 BT 20 21 74 23 24

Plagiocl, 23 37 a7 33 37 ayy 4] Al

Orthopyrox, 2 4 4

Clinopytox. 3 3 2 1 2 325 13

Hornblende 3 1.5 1 2 7 0.5 45 5.5

Biotite tr 5 tir 6 O.1 tr ) 6 On+

Tron Ores 4 a5 4 2 5 3.5 4 3.

Apatite 0.5 1y 1 1 1.4 1.4 15 1.

Zircon | 0.3 0.3 tr tr 1.3 0.3 tr 0.3

4 5 8 z 8

ne eR ee ee EEE ee ee eee ee

Add:—. tealeite=tr; ‘aphene=3, overs —U-5; Sgarnet=4; ?sphene—tr; fothers=1,

i & 3 SE

30138.

d0888.

AURRT.

30604,

SO7BY.

80210),

4568,

» Ferrohyporsthene adamellite, Spinifexs Hill, Musgrave Ranges. Anal., W, H. Herdsman,

1950,

Hornblende-biotite adamellite (Kulgera, Adamullite), Kalgera. Hill, Kulgera Hills, Anat,

W.. H. Herisman, 1950,

Ferrobypersthone adamellite, Ormbagunda, Musgraye Ranges. Anal, W. H. Herdaman,

1031.

Garmetiferous pyroxeno adamellite (Upsan Downs Adamellite), The Pass, sast of Upsan

Downs. Musgrave Ranges. Anal., W. IL. Herdsman, 1950.

Hornblende adamellite, near Buld Hill, Musgrave Ranges. Anal. W. AH. Murdsman. L950.

Ferrohypersthene granodiorite, ear Ernubella wator-hole, Musgrave Rangus. Anal,

A, PF, Wilson, 1944.

s\ngite-lordhlonda adamelite, Aleurra Creek, E, Musyrave Ranges. 4nd... W.H. Herdsman,

1950,

Hornblende adamellite (the Ayers Ranges Adamellite), 33 miles NW, Mi, Cavenach

homestead, Ayers Ranges. anal. W. H. Herdsman, 1933,

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSERALIA “i

and hidtite as late magmatic erystallizations (total quartz —16°9%); hornblende

(41%, y= 1°682), irregular poikilitic masses corroding clinopyroxene (1-7,

v7 718) and iron ores (4°2%), and closely assuciated with apatite (1:92,

) = 1-638), epidote and (?) lawsonite rare accesseries associated with eblori-

lived biotite (2-9%, y = 1-632), calcite, sphene and late iron ores.

Tur Avrks RANKS

the Ayers Ranges (Fig. 1) is a group of hills which rise “like islands out

of a vast ocean of scrub” (Giles, 1874, p. 75), Basedow published a sketch map

of the general distribution of rocks in the area, and pointed out in his brief

report that large portions of the Ranges are apparently composed of somewhat

coarsely crystalline normal to slightly porphyritic granite intruded in a direction

north of west ( Basedow, 1905, p. 78, and Plate XX), Ile also points out (p. 78)

that “outcrops of identical rock were found intermediate in positian between

Mount Sir Henry and Mt, Camarvon (Sentinel Hill), thns geologically con-

necting the Musgrave and Ayers Ranges” Buasedow’s “intermediate hills” are

probably the hills of the Aleurra Creek Region uf this paper.

In a brief petrographic deseription of what he presumably considered to

he the typical granite (taken from Mount Sir Henry), Basedow stated (p. 93)

that orthoclase was somewhat subordinate to plagioclase, and that the main matic

mingral was a green biotite. In a Tater, more detailed description of a tock,

also presumed to be typical of Mount Sir Henry, Rubinson (1949, p. 38) pointed

out that the rock was a hornblende granodiorite. Since Robinson makes nn

mention of biotite but gives details of a grea hornblende it scems likely that

Basedow mistook hornblende for hiotite, —

Keeonnaissance mapping with the aid of air-photographs was carricd out

in the Ayers Ranges in January, 1952. Since papers are being prepared on

special aspects of the geology, only the Ayers Ranges Adamellite will he de-

sevibed in this paper, Some of the granitic rocks of the arca are course

porphyritic udamellites, others are granodiovites. The rock described helaw was

chemically analysed, for it appeared (o be fairly typical of the acid intrusions

of the Ranges, In all of the rocks hornblende appears to he the prinvipal mafic

Mineral, unt! clinopyroxene and biotite occur in some. No orthopyroxene was

found, and sphenc is an accessory in some rocks.

Hornhlende adamellite (Ayers Ranges Adamellite )—(34568)—NW. end of

large low bare granite hill 24 miles SSW. of Mt, Reynolds and 3% miles NW, af

Mt. Cavenagh Homestead; probably typical of Ayers Ranges; good platy-flowage

of K-feldspar phenoerysts ends NW. with dip 60° SW., nearest known outcrop

of gneiss 34 miles E,

In hand-specimen; coarse-gramed purplish grey porphyritic; coarse ground-

mass of pale pinkish grey K-feldspar and cream-colourcd plagivelase; very

roughly oriented mafic clots (mostly 10 mm & 5 tam) of black hornblende, iron

ore, dull greasy light green augite; few phenocrysts pale pinkish grey K-feld-

spar (15 mm diam. ); oceasional light bluish yrey plagivelase (15 mm * 12 mm).

In thin-section (supplementing Table 1): occasional phenocrysts of K-

feldspar set in course xenomorphic granular groundmass; andesine, non-zoned,

mostly 2 mm diam. albite-pericline twins curved, shattered and healed by

K feldspar and sometimes by apatite or hornblende, muny inclusions of dis-

torted magnetite octahedra and rutile needles, corrosion by K-feldspar rot as

common as in many comparable yranitic rocks of Central Australia, but myrme-

kite prosent, K-feldspur, moderately microperthitic, na eross-hatch twinning: non-

sagenitic quartz; hornblende corrodes iron ares and clinopyroxene, and smears

of magnetite dust in hornblende suggest early replacement ot ferriferous

51 ALLAN F. WILSON

pyroxene, pleochroism — yellowish fawn, greenish khaki, green; biutite, mostly

enrrading iron ores and hornblende in mafic elots, pleochruism — very pale

yellow, golden brown; zircon, colourless, mostly euhedral crystals associated

with mafic clots, fuorescent as in other rocks of this suite; epidote, lawsonite,

ereenish biotite are rare secondary minerals.

Details of mineral compositions are set out in Table 1

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, ion

percentages are set out in Table f, and further reference is made in Figs. 5 and

6. A discussion of these data is reserved for the petrogenesis section.

Tr Kuicena Hinws

The Kulgera Hills are separated from the Ayers Ranges, which are some ten

miles to the south, by a trough in which remnants of flat-lying (#) Mesozwic

sandstones are the only outcrops (Mig. 1). Gneisses, mostly of amphibolite

Facies, trend approxtrnayely 330° to 340° (both strike and lineation), In places

these are heavily granitized, and some are cut by magrnatically-emplaced gran-

ites, microgranites and muscovite-hearing pegmatites. Notwithstanding marked

lowul transgressive: structures, the overall trend of the granite imtrusions appears

to be sub-parallel to the fold axes of the gneisses, ic., 330° to 340° (Fig. re

The first geological study of this area was made by the author in 1949 when

the main distribution of rock types and structure were worked out. Some

features of the granitic rocks of the Kulgera Hills have been published (Wilson,

1950b, bp. 228, 230; 19584, p, 78), and other papers await publication.

In the present paper a desuntptton is given of the Kulpera Adamellite, the

mosl important granitic rock of the region,

Moernblende-biotite adamellite (The Kulgera Adamellite) — (30138 ).—Eust

face of Kulgera Hill, one mile RNE, of Kulgera Homestead; coarse massive

even-gruined rock composed of flesh-coloured microcline, dull white plagivclase

(with occasional phenocrysts of bluish grey plagioclase, 30 mm long), shiny

black biotite. dull black hornblende and plentiful accessory brown sphene;

imicrocline fluoresces pink and zircon yelluw (Wilson, 1950b, pp. 227-228, 230),

In thin-section (supplementing Table 1): coarse xenomorphic texture with

non-criented mafic clots; oligoclasc, An 26, slightly zoned to An 23 near the

edges of Iarge crystals, grotesquely-shaped relies within well-twinned micro-

cline microperthite, or as aggregates of subhedral tabular crystals which, by

their bent and fractured twin-lamellae, indicate some (?) protoclastic shearing

prior to or during their partial replacement by microcline, rods of rutile and

Hakes af haematite common inclusions; sagenitic quartz: biotite, corroding horn-

blende and iron ores, tends ta occur as buffer between these mincrals and micro-

cline, pleochroism — pale fawn, dark brown; iron ores (3-5%) —mostly magne-

tite, prominent constituent of mafic clots, in places corroded by sphene, horn-

blende or biotite: pale fawn sphene, and a little purple fluorite, are in contavt

with microcline and correde iron ores; hornblende, corrodes iron cres and is

itself corroded by biotite, pleachroism— pale greenish fawn, kheki-green, clear

greenish bine. .

Details of mineral compositions in Vable 1.

A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, dor

percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs. § and

6. Discussion of these data is reserved for the petrowenesis section

MINERALOGY

Notyithstanding the marked differences in appearanve in hand-specimen,

the main granitic intrusions of a large portion of the Musgrave Block show many

GRANITES OF CEN TRAT. AUSTRALIA 5

mincralogical and textural features in common. The general range of propertics

of the minerals is set out below.

(QUARTZ

Bluish-grey in hand-specimen (as in many Indian charnockitic rocks) in

only some orthopyroxene-bearing granites; bluish tint absent from clinopyroxenc-

bearmg, and hornblende-bearing granites; quartz not always sagemitic; sagenitic

quartz not restricted to pyroxenie granites; may also occur as small rounded

gruins (sagenitic or otherwise) in K-feldspar (I'l. 2, Fig. 4); water-clear blebs

may be included in hornblende,

Kererosvan

Mostly moderately micro-perthitic non-twinmed microcline, presumably in-

verted from monoclinic phase (Wilsou, 19502, p. 219); typical cross-hateh

twinning of microcline best seen in biotite-rich or sphene-bearing granitic rocks

where it may show characteristic pale pink Auorescence (Wilson, 1950b, p, 232);

pronounced corrosive action on plagioclase: (discussed, p. 49); no phenocrysts

of K-feldspar in the orthopyroxenic granites deseribed in this paper, but are

important in sume granites from the Ayers Ranges.

PLAGIONLASE

Similar habit in both orthopyroxene-bearing and orthopyroxene-free granites;

mastly as corroded relies 2 mm diam, from probable originals at least 6 mm long;

réré bluish-grey non-zoned phenocrysts up to dQ mm & 12 ma tr seme pyroxene

granites, but greasy blue phenocrysts about 20 mm » & mm not rare in many

hoenblende-bearing granites of Avers Ranges and eastern outliers of Musyrave

Ranges. Composition of phenocrysts or groundmass very similar in either ortho-

pyroxenie rocks or otherwise {see ‘Table J); determined (by reference to

Winchell and Winchell (1951, p. 283)) from extinction a’ A010 in sections

1a (to conserve space, recorded thus; “extinction — 20°"); in orthopyroxenic

granites commonly andesiné (about An 37) (contrast (a) “charmockific adamel-

lite” from Kakamas, South Africa (Poldervaart and von Backstrém, 1949)):

phenocrysts. commonly strongly zoned (An 54-28 with average composition An

45); plagioclase non-zoned in Australian rocks. (b) Finnish “charnockites” at

Turki (Hietanen, 1947; p. 1039) with Wwondhjemitic: affinities: comparable rocks

much more sudic (An 25— An 33) than the Australian rocks). Dark evlour of

plagioclase in hand-specimen probably due to almost ubiqnitous presence of

inclusions (? exsolution phenoment) such as slender, hair-like crystals af rutile

(as in quartz of many associated rocks), and associated in some grains with

enatic davelambent of squat rods of rutile, octahedra of magnetite or fakes of

haemutite. Albite and pericline twin-lamellae of almost all rocks bent and trac

tured: development of the twinning appears to have been facilitated and even

controlled by shearing in many rocks: K-feldspar replacement possibly prenetalerd

pari passa with shearing (sec p. 68), and there is probably a similar control

for erratic ad poor development of micro-antiperthite which is here of repluce-

ment nut exsulution origin (see p, 65).

{YATHOPYROXLENE

Within restricted areas hyperstherie-bearing and hypersthene-lree vranites

clasely associated as though of similar age and renetivally related (e.g., Sentinel

Hill); orthopyroxenic grimites restricted (as ir as is known) to Musgrave

Ranges; ia some rocks evidence of development al expense of clinupyroxene; in

uthers a lamellar structure (// optic plane (010)) in orthopyroxene is some-

58 ALLAN F. WILSON

what bent and shattered, and the mineral corroded by unsheared clinopyroxene;

in many rocks, no clear evidence of order of crystallization of the two pyroxenes.

Composition estimated by measurement of y in immersion liquids in sodium

light (accuracy about + 0-001, and reference to the graph by Hess (1952, Fig.

2) ); outstanding feature is very ferriferous character (range Fe 65! to Fe 50 wi

average about Fe 57) in marked contrast with less ferriterous basement granu-

lites (average about Fe 37 and maximum Fe 50, and marked tendency for most

ferriferous orthopyroxenes to occur in granulites of intermediate rather than

basic or acid composition); chemical and modal analyses of the Central Aus-

tralian granites show that more ferriferous pyroxenes (both ortho- and clino-)

are in the more basic of the granitic rocks; contrast the commonly recorded iron-

enrichment in acid differentiates of igneous bodies and note that Hictanen

(1947, p. 1040) points out that the itou content of the pyrexenes (both ortho-

and clino-) seems to rise regularly with increasing silica-content in the charnov-

kite series of Turku, Finland, where charnockitic rocks are basic, intermediate

and acid types, and said to be magmatic and related to trondhjemites; very ferri-

ferous orthopyroxencs also typical of intermediate charnockites from Varberg,

Sweden (Quensel, 1951, p. 247), where orthupyrexenes from two typical racks,

more basic than the rocks described in the present paper, contain Fe 64% and

Fe 774 respectively (using Hess’s graph (1952, Fig. 2)). Dispersion, r<v, for

observed range af composition (cf. Kynu, 1941), Correlation between composi-

lion as suggested by y and 2V not as guod as for orthopyroxenes of basement

granulites. Pleochroism weak as in mast other ferriferous orthopyroxenes of

other charnockitic areas (e.g., Quensel, 1951, p, 245; Hietanen, 1947, p. 1038;

Howie, 1955, p, 753) — colours noted, «= pale pinkish fawn, ¢ = pale fawn, y=

very pale greenish grey.

CrcrxopyHOXRNE

Present in all rocks under discussion except certain granites very rich in

hornblende and biotite, and some sphene-bearing rocks; in orthopyroxenic

granites confusing evidence of pyroxene relations (as pointed out above); in

many hornblende-rich rocks clinopyroxenes strongly corroded by hornblende;

in addition to normal (110) cleavage. (100) and (001) partings usually stronyly

developed. and (010) partings less prominent; very fine lamellar structure

commonly developed // (100); exsolution lamellae of orthopyroxene not om

mon; inclusions of corroded orthopyroxene and magnetite uncommun; cleavages

and Jamellar structures not curved as commonly as those of orthopyroxene uf

same rock; colour—clear, very pale greenish grey with very rare weak plen-

chroisn, Cuomposition—estimated by using y (measured in Na light on grains

yielding centred Hash figure—owing to poor (010) parting such grains not diffi-

cult to locate) and 2V, and appropriate curves (superimposing plates I and I:

Hess, 1949); accuracy about + 2% for each camponent, since influence on optics

of Al, Fe*, Ti, ete., not known; extinctiun y Ac, measured directly in Na light

un universal stage by orienting grains normal to both (001) and (100) partinys,

and accurate to + 1°; mostly calcic augites, somewhat more ferriferous Uian those

of basement granulites (Fig. 3), The optically derived compositional tic-lines

of co-existing pyroxenes in intrusive orthopyroxenic granites are distinctly dif-

ferent from those of basement granulites, thus suggesting a possible method for

recognizing intrusive (mobilized) charnockitic rocks, for Hess (1941, p. 585)

pointed out that for igneous rocks “if a line joining the two pyroxenes of a given

specimen be extended upwards to the En-We composition line it will intersect

that line at approximately En 25 Wo 75°—contrast C. Australian othopyrexenic

granites (En 24% Wo 75%), and basement granulites (En 15% Wo 84%). The

SRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 57

compositional tie-lines are shown in Fig. 3. The significance of variation in

optically derived tie-line trends of co-existing pyroxenes has been discussed

elsewhere (Wilson, 1959b).

Ca (Wo)

CHARNOCKITIC GRANITES

GRANULITES

(mean = 15-5 Mg)

|} = No, 30789

2= No, 30816

= No; 3087!

Na. 30658

Ne: 30476

No. 30385

No. 30700

No. 30558

INTRUSIVE GRANITES

(mean = 24:5 Mg)

: \\ \

\ INTRUSIV!

THOPYROXENES ELGRANIFES

1 AS

aie ee ee

Mg (En) 3

& ob» bo Fe (Fs)

Fig. 3—The optically derived compositional tie-lines of co-existing pyroxenes in

charnockitic granites compared with those of the granulites which are intruded by

the granites.

egryeunnaw

AMPHIBOLE

Hornblende of the orthopyroxenic granites: Dominant mafic mineral in some,

absent from others; normally charged with apatite and corrodes iron ores (PI. 2,

Fig. 4) and both pyroxenes; in some rocks grotesque poikilitic masses de-

veloped largely at expense of plagioclase and associated with granules of clear

quartz in contrast to more normal sagenitic quartz of rest of rock; y ranges from

1-703 to 1-685 with higher values in more basic rocks; pleochroism—e = pale

fawn or fawn, 8 = brown or dark khaki, y = greenish khaki, with 8 >y >a;

2V/a = 72° to 78°: y\c=15° to 19°; probably ferriferous hastingsites; con-

sistently more ferrifcrous than hornblendes of basement pyroxenic granulites.

Hornblende of the clinopyroxenic and hornblendic granites; Habit and

mineral associations, 2V and y A c are similar to those of hornblende of ortho-

58 ALLAN F. WILSON

pyroxenic granites, but refractive indices (y range 1-682-1-673) consistently

lower (unly exceptions: sphene-hearing biotite adamellite from Kulgera, 30138,

in which » = 1-692; pleochroism — a= pale greenish fawn, 8 = khaki green, y =

clear greenish blue, and a similar rock from Stony-Jump-Up, Musgrave Ranges),

Plesehroism (for y= 1-681 to 1-682, y Ac= 18°) —a= pale fawn, 8 = khaki

green, y — yellowish green, or (for y= 1-673, yA c=17T°) «=yellowish fawn,

&=veenish khaki, y=green. In composition, homblendes of granites [ree

from orthopyroxene are less ferriferous than those of orthopyroxenic granites,

Biowce.

Biotite of the orthopyroxenic granites; Rarc, but may occur as small irregular

grains encrusting some grains of won ore and hornblende; strongly pleochroic —

u =light straw-yellow; B= y=chestnut brown; y ranges from 1:640 to 1:665

indicating biotite more ferriferous than in granites devoid of orthopyroxene;

3V/u mostly 0".

Biotite of granites devoid of orthopyroxene: Plentiful; corrodes iron ores

and homblende, and in some rocks (¢.g,, 30135) bivtite tends to act as buffer

between those minerals and corroding microcline; pleachroic haloes rare (hest

seen in 30573); mostly biaxial (2V/u=0° to 15°, r<v, strong); y (1-632 to

1-616) lower than for biatites of orthopyroxenic vranites; pleouhroism — «=

fawn, 6 =chestnut brown, += yellowish brown, or «= very pale yellow, 8 =

y = golden brown,

Biotite of pegmatites: In peematites closely associated with orthopyroxenic

granites near Ernabellu, greenish khaki or khaki in thin (001) flakes, sensibly

unaxial negative with y ranging 1-654 to 1-678 (one biotite has 2V/a =—7°,

+ =1-680); more ferriferous than those of orthopyroxenic “parent rocks”.

Iron Onts

imenite and magnetite of equal importance as main iron ores, aud pyrite

and pyrrhotite very rare; corroded grains in pyroxene, hornblende and bivtite

in the basic clots, small octahedral inclusions of magnetite in plagioclase, irve-

gular’ plates “healing” shears and gashes in rhost minerals (Pl. 2, Figs. 3 and 4),

small euhedral orange-coloured and ced fake inclusions of (7) haematite in

some plagioclase grains.

Fivonavatrrr

Abundant aceessery; no consistent differences in compusition or type of

inclusiom (commonly colourless tubular inclusions alined // c) or fluorescence

fin ste rocks pale dull yellow in contrast with associated zircons which always

IInoresce bright yellow or orange) notwithstanding variable habit as subhedral

masses inlimately associated with all minerals or mafie clots, or as euhedral

grains in hornblende, or as euhedral grains in K-feldspar near contact with

pligioclaso grain in process of replacernent by K-feldspar (as though P and F

fixed by Ca expelled from plagioclase by K)—see PI. 2, Figs, 2 and 6.

ZION

Clear, almost colourless, non-zoned, euhedral grains usually associated with

mafic clits; Commonly with characteristic tubular and crystal inclusions; bright

yellow or orange fuorescence (2537 A); only one type in intrusive rocks (cun-

trast with several types in some basement granulites), thus suggesting close

genetic relationship as discussed in previous papers (Wilson, 1947b, pp. 201,

309; 1950b, p. 209); similar zircons occur in granulites which have suffered

extreme metusomatic activity and recrystallization (compare Poldervaart and von

Ikackstrom, 1949, p. 467: “recrystallization of zircon accompanies the produc-

TABLE 3

Acid and Intermediate Charnockitic Rocks, mcluding some known to be magmatically emplaced.

1 2 3 4*. 5 G* 7 8 9 10* I 12

{

SiO, 77.47 70.63 69.57 66.96 66.93 65.92 65.89 64.62 63.85 63.52 60.45 60.12

TiO, 0.26 0.61 0.02 0.97 2.59 0,88 055 1.26 0.83 0.84 1.50 0.95

Al,Oy 11.00 14,34 15.08 14.32 12.50 14,38 14.8) 13.76 14.87 16.76 17.56 16.63

Fe,O, 1.04 0.32 0.26 1.78 0.87 L.81 2.00 3.28 2.32 0,96 0,62 2.19

FeO 2.02 2.2 3.29 3.85 4.25 4.16 3.10 3.52 5.07 3.97 5.77 4.79

MnO nil 0,04 0.02 0,23 0.16 0.04 O.11 0.05 0.09 0.10 0.10

MgO 0.43 0,56 2,09 1.12 1.36 L.24 2.10 1.62 3,29 0,91 1.60 0.82

CaO 1.02 2.04 2.62 2.06 3.43 3.23 §.25 5.06 4,45 £51 4 72 3.78

BaO 0.20 0.16 0.18 nil 0,12 0.18 0.21

Na,O 2.86 3.02 2.87 2.73 2.82 3.33 2.42 2.59 3.72 3.88 3.75 4.73

K,O 4.14 5,59 3.99 5.14 3.39 4.16 3.18 3.58 1.09 4.01 2.45 4.25

HO + 0.20 0.40 bo 53 0,04 0.38 O 14 933 Le ay 0.18 0 7h 0.25

H,O — 0.05 0,09 +b 0.18 0,08 O16 O.10 ri 0.06 0.53

P.O, nil 0.25 0.04 0.33 0.78 0.38 0,29 0.65 0.08 0.52 0.31 0 77

Ss 0 08 0.12 0.15 0.11 0 OY

ZrO, tr tr 0.08 0 OL

100.49 | 100.09 | 100.66") 99.87 99 80%) 99.95% | 99.83 100.48 99.954! 100.545) 100.308) 99.56

Tneludes: 1srO =tr; 2SO,=0. 26; 2CO,=nil; *SrO=0.04, Cl=nil; 8Cl=0.07, CO, =nil; °CO, =nil.

CIPW. NORM

qu 41.22 24.3 25.26 24.12 20.46 20.09 25.56 24.9 20.95 14.20 13.88 7.26

or 24.46 33.3 23.91 30.37 20.02 24,58 18 90 21.1 6.67 23.70 15.01 25.02

ab 24.10 37.7 24.63 23.10 23.58 28.18 20.44 22.0 31.44 32,53 31.44 St 82.

aL 5.00 8.8 13.07 8 36 11.68 12.01 20.29 15.3 20 57 16.48 21.78 11.68

cor 1.12 1.20 0.64

wo 1 0.64 al 1.14

di {i 0 25 3.40 L4 1.36 0.36 \ 1.8)

fs | O.40 05 0 8)

p € 2 29

hy {of } gaa} 78 } 10.81 rel } p84) P8y |b oar] Pf | baa.ze) goog | bits } 6.68

mt. ~ 1.62 O.4 ) 46 2.58 1.30 2.63 3.02 4.9 3.25 1.39 0.93 3.25

il 0.61 1.0 1.84 5.2 1.67 1.06 24 1.52 1.59 2.8 | 1.82

pyr 0.22 220

ap 05 0.78 2 02 90 0,67 1.7 1.28 0 67 1.68

air 12

| |

MODE (Vol. %)

Quartz 40 26 8 20.3 26 20.46 2 27.1 15 5 15 1a

K-feldspar 42.3 38 20.02 27 22-7 | xe 24 ‘i

Plagiocl. hoa 23.4 hos 0 23 33.58 | 37 298 |p A) ay pao

Orthopyrox. 3 5.7 12 3 2 \ Toa 4 } 3.8 23.6 4 12.4)

Clinopyrox. 3 ina 3 2 16

Hornblende 3 1 2.5 05 14.3

Biotite 1 03 9 4 tr tr 5.7 tr

Tron ores 2 1.2 1 6.41 6.6 fd 3.5 6.9

Apatite 0,3 0.3 2.02 1 1.3 1.5

Zircon 0.3 tr 0.5

Etc 0.5? 5.18

a Oe i eee

tmostly sphene; Sgarnet..

8.G. | 2.67 | 2.77 2.705 2.80 2.728 | 2.74 | 2.78 2,77 | 2.737 | 2,72 2277

| '

. Charnockite, St, Thomas’ Mount, Madras, India (Washington. 1916, p. 325).

. Charnockite, Ivy Point, Alfred County, Natal, S. Africa (Gevers and Dunne, 143, p. 201),

. Charnockite, Bunyore district, Uganda (Groves, 1935, p. 163).

*30558. Ferrohypersthene adamellite, Spinifex Hill, Musgrave Rys., C. Australia, Anal., W. A. Herdsman, 150.

. Charnockite, Nuwara Eliya, Ceylon (Adams, 1929, p. 481).

*30885. Ferrohypersthene adamellite, Ombagunda, Musgrave Kgs., C. Australia. dnal., W. H. Herdsman, 1991,

, Charnockite, Galle, Ceylon (Adams, 1929, p. 481).

. Charnockite adamellite, Kakamas, Cape Province, 8. Africa (Poldervaart and yon Backstrom, 1949. p, 487).

. Intermediate charnockite, Yercand, Shevaroy Hills, Madras State, India (Washington 1916, p, 329).

10, *80789. Ferrohypersthene granodiorite, Ernabella, Musgrave Rygs., C. Australia. dnal., A. FP. Wilson, lidd.

, Quartz-hypersthene diorite, Mt. Wati, Uganda (Groves, 1935, p. 146).

2, Intermediate charnockite, Fastningsberget, Varberg, Sweden (Quensel, 1951, p. 248).

cantor wNe

—

o—

*Tndicates a new analysis.

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 59

tion of ultrametamorphic granite”); in pegmatitcs closely associated with both

the orthopyroxene-bearing granites in Ernabella region and sphene-bearing horn-

blende-biotite granites of the Kulgera Hills, very dark brown weakly radio-

active non-fluorescent zircon (possibly cyrtolite) occurs as euhedral crystals

up to 2 cm. long (Wilson, 1947b, p. 208).

SrHENE

Absent from orthopyroxene-bearing granites, but very rare accessory in

pegmatites closely associated with these rocks near Ernabella; usually absent

from clinopyroxene-bearing granites, but appears as crusts on some ilmenite

in a few of the granites from Ayers Ranges; abundant in some biotite-rich

granites (especially those containing a hornblende more typical of rocks of

the amphibolite rather than granulite facies, eg,, 30188 und 30573); some petro-

graphic evidence of its formation by fixation vf Ti from ilmenite by Ca liber-

ated from plagioclase in process of corrosion by K-feldspar; sphene and blnish-

green amphibole are late magmatic phenomena in charnuckitie adamellites of

Kakamas, South Africa (Poldervaart and von Backstrém, 1949, p. 486), and

sphene ig rare in Swedish charnockitic rocks (Quensel, 1951, p, S51).

CALCITE

Rare, apparently late magmatic concentration in both orthopyroxenic and

histite-rich granites,

GARNET

Carnet absent, but spessartitic types (with n= 1-817, approx.) in associ-

ated pegmatites; basement rocks commonly garnetiferous (see p. 66).

Rute

As needles in some quartz and plagioclase,

ALLANITE

Absent from granites, hut found in pegmatites closely associated with the

granites of the whole area,

PETROGENESIS

CHEMICAL DATA

Eight new chemical analyses of granites from the Musgrave Block are set

out, together with CIPW. norm, and mode in Table 2. Three are of ortho-

pyroxenic yranites (“charnockites”) (30588, 30385 and 30789), and also appear

in Table 3 with other orthopyroxenic rocks.

Novres on Inprvinwar, ANALYSES

Perrohypersthene adamellite, 30558 (Table 3, 4 Table 2).—Petro-

graphy, p. 48; in hand-specimen closely resembles type acid charnockite from

Madras (‘lable 3, 1), but this resemblance is of no chemical significance for

the yvreasy dark prey colour is a feature of a wide range of pyroxenic rocks;

similar to acidic charnockite from Uganda (Table 3, 3), and Ba content of both

rovks is high, a feature noted by Groves (1935, p. 174) in several charnackitic

rocks from Uganda; similar to some charmockitic rocks from Ceylon (Table 3,

5 and 7), but is more potassic (late magmatic enrichment in K reflected in

analysis—see Fig. 6).

Hornhlende-biotite acamellite (the Kulyera Adamellite), 30138 (Table 2).—

Petroyraphy, p. 54; sphene-bearing granite devoid of pyroxene, and emplaced

within racks of amphibolite facies; chernically similar to more deep-seated rocks

60 ALLAN F. WILSON

west of Kulgera (all other analyses of Table 9, and see discussion, p, 64), but

ratio of ferrous to ferric iron much lower in 30138, and Ba low.

Ferrohypersthene adamellite, 30385 (Table 3, 6, Tablo 2).—Petrography,

p. 46; very similar to 30558, thus resembling some charnockitic rocks from

Ceylon (Table 3, 5 and 7) and from South Africa (Table 3, 8}; richer in Ca

than 20558, as shown by appeurance of diopside in the norm in 30385, but

both reeks contain modal clinopyroxene; high rativ of ferrous te ferric iron in

both modil and normative pyroxenes is significant (see p. 64).

Gurnetiferous pyroxene adamellite (iis Upsan Downs Adamellite}, 30397

(Table 2),.—Formal description not in this paper; typical of granites of Upsan

Downs region, all of which have suffered a characteristic metamurphism with

production of abundant microstopic pink gamet (n= 1-799) developed at

expense of iron cres and pyroxenes during (?) deep-seated shearing; many

granites converted to Haxer-granites and augen-gneisses; approximate mode of

30097, the typical granite from the middle of The Pass F about 1 mile EF, of

Upsan Downs Well) set out in Table 2; no orthopyroxene remains but was

prohahly present in the igneous rock prior to the metamorphism; chemival

analysis remarkably similar tu those of other granites from the Musgrave Ranges.

Hornblende adamellite, 30604 (Table 2)—Petrography, p- 49; this ortho-

pyroxene-free rock probably typical of the hornblende facies of the Ernabella

Adamellite; main chemical difference —Emmabella rock (30789) contains much

less FeO, and P.O, but more NasO; very similar to 30910, the auyite-horm-

blende adamellite from Alcurra Creek, and to 30138, the sphene-bearing horn-

blende-hiotite adamellite from Kulgera, moreover, all three rocks unusually

low in BaQ,

Ferrohiypersthene granodiorite (close to adamellite), 30789 (Table 3, 10:

Table 2).—Petrography, p. 44; when first analysed, thought typical of granites

in vicinity of Ernabella where orthopyroxenic granites best isplayed in Mus

Baits Ranges; normative and modal quartz are lower than in any other granite

om the area, and owing to the high potash-content it is not a typicu) grano-

diorite; further work now shows that this rock, 30789, may be considered a

slightly more hasie facies of the Ernabella Adamellite; although closely re-

sembling 30385 and 30558 (the other two analysed orthopyroxenic granites

from Musgrave Ranges) 30789 is not closely comparable with other charoe-

kitic rocks; some resemblance to “quartz-hypersthene diurite” from Ueanda

(Table 3, 11), but eloser to intermediate charnockite from Sweden (Table 3, 12),

thns pointing ont another feature of this rock, viz,, it could be of intermediate

composition rather than acid if it were not for its high potash content and high

modal quartz — petrographic evidence for late magmatic replacement of plagio-

clase hy K-feldspar ts significant especially since, similar replacements are more

common in 30558, a rock otherwise similar to 30789; the high FeO/Fe.O, ratio

is feature of orthupyroxcnic granites of Musgrave Ranges, and of charnackitic

rocks of Uganda and Sweden,

Augite-hornblende adamellite, 30210 (Table 2).—Petrography, p. 51; typical

of Alcurra Creek region, and similar ta 34568 from Ayers Ranges and 30604 from

Musgrave Ranges; link with 30604 and 30138 suggested by low BaO content

of all three rocks.

Hornblende adamellite (the Ayers Ranges Adamellite), 34568 (Table 2),—

Petrography, p. 53; typical of Avers Ranyes; although the least silicic uf the

analysed wrunites, contains over 20 per cent. normative quartz; low ratio

FeO/TeQs as in most non-urthapyruxenic granites; TiO, and P»O; more abun-

dant than in any other analysed granite frum the Musgrave Block.

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 61

GrapuicaL MetHops ror Tim Stuny oF THE ANALYSES

Both Harker and Larsen linear isgeatos were prepared but show no signi-

fieant features not equally well shown by other diagrams.

Larsen triangular diagrams —These diagrams show the relative proportions

of Or, Ab and An (shown by ®), and Felsic, Quartz and Femic constituents

(shown b o) as calculated from the CIPW. norm. A study of the length and

slope of the ines joining the two points of a group of analyses has commonly

lead to indications of differentiation trends, and has suggested which rocks of

a group are magmatically related (Larsen, 1938). In the calculations for the

diagrams in the present paper the small amount of corundum has been ignored.

Hornblendic—s

aed

Orthopyroyenic” es I

Quartz Feldspar

Fig. 4.—Variation in proportions of narmative minerals of three related orthopyroxene-

hearing granites. Limits of variation of associated hornhlende-bearing granites are also

shown. 1 = 30789, 2- 30385, 3 = 30558.

In Fig. 4 the Or-Ab-An field and the Quartz-Felsic-Femic field of the three

orthopyroxene-hearing granites are compared with those of the five other

granites of Table 2. The fields for the non-orthopyroxenic granites (taken from

Fig. 5) show remarkable similarity. The shape of the fields for the ortho-

pyroxene-bearing granites, however, is interesting. The shape of the Or-Ab-An

field tends to support the conclusion suggested by the petrography that, prior

to considerable late-magmatic replacement of plagioclase by K-feldspar and

quartz, 30558 was similar to 30789,

Brammall triangular diagrams —These diagrams show the relative propor-

tions of Or + Cor, Ab, and An+ Femie as calculated from the CIPW. norm.

Brammall used such variation diagrams in an attempt to show the importance

of syntexis and differentiation in igneous rocks, The positions of average shale,

sandstone, phyllite, mica schist and limestone are after Brammall (1933, p, 101,

Fig. 1). The position of average greywacke was calculated from Pettijohn’s

average preywacke (1949, p. 250, Table 64, analysis G).

62 ALLAN F, WILSON

Fig. 6 shows the position of the analysed granites described in this paper.

The three orthopyroxenic granites (A, B and C) are clearly related, The

diagram illustrates the petrographic evidence that the granite from Spinifex

Hornblendie_-S

Orthopyroxenic “eee

Or Ab

Quart; Feldspar

Fig. 5.—Variation in proportions of normative minerals of hornblende-bearin aranites,

Limits of variation of related orthopyroxenc-bearing granites are also shown.

1 = 30604, 2= 34568, 3= 30210, 4= 30397, 5 = 30138,

Hill (C) has been formed from a rock like A (from Ernabella) by late magmatic

replacement of plagioclase by K-feldspar.

The non-orthopyroxenic granites are also shown in Fig. 6. The granites

from the Ayers Ranges (F), Alewra Creek (E), and Bald Hill (D) are all

remarkably alike chemically, even in lesser components, such as BaO and MnO,

These three rocks appear very close together in Fig. 6, tending to confirm the

petrographic evidence of the co-magmutic relationship between the granites of

the three areas. The sphene-bearing granite from Kulgera (CG) appears from

the diagram and petrography to be a slightly alkaline differentiate of the yranite

from the Ayers Ranges (I*).

The bulk of the granites are found to lie between average greywacke (S)

and average mica schist (T). This could be taken as evidence in favour of a

palingenetic origin of the granites.

Four analysed granitic granulites from the basement complex are also shown

in Fig. 6, and certain basic granulites are shown on the lower continuation of the

trendline through the acid granulites, The similarity of the trénd-lines of the

metamorphic and igneous rocks is obvious. Its significance, however, is prob-

ably not as great as one might be tempted to think, Rocks which, for various

reasons, have becn largely converted to granite-like rocks during regional meta-

morphism may be expected to fall on a “trend-line” comparable with that dis-

played by these granulites. The curve merely means that as basic rocks bes

come less femic the tendency is for them to become first enriched in soda feld-

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 63

spar and later in potash feldspar. The differentiation curve is that shown by

“normal” igneous rocks (whether ultimately derived from melts or by palin-

genesis). It would seem that while “Brammal] diagrams” are useful as pictorial

Or + Corund.

Ab An+ Femic

Fig. 6.—Diagrain to show variation of nomnative orthoclase + corundum, albite,

and anorthite — fewic minerals in certain groups of Central. Australian granites, and

related _granulites, The spats represent orthopyroxeng-bearing granites (A = 30789,

B= 30385, G= 30558), The solid triangles represent related hornblende-beuring

granites (D = 30604, M= 30210, F= 84568). The circle represents the Kulgera

Adamellite. (G = 30138). ‘The triangles. represent associated acid granulites (30726,

30829, 30674, 30521 —numbcred from top to battom). The ¥’s represent associated

hasie granulites (30730, 30581, 30840, 30638, 30639, 30543, 30230 — numbered from

left to right). The crosses represent average sediments (8S = areywacke, T= mica

schist, U = phyllite, V = shale —Brammall, W = shale — Pettijuhn, Y — sandstone,

Z = limestone.

means of displaying the feldspar ratios of groups of rocks they can be mis-

leading if too much petrogenetic significance is placed on them. Much better

impressions are obtained from Larsen triangular diagrams, but even these must

be curefully studied before the true significance of “trends” is decided,

SUMMARY OF THE Mam Corsican Features or rae GravirEs

Notwithstanding the similarity of the orthopyroxenic and non-orthopyroxenic

granites there are sume significant chemical differences.

In Table 4 the percentages of the oxides of the three analyses of orthopy-

roxenic granites (A) and of the four related non-orthopyroxenic granites (B)

are contrasted (the sheared garnetiterous granite from Upsan Downs (30397)

omitted from Tables 4-6). The main teatures are:

a. The ranges of SiOs, Al,Os, TiO. and MgO are about equal in both groups.

b. BaO shows a small but marked preference for the orthopyroxenie rocks,

notwithstanding that normative orthoclase is comparable in both groups of

granites,

c. P,O; is high in all of these rocks, but is higher in the rocks rich in horn-

blende and. bivtite,

G4 ALLAN F. WILSON

d, K3O tends to be slightly more plentiful in the orthopyroxenic granites,

and K,O > Na,O in both orthopyroxenic and non-orthopyroxenic granites. Note,

however, that if cation % (rather than weight %) is considered, K is almost equal

or slightly less than Na in both types of granite (see Table 6).

e. Although the range of CaO, and the An content in normative plagioclase

tend to be higher in the rocks free from orthopyroxene, the range of An content

in the modal plagioclase is about equal in both types of granite.

TABLE 4

A comparison of the main chemical features of somu of the granites from Central Australia

Comparison | Ortbopytoxonic granites Non-orfhopyroxonic

| (A)—variation in 3 granites (B)—variation in 4

Weight, | Weight Woight®,

Bid, AwB 6352-66-96 61-48-66-20

Ti», AsB 0-S4- 0-97 0:69- 1+16

Al,O5 A&B 14-$2-16+76 14-79-16+07

Fe,0, B>a 0-96- 1-81 2-GR- 2°98

Fed A>B 3085. 4-16 2-72. 3° 7A

Fe,0;4-FeO BoA 4-93. 4-7 5-42- 7:27

FeO 4. MnO \ re = , ) Ki

Feo + MnO 1 Fc.0; A>B 0-70. 0-81 0°47- 0°58

Of in CLEW A>RB 61-3 -69-1 25-4 -b9-2

norm arthopyrox,

Mn) BSA O-09- 0°23 0-18- 0-32

MgO AaB O-OL- 1-24 0-92- 1-38

CaO BSA 2-06- 4-51 3: 2B4- 4-77

, al

An in OUR B>A 26-8 -33-4 Q1-7 441

norm plagio. \

Au in modal plagio, ; AsB 22 = RY 26 0 --BT

BaQ >B 0-12- 0-16 tr - U-O¢

Na,0 A=B 2: 73- 3-88 2-54- 3-18

KO A=L 4-D1- 5-h4 3-5R- 4°30

A,0+ BSA O-D4- 0-14 0-05- 0-26

PLO, B>A 0-38- 0-52 0-55- 0-85

f. The most obvious difference is in the state of oxidation of the iron. Al-

though the orthopyroxenic granites are somewhat lower in combined Fe.O, and

Fc than the granites free from orthopyroxene, they are much richer in FeO.

The difference in state of oxidation of the two groups of granites is further em-

ory f i Akal FeO+MnO

phasized in Table 4 by the contrast in the ratio FcO + MnO + Fe,0, and in

normative orthopyroxene.

In Table 5 an interesting relation is suggested between geographic location

and the content of iron oxides (here expressed as cations—see also Table 6)

in the granites. From Emabella in the west to Kulgera in the east the granites

tend to become Jess orthopyroxenic and increasingly hornblendic and biotitic,

and, chemically, there is a general increase in the state of oxidation of iron

from west to east. The basernent gneisses and granulites, moreover, tend to

change in facies from granulite to amphibolite from west to east.

An important conclusion from the chemical data of Tables 4 and 5 is that

the orthopyroxenic rocks are in a lower state of oxidation than the hornblendic

and biotitie rocks. On increase in P,O; (and presumably F, since the P.O; is

fixed in these rocks as fluorapatite), and on slight increase in H,O+, the Fe

has become increasingly oxidized. These features are independent of the SiOz

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 65

content. It is suggested that the availability of oxygen was an important factor

controlling the formation and stability of the orthopyroxenic granites, The lack

of any significant difference in the total oxygen content of the orthopyroxenic

and. non-orthopyroxenic tocks is pnPeeatiog but not disturbing (see Table 5).

It should be remembered that the small but significant changes in oxidation

TABLE 5

The variation in state of oxidation of iron in the granites, arranged in order from west to eust.

Cation ratio i Cation % Oxygen no.

Fe?+Mn® Fe" + Mn*+ Fo3 for 100 cations

30758 Inrnabella S28 3-88 163+4

30385 Ombagunda ~726 4-71 166-0

S0558 Spinifex Hill -718 4-51 167°5

30604 Bald Hill *H08 4-40 167:7

30210 Aleurra Hill “99 5729 166-0)

$4568 Ayers Ranges +493 6-62 165-2

30138 Kulgera “HAT 4°33 167-1

state of the iron are masked by variations of little or no petrological significance

in some of the more abundant cations. Thus, Sit and Al? between them hold

about 150 out of a total of 167 oxygen ions whereas Fe* and Fe* between them

hold only about 5 or 6 oxygen atoms (readily calculated from cation %— see

Tabic 6). In basic rocks, however, the change of valence of Fe shows a more

significant change in oxygen distribution among the cations of the rock.

TABLE &

Ton Fercentages in Granites

Orthopyroxenie

Ton || 789 | aoaas | uses |

Non-orthopyroxenic

30210 34568 30138

Si 59°16 62-25 63-4 60°19 58-48 62°56

Ti 0-58 0-62 + ey 0-80 {I-83 0-60

Al 18-40 16-00 16°08 17-09 18-02 16-47

Fe 0-67 1-29 1-27 2-12 2-85 1-92

¥Fe® 3-09 3-29 3-06 2-08 2-§2 2+15

Mn 0-07 (13 1-18 0-19 Ole 0+ 26

Mg 1-26 1-74 1°58 1-58 1-96 1°30

Cu 4°50 3°27 2°00 4-44 4:86 3-28

Ba 0-04 O06 0-015 U-OL5

Na FOL 6-10 5-02 5-81 5-20 5-83

K 4-76 5-01 6-22 4-33 4°36 5-18

R Q-41 0:30 0-27 0-44 0-68 O45

(OH) 0-80 0 BS O26 0-32 1-64 O94

0 for 100 163-4 165-98 =| 167-54 166-03 165+18 167-09

cations |

RELATION OF THE GRANITES TO METAMORPINIC FACIES

OntHorynoxentc GrANIres

The country rocks in the vicinity of these granites are rocks of granulite

facies. Details of these rocks are set out elsewhere (Wilson, 1954b, vol. 2).

Sphene is absent, and where hornblende is present it is the dark brownish,

hastingsitic type which appears to be stable in rocks of granulite facies. Where

{i} ALLAN F, WLLSON

garnet ovcurs’ it is the typical garnet of granulite facics (a pyrope-almandine,

very deficient in spessartite, with n=—1°772 to 1-796, and MnO =0:50¥ to

081%).

The eranites themselves shuw many features in common with charnockitie

tocks from several parts of the world, They are composed essentially of ande-

sine, K-feldspar, quartz, orthupyroxene, clinopyroxene and irom ores. Horn-

blende and biotite may be present, but ave relatively late magmatic minerals,

However, pyroxenic xenoliths are partly converted to hornblende, thus indicat-

ing that the “magma™ was not as dry as has sometimes been supposed. The

hornblende is more ferriferons than that of the granulites, but is oot the green

hornblende so commonly found in rycks of amphibolite facies. Sphene is

absent. The potash feldspar is a moderately microperthitic orthoclase ur nun-

twinned microline, and is nut fuurescent (Wilson, 1950b, p. 229).

In the metamorphic aureole garnet and cordierite-bearing rocks are de-

veloped in a narrow zone near most contacts of the orthopyruxenie granite in the

Ernabella cegion. The gamet is not the spessartitic almandinc so commonly

found in metamorphic rocks of amphibolite facies. The known range of re-

fractive index (1) is 1-781 ta 1-794. This suggests. that the granite was em-

placed under P.T- conditions equivalent to at least the lower grades of granu-

lite facies. Tlowever, the co-existence of cordierite and “granulite” garnet in

rocks which appear lo be isoflacial with rocks containing “granulite” gurnet und

hypersthene is possibly explained in terms of a more purely “thermal” meta-

marphistn, whereby some of the features of the pyroxene hornfels facies (namely,

co-existence of cordierite and hypersthene) have been superimposed on rocks

of cranulite facies. Indeed, the thermal metamorphism of “dry” metamorphic

rocks hy a fairly “dry” granite could be expected to produce rocks haying features

in earamnon with both the granulite fucies and the pyroxene hornfels facies.

The associated pegmatites of the orthepyroxenic granites contain horn

blende: biotite, sphene, alunite and spessartitic garnet (n=1-:517). Such an

assemblage is foreign to rocks of granulite facies, but is stable in amphibolite

facies, This suggests that, althonyh the parent orthopyroxenic granite could

have Leen emplaced under “granulite metamorphic conditions”, the associated

pegmatites formed under the lower P,T- cenditiuns of amphibolite facies.

Spuexe-Horveresne-Bierrre Gnanires

The country recks in the vicinity of these granites belong to amphibolite

facics, Details of these rocks will appear in subsequent publications dealing

with the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills. Sphene-bearing gneisses, cordierite-

spessartitic almandine-sillimanite gneisses, ancl amphibolitie rocks rich in a

bluish green homblende (y= 1/690) are characteristic rocks. The spessartitic-

almandines have n= 1-807, and MnO = 11-0%. These mineral assemblages are

unstable in pranulite facies, but stable in certain portions of amphibolite ficies,

The granites Themselves are devoid of orthopyroxene, and clinopyroxene

accurs only as relies heavily corroded by a bluish green hornblende (+= 1-692.

2V/'u=55°, y Ac = 19°), whieh is, in tarn, heavily corroded by biotite. Sphene

is common and the potush feldspar (microclioe) fluoresces pink under short

wave ullra-violel radiation,

The associated pegmatites of these granites contain muscovite, beryl, tour

maline, bivtite, microvline, and a spessartitic garnet with n = 1-817,

These features suggest that both the parent sphene-hornblende-biotite

granite and end-phase pogmatitic material were emplaced under “amphibolite

metanivwphic conditions”.

SRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA ay

Horwarennig Granites or Intanarmnate Tye

Between the two extremes of the orthopyroxenic granites and the granites

containing sphene and biotite there are many granites which are hornblendic

bul contain neither orthopyroxene on the one hand, nor sphene on the wther,

The hornblende is not the bluish green type noted above, nor the eommon

green type. It is rather a brownish green type, in some respects similar to that

found in certain metamorphic rocks of the granulite facies, but in other respects

it is somewhat like the hornblende of the orthopyroxenic granites, The country

rocks are difficult to place in facies as there are portions which may be taken as

lypical of the grannulite facies, und others where characteristies oF Che eaaphi-

halite facies appear.

Tt is thus concluded that the granites described in this paper may be taken

to be largely isofacial with their country rocks, The ovthopyroxenic “igneous”

rucks were emplaced under P.T- conditions comparable with (but probably a

little lower than) those which produce typical metamorphic racks of the granu-

lite facies. The granites containing sphene and blue-green hornblende were

etuplaced under P,T- eoudilians comparable with those which produce certain

high grade rocks in the amphibolite facies. The normal hornblendic granites,

however, were probably emplaced «under P,T- conditions capable of producing

metumurphic rocks intermediate in many features between those of the granulite

facies and the amphibolite facies.

THE PETROLOCICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF CERTAIN MINERAL REACTIONS

ReybaAGEMeNr OF OnvHOrYKOXUNE, CLINVPYHOXENR AND IRON ORE BY HORNKL ENTE

Replacement of orthopyroxene by clinapyroxene, and replacement of

pyroxene by hornblende are reactions commonly of considerable importance in

the metamorphic rocks which are associated with the wraniles ander discussion

in this paper: The latter phenomenon usually represents a fixation of certain

cnmponents sich as water, Na, Ca and F from migrating metasumatizing agouts,

Since similar reactions are also comm in the associated granites, some

petrologists may be tempted to favour a hypothesis of mcetasomatic emplacement

for the granites. Towever, the field evidence for magrnatic emplacernent of

these rocks iy more easily satished by considering that many of the reactions are

due to concersitration of end-phase liquors, as is the case in most Hormal (geneous

rocks, This is suggested by the facet that xenoliths of hypersthene-augite-

labradorite granulite in orthopyroxenie granite are found to be impregnated

with biotite, Huorapatite, potash-feldspar and hornblende, and rimmed with

a sheath of brown hornblende, Thus the orthopyroxenic granite cuntained

sufficient “end liqnors” to carry out considerahle envrosion of basic xenolillis.

On the other lain, the orthopyroxenic granites cannot be considered to be rich

in volatile components, for they have had little ravtasomatizing effect on the

wall rocks, and they contain only small quantities of minerals normally asso-

ciated with the end-phase of normal igneous rocks.

In hornblende-rich granites pyroxene is found ta be more completely re-

placed by hornblende, and apatite, biotite, calcite and late quartz are more

nwoportant than in the orthopyroxenic granites. In the biotite-rich granites

sphene and fluonte may he additional end-phase minerals, These reactions are

probably strongly influenced by the availability of oxveen as well as of Huorine

and water,

Connosios or PLAGIOgASR AY K-Frnnspan

Corrosion of plagioclase appears to have taken place in at least three waya,

resulting in the development of micro-antiperthite, microperthite. and an exten-

sive replacement of shattered and bent plagioclase (see Plates 2, 3 ancl 4).

63 ALLAN F, WILSON

Miero-ontiperthite —The irregular development of micro-antiperthite appears

to be confined in some rocks to these portions must affected by the same stresses

which controlled the formation of twinning, In some granites (as in some of

the basement eranulites) it would even appeur that the K-feldspar lenses tend

to be localized in “potential” tension gashes in the newly formed twin-lamellac,

While it is possible that the shearing may have initiated exsohution of dissolved

K-feldspur only in thuse zones most affected by the shearimy, it is thuught that

it is more likely that the structural weaknesses, such as developing twin-plades

and potential tension gashes, have merely assisted to localize the replacement

of the plagioclase by migrating K-feldspar or its equivalent ions. True exselu-

tiem mierc-antiperthite has not been recognized in these rocks.

Microperthite —In some rocks microperthite bas been developed by the

replacement of plagioclase by K-feldspar. The replacement of plagioclase has

been so extreme that it is difficult to dectde which is the host and which is the

included mineral. Pl. 4, Fig. 1 shows how such a microperthite can sometimes

be developed from miero-antiperthite, This is identieal with a phenumenen

described from the basement granulites of the Musgrave Ranges (see Fig, 25,

Wilson, 1954h, val, 2, p, 92),

Extensive replacement of bent and shattered plagtoniane crystals.—This is

une of the most common replacement phenomena found in these granites. In

almost all cases the twin-lamellac are bent and shattered. The petrographic

evidence is clear that the twinning and distortion took place at about the same

time, and it appears that the twinning itscli has been largely developed hy

shearing. In the associated granulites and gneisses, identival bending and shat-

tering of plagioclase grains appear to have gone on at the same time as potash-

feldspathization. Not only has K-feldspar replaced plagioclase in the solid

state, hut emhedral fluorapatite crystals are commonly found in such positions

within embayments of the plagioclase that they must represent u fixatiun uf P

und F ly some of the Ca expelled from the plagiuelase, For replacements of

this type, K, Si. P and F were necessary, Such reactions seem to have tuken

lace during a period of shattering and upwarp, or even of active folding which

has been supermmposed on the products of a metamorphism which took place

under P|T- conditions characteristic of the granulite facies. This is suggested

by the fact that in the granulites the plagioclase grains tend to he poorly twinned

in mest of those rocks where bending of (OL0) cleavages (and twin-lamellac)

and K-feldspathization are not well developed. It is well known that plagio-

vlase is very poorly twinned in many rocks of the granulite facies. Develop-

ment of un-bent clinopyroxene from the carrosion of bent osthopyroxene and

fixation of Ca expelled from replaced bent plagioclase, and the development

throughout the rock of irregular cracks filled with bands of magnetite, emphasise

that considerable metasomatic adjustments have taken place in many of the

original granulites during or just after a period of folding or warping.

AU of these features are also common in the granites which appear Eo inject

the eranulites. Now, then, can the granites be magmatic. for wherever similar

phenomena are present in the granulites it is clear that the reactions have gone

im in sitte in the solid state? This is a question of fundamental importance, and

must now be discussed.

Corrosion of plagioclase by K-feldspar is well known as a late phase of

crystallization of silicate melts, is phenomenon is often attended by corre

sion and replacement of orthopyroxene by clinopyroxene, clinopyroxene by horn-

blende, hornblende by biotite, and by crystallization of Tate apatite, ‘calcite,

quartz, iron ores and certain other accessories, Since these mineralogical re-

actions are all developed in varying degrees in most of the granites of the area

32” 240

iow aw Be 16E 24E

T T =F T T 7 Ly at a | T T —T T T&T

GRANITE %

\ 7 weet,

GEOLOGICAL SKETCH MAP !

/ !

OF A :

- ~

cai CENTRAL & EASTERN MUSGRAVE RANGES Yeo / le Oe NSN ee Wem

-~ -~ . . WELL *

C. AUSTRALIA a 7% unwarees 2-5 or See SR \

? \ . \e . . ‘

7 J) cf GRANULITES ano GNEISSES, vominantty a fa Ly . / ‘ 4 ya lee we ‘ a \

T- FA ORTHOPYROXENIC BUT INCLUDING HORNBLENDIC TYPES ff s At \s \ | A 5 ¥ ’ % ‘

c+ + +4 / Pa faptoures rHehso J «es ty" ’ ooo? \ -\

[S77 %} WOODROFFE NORITE GROUP, ixcwoinc : ' 8 Wy tb ce eho” | ‘ \, SENTINEL) 2

WSS ¢) WYPERSTHENITES AND ANORTHOSITES | + a | on \/ 3° t J HILL s

— ? he PES oa zt fe eS & ey we 8 / a faye a8

AA A| WATIA BIOTITE NORITE ‘ST ae a \ + igs a P. ' \ © of

wa .+t + aA Say ro SONS > a re

i eT) &

| [| UPSAN DOWNS ADAMELLITE S, ARE \ PAOD apt | + \\

‘i py + \ j-

=~] ERNABELLA ADAMELLITE, optnopvaoxenic a ee | an b ’ \\ 2. *

| » « © | AND RELATED HORNBLENDIC FACIES « ls cts \ Pr) f \ ui

t" sh © ee TALJARITIA Py oe |

SEN MAJOR SHEAR ZONE pa) Sree ae ¢ ae ;

eee A _

° -<7 o) WELL

STRIKE AND DIP OF GRANULITES wy * tt I

60870 AND GNEISSES 25 a Via i,

. fi . ° , a

STRIKE AND DIF OF OVERTURNED ‘! é i od

4 GRANULITES AND GNEISSES ane f% | « + © 8 i : 4

wn 30 F ' aK

ee wt S MS Mar 8 8 8 {| 40

DIRECTION AND PLUNGE OF x A tir a ¥ a. / 70 ey A

SAL LINE ATION _- ra has both oe Ne ae c/ ~ . 4. & vy

26° 15's -—— va ‘id ( (Foe YF SESS yy," te A fae a wen, 20°15

fo TivEns ‘Or IGNEOUS MASSES D\ GFA susasxicts (Mi CARRUTHERS, of < N

woos AE ar 9%, A] sss "8 Mes .

00 j ‘ Aro MERNABELLA 4 oy

A PROMINENT HILLS ( City Pie /ie vs aie |

FAS w \e/ ew ShENGUNPAS (

Epaeapesgon oH? a Hel? at op

a ane " i toy

Pop WNP Ye . . ' os Ay

Bat WOODROFFE: —— ot EG, ;

4 O”*% a SS 7:

ak oe Jy Fi

oe Pat ec PASS rst mah Ace i * . t

a | SPT TEs rie eer f

en “aoe A / ad ip pA WA /. NY lili jPARK

| Zs am ye .-—s 8 20 70

; ~ +> rh oe bet’ PRO aad [- a oo et “7 . -, . A det Borex of if # /

NO OUTCROPS \7 ie Ls rs ae wa 5 pias HILL / ! /

3 LN We et \

aig + “st hes as ie ~, a \ Nas. io : : 8s

xy rs f N e

+ <> + + \r | 3 — —____ Ss gute ae? \

Veen SA: aa a “

pe y ie alee ne

ped oe

UPSAN asa Cw —==— ee

~ ne no ¥ SCALE IN MILES

\ NN

L a -s / ° 2 4 & 8 10 2

\ ‘ f

\ ‘ / /

Le a ! ies a | | 1 —_t SSS Ses a | {| __ 4 — ee } 1 ! 1 L ff 1 air 168

32W 24w iow BBW oo BE WE 24

— |32°E

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA fit

one could argue a magmatic origin and emplacement of these granites, While

it is true that such reactions do occur, certain grave textural anomalies appear

if such a view is accepted without modification.

If corrosion of plagioclase took place in a potassic liquid, a grain would

be gradually disintegrated, and, before completely dissolving, may be expected

to drift apart as corroded microxenocrysts with random orientation. Bending

and fracturing of the crystals could take place during corrosion by the liquid

but only if there were a small amount of intergranular liquid, for free-Hoating

crystals cannot he bent. If it can be demonstrated that distortion of erystals

touk place during their corrosion the phenomenon could perhaps he called a

protoclastic structure.

In the granites under discussion, however, the corroding K-feldspar could

scarcely have been merely an intergranular liquid for the following reasons:

(1) The sheath of K-feldspar is usually much too wide to have allowed

protoclistic bending and shattering to go on during corrosion by K-feldspiar.

(2) Relies of plagioclase have not drifted apart as they would in liquid,

In many cases the plagioclase has clearly been replaced in sift.

Tt is thus concluded that the extensive replacements of bent and broken

plagioclase crystals would appear to favour a metasomatic mode of emplacement

of the granites. A suggested reconciliation of the field and luboratary evidence

concerning origin and mode of emplacement of these granites is set out under

“Conclusions”.

AGE OF THE CHRANTTES

The granites and intruded gneisses and granulites of the Musgrave Block

are presumed to be of Preeambrian age. Almost unmetamorphosed Upper

Proterozoic scdiments of the Adelaide System are reported to lie unconform-

ably upon the Precambrian gneisses east of the Everard Ranges (Jack, 1915,

figure facing p. 46). Tillites have been recorded in these sediments (Wilson,

1952c).

Stas dolerite dykes are found cutting both the gneissic complex and the

granites of the Everard Ranges yet have not been found cutting the Upper

Proterozoic sediments, it is presumed that the granites of the Everard Ranges

are Pre-Upper Proterozoic in age. Similar dolerites cut the granites in the

Ayers and Musgrave Ranges, hence an early Precambrian age for the granites

vf the Musgrave Ranges is reasonable on the evidence at present available

(Wilson. 1948).

CONCLUSIONS

Two major problems have hecome evident in this study. One is the petro-

logical relation between the uranites. and the granulites and gneisses: the other

is the structural relation between the granites, and the granulites and gneisses.

These are problems because there is strong petrographic evidence that the

granites have been derived from the granulites and gneissos by metasomatism,

but there is equally strong ficld and petrographic evidence that the granites

were magmatically emplaced. Moreover, some of the most important granites

are more or less meridionally-trending masses which ave set within more ur Jess

meridionally-trending granulites and gneisses, and yet, whem they are considered

resionully, they are distributed geographically as an E.-W. string of granites

rather than as a N.-S. string.

Consideration of these two allicd problems raises many side issues of im-

pastariop., but much more field work must be done before these can he discussed

with proht.

ri) ALLAN F, WILSON

PETROLOGICAL RELATION BETWEEN THE GRANITES AND THE

BASEMENT GRANULITES AND GNEISSES

Three main hypotheses may be brought forward to explain the origin of

the granites and their relation to the basement rocks. The hypotheses emphasize

(respectively) the role of metasomatism, or of a silicate melt, or of mobilization

of « rvuconstituted hasement. None of these hypotheses indicates the ultimate

cause of the granite formation, and the favoured hypothesis (mobilization of a

reconstituted pasement is to be looked upon as one which should stimulate

more fundamental geochemical research, Moreover, it will be noted that some

of the evidence which is listed under a particular hypothesis is not strong, und

is capable of other interpretations.

Metasomatism hypothesis—features which could support the hypothesis of the

formation of the granites in situ by metasomatisin,

Petrographic evidence:

a. K-feldspathization of plagioclase on a scale larger than js normally seen

in an end-phase magmatic liquid (see p, 69),

b, Replacement of plagioclase by hornblende in some granites.

c, Zircon is of une type in the granites, whereas many of the basement

erannliles contain a svite of zircons as in meta-sedimentary rocks. In sume

granulites, however, a complex vircen suite would appear to be in process of

homogenization. Poldervaart and von Backstram (1949, p. 467) give some

evidence that zircon may undergo granulation and recrystallization by ultra-

metamerphism of a vrade higher than the sillimanite zone.

Field evidence,—Nil,

Silieute-melt hypethesis—features which could support the hypothesis that the

wranites crystallized from a fairly pure silicate melt,

Petrographic evidence:

a, Orthopyroxene and hamblende are notably different from those of the

juteuded basement.

b, An order of crystallization for the mafic minerals Ccommonly ortho-

pyroxene, followed in order hy vlinopyroxene, hornblende and hiotite) is the

sume as that of basic magmas,

ec. Zircon is of one type in the granites, whereas many of the basement

@ranulites contain a snite of azireons as in meta-scdimentary rocks,

Occasional phenacrysts of won-zoned andesine (almost identical m ortho-

pyroxenie and non-orthopvroxenic granites) may be found throughout the whole

area. (But note that similar, though smaller, non-zoned andesine grains are

common in the basement granulites of comparable composition. Moreuver,

there is evidence that many of these grains have developed in the granulites

in @ manner compurable with the growth of K-feldspar porphyroblasts: Thus,

it could be argued that the occasional phenocrysts in the granites do not neces-

sarily sapport the silicate-melt hypothesis, for the phenoerysts could be relics of

andesine porphyroblasts which. grew during a metamorphic phase prior to

mobilization of the granite magma).

Field evidence—Xenoliths (sheathed with hornblende) are alined parallel

1G transgressive contacts with the hasement prannlites. Xenoliths are mncom-

mon in areas away from the coritacts,

Surronnding the masses of orthopyroxenic granite there is an auredle in

which cordierite and pyrope-almandine co-exist in the basement rocks of ap»

propriate composition. The basement rocks are elsewhere dominantly granu-

lite facies. Similar aurcoles, but at.a slighUly lower temperature range, surround

the clinopyroxenic, hornblendic and biotitic granites.

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 7L

Mobilization hypothesis — fedtures which could. support the hypothesis that ihe

granites were formed by mobilization of a magma produced by reconstitution

of the basement pyroxenic granulites.

(This is the bypothesis favoured in this paper.)

Petrographic evideuce:

a. Zireon, This is nun-zoned and of one type, whether found in artho-

pyroxenic, hornblendic or biotitic granites, It appears to be a fairly “carly

mineral” in the granites, If the zircon has been formed by homogenization and

recrystallization of heterogeneous suites uf zircons in the basement rocks the

process would need to have been very efficient, for no. evidence of “original”

zireons has heen found im the granites themselves, Poldervaart and von Back-

strém (1949. p. 467) bring forward some evidence that complete recrystalli-

zation of this sort can go on during the formation of granite hy “ultra-meta-

morphic” processes.

b, K-feldspathization, Replacement of bent and shattered plagioclase by

K-feldspar is common in both granites and basernent rocks, but is more con-

sistently developed and is generally more effective in the granites. The de-

velopment of these and other K-feldspar replacement phenomena (as discussed

on p. 68) is strong evidence for a replacement origin of the granites (as pointed

out above). Towever, it must he remembered that the hyputhesis now under

discussion also requires widespread reconstitution of the basement rocks. In-

deca], the uct of mobilization itself is thought to be largely controlled by more

intense “Hooding” of the reconstituted basement rocks (in structurally favour-

able pasitions ) by ions of K, P and #. In a sense, some of the more extensively

replaced shattered plagioclase grains may be looked upon as a result of cor-

rosior uf the rheamorphic erystal roush by the K-rich “lubricant”.

¢. Fluorapatite. Fuhedra nf fluorapatite commonly have been formed by

the fixation of P and F by Ca in process of beimg displaced from plagioclase

during K-metasomatism.

d. Orthopyroxene. In the granites orthopyroxene is consistently much more

ferriferous than the orthopyroxene of both acid and hasie basement rocks,

Moreover, the Fe content of the orthopyroxene is not linked with the SiO, or

alkali content of the granites. Ilowever. the orthopyroxene of the granites is

thus not merely xenoerystal orthopyroxene fram the Fdeietent rocks, as in some

granites (c.g. Wilson, 1958a, p. 39). Fram theoretical considerations, one

would expect the magma which has been produced by partial melting of the

busement to contain matic minerals which are more ferriferous than those of the

basement, if for no other reason than that ferrous silicates have a lower melting

point than corresponding magnesium silicates, The differences in composition

(determined optically) of the co-existing pyroxenes of the granites and of the

basement granulites (Fig. 3) may he explained if the orthopyroxenic granites

resulted from palingenetic mayrna produced by partial melting of the basement

in structurally favourable positions. Lf «a palingenetie granite magma were

formed from erustal or geosynclinal rocks rich in volatiles the mafic minerals

would probubly be biotite or hornblende. These, too, shontd be richer in Fe

than curresponding mineral phases in the original rocks. Hf palingenetic granite

mayma were produced by partial melting of igneous or metamorphic rocks

which are low in volutile content (such as pyroxene granulites) pyroxenes are

likely to be prominent among the new mafic miincrals. Moreover, the mafic

minevals tuay be expected to be more fereiferous than corresponding mineral

phases in the original rocks. Thus, it is signifieant that in Centra] Australia the

orthopyroxene of the orthopyroxenic granites and the hornblende of the hern-

72 ALLAN F. WILSON

blendic granites are more ferriferous than corresponding mafic minerals uf the

basement gneisses and granulites.

Possibly due, in large measure. to an increase in availability Of oxygen in

the ureas undergoing injection, orihepyroxenie granites appear to have given

way to clino-pyroxenic and hurnblendic granites. A) of these types of granite

may he found in a single restricted area, e.g,, Sentinel Hill, This emphasizes

the genetic unity of the long E.W, stving of granites which range froin artho-

pyroxene granites in the Musgrave Ranges through saugite-biotite granites in the

Avers Ranges and Kulgera Hills.

Field evidence.—As for the silicate-melt hypothesis.

STNUGTURAT. RELATION BETWKEN THE GRANITES AND THE

GRANULITES AND GNEISSES

Extensive field work must precede the explanation of the apparent contra-

diction of the lang E.-W. string of petrologically clusely-related magmatic

granites, many of whieh form N,-S, bodies sub: parallel to the major fold strac-

tures of the basement rocks. An origin of the granites by an orthodox geo-

synclinal-disintegration mechanism is difficult to substantiate. The weight of

aveilable evidence is that the granites here described may have been formed

by a reconstitution of the basement rocks (now represented by hypersthenic ar

horablendic granulites of many types), It is suggested that a regional deep-

seated EW. downwarp (possibly associated with deep-seated E.-W. trans-

current shearing) may have been sufficient to have caused thorough reconsti-

tution of the basement rocks, and to have produced “pockets” of potential magma

in favourable aveas. Subsequent emplacement of the resultant rheomorphic

masses woukl be assisted by pre-existing weaknesses due to the N\-S. attitude

of many of the original rocks.

This may explain the E.-W. string of granites which are often found within

rocks of N.-S, tectonic trend and could throw light on some of the lineation

problems in parts of Central Australia (sce Wilson, 1953b, 1954a, 1959a). EW.

downwarping is not tectonically foreign ta this portion of Australia. There

have been some major E.-W, downwarpings and archings immediately to the

N, and possibly to the S. of the Musgrave Block. The Amadeus Trough seems

to be the relic of downwarping and other crustal disturbances which later

became the basin for sedimentation ranging from late Proterozoic to at Jeast

Ordovician, It is not suggested, however, that the Amadeus Trough as such

has had anything to do with the origin of the granites under discussion, hut

there scems to be evidence that there has been a very early E-.W. crustal weuk-

ness in this area which may have been the ultimate cause of the granite

formation.

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF TUE GRANITES IN THE CHARNOCKITE PROBLEM

A siperimposed metamorphism (which is essentially thermal aud metu-

somatic rather than dynamic) could be responsible for some of the puzzling

features of Charnockitic rocks. For example, the vrawulose texture of many of

the basic granulites associated with these granites is remarkably like that prv-

duced by prolonged thermal metamorphism of dolerite. Regional downwarp

on E-W. axes may have first developed rocks of granulite facies (or upper

levels of the amphibolite facies) from metamorphic or igneous rocks which,

inany millions of years previously, had suffered their original metamorphism

ur mjection. These have undergone intense granulation in structurally unstable

zones (eg., near zones af “plastic shear” which would represent fault zones at

GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA TW

higher structural levels), and reerystallization elsewhere. In favourable zones

pos pues oh a granites were develigzed by a reconstitution of the basement

TOUKS,

The restriction of urthopyroxenie granites tu areas where the associated

racks are dominantly of granulite facies, and the restriction of hornblende

tranites and sphene-bearing yraniles to areas within the amphibolite facies

suggest that the metamorphism of the basement rocks and the generatiun of the

granitic magmas are closely related phenomena. Moreover, on the uprrise af

the mobilized “igneous” masses the basement rocks have suffered a further meta-

morphism (of relatively local extent), This is more akin to the conditions

necessary to produce the rocks of pyroxene hornfels facies, As was seen on

p. 66, rocks of granulite and pyroxene hornfels facies haye much in common,

mineralogically.

Whether or not the hypothesis of a downwarping of already metamorphosed

rocks can be substuntiuted, there are some important facts which do emerge from

the present stucy.

In the Musgrave Ranges charnockitice rocks of more flan one origin have

been foumd. The basement rucks are mostly hypersthene-bearing granulites and

gneisses which are of granulite facies. They are metamorphosed sediments of

various types, basic igneous rocks, and rocks whieh lave been so affected by

metasomatism that their original character is unknown, Moreover, some af the

basement recks shaw evidence of superimposed metamorphism whereby features

ot the amphibolite facies, or of the pyroxene hornfels facies, may appear.

The orthopyroxenic granites described in this paper may also be called

charnockitic. These differ structurally from the charnockitie rocks of the base-

ment roeks in that they have been magmatically emplaced, Although there are

some important features of these maginatically emplaced rocks which owe

their origin to metasomatic metamorphism, there are other important features

Which appear to haye resulted from crystallization from a silicate melt, even

thuugh this may not have been any more than the interstitial material of the

partly crystalline mush fram which these charmmockitic granites were firmed,

These “magmatic” charnockitic granites, morcoyer, gradc into augite gran-

ites, hornblende granites and even sphene-beariug biotite granites where the

P.T- conditions (and possibly availability of oxygen and water) are more like

those pertaining to the amphibolite facies than to the granulite Facies,

Although these “magmatic” charnockitic rocks cover a large area nf the

Musgrave Hanges, charnuckitic racks of purely metumorphic origin (ie. the

basement granolites) are more Important both there and elsewhere in Australia,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Part of the cost of the second and third ficld operations was borne by Gom-

monwealth Researeli Grants administered by the University of Adelaide. Initial

luboratory work was carricd out in the University of Adelaide. Research grants

from the University of Western Australia have paid for several chemical anulyses,

and the preparation of the manuscript and final drafting of the maps for pub-

lication, Tait have borne most of the cost of the fourth field trip. Laboratory

work was dune at the University of Western Australia after 1949. Messrs, F,

Billing and KR, Morris bave rendered valuable technical assistance. The co-

operation of Richard Brock and Lester Russell on the second and third field

trips (respectively) was Outstanding. The staff of the Ernabella Mission Station

was particularly helpFul during the field work in the Musgrave Ranges.

re ALLAN F. WILSON

REFERENCES

Avan, F. D., 1929. The geology of Geylon, Canad, 4. Res, 1, pp. 425-511,

Asstncao, C, F. T., and Pixto Corino, A., 1955. © rocks with charnockitic affinities in

Mozambique, Proc, Pan-Ind, Ocean Sei. Comgs,, Perth, Aug., 1954, pp. 20-33.

Basknow, H., 1905, Geological report on the caustry traversed by the South Australian

Coverament North-West Prospecting Expedition, 1903, Trans Ray. Sov, $, Aust, 2,

pp. 57-102.

Brasmanr, A., 1933. Syntexis and differentiation, Geol. Mas., 70, pp. 97-117.

Beown, H, Y. L., 1890. Report on journvy from Wartina to Musgrave Ranges, S. Aust.

Parl. Paper, 45.

Fornest, J., 1875. “Explorations in Australia” (S$. Low, Marston, Ete.: Lindon),

Grevens, ‘I’; W., and Dunne, J. C., 1943. Charnockitie rocks near Port Edward in Alfred

Country, Natal, Trans. Geol. Soc. &. Afr., 45, pp. 183-314,

Gires, E., 1874. “Geographical travels in Central Australia, 1872-1874" (McGurron, Bird

and Co,: Melbourne),

Gossr. W, C., 1874, Reports and diary of Mr. W. C, Gosse’s expedition in 1873, 5. Aust.

Parl, Paper, 48,

Groves, A. W., 1935. The churnockite series of Ugnnda, British East Africa, Quart, 1, Geol,

Sac. Lond., 91, pp, 150-207,

Hates, F. H., Weous, A, K., and Wuuxs, M, K,, 1049. “The petrology of the izneans meks”,

10th ed. (Murby: London).

Hess, H. H., 1941. Pyroxenes of common mafie magmas, part 2, Amer. Min,, 26, pp. 573-594.

Hess, H. H., 1949 Chemical composition and optical properties of common cling-pyroxenes,

part 1, Amer. Min., 34, pp. 621-666.

Hess, 1. H., 1952, Orthopyroxenes of the Bushveld Type, ion substitutions and changes in

unit cell dimensions, Amer. J. Sei., Bowen Vol., pp. 173-187.

Hneranen, A., 1947. Archean geology of the Turku disttict in south-western Finland, Bull,

Geol. Soc, Amer., 58, 1019-1084.

Hoitanp, T. H., 1900. The charnockite series, a group of archacan hyperstlhente rocky in

Peninsular India, Mem. Geol, Surv. India, 28 (2).

Howe, R. A., 1955. The geochemistry of the churmockite series of Madras, India, Vans,

Hay. Soc. Edin., 62, pp. 725-768.

Jack. KR. Locesanr, 1915. The geology and prospeets of the region te the south of the

Musgrave Ranges, Bull. Geol. Surv. $. Aust., 5.

Kuno, H., 1941. Dispersion of optic axes in the orthorhombic pyroxene serias, Proce. lap.

Acad. Tokyo, 17, pp. 204-209,

Lansen, E. S., 1938, “Some new variation diagrams for groups of igneous rocks, J. Grol.

46, pp. 505-520.

Perryjoun, F, J,, 1949, “Sedimentary racks’ ( pil New York).

Pronamurne, ©. .S., 1053, “The chatnackite problem” (Mysore Geol. Assoc,: Bangalore,

India).

Pore A., and vow Backstrom, |. W,, 1949. A study of an area ut Kukamas (Cane

Province), Trans. Gool. Soe. 8. Afr., 52, pp. 433-495.

Quanse., P., 1951, The chamockite series of the Varberg district om the south-westera

woust of Sweden, Ark, Min,, L, nr. 10, pp, 227-332, 7

Rowinson, E, G., 1949. The petrologigl nature of some rocks from the Minn. Tompinsun

aad Avers Ranges of Central Australian, Teans, Roy, Sac. & Aust. 73 (1). wp, 28-39,

Srnerat, Vy, 1893. The country between the Everard Ranges. qnd Barmw Raner, etc, lrans,

Toy. Sac. 8. Aust. 16 (2), pp, 74-115,

Wasuiscron, TT, §., 1916. The charockile seriés of igneons rocks, Amer, J. Sea, Lot,

pp, 323-338.

Winsow, Annan F., 1947a, ‘The Musgrave Ronevs, Walkabout, 14 (1), pp. S-16,

Winsow, Arman F., 1947b, ‘Che charnackitie and assoviated rovks of north-western South

Australia, pt. 1: The Musgrave Ranges—an introdnetory account, Trans. Ruy, Sou. 8.

Aust, 71 (2), pp. 195-211.

Wiosen, Arran F., 1948. The charonckitic and iassociated rocks of north-western South

Australia, pt. 2: Doleritus from the Musgrave and Everard Ranges, Trans, Roy, Soe,

S. Aust., 72 (1), pp. 178-200,

Wirson, Antawn F., 195fMa. Some unuswel alkali-feldspars in the Central Atutealiin clon

kitic Tocks, Miner. Mag., 29, pp. 215-224.

Wirsox, Antan F,, 1950b. Tlnorescent feldspar and zircon as petrologieal airs, Miner. May.,

24, pp. 225-233.

Wirson, Aroan F., 19524, Metamorphism of granite rovky by olivine dulerits in Contenl

Australia, Geol. Mag, 88, pp. 73-86,

GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 7h

Winsonw, Aruan F,, 1952b, The charnockite prablem in Australia, Sir 1. Mawson Anniv.

Val, Univ. Adelaide, pp. 203-224.

Witson, Atztan F,, 1952c, Precambrian lilites east of the Everard Ranges, north-western

South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 75, pp. 160-163.

Witson, ALLAN F., 1953b, The significance of lineation in Central Australia, Aust J, Sei.

16, pp, 47-50, ;

Winson, ALLAN F., 1954a. The significance of lineatian in Central Australin—a reply, Aust.

J, Sei, 16, pp. 242-243,

Wrison, ALLAN F., 195¢b, Studies on Australian charnockitic rocks and related problems;

Vol, 2. The charnockitic granulites and associated gneisses of the Musgrave Rouges.

Vol. 3. The charnovkitic pranites and assaciated pranites ot Central Austrulia, D.Se-

Thesis, Univ. W. Aust.

Veanson, ALLAN Fi, 1955, Charnockitie rocks in Australis—a review, Proc. Pun-Ind, Grew

Sei. Congr., Perth, Aug., 1954, pp. 10-17.

Winson, Annan FF, 1958. Pyroxenie granites ond related rocks in the Jorrannwigup-

Galyerup Greck Area, Western Australia, J. Koy, Soc. W, Aust, 41, ye 34-40,

Winsen, ALLAN F,, 1958b, Advances in the knowledge of the structure and petrology of the

Precambrian rocks of south-western Australia, J, Roy, Sou, W. Aust, 41, pp. 57-83,

Winsow, Arias F., 1959a. Notes on the fabric of some charnackitie rocks From Central

Australia, J. Hoy, Soc. W. Aust, 42, pp, 56-64.

Witsow, Annan F., 1959b, Co-oxisting pyroxenes: some causes of variation snd anomalies

in the optically derived compositional tie-lines, wilh partieular referenee to charnoc-

kittie rocks, Geol. Mag. (in press).

Wiusos, Attan F., 1959c. The charnockilic rackg of Aristralia, Geol. Runil., 47, pp. 191-510.

Wineweci, A. N., and Wincuen., I., 1951. “Elements of optical mineralogy,” pt, 2 (4th

ed,) (Wiley: New York).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 1

¥ig. 1—Sharp intrusive contact of the orthopyroxenebedting FErnabella Adainellite and

stceply-dipping charnackitie cranulites & mile SW, af summit of Mt. Carrnthers, Mus-

grave Ranges. The adamellite contuins a few Jark Isluish prey phenoerysts of plagio-

ase, ‘Che grauulites do not appear ta have been metamorphosed by the intrusion, which

is here shown (in a cliff section) to have been emplaced above the pranulites.

Fix. 2—Sharp intrusive contact of orthapyroxene-hearing granite (bottura right) and. gurnet-

brering gneiss (top left). Large hammer-head is on contact (which has strike 300° and dip

80° $,, he., parallel to the small hammer handle), and the handle of large hammer is ap-

proximately purallel to the strike of the gneisses (which have strike 340° and lip 40° W,),

The weanite Is aineh finergrained at the contact and shows rongh platy-flow structure

parnilel to the contsct. Looking NE, High up on S. wall of valley near Alalka rock-

hole, Musgrave Ranges.

PLATE 2

Hig, 1—Elongate mafe clot ¢enmpoved of magnetite (black), ferrohypersthene and Jess

common caleie augite (hoth dark grey), apatite (highly retringent white wraius in inafe

alot). Most of the salie anineruls shown in this figure are poorly Lwinoed grains of

plagioclase. Ferrohypersthene grinodiorite (30476), 24 miles NNW. of Alalka pock-

hole, Musgraye Ranges. Field of view: 4 mm. diam,

Fig. 2.—Shattered plagioclase: crystal (white, om cross-wire quadrants 1 and 4) replaced by

K-feldspur (dark vrey), Note relies of plagioclase in K-feldspar, Most of the. black

areas in the plagioclase are K-teldspar. Apatite urystals are commonly associated with

these corrosive patches of K-feldspar, Ferrohypersthene granodiorite (30476), 2% miles

NNW. of Alalka rock-hole, Musgrave Ranges. Crassed nivols. Field of view: 5 min. diam,

Pig, 3.—Micro-anttperthite formed by replacement of sndesine (twinned anineral forming

the major portion of the field) by K-feldspar (dark grey irregular patches in the ande~

sine), The patches of K-feldspar commonly contin grains of pyroxene (as tm quadrant

1), apatite, zircon or iron ore. ‘There is no lenticular micro-antiperthite in this rock.

Note the healed shatter zone and the shears filled with iron ores crossing quadrants 3

and 4, Tyniecal charnockitic granodiorite, No. 30789, Ernubella, Field of view: 5 nin.

diam, Grossed nicols.

Fig.

Vig.

Fig.

F ig.

Tig.

ALLAN F. WILSON

4.—Texture of a typical chamockitic granodiorite, No, 30789, Ernabella. There is a

tendency for alinement of the mafic clots, which are composed of ferrohypersthene (sur-

rounded by calcic wugite in wpper part of quadrant 3), caleic augité (quadrant 3), iron

ores, hornblende (swrounding iron ores in quadrant 2), und qnartz, whether as granules

(eg. on the oross-hairs intersection) or as larger grains (e.g., in quadrant 2) have

plentiful dust-like inclusions, Microperthite commonly encloses quartz granules (¢-g.,

centre of figure). Plagioclase is shown in bottom of quadrant 3 (see also Plate 2, Fig,

5): There are shears filled with black iron otes in quadrant 4. Field of view: 4:5 umn.

iameter.

5.—Relies of corroded plagioclase (twinned) in K-feldspar (microperthitic). Attitude

of relics suggests bending and shattering of plagioclase prior to replacement by K--

feldspar (cf. Pl. 2, Vig. 4), Hornblende adamiellite (30596), Bald Hill, E. Musgrave

Ranges. Crossed nicols. Ficld of view: 5-4 mm. diam.

6.—Relies of plagioclase (white) corroded by K-feldspar, Note erystal of apatite (dark

grey needle near A) which occurs in tiny “pool” of K-feldspar introduced into the

plagioclase. The round dark objects are bubbles in the thin-section. Augite-homblende

adamellite (34598), 8 miles WSW. of Victory Downs, W. Ayers Ranges, Central Aus-

tralia. Field of view: 4-8 mm. diam. Crossed nicols.

PLATE 3

1,—hregular development of micro-antiperthite due to replacement of plagioclase

(white) by K-feldspar (light yrey). K-feldspar content of some portions of the feldspar

reaction complexes is such that all gradations may'be seen from plagioelase through

niicro-antiperthite to micro-perthite. Very fine micro-perthitic lenses. of albite (probably

due: Lo exsolution rather than to replacement) may be seen in the middle of most patches

of K-feldspar (e.g., near cross-wires, and see PI. 3, Fig. 2), Ferrohypersthene adamellite

(30701), Tjakumja, Musgrave Ranges, Crossed nicols. Field of view: 2°8 mm. diam.

2.—Very fine micro-perthitic inclusions (centre) in K-feldspar lens in micro-antiperthitic

plagioclase. Enlargement of central portion of Pl. 3, Fig. 1. Crossed nicols. Field of

view; 0:4 mm, diam,

PLATE 4.

1L.—Micro-antiperthite (quadrant 2) and microperthite (quadrants 3 and 1) both

formed by metasomatism of a single plaginelase crystal, K-feldspar (K) has irregularly

replaced plagioclase (P), and the small relics of plagioclase in. quadrant 3 are clearly

in optical continuity with the parent plagioclase mass. The plagioclase grain which is

shielded by pyroxene from K-metasomatism (white grain, P, in qnadrant 4) is not anti-

perthitic. Pyroxene is ferrohypersthene in which Iamellae of diopside show as several

vertical narrow white bands, QQ = quartz, Ferrohypersthene adamellite (30700), near

Tjakunja, Musgrave Ranges. Crossed nieols. Field of view: 3 mm, diam.

A, F. WiLson Puate 1

A. F. Witson PLATE 3

A. F. Witson PLATE 4

AN ABERRANT SPECIES OF ECLIPTA FROM AUSTRALIA

BY R. MELVILLE

Summary

AN ABERRANT SPECIES OF ECLIPTA FROM AUSTRALIA

by BR. Metvnue

[Read 9 July 1959]

The composite described below was discovered by Mr. E. IL Ising on the

Arkaringa Creek about 60 miles south of Oodnadatta, On examination it was

seen to be a member of the Heliantheac-Verbesininac, but at first it did not

appear to fit any hitherto described genus in this section of the family. The

Verbesininae include a number of weedy species and it seemed likely that the

plant was an adventive in Australia {rom some other part of the world. Accord-

ingly, a search was made through the available material of the Verbesininae to

determine whether the plant was an aberrant member of any of the recognised

yenera, either from Australia or clsewhere. It was found to resemble Eclipta

ulba (L.) Hassk. and 1. platyzlossa F, Muell. very closely in foliage, involucre

sind indumentum and the aspect of the capitula, A comparison of dissections

uf the several species of Eelipta with the new plant showed that all were very

similar in floral morphology. However, the fruits differed strikingly in the pos-

session of rather bread wings, us well as iv. a greater development af the pappns.

They were similar to those of Verbesina ¢neelioides (Cay.) A. Gray, which is

in other respects widely different. This Verbesina is itself rather aberrant in its

own gemis in the possession of winged fruits, but it serves to draw attention tu

the existence of winged and wingless fruits in a number of composite genera.

Sometimes, as in Verbesina the exalate forms predominate, at others, as in

Brachycome alate forms are most abundant. Such variation is not, of itsclf,

sufficient to warrant separation as a new genus, in the absence of other dis-

tinctive features and the conclusion was reached that the new plunt should be

assigned to Eelipta. No evidence was fomd that it occurs anywhere but in

Australia.

Ecuera Anatocanpa Melville, sp. nov., E. platyglossae F. Muell. affinis, sed

dentibus pappormm subulatis et acheniis late alutis differt,

Herba annua crecta ramosa 20-30 cm alta, caulibus scabridulis vel sub-

glabris. Folia opposita vel interdum alternata, Janceolata, acuta, hasihus

cuneatis, supra et infra scabridula, laminae 15-35 mm longae, 5-10 mm Jatae,

petiolis 5-12 mm Jongis munita. Capitula florifera 3-5 rom lata, in axillis foliorum,

pedunculis 4-6 mm longis appresso-hirsutis; byacteae involucrorum 6-10, 1-2

seriateae, oblongo- vel oyato-acutae, scabridac, 5-6 mm longae, 1-5-3-0 mm

Jatae, eae receplaculorum lineari-subulatac, circa 4-5 mm longae breve ciliatae;

flores radiati ¢, circa 10, avi, corollis ligulatis, emarginalis, 2-3-3-5 mm longis,

2 vel 3 nervatis; ores disci cirea 20-25; hermaphroditi, tubi corellanun 1-5 mm

longi, 4obati; ovaria oblonga, applanata, cirea 25 mm longa, supra hirsuta et

setis 2 vel 3 papporum coronata. Capitula fructifera 8-10 mm lata, cypselae

Hororum radiatorum tri-alatae, eae Hororum discornm wpplanatac, obovatae, late

bialatae, 4:5-5-5 mm longae, 3-4 mm latae, faciebus lateralibus papillis conicis

vel ineularibus indutis.

South Australia: Arkaringa Ck., 12 mls. N. of Mt. Barry stn., 60 mls. 5. of

Oodnadatta, K. IL. Ising No, 3768, Aug. 30, 1955 (K holo.; Adelaide, isa),

Queensland: §, Oestrus, Gilruth Plains, Coll, K, C, Baker. No. G830, March 7,

1949 (in Herb., Canberra).

Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Sust, (1960), Vol a.

78 R. MELVILLE

During this investigation, a second collection, from the Gilruth Plains, was

sent to me by Miss N. T. Burbidge. Both occurrences were of single plants so

that the species may be scarce, though, with its undistinguished appearance, it

may easily have been overlooked.

Eeliplta alatocarpa. Melville, sp. nov. 1, Howering capitulum, scale A; 2, 3, ray

floret, adaxial and lateral views; 4, dise floret; 5, inner bract of involucre; 6

receptaciilar scale; 7, stamens and stigmas of dise florct; 8, pappus of disc

floret; 9, fruit of dise floret; 10, fruit of ray floret. Figs. 2-6, scale B, Figs.

7-8, scale D, Figs. 9-10, scale C. Camera lucida drawings from the holotype.

NOMENCLATURE OF NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN

THE LAKE EYRE BASIN

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

NOMENCLATURE OF NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN THE

LAKE EYRE BASIN

By H, H. Frauarson

(Read 13 August 1959]

In identifying some recent collections of Notomys my altention has been

directed again to the unsatisfactory state of the nomenclature of two of the

species which are widespread in the arid districts of the State of South Australia

und are particularly important numerically in the Lake Eyre Basin.

In 1939, in checking the results of my own field work in that area against

the considerable series of Netomys, which had accumulated in the South Aus-

tralian Museum from the samne district, | qwas drawn to the provisianal cou-

clusion (for reasons fully stated in my subsequent paper), that Natomys aistoni

Brazenor, 1934, was a colour phase only of N. cercimus Gould, 1853; this species

is known to the local aborigines (Wonkanoorao) as oorarvic, A second species

known as wilkintie, which I then considered to be the N. cervinus of Waite and

Wood Jones and most modern authors, was thereby rendered innominate; but

us any measures towards stabilization depended on a4 re-examination of the type

of N. cervinus Gould in London, the matter was left mm abeyance. No further

factnal evidence bearing on the subject was published until 1951, when Tate

in his review of the genus, made this re-examination in relation to topotypes

ul N. aistoné and found sufficient agreement to substantiate my suggestion of

1939, and to relegate the latter to the synonymy of N. cervinus Gould,

The way was thereby opened for the recognition of the wilkintie in nomen-

chiture, hut this step was complicated by a doubt as to the real status of Notomys

fuseus Wood Jones, 1925, of which no type was designated and of which only a

single topotype of the Wood Jones series is available for study. Iredale and

Troughton (Check List of Aust. Mammals, 1934) have already equated N,

fuscus to N. cervinus of Gould, but it is not clear whether this finding was based

ou the Wood Jones series from Ouldea or on some of the several “dark forms”

which have been recorded from other localities; their synonymy is, of course,

no longer acceptuble owing to the revolution in the conceptions of the real

character of Gould's species (infra).

A critical re-examination of the above topotype of N. fuscus has convinced

me of its specific identity with the Lake Eyre Basin wilkintie, but the question

remains as to whether the differential characters relied on by Wood Jones

(most of which show considerable variation in the Lake Eyre Basin) should be

accepted at the sub-specilie level or regarded merely as a phase of polymorphism

of which there are already illustrations in the genus. The single specimen

available is quite inadequate for a solution of this problem, which will depend

ultimately on extended field work. Wood Jones, however, writes (1925) of

having had numerous specimens from Ooldea and as he was evidently assured

of the uniformity of N. fuseus at that place it may be accepted that the differcn-

tial characters at least have a higher frequeucy at Ooldea than in the Lake Eyre

Busin. I have therefure chosen the first alternative and now regard N. fuscus

as being represented by two geographical forms based on these respective areas.

These conclusions may be summarised as follows:

Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust, (1960), Yok 83.

&0 HB. OH. FINLAYSON

1. NOTOMYS CERVINUS Gould, 1853.

Hapalotis eervinus Gould, 1853, Proc. Zool. Soe, London (1851), p, 127.

Notomys cercinus Thomas, 192], Ann. Mae. Nat. Hist, 9 (8), p, 425, et seq. (lectotpe).

Revlersonresbte § gitont Brazenor, 1934, Mems, Nat, Museum Melbourne, 8 (81), Pl V, Pig. S:

‘ Ww, 0,

Notomys aistoni Finlayson, 1939, Trans, Moy, Soe, 5. Aust, 63 (1), p. 108, Th CV, Pigs. 4,

H wd P; PL V, Figs. M,N and Q,

Natonmys cercinus Tate, 1951, Bull. Am. Mais. Nat. Hist., 97 (4), p. 262.

A species of medium size, with no gular pouch, grey based belly fur in-

variable in adults, conspicuously shortened skull and grooved upper incisors.

A raised nude presternal gland is seasonally developed in the male, but

there is no tract of specialised hair on either gular or sternal sites. Pes eom-

patitively stout, with large plump pads and the hallucal pad always present;

under surface of toes very lightly haired, Ear long,

Pelage soft; mid-dorsally from 10-14 mm long; colour dorsally exceedingly

variable. ranging feom pinkish cinuamon of Ridgway scarcely pencilled with

uctr black tips in the richer phases, through intermediate strongly grizzled

drab, to near blackish. Ventral fur white termially and usually pale plumbeous

at base, though white-based suh-adults oceur.

Skull shoré and broad, with the anterior zygoma root strongly out-thrust

and a square zygomatic outline. Interorbital space wide, Anteorbital fossa

broad und shallow, with the external wall turned uniformly inward. Free margin

of zygomatic plate with a shallow concavity only and with the upper spur little

developed, Anterior palatal foramina usually exceeding the anterior murgin

of M' and very wide. Mesopterygoid fossa constantly wide and frequently

lyrate in outline. Bulla small.

Upper incisors distinctly orthodont; narrow and delicate and with the

antertur surfaces constantly marked by a broad and shallow groove.

Dimensions.—The range of flesh dimensions in 47 individuals and of skull

dimensions in 17 is given in my paper of 1939 and Tate (1951) quotes some

merastwements of the lectotype.

Type (lectotype of Thomas, 1921).—British Museum No, 53, 10, 22, 7; cal-

lected by Capt. Charles Sturt m 1845 at 29°06" S. lat. and 141° E. longt. Also

recorded from Ooldea and several intermediate localities.

Ninety-three exanrples examined, many of them collected by L, Reese, Esy,

From 1929-34 this species appeared to be much more numerous in the Lake

Fyre pom than the next, but in recent collections the proportions have been

reversed,

2. NOTOMYS FUSCUS Wore Jones, 1925

Thilacomys cervinus Waite, L898, Proe, Ruy. Soe, Viet, &, 2, 122; PL V1, Fig. 3 (in part)

nee. Tapalotis cervinus Gould, 1453. :

Ascupharynx cervituis Waite, 1900, Ann. Mae, Nal, Hist, 7 (5), po 222 ¢in part); aec A.

vervinus Waite. 1915, Tratis. Roy. Soc. §. Aust, 89, p. 735 (= N. alexw Thos.1.

Aseophargnx cervinus Wood Joves, 1925, Ree. S. Aust. Museum, LEL (1), qs. 3 (in part)

Ascopharynx fuscus Woad Jones, 1925, Thid,

Notomps cercinus Brazenor, 1934, Mems. Nat. Mus. Melbourne, 8, p. S23 (in part).

Notomys certinus Finlayson, 1939, ‘Trans, Roy, Soe. S, Aust., 63 (lL), p. 108; Pl TV, Figs.

I, J and O; PI. V, Pies. J, K and L-

A medium-sized species with a gular pouch in bath sexes, strongly hatred

undersurface of toes and an elongate much modified skull, with tapered zyqu-

matic outlines

The gular gland is constant and the floor of its pit is densely clothed with

shining adpressed white hair, which forms a conspicuous disk in dried skins.

NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN THE LAKE EYRE BASIN SL

Rarely a sternal gorget of glandular hair is feebly developed in males. In the

pes the undersurface of the toes is often thickly clothed with bristle hairs obscur-

ing the integumental folds and overlapping the apical pads. The interdigital

pads are relatively small and the hallucal pad may be absent. Ear very long.

The skull is differently shaped from that of N, cervinus Gould with a longer

muzzle region, much Jess prominent anterior root of zygorma and a zygomatic

outline which tapers markedly forwards. Interorbital region narrower. Ante-

orbital fossa narrow and dcep and in fully adult examples the external plate

often nearly parallel to the rostral axis. Free margin of zygomatic plate deeply

concave and with a well-marked upper spur. The anterior pulatal foramina

variable in length, sometimes falling short of M' and relatively narrow. Meso-

pterygoid fossa somewhat variable and decidedly narrower than in. N, cervinus

Gould and the processes less frequently fared outwards at their extremitics and

after parallel. Bulla very large.

Upper incisors heavier than in N.. certinus Gould, less orthodont and their

anlerior surfaces ungrooved.

Subspecies A. NOTOMYS FUSCUS FUSCUS Wood Jones, 1025

(as given by the author op. cif. supra, )

Pes relatively heavy; hallucal pad absent; rhinarium heavier and less

hooked.

Pelave with dorsal colouration darker. isabelline brown or drab and with

the bases of the ventral fur pale smoky.

Type (lectotype)—Young adult male in alcohol with skull removed and

prepared. Formerly of the private collection of Frofessor F. Wood Jones, sub-

sequently No, 524 im the museum of the Zoological Department of the Univer-

sity of Adelaide and now registered number M6258 af the South Australian

Museum.

Type Locality —Ooldea district, South Australia.

Dimensions of the Type—Head and body. 105; tail, 127; pes, 34-5; ear, 25,

Skull.—Greatest length, 30-0; basal length, 24:5 cx; zygomatic breadth,

15:2; brain case breadth, 14-4: interorbital breadth, 5-3; nasals, length, 10-7;

nasals, breadth, 2'6; palatal length, 15-0); anteriur palatal forumina, 4-9; bulla

leneth, 5-8 ca.; upper molar series. 4-7.

Subspecies B, Notomys fuscus eyreius nov.

Hallucal pad present in about 70 per cent. of the series examined. Pelage

somewhat thinner and slightly crisper than in N. cervinus Gould of the same

districts; the dorsal colour variable but generally brightly fulvous or rufescent;

at its richest, orange cinnamon of Ridgway, more vinaceous than N. cerpinus

Gould and with light sepia penvilling rather than black, but in a Jarge propor-

tinn of specimens scarcely different from the buff forms of that species. A dark

ashy phase (about wood brown) oceurs, with a frequency of less than 2 per

cent, in the available sample. Ventral fur most frequently pure white to the

base, but distinctly grey (pale plumbeous) in 10 per cent. of individuals,

Type—Adult female; skin and skull; South Australian Museum, registered

number M4595. Collected by G. Aiston, Esq., April, 1934.

Type Locality—Mulka (New Well), on the cast side of Lake Eyre ghunat

5) miles ENE of the Barcao inflow.

Dimensions of the Type. —llead and body, 100; tail, 141; pes, 35; ear, 25.

82 H. H. FINLAYSON

Skull.—Greatest length, 30-3; basal length, 24-8; zygomatic breadth, 16-2;

braincase breadth, 15-3; interorbital breadth, 5-6: nasals, length, 10-9; nasals

breadth, 2-8; palatal length, 15:1; anterior palatal foramina, 5-1; bulla length,

6-2 ca.; upper molar series, 5-0.

The range of flesh dimensions in 22 examples and of skull dimensions in

four examples are given in my paper of 1939 (supra).

Fifty-two examples examined, including a series of 27 paratypes from

Mulka and 25 from other localities in the Lake Eyre Basin, most of the latter

having been collected and carefully prepared in the field by Mr. Paul Lawson

of the Muscum staff, and Mr. R. Tedford.

This species which ovcurs sympatrically with N. cervinus Gould and N.

mitchelli vars. both in the Lake Eyre Basin and Ooldea district is readily dis-

tinguishable from them hy both somatic and cranial features. From N, alexis

Thomas which is now known to occur on the north-east margin of the Basin,

the distinction is equally valid, though sometimes less obvious, and is more

justly appreciated in series than individually.

The chief points in which N. alexis differs are as follows. Both foot and

ear are smaller; the ear decidedly so, both length and breadth averaging lower

and the overall size therefore markedly less. The dorsal pelage shows a range

of ferruginous brown toues in the subterminal band quite absent from N, fuscus,

White-based belly fur vccurs in N. alexis, though with much less frequency than

in N. fuseus eyreius; but distinction from N. fuscus fuscus in this character may

not be practicable. The gular pit is less strongly haired, and in dried material

its site is marked by an oval area of nude skin rather than a disk of specialised

hair. On the other hand, the sternal tract of glandular hairs in males is strongly

developed and resembles the condition in N, mitchelli.

The adult skull is generally less modified in outline and more pseudomys-like

than in N. fuscus, though examples occur which are difficult to distinguish and

in the remaining points listed the distinetion is also of an average character.

The brain case is smaller, narrower and less pyriform; the zygomatic process of

maxilla in lateral aspect less expanded and differently shaped; the anteorbital

fossa broader and shallower: the anterior palatal foramina wider; the bulla de-

cidedly smaller and the incisors more opisthodont.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

In the preparation of this note T have been indebted for loan of material

and various courtesies in correspondence to Dr. Donald Thomson of the Uni-

yersity of Melbourne; to Mr. G, B, Sharman of the Zoological Department of

the University of Adelaide; and to Mr, B. J. Marlow of the Australian Museum,

Sydney; to all of whom my thanks are rendered.

THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND

GLOBAL RADIATION

BY J. N. BLACK

Summary

An examination has been made of the relationship between illumination and global radiation for

five stations for which long term records of both factors are available (Helsinki, Stockholm, Kew,

Vienna and Jerusalem), to determine whether radiation data can be used as an index of the light

climate in studies of agronomy and plant ecology. Despite differences in instrumentation and

climate there was found to be a high correlation between illumination and radiation and there is no

significant departure of the data for any individual station from the common regression. It is

concluded that, at least for the climates of which the six stations are representative, radiation can be

used with confidence as an index of the light climate.

‘THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND

GLOBAL RADIATION

By J). N. Brack*

[Read 13 Angust 1959]

SUMMARY

An examination bas been made of he relationship between illumination

and glohal radiation for five stations for which Jong term records of both factors

are available (Helsinki, Stockholm, Kew, Vienna and jertisalem), to determine

whether radiation datu can be used as am index of the light climate in studies

of agronomy anid plant ecology. Despite differences in instrumentation and

climate there was found to be a high correlation between illumination and

radiation and there is no significant deparmre of the data for any individual

station from the coromon regression. It is concluded that, at least for the

cliroates of which the six stalions are representative, radiation can be used with

confidence as an index of the light climate.

In the study of agronomy and plant ecology there frequently arises a need

for data on the average illumination to which plants are exposed, for instance

when the growth or geographical distribution of field crops or pastures are

under consideration. Recent studies in the relationship of leaf area and incoming

light energy (e.g. Brougham, 1957; Donald and Black, 1958; and Black, 1958),

which have led to a better appreciation of the basic principles involved in the

growth of pastures, have drawn attention to the Jimited understanding of the

spatial distribution of illumination. Unfortunately. the number of stations for

which long term records of light energy are available is very sinall, and in the

absence of such records, recourse has often been made in the past to some

general relutionship between light intensity and global radiation such as thut

pul forward by Kimball (1924) (e.g. Black, 1957; Brougham, 1958), or to the

values given by Moon (1940) for the distribution of energy between various

wavelength hands of the incoming solar radiation (Tamiya, 1957; Blackman

and Black, 1959). Both Kimball's and Moon’s values vary. as would be expected,

with afinospherie conditions; Kimball quotes a range of values for different

cloud cover while Moon’s are caleulated for a number of optical air masses.

Since it has not been possible to study the distribution of Wumination

directly from measured valies, interest has heen concentrated on the distrihu-

tion of radiation; a study by Black, Bonython and Prescott (1954) of the

relationship between radiation and sunshine could not be extended to the

charting of radiation since the distribution of sunshine was itself unknown,

except in the broadest terms. A further attempt was made by Black (1956)

to relate radiation to mean cloud amount, and this was followed hy the prepara-

tiun of monthly maps af the distribution of incoming wlobal radiation. It

appears that two other studies were proceeding simultancously with similar

objects: Budyko (1955) was interested in radiation balance, but his “Atlas of

Tfeat Balance” inchides maps. of global radiation, and a more recent study has

been published by Bernhardt and Philipps (1958). Tt is therefore of considerable

interest to ascertain to what extent the use of maps of radiation to obtain an

estimate of illumination climate is justified. Blackwell (1954), cxamining the

* Waite Agricultural Research Distitute, University of Adelaide.

Trans, Boy. Soe. 5. Aust. (160), Vel #4.

soyourozoyduajeg

961 Pqusy esue'y Aoqddgy O-FSGT ‘sawed Z de-oe N8‘1E wueyesnile ft

861 qosoqneg (Z) |

qroypHqaye pe

ymeudposr) pun atsolo10040py [e200 uray (Z)

THF yesuvpeaquez (T) wuntusTeg §— YoReqrqoxy (1) Of-OFGT ‘stead TT Ab 91 NL-9F euUal A

FSG6L TE“ ORI (3) aojourojoyd rysuAzZa104)

wa E961 Teayovt_ (1) Suiprooey Moy “HOW TS-LFGT ‘stead g MAE +0 N&-1¢ MOT.

Z TaxHOqsy

= “qN4ISUy BysoapAT

YOO BYSIZOTOIOIOPT SOFIIOAG (Fg)

z 6861 U9INyY (Z) q220j0yd

$861 Ugany (T) TUN ISse404 wonsduy LE-RB6T ‘S104 OT 1-81 NP-6¢ punsyoo3g

TT290q304d

9€67 punjounT UWINISsB40 qT worssuy £€-6261 ‘sae0d g HO: SE N¢-09 THUISTS

eyep jo samag WOlBULWANY TT UOlPRIPeyy Spiooad Jo yysue'T epnyZu0Ty epnqdey aoe]

quoeuMaysuy

eS Se TS

E[QBTLeAB ore VBP YOIYM IG} suOTyBIg

TL Wid Vio

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TLLUMINATION AND CLATBAL BADIATION a

series of records of iNumination and global radiation maintained at Kew between

1947 and 1951, pointed out that from the mean monthly values of Juminovs

eliciency obtained from these records it would be possible to deduce

uppreximute illumination values where only radiation data were avail-

able, and that these values would hold regardless of cloud amount. Blackwell

further observed that his results were somewhat tentative and were only relevant

to the five-year period under observation, to the methods of measurement and

to the local conditions of exposure and climete,

More révenily, a detailed study af the illumination vlimate of Pretoria,

South Africa, has been published by Drummond (1955), which includes a

comparison of the luminous cHiciency of daylight for various locations. Drim-

memd discussed in particular the values of luminons efficiency an clear days,

and its relationship to atmospheric moisture content and turbidity. and showed

that for fonr selected months (March, June, September and December) there

were differences in Juminous efficiency between the various stations examined,

It was felt that a suitable approach to the problem would be to assemble,

for as many locations as available, daty of racliation and illumination for

average conditions of cloudiness, using mean yalues for each month over as

long as possible periods of years. A list of stations for which suitable records

are uvailable, with the appropvriate literature references, is given in Table 1, It

will be seen that they are all located in Europe or the castern Mediterranean,

and that no records are ayailable for tropical conditions, Unfortunately, Drurmn-

mond (1958) did not publish illumination values for average cloud enuditinns,

arul his data for Pretoria cannot be used in the present study, [t is probable

that other records exist but are not known te the author; lor instance, Tapukin

(1953) bas published @lumination values fur Tastikent, but it has not becu

possible to obtain appropriate global radiation data. There are, moreaver, 4

uumber of limitutions which tust be borne in mind when data fram these

various stations are being examined, Firstly, different instruments have been

used at the different stations; this is porhaps of more consequence in the

illumination than in the radiation measurements, but it hag not proved possible

to introduce any correction Factor. Sceondly, the cata for the various stations

are for different years. This is unlikely to be of importance, since it is reason-

ablo to assume that the relationship between ilumination and radiation will

net vary between years, and the data for each individual station were ablained

simultaneously, Thirdly, the illumination data for Jerusalem were not obtained

hy continuons recording but by instantaneous hourly reudings on clear days

omly, (Ashbel, personal communication.) Since there are practically no clends

during the summer at Jerusalem, Ashbel considers Hat the data for the months

May to October may be accepted as representative for the whole month, whereas

the values for the winter months rust be discurded. In view of the marked

difference between the climates of Jerusalem snd the other stations, it is wnfor-

tunate that the data are limited not only In this way, hat also in having been

taken only for a very short time, Two small points may also be noted: firstly

the ilhimination values for Helsinki and Stocksund (a suburb of Stockhalin}

were published in EsH units, ind have been converted for the purpose of this

shidly into Kilolux-hours by the factor 1 Es = 77,000 lux given by Pohjakailio

(1952), Secondly, the illumination data for Kew lave been amended in aceord-

ance with the snggestion of Blackwell, Eldridge and Robinson (1954).

The mean monthly values of illumination and glebal radiation calculated

from the available data are given in Figure 1. It will be seen that despite

the differences in instrumentation, geographical location, time of year and length

of record, the data show little scatter and are, in fael, remarkably consistent.

86 J. N. BLACK

There is, in fact, no significant departures of individual stations from the

common regression, and any effect of varying cloud cover on the relationship

between illumination and radiation has disappeared in the use of long term

average data. It may therefore be concluded that the use of radiation data,

JERUSALEM g

KEW

VIENNA

STOCKHOLM

HELSINK|

MONTHLY MEAN [LLUMINATION—K(LOLUX—HRS/DAY

X= 1405 Y - 152

200 400 600: aco

MONTHLY MEAN GLOBAL RADIATION—GM CAL/CM?/DAY

Fig. 1—The relationship between illumination and global radiation.

either directly, as indicative of light energy, or by the use of a suitable con-

version factor, is a satisfactory method of estimating light climate where no

illumination data exist. It must, however, be stressed that the extension of this

relationship to other climates—e.g. tropical or sub-tropical—which are not

represented in the stations examined, will not be justified until confirmed by

further data.

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND GLOBAL RADIATION AT

REFERENCES

Asuurs., D., 1956. Global solar radiation and daylight in Jerusalem, Jerusalem, The

Hebrew University.

Acrén, T. E., 1933, Illumination from sun and sky. Ark, Mat, Astr, Fys., 244, pp. 35.

Aunt E., paah Radiation climate in Scandinavian peninsular, Ark, Mat. Astr, Fys.,

GA, pp. 50.

Funaase F., and Panarrs, I, 1958. Die ritumliche und zeitliche Verteiluang der

Finstrahhmg, der Ausstrublung und der Strahhingsbilanz im Meersniveau. 1. Die

Kinstrahlung, Met. Hydr. Dienst der D.D.R. Abh, 45, pp. 227.

Brac, J. .N., 1956, The distribution of solar radiation over the earth’s surface. Arch. Met,

Geoph. Bioklim., B, 7, pp. 165-16).

Buacx, J. N,, 1957. The tilluence of varying light intensity on the growth of herbage plants.

Herb, Abstr., 27, pp. 89-98,

Buack, J. N., 1958, Competition bebveen plants of different initial seed sizes in swards of

subterranean clover (Trifolium subterrancam J.) with particular reference: to leaf area

and the light microclimate. Aust. J. Agric. Res., 9, pp. 299-318.

Brack, J. N., Bowysnon, ©, W., and Prescott, J. A., 1984 Solar radiation and the duration

of sunshine. ©. Journ. Roy, Met. Soc., 80, pp. 331-5.

By.ackatan, G. E., and Buacx, J) N., 1959. Physiological and ccvlogical studies in the analysis

of plant environment. 12. The role of the light factor in limiting growth, Ann, Bot.,

N.S. 23, pp, 131-146,

Biackwein, M. J., 1953. Five years continuous recording of daylight ilimination at Kew

Observatory, Ait Ministry, Met. Res. Comm., Met. Res. Publ. 831.

Brackweus,, M. J., 1954. Five years continuous recording of total and diffuse solar radiation

at Kew Observatory. Air Ministry, Mct. Res, Comm., Met. Res, Publ. 895.

BrackweL., M. J., Exorwor, R, H., and Rownsos, G. D., 1954. Estimation of the reflection

anc! absorption of solar radiation by a clondless atmosphere from recordings at the

ground with results for Kew Observatory, Air Ministry, Met, Res. Comm,, Met. Res,

Publ, 894,

Brovenam, R. W., 1957. Effect of intensity of defoliation on regrowth of pasture. Aust. J,

Agric, Res., 7, pp. 577-387.

Braounwam, A. W., 1958, Interception of light by the foliage of pure and mixed stands pf

pasture plants, Aust. j. Agnec. Res., 9, pp. 39-52,

Buvyxo, M, [., 1955. Atlas of heat balance (Russian). Loningrad, 1955.

Donauw, C. M., and Brack, J. N.. 1958. The significance of leaf area in pasture growth.

Herb. Abstr., 28, pp. 1-6.

Drummowp, A. J., 1958. Nates on the measurement of natural illiination. 2. Daylight

and skylight at Pretoria; the lominous vfficieney of daylight. Arch, Met. Geoph. Bioklim.,

B. 9, pp. 149-163,

Kinaaur, 1H. H., 1924. Bevords wf total solar radiation and their relation to daylight intensity.

Mouth. Weath. Tav., 52, pp. 473-9.

Lorukm, E. A. 1953, Natoral daylight in Tashkent (Russian), Bull, Acad. Sei, U.S,5.R,

Ser, Geoph., 5, p. 469.

Lunrtunp, H., 1936. Virinestealning och Ijusstrilning i Finland. Sv. ‘Tek. Vet. Akad. Fin-

land, Acta 12, pp. 126. j

Moow, P., 1940. Proposed solar radiation curves for cnginecring use. J. Frank. Inst, 230,

pp. 583-617.

Ponjakanuo, O., 1952, Ljnsintensiteten i norra och sédra Finland samt dess inverkan pa

odlingsviaxterna. Nord. Jordb,, 34, pp. 99-112.

Savneren, F., 1958, Meteorologische Lichtmessungen in Wien. Arch. Met. Geoph. Bioklim.,

B. 9, pp, 164-154,

Sveriges Meteurologiska. och. Hydrologiska Institut. Arsboker.

Tamiva, H1., 1957, Mass culture of algae, Ann. Rev. Plant. Physiol. 8. pp. 309-334,

Zentralanstalt fiir Metcorologie und Geodynamik, Wien. Jatwbiicher.

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECHIUROIDEA)

BY S. J. EDMONDS

Summary

Four new species of echiuroids, Thalassema sydniense, Arhynchite hiscocki, Anelassorhynchus

adelaidensis and Ochetostoma autraliense are described and six other species are listed from

Australia. Some anatomical details of Pseudobonellia biuterina Johnston and Tiegs are redescribed

and a key to the genera of Australian echiuroids is given.

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECINXUROIDEA)

By S. J. Epmonps*

[Read 10 September 1959]

SUMMARY

Four new species of echiuroids, Thalassema sydniense, Arhynchite hiscocki,

Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis and Ochctastoma qustraliense are described and

six other species are listed from Australia. Some anatomical details of Pseudo-

bonellia biuterina Johuston and. Tiegs are redescribed and a key to the genera

of Australian echinroids is given.

I, INTRODUCTION

The phylum Echiuroidea consists of a group of unsegmented, coelomate,

marine invertebrates that is closely related to the Annelida and the Sipuncu-

teidioa: The phylum contains two chief families, the Echiuridac and the Bonel-

idae,

The present paper describes four new species and refers to the species pre-

viously recorded from Australia. Some anatomical details of one of the latter

are re-described. The scheme of classification used is that adopted by Fisher

(1946, 1948). The species are:

Family ECHIURIDAE

Thalassema sydniense n, sp,

Arhynchite hiscocki n. sp.

Anelassorhynchus cegrandis (Lampert),

Anelassorhynchus porcellus Fisher.

Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis n. sp.

Ochetostoma australiense n. sp.

Family BONELLIDAE

Bonellia haswelli Johnston and Tiegs.

Pseudobonellia biuterina Johnston and Tiegs.

9. Archibonellia michaelseni Fischer.

10, Archibonellia mjobergi Fischer.

VS 69 bo

II. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES

I, Thalassema sydniense n. sp.

pl. la, figs. 1-2

Thalassema Lamarck, 1801: Fisher, 1946, p, 230,

Specimens—4 (2 dissected): Aust. Museum specimens G11219.

Locality—Of Watson’s Bay, Port Jackson, N.S.W,

Description—The four specimens are small and in the preserved state grey-

brown in colour. The length of the trunk is 6-12 mm. and the maximum width

2-5 mm. The proboscis, still attached to the trunk in all specimens, is about

half to a third as long as the trunk and gradually narrows anteriorly. The sur-

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide.

Trans, Roy, Soc. S$. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83,

go S$. J. EDMONDS

face oF the animal iy covered with numerous, very small, rather fat papillae

which appear to lie almost in transverse rows. They are more noticeable at

the anterior and posterior regions of the trunk, The longitudinal musculature

of the body wall is continuous.

Only a limited amount uf information about the internal anatomy was ob-

tained from the dissected specimens, The setae are comparatively large and

prominent and strongly recurved at the tip. They are connected by a very

prominent interbasal muscle. Another well-developed muscle runs from the

base of cach seta to a point on the body wall posterior to the nephridiopure

of the first pair or nephridia. There are two pairs. of nephridia all of which

open to the exterior posteriorly to the point of extrusion of the setae, The lips of

the nephrostomes are not clongated or spirally coiled and the internal opening

is on a short peduncle near the base of the nephridia.

No satisfactory information can be given about the alimentary and vasctlar

systems. The anal vesicles arc about half as long as the trunk. No pre-cluacal,

intestinal caecum appears to be present, but this point should be checked

when more specimens ure available for examination.

Sustematic Position.

This species resembles Thalassema steinbecki Fisher, 1946, which is. found

along the Pacific coast of America from California to Ecuador, It differs, how-

ever. from T. steinbecki becuuse the uephrostomes ure on shirt expanded

peduncles -and for this reason it is considered to be a new species.

T. sydniense is known only from four specimens all of which are small. It

differs from A. porcellus and A. adelaidensis in that:

(1) the lips of its nephrostomes are not spirally coiled:

3} a strong interbasal muscle joins its setae;

‘3 the nephridiopores of the first pair of nuphridia lic between the setac

and the point of fixation on the body wall of a well-developed, pos-

teriorly directed, seta] muscle,

Type Localtty—Off Watson's Bay, Port Jackson, N.S.W.

Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Sydney.

2, Arhynchite hiscecki n, sp,

pl. Lh, fiz. 3

Arhynehite Sato, 1837, p. 242; Fisher, 1940, p. 485.

Specimen—1 (collected by Dr, L, Hiscock, University of Queensland),

Lecality—Dug from sand 18 in. down on the sandspit”, Dunwich, Queens-

Jand-

Deseription—The specimen is long, slender and pencil-like. The length of

the trunk is about LO cm. and its width 4-6 mm- The specimen, preserved in

aleohul, is yellow in colour. The body is covered with small, nniformly dis-

tributed papillae which are shghtly lurger at its anterior and posterior extremi-

ties. The papillae give the impression of being arranged in transverse rows.

Anteriorly (here is a very delicate and slender proboscis about 3 em. lony and

13 mm. wide. It is still attached to the trunk and its anterior extremity fs

flattened so as to make it fan-like, The longitudinal musculature ig continuous

and not grouped into bundles.

The specimen possesses one pair of nephridia abont 1°35 cm, long that

open to the exterior behind the setae, Each of the nephridia possesses a rather

elaborate, leaf-like nephrostomal lip. The sctae are ony and are connected to

strong, radiating muscles which arise from the body-wall. There is a well-

developed interbasal muscle. The alimentary canal is very long and consider-

ably coiled. The sesophagus if firmly fastened to the body by well-developed

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUKOIDS (ECHIUROLDEA ) 1

mesenterics and the presiphonal segment is very long. No precloacal caecum

is present on the intestine,

The vascular system consists of a prominent, tubular dorsal vessel that is

closely associated with the alimentary canal for a considerable part of its length.

Jt then appears to fuse with tlie intestine. ‘The ventral vessel gives off a

branch that joins the intestine at a point posterior to the point of fixation of the

dorsal vesscl. There does not appear to be a ring vessel. The system re-

sembles rather closely that of a bonellid.

There are two very thin, slightly brown anal vesicles, the length of which

is about one-quarter that of the trunk, On their surface there are numerous

very small structures, presumably the ciliate funnels, that are visihle only with

the aid of a magnifier. The anal vesicles are fastened throughout their whole

length by numerous fine muscles to the posterior region of the alimentary canal,

but to the body wall only over the last quarter of their length,

Systematic Position.

This species differs from other species of the genus in (1) the structure

of its vascular system, and (2) the way that ihe anal vesicles are attached

principally to the alimentary canal and not ta the body. The tost closely

related species is A. arhynchite (Ikeda) described from Japan.

The genus Arhynchite as defined by Sato (1937, p. 142) contained echiurids

which did not possess a proboscis. Fisher (1949, p. 485), after finding two

species that possessed a long decidnous proboscis, re-described the genus, The

proboscis of the Australian species described in this paper was still attached

tn the specimen when it was callected.

A. hiscocki differs from other Australian echiurids in that:

(1) its proboscis is very slender and flattened anteriorly: and

(2) the lips of the nephrostomes are expanded into elaborate, leaf-like

structures.

Type Locality—Dimwich (Stradbroke Is.), Queensland.

Type Specinen—Australian Museum, Sydney.

8. Anclassorhynchys vegrandis (Lampert)

Thalassema teyrande Laropert, 1883. p. 341.

Anelasscrhynchus vegrandis Fisher, 1949, p. 481,

Australien Rezord—Low Is,, Great Barrier Reef, Queensland (Monro, 1931).

Remarks—Monro gives no details of the anatomy of his specimens. A.

nezraniis possesses three pairs of nephridia, all of which open to the exterior

pasteriorly to the setae. The lips of the nephrostomes are coiled,

4, Anelassorhynchus porcellus Fisher

pl. le

Anelassorhynchus porcellus Wisher, 1948, p. 274.

Speelmens—12 (6 dissected). Collected by the author from under pieces

of coral rock lying in loose coral sand near the level of low spring tides: 19/8/ 55,

Locality—Heron Is (Capricorn Group), Queensland.

Description—The animals are plump and sac-like and when alive sandy-grey

i colour, ‘The length of the trunk is 2-5-4-0 cm. and the maximum width

1-5-2-3 cm. The proboscis is 1-2-1*8 cm. long and readily deciduate; it tapers

slightly anteriorly. The body wall is wrinkled and made verrncose hy the

presence of numerous flat papillae, which are largest on the anterior and pas-

terior surfaces of the trunk. The skin appears to be thinner and smoother on

the dorsal than the ventral surface. The musculature is continuous and nat

92 5. J. TDMONDS

grouped into bundles and two rather inconspicuous golden-enloured setae lie

just posterior to the mouth, No interbasal muscle was found connecting. them.

The alimentary canal is very Jong and frail, In all specimens it was filled

with fragments of coral, small shells and coral sand which had ruptured the

thin wall in many places. 'Yhis prevented « thorough examination of the alimen-

tury canal being made. The presiphonal section, however, is very long. The

dorsal blood vessel is attached only to the anterior-most part of’ the Tordput:

There is a ring vessel, two dorso-ventral vessels which unite at a level just

posterior to the setae and eventually connect with a rather poorly developed

ventral vesscl, There are two pairs of nephridia which open posteriorly to

the setae. Their nephrostomes bear long, slender and slightly cviled prolonga-

tions which are often entangled in the coils of the intestine. The nephridia

vary in size and in shape; in most specimens they are slender, There are two

long. anal vesicles with numerous small unstalked funnels which appear to be

in longitudinal rows. No caecum was found in the intestine,

Systematic Position.

J have not been able to find any churacter which can be used to distinguish

these specimens from A. porcellus, Fisher described from Hawaii, where it has

been found in sand under rocky in Hide pools. The lips of the nephrostomes

of the specimens from Queensland are less coiled and the ventral blood vessel

appears to be not as well developed as those of A. porcellus, These differences

may be caused by diflerent methods of fixation.

A, porcellus possesses two pairs of nephridia which open behind the setac

Hod which possess long spirally coiled lips. The presiphunal of the gut is very

ang,

e istriburlon—Hawait: Heron [s., Queensland,

5 Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis n, sp.

pl. 2a

Anelassorhynchus Annandale, 1922, p. 148.

Specimens—8 (5 dissected),

Localities—St, Vincent Gull, South Australia. Seven specimens were col-

lecteel by the author from the sand and gravel amongst the yoots of the marine

angiosperm, Cymodocea antarcliea at Aldinga Beach and one at Cape Jervis

by Mrs. P. M. Thomas.

Description—This species is clustly allied to A, poreellus Fisher, described

from Hawaii and reported in the present paper, from Heron Is., Olcensland,

The South Australian specimens when alive are tich dark green in colour, while

those Irom Queensland are sandy-grey, ‘The length of the trunk of the specimens

js 6-10 wm. and the maximum widflt 1:35-3-0 em. The proboscis, a deciduous

structure, is 2-4 em. long and 0-3 cm. wide and tapers anteriorly, J{s murgin,

though slightly wavy, is not frilled and its groove or trough is light green in

evlour, The skin of the animal is wrinkled and bears numerous. srnall, Hut, glan-

dular papillae, The maxinwm length of the setae is 5 mm. and there is no

interbasal muscle. The longitudinal musculature of the body-wall is continadus,

There are four nephridia which open behind the setae and which possess

spirally coiled and clongate lips, The alimentary canal is long and tangled.

Its presiphonal section is very long (as much as 8 cm. in one specimen) and

thin-walled. There is no precloacal caecum.

The blood vascular system consists of a dorsal blood vessel, 2 ring vessel

aad lwo dorso-ventral vessels which join the ventral vessel. The latter is clasely

pressed to the ventral nerve cord. There are two long and slender anal vesicles

which are attached to the budy-wall only posteriorly. The vesicles are brown

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (RCIUUROIDEA) 93

in colour and their surface is covered with numerous, minute, brown funnels,

The diameter of eggs found in the nephridia of one female was 0:13-0+17 mm,

Whether they were ripe could not be ascertained.

Systematic Position,

These specimens resemble two specimens of a dark green echiurid collected

at Amboina and described by Fischer (1896) as Thalassema semoni, A, semont

possesses four nephridia with spirally coiled Jips, I one of F ischer's. specimens

all the nephridia open to the exterior behind the sctao but in the other the first

pair do not. Wharton (1913, p. 247) re-deseribed the species from Buquet 1s,

(Philippines). Aceording to him the first pair of nephridia open in front of

and the second pair behind the setae. Since both pairs of nephridia at the

South Australian specimens open behind the setae, it is most likely that they

urea different species from A. semont,

A. adelaidensis pussesses two pairs of nephridia which open behind the

setae and which have jong, spirally coiled, nephrostomal lips. The presiphunal

section of the gut is long. It is dark green in colour, differing in this respect

from A, porcellus Fisher.

Type Locality—Aldinga Beach (near Adelaide), St, Vincent Gulf, S.A-

Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Syduey.

6, Ochetostoma uustraliense n_ sp.

pl. Sh, fix. 4

Ochetostoma Teuekart and Ruppell, 1828, bisher, (946, p, 24D.

Specimens—21 (12 dissected ).

Localities—Queensland: Stradbroke Is. (3 three specimens coll, $. Iynd),

Myora (two specimens coll. I. Tliscock), Dunwich (eight specimens coll, L.

Hiscock), Palm Is. (two specimens, from Univ. of Queensland). New South

Wales: Goodwood Is,, near mouth of Clarence River (six specimens evll, P.

Durie), Aust, Museum specimens W3375, W3186, W3187,

Descripltion—My. P, Durie says that the worms from Coodwood Is, are

found “between high and low water marks in rather dark sand, situated close

ti some small mangrove clumps. he proboscts is white and fleshy anid pro-

trudes from a hole in the sand, It lies Wong the surface of the sand and is about

6 in. long and & in. wide. In this condition it appears to be quite flat (like a

ribbon) and does not appear to take on a tube-like shape as in preserved speci-

mens, The body of the worm is soft and bright red in colour. Twelve longi»

tudinal muscle bundles show up very clearly.”

The length of the trank of preserved specimens is 4-3-10-2 cm. and the

maximum width J-8-2+8 em. The probuscis is 1-8-4-1 cm. long and not readily

deciduate, Living specimens are red bnt peeserved specimens are pale pink

or straw coloured, The thickness of the skin varies. In some specimens iL is

thick, in others thin, the condition probably depending on the state «f the

musculature at fixation, There are usually 12-13, occasionally 1-14 limgi-

tudinal muscles which are best counted in dissected specimens. In all speci-

mens except two there was one more band in the posterior half than the anterior

half of the trunk. Of the 12 dissected specimens the maximum number wt bands

was 14 in one specimen, 13 in five, and 12. in six. The oblique musculature

between the longitudinal bundles is gromped into numerous fascicles, The

faseivles are not always noticeuble in those parts of the body which have been

stretchied vonsiderably. The anterior and posterior surfaces of the trunk hear

small flat papillae.

There are three pairs of nephridia which vary in size and shape; generally

they are lang. One pair opens anteriorly to and the other twa pairs posteriorly

94 S. J. EDMONDS

niv

niv:

Vigs. 1-2.—Thalussema sydniense; 1, anterior region dissected to show nephridia, setae and

setal muscles; 2, seta.

Fig, 3.—Arhynchite hiscacki; dissected specimen,

Fig. 4.—Ochetostoma australiense; dissected specimen showing anterior region of body.

Fig. 5—Pseudobonellia biuterina; dissected specimen showing anterior region of body,

Legend. —dy = dorsal vessel, Im = longitudinal muscle, mt—=male tube, n= nephridium,

niv = neuro-intestinal vessel, np =nephridial process, om = oblique muscle, yy =

ventral vessel.

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECHTUROIDEA}

to the setae. All the nephrostomes have long spirally coiled lips. No interbasal

muscle was found between the setae, The alimentary system consists of a

short anterior region, a long intestinal region possessing & ciliale groove and

siphon and a short rectum. The anterior region is held in position by strong

mesenteries attached to the body-wall and the other regions by numerous fine

filaments. There is a precloacal, intestinal caecum,

The blood system is similar to that found in a number of species of Ocle-

tostoma, es. QO. actomyotum Fisher, 1946. There is a dursal vessel, a ring

vessel, two at dacsveriteal vessels and a ventral vessel. The Litter is placed close

to the nerve cord and connects posteriorly with the precloacal caecum. There

are two lone anal vesicles with small unstalked ciliate funnels.

Systematic Position,

At least six species of Ochelostoma have heen described that pussess three

piirs of nephridia, one pair of which opens in front of and two pairs behind

the setae; OQ. erythrogrammon Leuckart and Ruppell, 1628, O- stwhbnanni

(Fischer, 1892), O. leptodcrnion (Fischer, 1892). ©, caudex (Lampert, 1883),

QO. kukotoniense (Fischer, 1892) and O. griffint (Whartun, 1913). Sato (1999,

p. 357) considers the first five of these species tu be synonymous.

The specimens from Australia are very close to O. erythrogranrman de-

scribed from the Ked Sea by Leuckart and Ruppell (1828), According to

Fischer (1927, p, 112) the original description (which was not available to the

present author) is “nur oberflachlich”, Fischer (1927, p, 115) re-examined the

species and deseribed it as possessing, 14-18 longitudinal muscle banners. This

last point has been re-confirmed recently by Wesenberg-Lund (1957, p. 9}

who re-examined a number of species of O- enythrozrammon from the Red Sea.

She says, “There are 17 longitudinal muscles but at the Jevel of the hooks the

two dorsal-most bands on each side unite so that there are only 15 bands in the

anterior part of the trunk”.

There seems little doubt, therefore, that the species from the Red Sea

possesses 14-18 bands, whereas that from eastern Australia possesses 11-14,

usually 12-13, For this reason the latter is regarded us new and deserihed as

©. australiense.

O. australiense is. a rather large species in which the Jongitudinal museu-

lature of the body-wall is divided into 12-13, oecasionally 11-14, bundles. Je

possesses three pairs of nephridia, the first pair of which opens in front vf and

the other two pairs hehind the setae, Its anatomy resembles that of O. erythro-

erammoan.

Type Localiiy Dunwich (Suadhroke Is.), Queensland.

Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Sydney.

7. Bonellia haswelli Johnston and Virgs

Bonellia haswelli Johnston and 'Viegs, 1920, p. 73.

Ronallia viridis, Whitelegge, 1880.

Australian Record—Port Jackson, N.S.W. (Johnsten and Tiegs, 1920).

Remurks—This species is known only from the account of Johnston and

Tiegs (1920). The length of the trunk is nver 2 in. and the maximum breadth

Kin; the length of the contracted proboscis 4 in, and of each of its arms Lh in,

A siphon, ahout # in. long, oriyinates as a very narrow tube on the dorsal surface

of the pharynx, widens posteriorly and ends blindly in a lohed structure. A

siagle nephridium about 3 in. Jong is situated on the left side of the body, The

nephrostome is situated about a quarter of the length of the nephridium from

its free end. The ovary is mid-yentral along the nerve cord. There ave two

ou Ss. J. EDMONDS

anal vesicles into which open about 15 tubes from which are given off smaller

tubes with ciliate funnels, Coloured green when alive; the male is unknown.

This species possesses only one nephridium and consequently can be readily

distinguished from Pseudobonellia biuterinu, Archibonellia michuelsent and A,

mjobergi which possess 2-3 nephridia.

8. Pseudobonellia hiuterina Johnston and ‘Ticgs

pl. 2c. fig &

Pseudahanellix biuterina Johnston antl Tiegs. 19148, p. 213; Wisher, 1946, p. 249.

Specimens and Localities49 (12. dissected). '

Queensland: North West Is, (5) (University of Queensland), Arkhurst

and Hayman Is. (2) (coll. Dr, Mackerras), Whitsunday Passage (2)

(Aust. Mus. Coll, W3029), Heron Ts, a (call. S, J. Kdmonds).

Western Australias Fremantle Harbour (21) (Mrs. 1. Marsh), Dongarra

(6) (coll. Prof. A. G, Nicholls), Pt, Peron (2) (coll. Prof. T. Hf. John-

ston), Trigg Is, (8) (coll. M. J. Littlejohn).

Precious Australian Record—North West Islet, Masthead Ts. (Capricorn

Group), Queensland (Johnston and Tiegs, 1919).

Deseviption and Discussion—Vhe specimens from Queensland, although they

differ in a few respeets from Johnston and Tiegs’s description of the species,

are considered to be P. hiuterina. Five specimens were collected at one of the

type localities and two others at an adjacent island. They possess two nephridia

(\iteri) and carry a degenerate male in a small blind tube which opens lo the

exterior hetween the two nepliridiopores. The male aperture shows up clearly

just helow the setae in all species.

The vascular system of the specimens is much more like that of a typical

bonclid (Fisher, 1946, Fig. 15) than that described by Johnston and Tiews.

There is a dorsal vessel whieh makes contact with the alimentary canal at three

points: anteriorly with the pharynx, then (usually) at a point un the ecsophageal

wall near the erop and finally at a point where it fuses with the intestinal wall

just anterior to the origin of the siphon. A venteal or neural vessel runs along

the nerve cord to the pasterior region of the animal. <Anteriorly, the ventral

vessel pives off a neuro-intestinal vessel which makes contact with the intestine

near the anterior extremity of the siphon. The neuro-intestinal vessel runs

along the intestine andl is closely associated with the siphon for about 1-5 em.

(Fig. 5),

a anal yesicles do not seem to communicate with the cloaca as simply as

described by Johnston and Tiegs, The ciliate tubules arise in groups or fascicles

from 4 slight outpocketing of the cloacal wall and show in sume specimens some

branching basally.

Johnston and ‘liegs state that the ovarivs “lic transversally on frenulae”.

The varies were inactive and invisible in the dissected specimens from North

West Is. but in the specimens from Arkhurst and Hayman Is. developing ova.

although small. lie clearly longiluciinally along the posterior third of the ventral

nerve curd. The transverse position of the ovaries, therefore, must be regarded

with reserve unGl more specimens with gonads are aviiluble for study.

The vascular system and the anal vesicles of the Western Australian speci-

mens are like those of the Queensland specimeiis. The ovaries of six specimens

lie along the nerve cord. Mggs with a diameter of 0-25-0-3 mm. were found

in the nephridia of the W.A. specimens. About 15 nematodes were obtained

from Ue intestine of twa specimens from Fremantle. They were found in the

mil-gut and showed no sign of attrition or digestion, Whether they were

SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHTUROIDS (ECHTIUROIDEA ) 97

ingested along the sand and debris or whether they are intestinal parasites is

not known.

Systematic Position.

P, biuterina is dark green in colour. Lt possesses two nephridia and a

small blind tube which opens to the exterior between the nephridiopores. The

male is carried in the tube. P. biuterina differs fram A. michaelseni Fischer,

also described from Fremantle, W.A,, in that its intestine is long and lacks a

caecum and in the structure of the anal vesieles.

9. Archibonellia michaelseni Fischer

Archibonellia michaelseni Fischer, 1919, p. 83; 1921, p. 7,

Australian Record—Fremanue and Rottnest Is., Western Australia ( Fischer,

1919).

Remarks—This species is described from a single specimen, The trunk of

the specimen is about 12 mm, long and the proboscis terminates in two short

lappets. The colour of the animal wlien alive is grey, The species possesses two

very small nephridia and an mmpsired “uterus”. The intestine is short and bears

a small caecum. The ovary lies along the posterior region of the nerve cord.

The anal vesicles terminate in a bundle of tubules.

10. Archibonellia mjobergi Fischer

Archibonellia mjobergi Kischer, 1921, p. 6.

Australian Record—Broome, Western Australia (Fischer, 1921).

Remarks—This species is ulso described from a single “coal black” specimen.

The trunk is 45 mm. long and the proboscis 18 mm. One arm of the proboscis

is 50 mm. long and the other 10 mm, The species possesses one pair of large

nephridia between which lies a very small unpaired nephridium.

It, KEY TO THE GeNERA OF AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS

1. Proboseis usually conspicuous (although sometimes deciduous. if speci-

mien is handled) and often several times the lenytl of the body bnt never

bifid. Anal vesicles long, sac-like, unbranched and covered with minute

ciliate funnels — family Echiuridae We - é 3, 4

2, Females with elongate, bifid proboscis. Anal vesicles with many branches

that end in ciliate cups. Male degenerate, living in or on the female —

family Bonellidae 7 . 9, 10

3. Longitudinal museles of body-wall grouped into bundles. The interval

between the bundles is crossed by numerous separate, small bundles of

the inner oblique layer. 1-4 pairs of nephridia with spirally coiled, nephro-

stomal lips — genus Ochetostoma.

4, Longitudinal muscles of body-wall not grouped into bundles , 6

5. Nephrostomal Jips either coiled or expanded into leaf-like structures 7, 8

6. Nephrostomal lips neither coiled nor expanded into leaf-like structures —

genus Thalassema.

Nephrostomal lips long and spirally coiled — genus Anelassorhynchus.

Single pair of nephridia with nephrostomul lips produced to form leaf

like structures, Proboscis long, deciduous and slender with a small fan

like oxtremity — genns Arhynchite.

“1 U1

aS S, J. EDMONDS

9. Only one nephridium or uterus present. Coelomic aperture of the nephri-

dium is situated near the base of nephridium at the end of a short Jateral

lube — genus Bonellia.

10. More than one nephridium or uterus ea we = . IW I2

11, Two nephridia or uteri with nephrostomes placed near their distal ends.

male permanently lodged in a small blind tube which opens between the

nephridiopores — genus Pseudobonellia.

12. Third nephridium placed between two paired nephridia— genus Arehi-

bonellia.

1¥. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to thank the following for supplying specimens of

echiuroids; Mrs. L. Marsh and Mr. M. Littlejohn (University of W.A.), Mrs.

P. M. 'Thomas (Waivpsstty of Adelaide), Dr. I. Hiscock, Dr. J. Mackerras, Mr. P-

Durie and Professor W. Stephenson (University of Queensland), aid Miss E.

Pope (Australian Museum, Sydney).

V. REFERENCES

ANNANDALE, N., 1922, The matine element in the fauna of the Ganges, Bijdr, Dierk., 22,

Feestmunmer 70.. Ceboortedag van Dr. Max Weber, pp, 143-154,

Fiscuen, W., 1892. Ubersicht der yon Herrn Dr. F. Stuhlmann avf Sansibar und an der

pedennberliegendn Festlandkuste gesammelten Gephyreen. Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst.,

9, pp, 80-89,

Fiscnen, W., 1896. Gephyreen. Hamburger Magelhaernsische Sammelreise, yo, 1-7.

Fiscuexn, W., 1919. Gephyrcen det sudwestkuste Australiens. Zool, Anz. 50, pp. 283-285.

Fiscnrrn, W., 1921. Gephyreen (Results of Dr, Mjoberg’s Swedish Scientitic Expeditions ta

Australiy, 1910-1913), Kumel, Svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl., 61 (8), pp. 1-8.

Fiscuen, W., 1926. Sipunculoidea und Echiureidea. Die Fauna Sudwest-Australiens Ergch-

niss der Hambiger Sudwest-anstralischen Porsch-ungreise, 5 (3), pp. 199-216.

FisvEn, % Se SUAs. Echiurid worms of the North Pucifie Ocean. Proc, bes, Nat, Mus., 6,

pp. 215-292.

Fiscumr, W. K., 1947. New genera and species of echiuroid and sipunculid wotms. Prev.

U.S, Nat, Mtis., 97, pp. 351-372.

Fisnex, W. K,, 1948. A new echiaroid worm from the Hawaiian Islands and a key to the

genera of the Echitridae, Pacific Science, 2 (4), pp. 274-277.

Fisuen, W. K., 1949. Additions to the echiuroid fauna of the North Pacific Quean. Pre.

US, Nat. Mus., 99, pp. 479-497.

Ixepa, I., 1924, Further notes on the Gephyrea of Japan with descriptions of some new

species from Marshall, Caroline andl Palan Islands. Jap. Jour. Zool., 1 (2), pp. 23-44.

Jounston, T. H., and Turcs, O. W.; 1919, Pseudobonellia, a new echiuroid genus from the

Great Barricr Reef. Proc. Linn. Sac. New South Wales, 44, pp. 213-230.

Tounston, T. H., and Tregs, O. W., 1920. A new species of Bonellia from Port Jackson.

Rec. Aust. Mus, Sydney, 13, pp. 73-76.

Lamrznr, k,, 1883. Uber einige neue Thalassemnen, Zeit, Wiss. Zool., 39, pp. 334-342.

Monno, C, A., 1931. Polychaeta, Ohgochueta, Echiuroidea and Sipynewoider. Great Bar-

rier Reef Expedition, 1925-1929, 4 (1), pp. 1-37.

Saro, H.,, 1937. Echiuroidesa, Siponculoidea and Priapuloides obtamed in north-cast Honshu,

Japan. Saito Ho-on Kai Mus. Res. Bull. 12, pp. 137-176.

Sato, H., 1939. Studies on the Echiuraidea, Sipnneuloides and Priapdoide of Japan. Sed.

Rep. Tohoku Imp. Univ., 4 (14), pp. 339-460,

Wesenpenc-Luwn, E,, 1958, Sipunculoidea aud Echiaroiden from the Hed Sea. Sea Fisheries

Res, Stat. Haifa. Bull., 14 (3), pp. 1-14, ;

Wuanrton, L. D,..1913. A description of some Philippine Thalassernae with .a revision of the

genus. Phil, Jour. Sci., 5, pp. 243-270. '

WuritrLecce, V., 1889, List of marine and freshwater invertebrate faunna of Tort Jackson.

Prac. Roy. Soe, N.S.W.. 23, pp. 163-523,

S. J. EpMonps PLATE ]

Thalassema Arhynchite Anelassorhynchus

sydniense hiscocki porcellus

la.—This figure is lb.—This figure is 8/10 lc.—Natural size.

twice natural size, natural size.

S. J. EpMonpbs PLATE 2

Anelassorhynchus Ochetostoma Pseudobonellia

adelaidensis australiense biuterina

2a.—Natural size. 2b,—2/3 natural size. 2c.—1-5 natural

size.

THE SAND RIDGE DESERTS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA AND RELATED

AEOLIAN LANDFORMS OF THE QUATERNARY ARID CYCLES

BY S. J. EDMONDS

Summary

A map is presented of the South Australian sand ridge deserts and a detailed description given of

the dune morphology. The mode of origin of the ridges is analysed and the conclusion reached that

a channelling action, accompanied by shepherding of loose sand, has been the principal element

responsible for the evolution of the corrugated desert landscape.

Thus it is proposed that the dune systems are to be classified in the main as windrifts. The numerous

playa lakes occurring within and bordering the deserts are similarly believed to be due essentially to

deflation during the Quaternary Arid Cycles; observations clearly show that excavation rather than

deposition has occurred despite their endoreic setting. The composition of the desert floors is

reviewed, and it is shown that the sand ridge belts are limited to areas featuring a mantle of

unconsolidated Early Quaternary deposits which would be readily liable to windrift development.

While the prevailing winds of the present day do not everywhere account for the pattern of the sand

ridges, there is a close correlation of ridge trends and the predominating strong wind direction

recorded at inland meteorological stations.

THE SAND RIDGE DESERTS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA AND RELATED

AEOLIAN LANDFORMS OF THE QUATERNARY ARID CYCLES

By D. Kkinc

[Read 10 September 1959]

SUMMARY

A map is presented of the South Australian sand ridge deserts and a

detailed description vive of the dune morphology. ‘Yhe wmode of vrigin of the

ridges is analysed ancl the: conclusion r¢ached that a channelling action, accom-

panicd by shepherding of loose sand, has been the principal clement responsible

for the evolution of the carmgated desert laudse:pe.

‘thns it is proposect that the dune systems are to he classified in the ¢nain

as windrifts.

The numerous playu lakes occurring within and bordering the duserts: ure

similarly believed to be due essentiully to deflation during the Quaternary Arid

Cycles; abseryations clearly show that excavation rather thw deposition has

ocentred despite their endoreic setting.

The composition of the desert floors is reviewed, aud it is shown that the

sand ridge belts are limited to areas featuring a mantle pf unconsolidated Early

Quaternary deposits which would be readily liable to windrift dovelopment.

While the prevailing winds of the present day do not everywhere account

tor the pattern of the sand ridges, there is a close correlation of ridye trends

and the predominating strong wind direction recorded at inland meteorological

stytions.

INTRODUCTION

A striking feature of the existing South Australian physiography is the

udvanced development and uniformity of the sand ridge formations covering

vast areas of the intcrior. These aeolian landscapes provide ample proof ot

the role of the wind as a major transporting agent during the Quaternary

Aridities,* a feature which has been commonly described in earlier works.

The primary effect of the wind as an erosional agent and the resulting land-

forms have, however, not been considered to the full extent which they deserve

in the South Australian example.

Onc of the main objectives of this contribution is (o Mlustrate that aeolian

effects, both erosional and transportational, have been principal elements in

the evolution of the landforms which now characterise the arid interior of the

State. In particular, it is suggested that deflation has played a direct role in

dune formation and in the excavation of the extensive system of playa lakes

bordering and accompanying the dune belts; deflation also contributed to some

extent in the dissection of the inland plateaux and gibber plains, and in remadel-

ling bedrock inliers within the desert provinces.

A mup of the South Australian desert sand ridges is presented as Fig, 1.

This has been compiled from a study of all available aerial photographs

supplemented by direct aerial observations of the writer and others (Bennett,

1935; Madigan, 1930) and from the Jew existing published descriptions. It

provides a reliable record of the overall distribution of the sand ridge deserts,

and also shows diagrammatically the relative abundance, the orientation and

the general planimetrie forms of individual dunes comprising the various desert

provinces. Other topographic and climatie elements which influence the study

* Three distinet Onaternary Arid Cycles have: heen recognisod as a result of soil stuvies

in the arid zone of Australia (Jessup, 1948),

Trans, Roy, Sec, S, Aust. (196), Vol. 33.

100 Db. RING

of the sand ridge deserts are also indicated. These include the principal ranges

of bedrock hills, the dissected inland plateaux. the various centres of lagoon-

type internal drainage, and wind analyses based on Bureau of Meteorology

recordings trom widely scattered weather statiuns. The broader orographical

puhdiiviiiae. and present-day climatological data are summarised in the inset

on Fig. 1.

the sand ridge deserts cover a total of 145,000 square miles, thus embrac-

ing more than a third of the total urea uf South Australia. Toyether with the

adjoining sand ridge areas of Western Australia and Northern Territory, they

comprise one of the most extensive and perfectly developed systems af desert

dunes existing in the world today.

The South Australian dune systems lie within twe broad provinces. One

fs in the north-east of the State, where the greater part is known as the Simpson

Desert. The other, the Great Victoria Desert, occupies the western part of the

State, being portion of the vast Desert Tableland extending into Western Aus-

tralia. The two dune provinces approach each other between latitudes 26 and

$1, where they are divided hy a dissected platezu up to one hundred and fifty

niiles wide characterised by the “breakaway” (or tent-hill) crosional forms,

‘Vhe formation of the sand ridge deserts probably occurred in several stages

during the Quaternary Arid Cycles. In the Lake Lyre region, a gradual de-

teiioration in climate to aridity is testified by interbedded gypsum layers and

an assemblage of fossils of a brackish-water lacies in the Late Pleistocene—Rarly

Recent stratigraphic record, while it can also be clearly demonstrated that dune

furmation post-dated deposition of these particular beds (King, 1956).

In Pleistucene time, prior to the onset of aridity, pluvial conditions had

prevailed throughout the interior, Extensive lakes and food plains in the vast

fowland areas received detritus from the bedrock ranges and from dissection

of the Tertiary tableland to the breakaway forms of the existing marginal desert

areas. As desiceation reached a climax and lacustrine and fluviatile sedimenta-

tion diminished, this mantle of unconsolidated Pleistocene waste—which, we

can expect from the environmental changes, would have been sparsely vegetated

—was remodelled by wind erosion into the sand ridge deserts.

Tn both provinces the dunes consistently assume the fonn of elongated

ridges, and altho h their spacing and magnitude may vary considerably in

different localities, locally they are always regular in magnitude and planimetric

pattern,

It will be observed that dunes of an inland type are ulso widely developed

in the northern Murray Basin, east nt the Mount Lofty Ranges, These, however,

are subordinate forms not characteristic of a truly desertic environment. Ex-

eluded from consideration are the stranded marine shoreline dunes of the

south-east, and the calcareous aeolianite mantle fringing the coastline of Yorke

and Eyre Peninsulas.

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE SAND RIDGES

The Simpson Desert. named and defined by Madigan, embraces an area of

43,500 square miles lying between the Finke River on the west and the Queens-

land border on the east. and extending from the Marshall River in latitude 33°S.

(Central Australia) southward to Lake Eyre in latitnde 28°S. This region

embraces most of the north-easten desert dune province, the exceptions being

an extension southerly to Lake Frome and a relatively ssnall area south-west

of Lake Eyre. Arid conditions prevail today in the Simpson Desert. the greater

part receiving less than five inches annual rainfall.

NORTHERN

132"

TERRITORY

‘

; SN

OODNADATTA %

ST &

AUSTRALIA

AND

QUEENSL

WESTERN

RIDGE MAP

AUSTRALIA

;

VICTORIA

Sane ~tdge formatian

Desert sand ridge —ground pla shown guagrammaticorly

wie Bewek ridge (af south-east)

Player lake

; wf Dissected tableland, “brechaway"

Orographic divistars

Over 1000° Ss ED Bedrock Atlis, principal ranges

a ae

500 to 1000° =

Under 500!

Wind rose, ammual percentage Preguency

ai ternxocan winds exceeding /& mph.

ey ta meteorologicad statins

Rainfall, cverage annual th intakes —3— tCedune 2Woomera 3Adelarde + Broken Hili

Evaporation, average anmutl in inches —~70~— “8 iLeigh Creek €O0odnadatia ft Korrest

Pig. 1—Sand Ridge Map of South Australia,

SAND RIDGE DESERTS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 101

The sand ridges of the Simpson Desert are developed to an especially high

order of magnitude and symmetry, for which reason the region has proved

most attractive for geomorphological researches. The physical characteristics of

the dunes and the dune belt as a whole have been fully described in earlier

published works and maps (Madigan, 1936, 1946; King, 1956) and are only

briefly summarised here.

In the Simpson Desert proper there are individual dunes that exceed 200

miles in length. They vary in height from 40 to 100 feet, lie 800 to 500 yards

apart, and are slightly asymmetric in section with the steepest slope facing

easterly to southerly, depending on trend. The axial trend of the ridges varies

chroneicut the Lake Eyre Basin in a broadly arcuate manner, from north-

easterly in the area west of Lake Eyre to meridional in the Simpson Desert,

and to approximately east-west in the south-east portion of the Basin near Lake

Frome. The dimensions and perfection of the ridges also vary gradationally,

changing from short and indefinite formations west of Lake Eyre to the bold,

corrugated relief of the Simpson Desert.

An outstanding morphological feature is the widespread occurrence of dune

convergence, despite the otherwise rigid parallelism of the sand formations.

The convergences are represented in ground plan by an asymmetric Y, which

in every case points to the north to east quadrant—depending on trend.

In one locality it has been shown by boring that the dunes are not entirely

composed of sand drift, but that the drift is superimposed on similar elongated

ridges of older Pleistocene sediments which form the desert pavement in this

region (King, 1956), indicating erosion of some twenty feet of the desert floor

from the interdune corridors.

The second province, the Great Victoria Desert, comprises an area of

some 70,000 square miles in the north-western portion of the State, together

with an adjoining area of comparable size in Western Australia, all featuring

a monotonous repetition of sand ridges with interspersed playa lakes and a

complete absence of surface drainage courses. Rainfall in the desert is between

five and eight inches annually. A narrow belt of sand ridges of the same

system extends from the desert province into higher rainfall areas of Central

Eyre Peninsula.

The sand ridges of the Great Victoria Desert have the same general forms

as those of the Simpson Desert, although panoramically they are less spectacular

because of an established vegetation cover. The ground plan of the dunes

in this area has been compiled from R.A.A.F. photographs of the Everard

Range and the Ooldea— Coober Pedy areas, supplemented by data of the

Mackay Aerial Survey (Bennett, 1935) and observations by the writer while

taking part in airborne geophysical surveys (Bureau of Mineral Resources,

1956) covering most of the desert area.

The spacing of the ridges varies appreciably in the different parts of the

desert, being most commonly of the order of a quarter to a half a mile, but

in places, and especially near the margins of the desert, as little as one sixth

of a mile. The usual height is from 30 to 40 feet and the length may exceed

twenty miles.

The orientation of the ridges changes gradationally from approximately

east-west near the W. Aust.—S. Aust. border, to north-easterly between Coober

Pedy and the Everard Range, finally swinging to west of north in the Simpson

Desert. On Eyre Peninsula they trend south-easterly. Tietkens Plain marks the

divide between the north-easterly and south-easterly trending dune systems.

The southern flanks of the ridges are generally the steepest.

Dune convergences are common throughout the Great Victoria Desert and

102 D. KING

the resulting V or U-shaped planimetric forms are without exception open to

the west (Plate 1, upper figure).

Vegetation is notably sparse throughout the Simpson Desert province, and

is represented chiefly by the non-aggressive Spinifex and Triodia, while in the

Great Victoria Desert there are also stunted acacias (Mulga, Myall) and other

drought-resistant plants.

As a general rule, the corridors of the ridges support the densest vegeta-

tion, while the crests are normally devoid of growth with local patches of live

sand. The meagreness of plant growth in most places gives the general impres-

sion that dune development has become essentially stabilised, but minor scale

sand migration is still taking place and might readily recur on a grand scale

in the event of but a slight climatic deterioration.

CLASSIFICATION AND ORIGIN OF THE SAND RIDGES

As a result of detailed studies and comprehensive publications by C. T.

Madigan (1936, 37, 88, 46), the ridges of the Simpson Desert have become

widely known, and are now accepted in overseas literature as classical examples

of longitudinal dunes—which may be generally defined as elongated ridges

composed entirely of drift sand lying parallel to the causal wind, to the leeward

of the sand source (Bagnold, 1941; Price, san! and believed by some (Melton,

1940) to be accumulations in the lee of obstacles.

In his valuable records, Madigan clearly indicated his appreciation of the

longitudinal windrift phenomenon and its possible role in the formation of the

Simpson Desert ridges. He preferred, however, to consider the adjacent dis-

sected tableland country as the principal sand source, and suggested that the

dunes were composed entirely of transported material forming a shallow veneer

upon a presumed hard desert floor. The following extracts from his works

(1936) are clearly relevant in the light of more recent observations, which

demonstrate the dominant role of wind channelling rather than shepherding

of loose sand in the evolution of the sand ridge landscape:

“In a private communication M. Aufrere has informed me that his essential

theory of the formation of longitudinal dunes is that they are derived from

forms similar to the caoudeyres of Gascony, which begin as wind-made excava-

tions in the sand similar to the fuljes . . . of the Nefud of Arabia and elsewhere.

These excavations, accompanied by a piling of the excavated sand on the down-

wind side and a trail of sand left behind on each side of the excavation, extend

downwind until they form a U-shaped dune, open to the windward, and, when

the closed portion of the U disappears, become a pair of parallel dunes, longi-

tudinal or parallel to the wind direction. . . .”

“The sand ridges of the south-western part of the Indian Desert, apart

from their height, bear a much stronger resemblance to those of Australia... .

The longitudinal form of the ridges was ascribed by Blanford to the particu-

larly strong force of the winds, which blow for long periods at 30 miles an hour.

. .. Blanford considered that the Indian Desert was at one time more thickly

covered with sand and that the hollows between the sand ridges were due to

denudation by the wind, so that the ridges would be residual rather than heaped

up by the wind. This is an entirely different point of view, but it has much

to recommend ‘it could it be established that there had once been an accumula-

tion of sand hundreds of feet thick.”

Indeed, as previously described, a section revealed by boring in the sand

ridges and corridors near Lake Eyre has shown that the formation of ridges

here has essentially resulted from wind channelling of the desert floor, and the

SAND RIDGE DESERTS OF SOUTH AUSTHALIA 1ns

consequent corrugations have been accentuated by deposition of the released

drift material slong the ridye crests, While nut denying that some of the sand

ridges, especially at the desert margins, may be longitudinal-type accumulations

of drift sand, the present study has led the writer tu believe: that residual or

windvft dunes, ay observed to occur at Lake Eyre, are predominant among the

sand ridge furms occurring throughuut the Suuth Australtun desert provinces,

Tn his classification, Melton (1440) states that windrift dunes are charac-

teristic o£ arid areas underlain by deep sand, with a non-aggressive vegetation

anil featuring strong winds of constant direction,

“Many (windrifts) ure a mile or more in length, though the width is only

a few hundred feet. The sand rim is a hairpin or elongated cheyron shape,

opening towards the wind. In the best developed windrifts the wings are quite

parallel throughout their extent. In the most common form, however, the wings

eracdually approach each other in the down wind direction, indicating that the

lowout grariitally became smaller as it migrated,”

A reference to the accompanying aerial photographs of the dure systems

Plate 1) and to those previously published (King, 1956) will demonstrate

that the windrift principle provides a compelling explanation of the various

converging sand ridge patterns. Further supporting criteria are the mumerous

elaypans of the interdune rifts which are clearly a result of wind erosion, and

the actual example of wind futings observed to be taking place in some present-

day windswept areas near Lake Eyre.

The composition of the desert Hoors would certainly be a fundamental

condition determining areas liable to windrift dune activity, an essential pre-

requisite being a thick mantle of poorly cemented or friable sandy matcrial

which in a dry state can be readily eroded by the wind. It is surely convinving

evidence that the main dune systcms are in fact restricted to areas featuring a

mantle of poorly consolidated Early Quaternary Huviatile deposits (Stephens,

1938) and are best developed in the Simpson Desert where the mantle sediments

—uneonsolidated gypseaus sand, sandy clays and fine sands (King, 19356)—

are especially well represented. Hence we also have a sound explanation why

the sand ridges of the Creat Victoria Desert terminate precisely at the margins

of the Nullarbor Plain, which is capped by hard silicified limestone, and why in

Western Australia (F las been observed that tulamd sand ridges are confined

to arcas underltin by sedimentary rocks, a feature described by Talbot and

Clirke (ei7) in their own words as follows:

“It is difficult to. account for the fact that, while the sand derived from

granite tends to spread cnt oyer a comparatively level surface, in the sedimentary

area... . it is piled in Jong ridges.”

In a personal communication, D, M. Traves states that microscopic analyses

of samples from the south-western Canning Basin of Western Australia (part

af the Great Sandy Desert) has revealed that the heavy mineral composition

of the sand ridges closely corresponds from place to hee with that of the

underlying or nearby desert pavements, thus he concludes that no appreciable

migration of sand has been involved in the formation of the ridges.

The sand cilge provinces are apparently independent of the regional grounil

relicf shown on the orographic map of the State (Fig. 1).

CLASSIFICATION AND ORIGIN OF TILE DESERT PLAYA LAKES

The Iarger salt Jakes and plava lakes of the intertor of the State, especially

Lakes Frome, Callabonna, Blanche, Gregory, Eyre and Torrens, have commonly

been desucibed as shrunken relicts of exoveic clrainage systems believed ta have

existed under pluvial conditions just prior ta the Recent Arid Cycle (MTowchin,

id D. KING

1413). It is to be understood, however, that all the playas of the north-east

lie within 4 vust area where stratigraphic records reveal active lacustrine sedi-

mentation during the Pleistocene and possibly Early Recent (Mawson, 1934;

King, 1956), but the direct association of the existing playa lakes with the

Pleistocene physiography is a generalisation which is considered untenable in

view of further researches outlined hereunder.

Geological and topographical studies conducted by the author in the Lake

Eyre Basin in 1953 have clearly proved in the case of Lake Eyre that lake

development has post-dated all fluviatile sedimentation in the area, the lake as

we know it today being a very youthtul feature formed by wind erosion ducing

the Reeent aridity, and thus comparable in origin with the great Qattara depres-

sion of the Libyan Desert ( Ball, 1927).

Lake Eyre North is approximately 25 feet below L,W.O,S.T, Port Adelaide

(Bonython, 1955) and would therefore he expected to have silted up appreciably

under the prevailing conditions of endoreie drainage. On the contrary, excuva-

tion rather than deposition has occurred as shown by the occurrence of undis-

turhed Early Recent Coxiella-bearing sediments in the shoreline cliffs at a

height of 36 feet above the lake bed, which itself comprises an eroded platform

of Quaternary sediments of a lower stratigraphic level, and is generally free

of any newer silt material. This is so, despite periodic floodings wf the lake

such as that experienced in 1949-50, and earlier Hoodings marked by a series

of stranded beach ridges observed along the southern shores,

The formation of Lake Eyre by defation would be materially assisted hy

wind-generated wave action during periodic floodings, especially as regards

the lateral growth of the shorelines. Indeed, it will be observed that the larger

lakes of this north-east proviove are the ones receiving drainage from distant

higher rainfall areas.

fi proposing an aeolian origin for all the playa lakes of the interior, a

more radical explanation arises for the highly asyrnmebical form of the greater

Lake Eyre “drainage system”, und the scemingly paradoxical condition (Browoe,

1934) that the lakes are |argest aud most abundant in the driest parts of the

State,

The sandy fractions removed from the playa depressions are believed tu

have «mtributed to the deposits of “live” sand occurring on the crests of the

accompanying sand ridges, Independent soil studies have revealed that finer

fractions of deflated material provided the principal source of the soils existing

in the arid portions of Australia (Jessup, 1958).

Fig. 1 illustrates that there are scores of other isolated playa lakes aml

claypans of appreciable size lying among the sand ridge deserts to the east of

Lake Eyre and extending northwards into the Simpson Desert. Lake Kitta-

kittuenla (Jat. 28°, lemy, 138°) is one of the largest. measuring about 25 miles

long and up to 5 miles wide. f

These lagoons have remarkably regular shoreline characteristics, all of which

bear testimony to a purely aeolian origin; the northern (or leeward) margins

ave bare and fluted surfaces of arcuate shape, concave to the south, und featuring

a wind-swept rim, beyond which there is a gradual restoration of the sand ride

formations, The southern shorelines are marked by classical cuspate inedenta-

tions in which the cusps correspond with the steep termination of dune ridges,

while the intermediate emhayments coincide with interdune valleys (Plate 1.

lower figure). These cuspute playa lakes are similar in profile to the fuljes nf the

Libyan Desert. and there seems little doubt that they are of similar physical

origin.

O Tdentical cuspate playas haye been observed by the author among sand

SAND RIDGE DESERTS O|f SOUTH AUSTRALIA WG

ridges in the Great Victoria Desert, glong the Western Australian border hetween

latitudes 27°30’ and 29°30’; others have been described from the Great Sandy

Desert of north-west Western Australia (Traves et alia, 1956) and are con-

sidered by these authors to haye “probably formed in the same arid period as

the sand dunes”,

Another lagoonal form Which can similarly be attributed to strictly aeolian

origin is the typically small oval-shaped claypan which occurs abundautly in

the interdune yalleys throughout all the sand ridge deserts of the State, and

which reflect wind excavation of the interdune corridors as proposed previously

in this paper, These corridor claypans are usually less. than a mile in their

largest dimension and are now commonly partly vegetated. Although individ

ally too sinall to be shown on the State maps, the dune corridor claypans would

collectively cover say five per cent of the sand ridge desert areas,

The relative abundance and dimensions of these claypans ure regarded by

the writer as a measure of the maturity of sand ridge development, Their

presence indicates that deflation has reached a hase level below which further

erosion is inhibited by ground moisture. This condition would now appear

tn apply generally to the various types of playa lakes of the Simpson Desert.

In briefly considering the extensive lagoonal depressions of northern Eyre

Peninsula, including the larger Lakes Everard, Gairdner and Gilles, it is truc

that the lake beds are in most places composed of a weathered bedrock pave-

ment (predominantly Precambriau) with negligible silt accumulations—whiely

also often applies in similar basement playa lakes of Salinalanil, Western Aus-

tralia (Jutson, 1934), Again there is evidence of the major role played by

deflation in the course of the Quaternary Arid Cvcles.

CAUSAL WIND REGIME

In proposing the windrift rather than longitudinal mode of origin foe the

éloncated sand ridges of the South Australian deserts, no modificatiuus are

required in reviewing evidence of the cavsal wind regime as both are basically

leeward growth phenomena. A difference arises, however, in consideriwe the

origin of the ¥-shaped convergenees formerly regarded (Madigan, 1936) to

he due to infrequent gusty side winds capable of locally deflecting the smaller

bulk of sand at the leeward end of the ridges. The suggestion here is thal the

convergences mark the termination of Individual rifts, which might veadily

become inactive as the result of more effective erosion and growth of adjacent

troughs. Thus two wings of a “captured” windrift may unite in an inverted V

or crescent and continue to the leeward as one wing of a larger rift.

As previously described, dune convergences—-or windrift terminations—are

common to all the South Australian desert tracts. and not one example of

orientation opposed to the trends shown in Fig, 1 have been ubserved by

the writer. These forms, open to the windward and pointing to the leeward,

thus provide a unique physiographic index of Early Receut wind activity. The

windrift pattern indicates that the causal winds were westeylics in the Great

Victoria Desert. with a gradational change to sonth-westerlies north of Woomera,

and swinging through southerlies to south-south-easterlies in the Simpson Desert:

north-westerlies (Eyre Peninsula) and westerlies (east of the Flinders Range}

were operative south of latitude 3°,

The euspate playa lakes of the Simpson Desert are similarly consistent in

shape and nrientation and reficct erosional characteristics produced by southerly

winds. A few of the playa Jakes in the Great Victoria Desert have identicz]

euspate shorelines on the windward (western) margins.

106 D, KING

An interesting question which arises from the sand ridge study is whether

the Early Recent wind record is comparable with the present day wind regime.

Madigan (1936) associated the dune trends throughout the whole of Australia

with the prevailing wind directions based on a mean annual pressure map of

1910. He was able to provide confirmatory morphological evidence of this

correlation in the Simpson Desert, but his conclusion that the Great Victoria

Desert dunes were formed by the prevailing south-east trade winds is incon-

sistent with the detailed ridge pattern here recorded,

While denying any overall association of dune trends and prevailing winds

such as those of today, the writer nevertheless considers from evidence outlined

below that the present wind regime can satisfactorily account for the sand

ridge systems providing that a discrimination is made between prevailing wind

and predominating strong wind directions,* The frequency of low velocity winds

has a considerable effect upon the geometry of the annual wind roses but little

or no bearing on deflational erosion and transportation of sand.

The significance of this distinction is illustrated by the following wind

recordings at Woomera oyer a three-year period,

Wind Wind Frequency Per Cent

Velocity = =. =

M.P.H. N. N.E. | BK. 5.5. 8. S.W. Ww. NW,

Less than 20 2 8 3 14 24 20 1 | 9

20-35 27 4 2 3 19 | 19 31 5

Greater than 35 26 - | — — 16 | 2 18 18

Wind roses based on the percentage frequency. distribution of afternoon

winds exceeding 18 m.p.h. at principal meteorological stations in South Aus-

tralia are shown in Fig. 1 and further particulars are given in Table L.

TABLE 1.

METEOROLOGICAL RECORDS USED IN COMPILLATLON OF WIND ROSES

Station Period Time Velocity Predominating Wind

(Hours) (M.P-H.) Direction Frequency %

1. Ceduna ' 1942-46 14-30 exuceding 20 Ss 20-4

2. Woomera 1949-53 * wi i Wsw 18-7

3. Adelaide 1938-40 15-00 4 18 SW 15-9

4. Broken Hilt 1942-47 | R “ Ww D2

§.. Leigh Creck 1952-54 14-30 i a SW 21-6

6.. Qodnadatta 1944-48 | 7 n 15 8 18-8

7. Forrest 1945-49 15-00 ” 1s W 16+3

Tt will be seen that in the interior there is a generally close correlation of

predominating strong wind directions and the causal wind directions proposed

by analysis of the sand ridge map. The only anomalous case is at Ceduna (and

to a Jesser extent Adelaide), where the wind records are probably influenced

by variations due to the coastal setting.

? Originally suggested in a personal communication by B. Mason, Senior Meteorologist

of the Bureau of Meteorology (S.A. ).

SAND RIDGE DESERTS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 107

The wind roses shown similarly account for the disposition of the transverse

gypsum sand ridges which occur adjacent to saline swamps aud playas in parts

of the State; believed to be formed by westerlies in the Murray Plains at Cooke

Plains and Craigie Plains, and at Lake Bumbunga, north-westerlies at Lake

Fowler, and south-westerlics at Lake MacDonnell near Ceduna.

Some strikingly severe dust and sand storms are promoted under present-

day conditions by strong northerly winds, which are well represented on the

wind roses of the desertic interior. These northerly winds would undoubtedly

modify the forms assumed by accumulations of live sand, but it has been

observed in the Simpson Desert that the cooler southerly winds have a much

greater effect on actual sand migration (Madigan, 1936),

Fig. 2.—Generalised map showing the distribution and oricntation of Australian desert sand

ridge formations. The arrows indicate the direction of Y-shaped ridge convergences (or rift

terminations) which are represented thraughoul the desert provinces and are considered

to be coincident with the causal wind pattern.

1, Creat Sandy Desert, 2. Creat Victoria Desert. 3. Simpson Desert.

A study of published data on the whole of the Australian desert zone

has shown that the morphological characteristics of the sand ridges and playa

lakes us observed by the writer in South Australia are also applicable in the

desert provinces of adjoining States, The distribution and orientation of the

desert sand ridges throughout the Continent are shown on Figure 2, where also

is given an interpretation of the causal wind regime based on the principles

outlined in this paper.

108 LD, KENG

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The observations contained in this contribution were largely made while

the writer was employed by the South Australian Mines Department, He is

grateful to the Director of Mines for encouraging the research work and for

granting permission to publish its results.

The draftiny of the text figures was undertaken by staff of Rio Tinto Australian

Exploration Pty. Ltd.. by kind permission of the Managing Director, Mr. §, B.

Dickinson, Dr. B. Campana, Senior Geologist of the same Company, is to be

credited with much helpful guidance during the preparation of the paper,

Thanks are also due to Professor J. A. Prescott for his assistance in finalising the

text and figures for publication.

Meteorological records and interpretations were supplied by Mr. B. Mason,

Senior Meteorclogist of the Bureau of Meteorulogy (S.A. Division) and by the

Director of Meteorology, Melboume, The Division of National Mapping of

the Department of National Development, Canberra, assisted by suggesting

and supplying relevant cartographic data.

REFERENCES

BACHE D, R.A, 1941. Tho Physics of Blown Sand and Desert Dunes, Methyen & Go. Ltd.,

ondon.

Bats, J., 1927. Problems of the Libyan Desert, Part 2—The Sand Dunes, Geog, Journal,

70 (3), pp. 211-220

Bennett, H. T., 1935, The work of the Mackay Acrial Survey Expeclition lo Wester and

South Australia, 1935, Australian Geographer, 2 (8), pp. 3-7.

Bonytnon, et al. 1955, Lake Eyre, South Australia: The Great Floodiny of 1949-50, Ray.

Geog. Sov. of Aust, (S.A. Braneh). Report of die Lake Byre Committed,

Browne, W, #., 1954. Some Peculiarities af Anstrulior Drainage Systems, Australian Geo-

grapher, 2 (4), p. 13.

VenNun, C,, 1930, The Major Structural and Physiographic Features of South Australia.

Trans. Roy, Soe. $.A., 54, pp. 1-36,

Howes, W., 1913. The Evolution of the Physiographical Features of South Apstralia,

Rept. AAAS, Melbourne, 14, Pp. 148-178.

Jessup, K. W., 1958, Ernsional Phenomeng Associated with Quaternary Aridities in the

Arid Zone of Australia. Read at ANZAAS, Section C, Adelaide,

Jutsos, J. T., eat The Physiography (Geomorphology) of Western Australia, Geal Surv.

WA. Bull. 95.

kone, D., 1056, The Quaternary Stratigraphic Record at Lake Eyre North aod the Evolotion

of Existing Topographic Forms, ‘lrans, Rov, Soe. S.A., 79, pp. 93-103.

PEABO Be T., 1936. The Australian Sand-Ridge Deserts, Grog, Review, 26 (2), pp,

205-227,

Maniean, GC. T., 1987. A review of the Arid Reyions of Australia and Their Feonomic

Potentialities, Presidential Address, Section MP ANZAAS, Auckland, pp, 375-397

Manian, C, T., 1938, The Simpson Desert and Its Barders, Jour. and Proc, Boy. Soe,

NiS.W. 71 (2), pp. 3503-535.

Manigan, CG. 'I., 1946. ‘The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Seicntific Reports: No, G—

The Sancl Formations, ‘Trans. Roy. Sor, S.A4,, 70, pp, 45-63.

Mawson, 1D, 1934, The Munyallina Beds: A Late Proterozoje Kormution: Trang: Roy. Sac,

$.A.. 58, pp. 187-196.

Meuron. PF. A. 1940. A Tentative Classificatiny of Sand Dimes—tts Applicatiny i Dune

History in the Southern High Plains, Journal of Gevlovy, 48 (2), pp, 119-174.

Puce, W. A., 1950. Saharan Sand Dunes und the Origin of the Longitudiaal Dune—A

Review, Geog. Review, 40, pp. 462-465.

Steruens, G. G,, 1958. The Theology of Ansiralian Spils, Tram Roy. Soc, S.A., Si,

pp. 1-12.

Taupor, 11, W. B,, 1910, Geological Observations in the Comntry between Wiluna,. Hall's

Creek, and Tanai, Bull, 39, Geol. Surv. West Aust.

Tacaos, WH, W, B., and Crave, E, de C., 1917, A Geological Accamnaissance of the Country

between Laverton und the South Australian Border, Bull. 75, Geol. Surv. West Aust.

Traves, D. M., et al., 1956. The Ceoloey of the South-Western Canning Basin, Western

Australia, Report No. 29, Bur. Min. Resouy. Aust,

D. Kine

Converging dune ridges of the Great Victoria Desert. View

looking north from near Ooldea, South Australia. There are six ridges

per mile in this area.

Puatre 1

Shores of a cuspate playa lake to the east of Lake Eyre: North,

DISTORTED COWRZES

BY BERNARD C. COTTON, F.R.Z.S.

Summary

The paper records some distorted cowries in the South Australian Museum collection.

DISTORTED COWRIES

By Bernarp C. Corron, F.RLZS.,

[Read § October 1959]

SUMMARY

The paper records some distorted cowries in the South Australian Museum

collection.

Lyncina lynx caledonica Crosse

Cypraca caledonica Crosse 1869. Journ, de Conch, Vol. 17, p. 41, pl. 1, fig. 1,

A scries of five specimens of “C. caledonica” (D. 3920), the name given to

a distorted form of L. lynx, from New Caledonia, range from the C. caledunica

form to almost typical C, lynx, The largest specimen agrees exactly in size

with the holotype of C. caledonica, height 59 mm. * width 24 11m, * dorso-

ventral 29 mm. The second largest specimen is 56 mm. X 25 mm, *X 25 mm,

The remainder are smaller and inerely slightly narrower in proportion than

typical C. lynx, Another series of eight specimens (D, 8917), from the same

locality, are somewhat irregularly weakly pustulose on the margins, but are

nearer to typical C. lynx than the distorted form, both in colouration and shape.

Qmamentiaria annulus noumeensis Maric

Cypraca nowmensis Marie 1869, Journ, de Conch., Vos. 17, p. 18, pl. 2, fig. 6.

Two mature specimens, from Noumea, examined are miniatures measuring,

leugth 15 mm. * width 9 mim. * dorso-ventral 7 mm., and 14 mm. x 8 mm.

* 6mm. The holotype is 30 mm. * 15 mm. * 13 mm.

Monetaria moneta barthelemyi. Bernardi

Cypraca barthelemyi Crosse 1861. Journ. de Conch., Vol. 9, p. 48, pl 1, figs. 3, 4.

Holotype measurement of this New Caledonian species is height 37 mm.,

width 22 mm,

Our series of thirteen shells grade from typical C. barthelemyi, ta normal

C. meneia. D, 3529(13).

The most distorted pair measure, height 831 mm., width 17 mm., dorso-

ventral 12 mm,, 384 mm, X 18 mm. x 15 mm.

Bistolida stolida crossei Marie

Cypraea crosset Marie 1869, Journ. de Conch,, Vol. 17, p, 16, pl, 1, fiz, 8.

Onr three specimens are fron Noumea, and are shorter than the holotype.

Height 38 mm., width 19 mm., dorso-ventral 16 mm., 35 mm. * 20 min. X 15 mm.,

37 mm. ¥ 19mm. x 15mm, D. 3587(3).

The holotype measurements are 43 mm. x 20 mm. * 15 mm.

Arabica arabica niger Roberts

Cypraca niger Roberts 1885, 'Trvon's Manual Conchology, Vol. 7, p, 174, pl. 8, fig. 3.

A series of seventeen specimens grade from the typical narrow, high, dark

C, niger through normal shaped dark specimens to slightly narrower lighter

Trans, Roy, Soc. S, Aust. (1960), Vol, 83.

110 B. C. COTTON

coloured shells, The narrowest and most distorted specimen measures, height

55 mm., width 29 mm., dorso-ventral 27 mm. The surface is pustulose and

the colour dark blackish-brown. D. 3930(10). D. 3931(4).

Notocypraea declivis Sowerby

Cypraea declivis Sowerby 1870. Thes, Conch., Vol. 4, p. 31, figs. 287, 328, 329.

This sinistral specimen of Notocypraea declivis is briefly referred to in the

“Journ. Malacological Soc., Aust.”, No. 2, p. 9, 1958. D. 14602(1).

The shell is typical in colour and noticeably wider than the Western Aus-

tralian N. occidentalis Iredale 1935, as figured by the present author in the

above publication. The height is 22 mm. and width 19 mm., and dorso-ventral

11 mm.

Since writing the above, Mr. R. V. Drogemiiller mentioned a_ sinistral

specimen of N. verconis taken at Port MacDonnell by Ian Carrison.

B. C. Corron PLATE 1

Notocypraca declivis Sowerby, sinistral. Tasmania,

OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIET AND SIZE VARIATION OF

AMPHIBOLURUS ADELAIDENSIS (GRAY) (REPTILIA: AGAMIDAE)

ON THE NULLARBOR PLAIN

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

Forty-one specimens of A. adelaidensis (Gray) were captured and the stomach contents examined.

Measurements of the body length of the lizards were recorded, and the variation suggests that the

life span in the natural environment does probably not exceed two or three years. A general

description of the specimens captured was made, and the taxonomic problems associated with the

original description are discussed. From analyses of the stomach contents, it is concluded that A.

adelaidensis is probably a discriminate feeder.

OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIET AND SIZE VARIATION OF

AMPHIBOLURUS ADELAIDENSIS (GRAY) (REPTILIA: AGAMIDAE)

ON THE NULLARBOR PLAIN

By Micxsen J. TyLern®

[Read 8 October 1959]

SUMMARY

Forty-one specimens of A, ddelaidensis (Gray) were captured and the

stomach coutenty examined. Measurements of the body length of the lizards

were recorded, and the varistion suggests that the life span in the natural

environment does probably not steak two or three years. A general descrip-

tion of the specimens captured was made, and the taxonomic problems associated

with the original description are discussed, From. analyses of the stomach con-

tents, if is comeluded that A, adefaidensis is probably a discriminate feeder,

INTRODUCTION

The food items selected by large reptiles may he determined by direct

observation upon the animals in their natural habitat, or examination of faecal

matter (Leydig, 1896). For smaller species, where it is impossible to identify

at 2 distance the food items ingested, different methods are employed.

Acceptance or refusal of fond items affered to a captive specimen may

provide interesting data, but the obvious limitations, due to the raiyted variety

ut available prey, impased upon the animal, could result in the acceptance in

captivity of prey normally rejected in the natural environment, '

By far the most satisfactory method, which has been employed for both

the Reptilia and Anura, is the examination of the stomach contents of » series

of specimens captured at random in the field.

Food items selected or rejected by Australian lizards have been mentioned

by several writers, the earliest probably being an observation by Krefft (1871),

who noticed that Tiligua (Cyclodus) sp, “feeds, besides insects, upon the

berry called ‘jee-bung’, and also on other berries and leaves”.

More recently Coleman (1945) reported that Tiliqua (Trachysaurus) rugosa

(Gray) and Amphibolurus barbatus (Cuvier) in captivity ate soft fruits, dan-

elions and other flowers, snails, eggs (previously broken), milk, bananas and

raw beef; sirmnilar observations upon the former species haying heen previously

mentioned in a publication by Longley (1940). The latter author also records

Cymnodactylus spyrurus (Ogilby) accepting caterpillars, isopods, the native

cockroach Panesthia Iaevicollis and an introduced species quoted to he Blatta

americana (presumably a confusion between Blatta orientalis and Periplaneta

americana ), but rejecting the vine moth Agarista glycinga. G. platurus is stated

to eat similar food items, and was also found to reject both the larvae and adults

of A. glycinea.

A very interesting observation by Davey (1944), revealed that Moloch

horridus (Gray) rejected certain species of ants but accepted others. Those

rejected were stated to be Iridomyrmex deitectus, 1. nitidus, Ectatomma metal-

licum, Monoromorium, Camponotus and Pheidole spp., whilst Iridomyrmex

* Department of Human Physiology and Phannacology, The Untiversity of Adelaide,

Yruns, Roy. Sec, S, Aust. (1960), Vol, 83,

12 Mo, TYLER

rufoniger was accepted at a daily consumption rate estimated by the writer at

1,350 specimens.

Neither previous papers mettioning stomach analyses of Australian spuct-

niens captured in the field, ner any record of food items ingested by Amphibo-

hivus adelaidensis (Gray) (The Queen Adelaide Dragon) have been traced by

the writer of this paper.

For reasons discussed later, the distribution is a matter of same conjecture.

It has apparently been recorded in Western and Sonth Australia, Victoria ane

Tasmania (Zicta, 1920; Lord & Scott, 1924; Waite, 1929).

Large numbers were observed by the writer upon the Nullarbor Plain at

the Commonwealth Railways fettlers’ camp “639 miles” W.N.W. of Port Pirie

tiring the period 6th-15th February, 1959. In this region A. adelaidensis

was the predominant species, being associated with Cymnodactylus milit (Bory

de Vine.), and Tiliqua rugosa (Gray).

METHODS

A. adelaidensis lives either singly or greyariously in short burrows beneath

large rocks or flat stones from which they emerge in search of food. If dis-

turbed whilst upon the surface of the ground, the lizards return to the burrow

with considerable speed, It was observed in the course of collecting that if the

rock covering the burrow was then remoyed, the lizard did not rely upon

escape by fleeing from the mtruder, but searched haphazardly fora new retreat

within the immediate vicinity, frequently selecting the instep of the writer's

shoes. Young specimens, however, remained in the exposed burrow, relying for

protection upon their excellent camouflage which closely resembled the sandy

soil, Forty-one specimens were subsequently captured at random by lund with

very little difficulty.

Shortly after capture the specimens were killed with the fumes of ammonia

ot carbon tetrachloride or by pithing, Measurements of the body, dorsally,

from the external nares to the apex of the tail and, ventrally, from the anterior

tip of the upper jaw to the vent were recorded.

The bedy viscera were examined for the presence of anatomical abnor-

malities and parasites, whilst the stomach contents were removed and the food

iterns, Where insects, identified to the order and if possible to the family.

OBSERVATIONS

(a) Size variation

The sizes of the specimens illustrated in the form of a histogram m Figure 1

are ventral measurements of the body from the antcrior extremity to the vent,

and not the total length of beady plus tail, because it was observed that the tails

af several of the mature specimens had been previously severed and were in

varions stages of regeneration.

The largest total lengths recorded were: 133 mm., 142 imm., 154 mm.

tales; 159 tam., 160 mr. 172 mm. females.

The distribution of the sizes in the histogram falls into two clearly defined,

apparently homogeneous groups which have been lettered A and B. The

specimens in A are all juveniles which will have hatched trom eggs laid by

group 8 in the previous season. A is thercfore homogeneous in sexual iromaturity

since all its members ave incapable of reproduction. Post mortem examination

of the gonads of group B revealed what was believed to be sexual maturity in

all specimens and homogeneity similarly applies.

AMPHIBOLURUS ADELAIDENSIS ON TIM NULLARBOR. LATN 113

The presence of a distinct gap between the groups (only one specimen

being recorded between 36-45 mm.) represents the growth made by the next

preceding generation during the winter months before the appearance of the

generation seen in A, a time when no lizards are born.

Similar observations were made by Simpson and Roe (1939), who examined

data compiled by Blanchard and Blanchard (1931) upon the salamander Hemi-

dactylium scutatum, and by the writer (1958) upon the frog Rana esculenta.

Number of

lizards.

GROUP A GROUP B

2| 26 3! 36 41 46 SI 56 61 66 7I

Length of body in millimetres.

Fig, 1

The rapid initial rate of growth by A. adelaidensis, the increase in size

during the first year, and the presence of only a single peak in B would suggest

that the life span in the natural environment does not exceed two or three

years, although it was previously believed that this species lived for much longer.

(b) Food items recovered

No apparent difference in the food items recovered from juvenile and

adult lizards was recorded, and so the entire prey have been treated as a whole

in the histogram (Fig. 2).

The Coleoptera consisted of single specimens of the Families Staphylinidae

and Tenebrionidae, whilst the [Temiptera was represented by four specimens

of the family Pentatomidae and one other unidentified specimen.

Three of the Lepidoptera were adult moths. the remainder being larvae

varying in size from a specimen measuring 14 mm, in length to first or second

instars of approximately 1 mm. length.

114 M. J. TYLER

The Orthoptera were all small grasshoppers (family Acrididae).

With the exception of one small parasite (family Ichneumonidae) the

Hymenoptera recovered consisted of various species of ants (family Formi-

cidae).

The remainder consisted of one fly (Diptera, family undet.) and five

spiders (Arachnida, family Araneae).

a |

O fa

w fe

Elo

& |2

x |G

x |S

OO}

COLEOPTERA

HEMIPTERA

ARACHNIDA

Fig. 2. Number of prey.

DISCUSSION

(a) Taxonomic problems arising from the original description

_ The specimens upon which this paper is based are typical of the form

regarded as Amphibolurus adelaidensis by Boulenger, 1887, and Waite, 1929.

The original description by Gray (1841) of specimens collected by Gould

in the locality of the Swan River is yery scant by modern standards, and is

based mainly on colour pattern which, as described below, is variable. He

named the specimens Grammatophora muricata var. adelaidensis.

AMPHIBOLUKUS ADELAIDENSIS ON THE NULIARBOR PLAIN 115

The following description of the specimens examined by the writer on the

Nullarbor Plain incorporates and elaborates those of Waite and Gray.

The adpressed hind limbs extend to or almost to the tympanum.

The scales aré strongly keeled and are largest on the dorsal surlace, where

they appear in distinct posteriorly projecting rows on either side of the mid-line,

extending from the cranium to the base of the tail, On each latertl aspect of

the base of the tail is a series of outwardly projecting spines extending pus-

teriorly for a distance in mature specimens of wpproximately ten millimetres,

and je similar to those previously mentioned in that they also possess three

spines.

The pores are either regularly situated or Interrupted in the preanal region,

and extend little more than half way down the thighs. The total number of

pores varies between twenty and thirty, more commonly nearer the Jower figure.

The ground colour on the dorsal and lateral surfaces of the hody yaries

from grey to olive-grey. There is a series of paired, small brown, angulur mark-

ings on the back which are adjacent superiorly to larger, similarly coloured,

but less clearly defined markings on the dorso-laterul surtuce between the limbs,

The head is of a reddish-brown colouration with symmetrical dark brawn

wnarkings; dark brown bars on the hind limbs are narrower and less con-

spicuous on the fore limbs.

The tail with a sevies af paired, dark brown markings of rectangular form

at the base which become irregular posteriorly, and merge inta symmetrical

bands towarls the extremity.

The veutral surface a pale cream. colouration with a broad black stripe

extending from the abdominal ventro-lateral surfaces, which fuses on the mid-

ventral line in the region of the thoras. Black markings on the throat extremely

variable, being present as an regularly shaped patch, spotted producing a

marbled appearance or completely absent,

A rapid colour change was observed in specimens placed from dark on to

light surfaces and vice versa, On the dark surface the brown dorsal markings

greatly increased in intensity. When placed on a white shrface, the brown

markings became paler, and approached a reddish-orange tint and a pattern

of markings appeared that had not heen observed in the field.

Three very distinct longitudinal, pale grey stripes appeared on the dorsal

surface, one extending as a vertebral stripe, between the angular markings,

from the base of the skull posteriorly to the base of the tail, where it was

replaced by a series of pale brown bars also not previously visible, From a

site posterior and superiar tu the typanue appeared two sinlarly coloured but

slightly narrower stripes which diverged slightly in the middle of the back,

and then passed beyond the termination of the vertebral stripe, and parallel

ta it, to a point situated approximately one third of the way down the tail

where they merged with the ground colouration,

Since the colour of A. adelaidensis varies so much from one individual to

another, the extremes of the range may be retained after preservation of speci-

anens for museum. collections, and this be a centrihittery cause to the present

confusion of the status of the species,

Stirling and Zietz (1593) found the measurements, of the larger of two

specimens collected between Queen Victoria Spring ane Fraser Range to he:

bely 50 mm.; tail 70 mm. total length 120 mm, Waite (1929) recorded a

specimen measuring: body 48 mm; tail 78 mm, == total length 126 mm. Since

the Nullarbor material inchtded seyeral specimens exceeding these in length,

it is sugyested that the former had not reached maximum size when cuptured,

A form distributed in 8.W. Australia and observed by the writer on the

1A MJ, TYLER

Nullarbor Plain a few miles east of Deakin, lacks the lateral spires at the base

wt the tail.

There exists a very real need for a revision of all species at present with

thie genus Aniphibolurus, for only after such a measure can the distribution of

A. wilelaidensts be correctly determined,

(b) Factars limiting the variety of potential prey

Before discussing the diet of A. adelaidensis, it is advisable to consider

the euvironmental factors, especially seasonal and climatic conditions, which

determine the variety and population density of those insects which can, by

virtue of their size. be regarded as potential prey.

The region where the lizards were captured is one of the most barren

parts of the Nullarbor Plain, Live vegetation consisted of occasional xeraphytic

plants which, because of their high salt concentration, are unsuitable host plants

to any but a few species of specialised insects,

The presence of occasional dense swarms of flies, however, provided a

retninder that the region is not entirely lacking in organic matter.

The temperature at the time of most of the captures was 90°-1L0°F,,

whilst Northerly winds were maintained, which is of interest since it has been

established that wind inhibits the flight of insects, particularly Hies,

It may be presumed that the conditions on the Nullarbor Plain are most

suitable, so far as lepidopterous insects are concerned, for those species capable

of completing their metamorphosis in the short period after the rainy season

when the vegetation is mast prolific, und then adapt themselves to arid con-

cditiuns,

A seasonal variation in the insect population will be reflected by stomach

contents of inscctivoreus lizards. if they are indiscritninate in their feeding habits.

Knowledge of the powers of sight and the stimuli inducing ingestion jn

the Sauria and Batrachia is improperly known, and certainly varies between

ditterent species.

If the feeding mechanism is an automatic one induced solely by the move-

ment of a small object within the animal’s ranve of vision, then the creature

must be an indiscriminate feeder, |

Such a case is well illustrated by the example of large frogs of the family

Kanidae, which were observed by the writer to inhabit a reservoir at Maltepe,

near Istanbul, Turkey, which automatically ingested any small object thrown

near to them, including stones,

The other extreme is where animals ure capable of distinguishing hetween

closcly ullied insect species. as is the case with Moloch horridus discussed carlier.

In this instance sight probably played very little part in the discrimination,

for the species selected was characteriscd by a strong smell (obnoxious to the

human being), which was absent in the species rejected.

As has been seen in Fig, 2, the Hymenoptera was the order of insect

imast Frequently ingested by A, adelaidensis, and it is most dificult ta decide

whither the species discriminated between different types of prey. or whether

availability is the all important factor. Ants were undoubtedly the inseets

inest frequently seen, and would presumably form a high proportion of the

toll insect population were an ccological survey undertaken,

A consideration of many papers on yutions animals led McAtee (1932) Io

coneluce that availability is the all important factor governing the food items

AMPHIBOLURUS ADELAIDENSIS ON THE NULLARBOR PLAIN WT

ingested. This can hardly he considered a complete answer in itself, for species

of similar size and habits in the same region (Cott, 1957) show marked differ-

enccs in the prey selected, Another point previously almost completely ignored

is that individuals within a specics captured under identical couditions differ

widely in prey selected and demonstrated, even in the Batrachia, apparent

individualistic tendencies (Tyler, 1958).

‘The present paper records the diet of A. adelaidensis, which foraging for

food is probably a discriminate feeder, but its limitations reveals the need for

new field techniques for dietary studies upon small animals,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to acknowledge the advice and assistance during the preparation

of this paper extended to me by Mr, F, J. Mitchell (Curator of Reptiles, The

South Australian Museum), Professor R, F. Whelan and Dr. 1. S. cle la Lande

(Bpactaret of Human Physiology and Pharmacology, The University of

Adelaide).

I a also indebted to the staff of the Adclaide Public Reference Library

and the South Australia Museum Library for tracing many publications; to

Miss D. Tinning for typing the manuscripts; and to Mr. M. E. Maude for

assistance rendered in the capture of some of the specimens.

REFERENCES

RBuancraup, FN. and Branenann, F.C. 1931. Size groups and their characteristics in the

salamander Hemidactyltuin. scutatim (Schlegel), Amer. Nat. LXV, pp. 149-164.

Bouencer, G. A., L885, Catalogue of the Lizards in the British Muscum (Natural History),

3nd edition, 2 Vol: London, 8yo.

Coteman, E., 1944. Lizards under domestication, Vict, Nat., Melbourne, 61 (8), pp, 157-138.

Corr, HW. B.. 1957. Adaptive Coloration in Aninuiuls, Methuen,

Davey, IT. W.. 1944. Some lizards T have kept, Viet. Nat., Mathournc. 61 (5), pp. $2-83.

Gray, J. E.. 1841, A catalogue of the species of reptiles and amphibia hitherte described

as inhabiting Australia, with a description of same new species from Western Australia,

uml soni reuia' s on thea geographical distibetion, Grey’s Trav, Aust, 11, p. 439.

Kaerer. G.. 1871. Australian Vertebrata, Fossil and Recent, Yvo.. p. 96.

Leyore, 1896, Remarks on the facene of Lacertilians, Biol. Centralhe. XVI, p. 101. :

Lonexrey, G,, 1940, Notes on certain lizards, Prog, KR. Zool. Soe. New South Wales, 1989-

1940, pp. 34-39.

McAteer, W. L,, 1952. Eltectiveness in Nature of the so-called Protective Adaptations in

the Animal Kingdom, chiefly as iMustrated by the Food Habits of Nearetic Birds,

Smithsonian Misccllancous Collections. 85 (7), 201 pp. and errata sheet of 2 pp.

RicwArpson, J., and Gray, J. E., 1844, The Zoology of the Voyage of H.M,S, Erebus and

Terror. under the command of Capt. James C. Ross, during the years 1§39, 40, 41, 42

and 43: London,

Suavson, G. G., und Ror, A., 19389. Quantitalive Zoology: MeGraw-Hill, New York,

Seine. Bi C., and Zmrz, A., 1893. Vertebrata, Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Austral., XVI, pp.

-176.

Tytrn, M, J., 1958. On the diet and feeding habits of The Edible Frog (Rana esculenta

Linnacus), Proc. Zool, Soc. Lond., Vol. 131 (4), pp. 583-595.

Warre, E. BR. 1929. The Keptiles aud Amphibiaus of South Anstralig. (British Science

Guild Handbook. } ;

Zorrz, F.R., 1920. Catalogne of Australian Lizards, Records of S, Austral. Mus, Vol. 1, No, 3.

DETERMINATION OF THE ABSOLUTE GRAVITY VALUES ON THE

SUMMITS OF A NUMBER OF PROMINENT HILLS IN THE

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES*

BY I. A. MUMME

Summary

Gravity observations have been carried out on a number of prominent hills in the Mount Lofty

Ranges.

DETERMINATION OF THE ABSOLUTE GRAVITY VALUES ON THE

SUMMITS OF A NUMBER OF PROMINENT HILLS IN THE

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES*

By I. A. MumMe

[Read 8 October 1959]

SUMMARY

Gravity observations haye been varricd out on a number of prominent hills

in the Mount Lofty Ranges.

INTRODUCTION

‘The gravity measurements were conducted with a Carter Y2 gravimeter

and the gravity values determined in the Mount Lofty Ranges are based on an

absolute gravity value of 979-7232 gals. at the gravity base station in the

New. Observatory (in the grounds of the University of Adelaide).

In determining the absolute gravity values on the summits of the hills

investigated, it was necessary to establish a number of intermediate gravity

stations.

The observed gravity valucs for the gravity stations on the summits of the

hills were reduced by applying the following corrections:

{3 Elevation correction,

3) Topographic correction,

Bouguer Anomalies were computed by subtracting the theoretical gravity

values for the gravity stations from their reduced gravity values,

PREVIOUS GEOPHYSICAI, WORK

No previous programme of gravity measurements on the summits of hills

have been conducted in South Australia.

However, a number of vravity determinations have been carried out on

the summit of Mount Lofty with gravimeters.

EK. McCarthy, of the Bureau of Mineral Resources. determined the gravity

interval between the Old Observatory (West Terrace, Adelaide) and the Mount

Lofty Summit gravity station with a B.M.R. gravimeter during 1949.

THe obtained a value of 979-5893 gals. for Mount Lofty, which is based

on a value of 979-7219 gals, at the Old Observatory.

From June, 1949, to January, 1952, Muckenfugs, on behalf of Wood's Hole

Occanographic Institute, carried wut world-wide gravimeter observations with

w geodetic Worden gravimeter,

He determined a value of 979-7258 gals. for grayity at the New Observatory

in the University of Adelaide, and a value of 979-5932 gals. for the Mount Lofty

gruvity stations.

The writer obtained a value of 979-5906 gals, for the Mount Lofty gravity

station, which is based on a value of 979°7232 gals. for the New Observatory

gravity station using a Worden gravimeter.

A grayity interval identical with that obtained by Muckenfuss was deter-

mined.

* Published by permission of the Director of Mines, South Austrulia,

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1960), Vol, £3.

MUMME

120

————— OS

1600 -0— £989-6L6 -€: 09.881 LST che 9LL9-6L6 86-0 9-68 F6F'I LL8S-6L6 WH Wary

9610-0— 1989-646 iv TFo881 che hLloFé 619-616 91-0 O-LS Ose 919-646 TH Meg

SS10-0— éB9-6L6 19 OFCBEE eT SToPE 199-616 FE-0 8-L9 Tell 1669-616 THEE AOS

FLOO-0— | TGOL* 616 16° FSO8ET 11 66.F€ LP69-6L6 Té-0 0°69 P86 CCE9-6L6 TEE 8.208.109 9%

9900°0— EL69- 616 16° FSo881 sL+GGoFE 4069-616 Fe-1 OrLL F80'T G619> 616 edaprayed

Se00-0+ 20GL-6L6 16> L8o88T O° GPOPE LEGL- 616 9e-% 9-011 FFe'l CTT9- 646 PrOy Mer “FAL

0é10-0— OPI L646 /9-LE,881 19+ LEOFE OF0L- 616 I¥-$ 8-86L F90°S 8PLO 616 Rod vA Aosaog

£200 -0— IOTL- 6L6 28620881 8° FE oFE 9F0L-6L6 OL°s 6-LIT $96'T 6885-616 | TOUOTP ST WAL

£600-0— GEFL-6L6 19 GPoBET 8+ 8O0PE LEGL-GL6 FI-& 0: O0FI Fees 9068-626, ItuUINg AYO'T “HW

| SEL+6LG | AqozesdasqQ MAN

‘s1ed sjnd “sed “sTesuL “spesur | qeay “‘S[Bs

Aypeurouy Aqrawiry epnysue'yT apnqiyery ALAR IN) UOTqIATIOL) uAigaeido?, ., [P.A9T-BO8 AqAany ualyeyg

zensnog [eorpar0ey, psonpoy =| orydwadodoy, | uoreasi gt iin paarasqg | AQLABIN)

SHONVH ALAOT LNOOW WH NI SNOLLVLS LINWOS

LY ALIAVEY NO SNOLLYANUSHO (1) ATaWL

GRAVITY VALUES IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANCES 121

METHODS USED

The Carter Y2 gravimeter was calibrated by measuring the dial interval

(allowing for instrumental drift) between the New Observatory and the Mount

Lofty gravity station, assuming a gravity interval of 0-1326 gals,, and a factor

of 0:0809 milligals per division was obtained for the sensitivity factor. Gravity

differences between the New Observatory gravity station and the summits of

the hills investigated, were obtained by establishing a number of intermediate

gravity stations and measuring the gravity intervals between successive stations

and thus obtaining the total gravity interval between the New Observatory and

the summit of a particular hill in the Range.

Repeat readings were taken in measuring the gravity intervals and curves

drawn up to allow for instrumental drift.

REDUCTION OF RESULTS

The observed gravity values for the gravity stations located on the summits

of the hills were reduced to mean-sea-level by applying the following corrections.

(1) Elevation Correction

This correction is composed of two components, namely the Free-Air correc-

tion and the Bouguer correction,

The Free-Air correction is a constant correction per unit change elevation

and is equal to 0-0946 milligals per foot.

The Bouguer correction is to allow for the gravitational effect of the rock

material between the gravity. station and the datum Jevel (mean. sea-level),

assuming that the material consists of an infinite plate of rock.

The correction is 0-0127d milligals per vertical foot, where d is the density

of the rock material between the gravity station and mean sea-level,

(2) Topographic Correction,

Due to the hilly nature of the terrain surrounding the gravity station, a

topographic correction had to be applied.

A graticule devised by S. Hammer was used.

THEORETICAL GRAVITY VALUES

The 1930 International Grayity Fornmla was used in obtaining the theoreti-

cal gravity values for the gravity stations at mean sea-level. namely;

Go = 978049 (1 + 0-0052884 sin?¢ — 0- 0000059 sin*24) gals,

Bouguer Anomalies of the gravity stations were calculated by subtracting

theoretical gravity values for the gravity stations from the reduced gravity values

obtained by applying Elevation corrections and topographic corrections.

Wei corrections and theoretical values are brought together in

Table (1).

RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES

By II. H. Fintayson

[Read 8 October 1959]

3 Prares ann Text Fic, 1

CONTENTS

Page

1. Introduction x OF) BE . . 4 . . 123

Distribution and Iabits .. os . ; a a — 125

2. Definition of a Standard Population of R. greyi Gray, 1841-129

(a) External Characters se . s . 180

(b) Dimensions — - be oe . 7 . 134

(d) Cranial and Dental Characters 7 : _s . 136

3. Other Populations of R, greyi .. re a ; . 135

(a) Mainland Districts North of Fleurieu Peninsula .. . 138

(b) Greenly Island rd - " . . 138

(d) South Western Victoria ... ‘, 3 » 142

4. Rattus assimilis Gould .. os a . - : . 144

5. Interrelation of R. assimilis, R. greyi and R. fuscipes Waterhouse 146

1. INTRODUCTION

The original form of this distinctive Australian rat was described by J, E.

Gray (1841) from two cotypes sent to London from South Australia. Captain

G. Grey, who is traditionally credited with being their collector, visited South

Australia unofficially in 1840, before his assumption of the governorship of the

province in the following year, and it has been generally accepted that the

locality “vicinity of Adelaide” quoted in the appendix on mammals in his

Journal, is to be accepted literally in localizing the type. While the circum-

stances of this early Colonial time might be thought to render this probable

enough it cannot be regarded as definitely established and some evidence lo the

contrary is later presented (infra),

No further systematic work was done on the species for more than 80 years,

during which time several “records” of it were later shown (or have come to be

regarded) as crroneous and based on misidentifications (Collett, 1887; Ogilby,

1892: Waite, 1896), It is somewhat remarkable that Gould who also travelled

widcly in the State did not recognise the distinctness of “Mus greyi” of Gray,

but relegated that name to the synomymy of Mus gouldi Waterhouse (now re-

ferred to Thetomys); and later (1858) in describing R. assimilis from New

South Wales, which is sa close to R. greyi as to be considered conspecific by

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, (1960), Vol. 83.

124 W. H, FINLAYSON

some authors, he did not alter thal opinion. In 1921, O. Thomas obtained

further material from Mt. Compass through the good offices of Professar Wood

Jones, then working in Adclaide, and after reviewing the series referred to R,

greyi in the British Museum, concluded that it was not homogeneous, and desig-

nated one of the former cotypes as a lectutype to represent Gray's species. This

specimen [B.M. 41, 1266) jis stated by Tate (1951, 329) to he of the “Gould

Collection”, At the same time, Thomas (ep. cit:) deseribed Rattus culmorum

austrinus from 2 speciinen collected by J.B. Harvey, and donated to the Zoo-

logical Society of London in 1841. Harvey collected both on Kanyaroo Island

and ut Port Lincaln ou Eyre Peninsula and the place af origin of the type of

austrinus is also quite uncertain, Thomas (1921) and Tate (1951) accepting

Kangaroo Island, and Iredale ind Troughton (1934) and Ellerman (1941), Pe,

Lineoln. This dispute would have no relevance here were it not for the fact

that Tate (1951) has been brought to the conclusion that austrinus is a form vf

R. xreyi and not of R, culmorum. Troughton (1920) recorded the persistence of

the species (under the psendonym R. assimilis) on both Kangaroo Island and

Eyre Peninsula,

A second insular representative was discovered by Wood Jones on Poarson

Isles in the Investigutor Group of the Eyre Peninsula coast, aud this was de-

scribed by Thomas (1923) as a full species, Kaltns murrayi. but now more

generally regarded as R. greyi murroyi, Wood Jones (1994, 1925) gave an

excellent general account of both the mainland and island forms and provided

the first Mustrations of the species, In 1936 Brazenor separated a western

Victorian population from the typical form under the name A. 2. ravus; but this

being preoccupied by Epimys racus (= Rattus ravus) of Robinsun and Kluss

was replaced by peccatys by Troughton (1937); ‘Tate (1940) independently

noted the preaccupution of rats atid geestedd brazenoari us a substitute. These

described totms have since been noted and discussed in monographie works on

muridae by illerman (1940-1949) and Tate, 1951. In spite of this consider

able body of work it cannot be said that R. ureyi is a well understood species,

Not only the vagueness in the provenance of early types, but still more, the

tendency to limit the basis of differential characters to the barest. conventiuns

of anuscum systematics, renders the subspecific identification of material from

descriptions, 2 hazardous proceeding.

The Ioeal interest of R. yreyé derives largely from its insular representatives

which are frequently the only mammals on the islets of the continental shelf

which can be obtained in numbers, and which if fully studied might give

valtealile information on the post-Pleistecene history of this area. The immediate

origin of the present paper has heen the necessity of assessing the degree of

ditterentiation which fins heen attained by an island population as compared

with one from the mainland, and in such wark holotypes, however well de-

serihed, are of limited service if unaccompanied by data un topotype series

which can supply the key ta the range of yariation normal to the form they

represent. The correspondence or divergence of individual specinens of

closely related and intergrading forms may be largely a matter of chance,

but population trends, as shown by the frequency with which characters recur,

is likely to. be much more significant of aflinity’.

Although several considerable series of R. ereyi are stated to exist in col-

lections, both in this country und overseas, no adequate analysis of their charac-

ters is available for such a purpose as T have indicated. Between 1936 and 1939

during the course of field work by the writer in the Fleuricu Peninsula, chiefly

upon the associated species R. lutreola, a considerable series of R. greyi wus

obtained as a hy-product. This material, personally collected uver a restricted

RATEUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES 1G

area and fully authenticated with field data, Inds itself well in making goad this

deficiency, which forms the chief content of the sequel. The series 1s then used

as 4 standard in a re-examination of other groups both insular and mainland,

which are available here, and in addition, the distribution, status, and habits of

the species are briefly discussed and some details given of its behaviour in

captivity.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS

The present distribution of the species, as far as it is known, invalves 4

narrow subcoastal strip extending from the Portland district of western Victoria

tu the southern portion of Eyre Peninsula in South Australia and some of its

off-lying islands, and is thus almost entirely within the territory of the latter

State. Its eustern extension in Victoria, however, raay be considerably greater

than is supposed, as it tends to be masked by the overlap with the very similar

R. assimilis, the most westerly record of which appears to be ut Beech Forest

in the Otway Peninsula of Victoria,

The range thus interpreted is one of the most restricted for Australian rats,

but if Tate's suggestion (1951) is adapted of considering A. greyt as a sub-

specific south-western off-shoot of R. assimilis, the combined range is then prob-

ably the most extensive, the forms R. a. coracits extending to north Qucensland

and R. a. manicatus to the Arafura coast of the Northern Territory, The absence,

so far as known, of any representative of the species group in Tastmania and

the frequency of its occurrence on the islands of the South Australian coast,

is a significant point in its distribution, Shortridge (1936) claimed R. greyi (as

distinct from R, fuseipes) as a member of the Western Australian fauna, but

this is not confirmed by Glauert (1950). Tate (op. cit.) suggests that such

an extension was established during the last pluvial phase of the Pleistocene

and has lapsed during subsequent ey times, but he was inclined to underrate

the arid tolerance of modern RB, ezreyi as shown, for example, by the dune colonies

of Eyre Peninsula and some of its islands, and it may yet be found to extend

much further along the south coast in this direction also.

In South Australia at the present lime if is well established in the southern

portion ef the Mt. Lofty Range and on Kangaroo, Greenly, Pearsons, Nth.

Neptune, and Gambier Islands and probably on several other islets off the coast.

It occurs much more sparsely in the lower South-eastern Distvict and persists

alsa in small numbers along the costal portion of the Adelaide-Wakefield Plain

and in the seuthern portion of Fyre Peninsula, The early obliteration buth

af fauna and vegetative cover by farming aperations in large portions of lower

South Australia, neccssarily leads t 4 patchy, discontinuous distribution common

to mast loca) murnmals at present, but how far this was tue of the pre-European

era and tw» what extent the present occupied areas were formerly linked, is

largely conjectural, Its survival north of Adelaide, in sheltered, umutilized

spots, such as the mangrove belts, suggests that it may formerly have occupied

many of the timbered portions of the wheat lands of the Lower North ancl sf

Yorke Penisula. It is absent from the major expanses of the Mallee, and sub-

fossil records do nof appreciably extend the existing distribution.

Today, m the hill tracts south of Adelaide, wherever sufficient cover has

been left for its needs, it holds out in small numbers and seems uble tu survive

the attentions of both the fox and domestic eat, and is ane of the very few native

mammals which are at all likely to be taken here by randum trapping. Twenty

years ago. before the use of trace elements led to a phenomenal increase of

pasture and sheep breeding, the portion of the Fleurieu Peninsula south of the

126 TT, 4. FINLAYSON

watershed and including the valleys of the creeks between the Waitpinga in

the cast and the Tapanappa in the west, was an almost virgin wilderness and

R. greyi was in very large numbers here and almost ubiquitous, Tt could be

trapped with almost equal certainty on dry laterite ridges under stands of

stringy bark timber , Susalyntas oblique and E. baxteri) and dwarf eucalypt

scrubs or in the tangled jungly growth along the swampy heads of creeks; the

former, however, and hill slopes with moderate cover of hracken und xanthorrhea

were the more characteristic stations. In this area it had no marsupial come

petitors and lew effective predatm's and the periodic bushy fires which swept the

creek valleys from the divide down to the sea were the only cause of large

scale arate From these disasters, however, it made rapid recoveries and re-

vecupied the burnt country with remarkable specd. Its relations with R, lutreala

which also has a firm hold on this country will be more particularly discussed

elsewhere, but it may be remarked that it is a much more wide ranging and

adaptable animal than the latter and only comes into competition with it in

the immediate vicinity of the vestricted ltreola colonies which are usually in

damp areas near the creek heds or in wet swanips. Unlike the west Vietarian

and Kangaroo Islund populations which make considerable living burrows in

suitable soils the local form of the Fleurieu Peninsula docs not narmully burrow,

but shelters in or under fallen logs and in matted banks of grass and sedges

and dried fern, Lven where very plentiful it is quite inconspicuions, leaving

no well-defined runways and being seldom seen hy day.

Some information on the feeding habits has heen obtained by the examina-

tion of stomach contents of considerable numbers from the Flenrieu Peninsula;

this consists most frequently of a dark coloured, finely ground pulp in whieh

setd case fragments form the chief recognisable constitkent. Incineration of the

dried mass yields an ash rich in sand which gives colour to the view that sub-

terranean materials are largely used for food, This had been inferred indepen-

dently from the frequency with which the rat had been trapped on burut clear

ings under Hmber where the soil was. much searred by fresh, shallow excava-

tiotes, About one-half the stomachs contained appreciable quantities. of insect

material representing both Coleeptera und Orthoptera, und in two cases a

Neshy muss derived, at least in part, from an Amphibian, No trace: of ereen

vegetation could be detected. The available evidence, therefore, suggests that

in Uds district at least, seeds, ruots and tubers are the chief eloments of the dict,

with 4 not unimportant intake af insects and small vertehrates, Lt is Very easily

(rapped with a yariety of haits of which bread, fat and sliced apple were found

about equally effective,

The stumach frequently carries a heavy infestation af a nematode, identi-

fied by Mrs. I. M, Thomas as a Physaloptera species, aut several unidentified

ectoparasites uceur, of which the most important quantitatively is a Laelaps

species.

As regards repraduction, the data is scanty and the evidence mostly negative

as the greater part of the Fleurieu Peninsula series was ubtained at times when

reproduction was largely suspended, However, by combining such infurmatiun

as it yields, bath in the field and in captivity, with that frum other South Aus-

tralian mainland localities and fron: Greenly and Gambicr Islands and western

Victoria, it may be seen that, in the mule, testes first underse a sndden-enlarge-

ment and become serotal in site in July and August and may be found so till

the following February; and that in the Female activity in the form: of observed

littering of wild caught rats in captivity, and lactation and pregnancy in the

wild, extend from September till February. While the evidence from ‘auy one

locality is adequate for a positive statement, the combined data might be

RATTUS GREY! GHAY ANT ETS DERIVATIVES 137

taken as indicating that the overall reproductive pattern for the species is onc

aft activity from lale winter or early spring to lute summer (July-February) and

that there is a period of quiescence in autumn and eurly winter (March-Junc),

Vulval occlusion is ubseut in the Fleurieu Peninsula series and in other muin-

Jand material has becn noted in one example only; a subadult fram the Meadows

Creek urea, slightly north of the main scries, in Apmil. 1( is more frequent in

a Greenly Island collection (infra). The number of litters per year is not

ascertained. In the single littering ohserved in captivity four young were pro-

dieed, hut in western Victoria, six full-term uterine embryos were observed in

hwo cases,

Numbers of R. vreyi taken in the Fleuricn Peninsula were kept in captivity

for varying periods under conditions similar tu those described for Pseudomys

(Cyomys) anodemoides in my paper of 1944. Ona diet of mixed grain, pututnes

and hurd fruit, whieh was always present in the cuges in excess of require-

ments, and supplemented by a small ration of egg, honey, powdered milk une

fat bacon, it appeared to thrive and produced and reared young. Water svas

drunk sparingly when supplied, but is not essential, and two groups, one captive

born and one wild, lived through a hot summer without it.

in general, it proved to be a vigorous, restless and agressive little evealure.

The males made almost ceascless attempts to escape and frequently succeeded by

snawing holes in the wire netling, but the escapees made little use if theit

freedom, seemed wonplissed by their enlarged surronndings and were usually

easily retrapped in the vicinity ot the cages. [ eannot confirm Woud Jones’

1995) description of its “gentle” character, Its failure to bite when handled

\ which is not invariable) seams to be due to a paralysis vf fear rather than

to tolerance, and though it may not move away when touched, it frequently

trembles, its tail beats an invuluntary tattoo and its eyes bulge in their sockets,

Tinpressions of temperament no doubt depend on the soeial balance of the

communities observed. The groups whieh € have watched always contained

an excess of males and under these conditions it appears in a very differant liylit.

Its libido during the season is quite tisatiable and under stress of sexual com-

petition it wages relentless wur on all rivals real or potential and either kills or

incapacitates them or enforces 2 recognition of its dominance. New additions

{a the colony were always treated with hostility though they all came from a

very restricted area of the Peninsula, On at least one vecasion house mice

straying into the cage were killed and caten,

Natural vegetation from the site of @uptire was used lo carpet the cages

and hallow logs and nest boxes were provided for shelters; these were generally

vecupied by pairs, but solitary males often made grass nests for themselves in

the corners, either of an open enp-shaped form (Pl 2. Tig. A) or a much

larger domed structure, with an entrance ner the base (PI, 2. Fig. B). Much

time and labour were expended in constructing these nests, which are not just

random heaps of material, but were made by interweaving selected stems.

They were demulished and rebuilt at freqient titeevals, and nest building is

evidently am important natural industry uf the species, Transference of 4

yroup to a new cage was always Followed by a tremendous burst of activity.

all crannies and furnishings being examined in minute detail and maved it

possible, At sich times it ventured out trecly in daylight, but ordinarily its

activities were strietly tochirnal, Il gave no evidence of any special clinthing

ability, and though it clambered about the netting un occasion, it made na use

of the perches provided. The voice is much in evidence in young animals, but

adults are rather silent, except when fighting or threatened, when (hey squeal

harshly. The ectuparasite Laelaps sp, which is almost always normally present

i324 H. HH. FINLAYSON

in the wild, tends to increase unduly in captivity but may be checked by fre-

quently dusting with pyrethruro.

The following serial notes cover some points of general interest in the de-

velopment of a litter in caplivitv. The female, having left her mate and begun

to make a nest separately, was transferred alone to a smaller cage, where four

young Were born next day (September 8) at unascertained intervals, They were

uniformly pink on all surfaces and smooth and very vacal, using a shrill bird-

like call when left in the cold by the mother. If disturbed at the nest she fre-

quently jumped out, dragging some of the young with her, but they did sot

adhere firmly to the nipples. Vhe female had but four of the tea mammiae

functioning — two inguinals and twa peetorals.

At Hanis: The young were removed from the nest, examined and weighed,

using a stoppered weighing bottle: weight 5 g. They were now perceptibly

darker above than below and wrinkled; the mysticial vibrissac quite apparent

and all white. When returned to the nest. the young were immediately flung out

by the mother and rolled to and fro on the srass of the floor with her hands

for a minute or more, She then took them in her mouth and carefully replaced

them in the nest. This decontamination rite was frequently, but not invariakly,

curried’ out on future occasions of handling.

At 9 days: Dorsum now much darker than ventrum and completely clothed

in a fine lead coloured down which is tinged with yellow on nape. The nestlings

were vigorous but not capable of locomotion.

ct 12 days: All young weighed 8 ».; pelage considerably advanced, the

yellow areas extending nearly ta the rump and on the outer aspect of the fore-

limb a conspicuous patch of lead coloured underfur bas appeared. Thougli still

blind) they could now seramble slowly over a bench, ‘The three males were

recognisable by minute paired spots of piginented epidermis on the scrotal sites.

it L6 days: Pelage naw markedly thicker, but of the same length and cover-

ing Ul the trunk and limbs but not the ears nor tail. The young were able to

remnain balanced on all four limbs and to walk an inch or two.

At 19 days; Weight LO g.; furring of body and appendages complete; un

the tail both seutation and hairs were apparent und its dorsal surface distinctly

darker than below; dorsum of the pes haired with pure white on the toes only,

that on the metatarsal urea heing slightly darkened at base. The sales of the

pes were now darkened ta.2a pale slate colour, but the palms of the manus, pink.

Al 4 weeks: Eyes opened on the 22nd day. When removed from the nest

the young jumped freely and ran and climbed about the cage and when handled

made drbermined attempts to bite: the lower incisors were still white.

AtS weeks: 4 13g; 6 lly: 6 13g 9 13g. The pigmented scrotal sites

ace still conspicuuus and in the female there is no vulval oeelusion, Though

they were not seen to voluntarily leave the nest they undoubtedly do so. at night

aud are taking solid tood freely. Both upper and lower incisors were now

yellow, but the former much darker. On the 34th day one of the 13 ¢. males

was Found dead; head and body, 73; tul, ffl, pes, 20; ear, 15:5 * 105 rhinarium

to eye, 12; oye tu ear, 12; skull greatest Jength, 25-6. The third molar had not

yet erupted.

At 6 weeks; Anuther male finind dead and partly eaten; the survivors

weighed ¢ l4g;, 9° 16¢,

At weeks: 4 2345 2 334. The young had not been under close obser-

vation since Just weighing und the remarkable disparity in size was quite um

expected; the male appeared to be entirely normal and healthy and active but

was tnuth less bulky than the female. Areas of exposed epidermis were still

relatively unpigmented and when exposed to sunlight or handled, the light

RATTUS GREYE GRAY AND ITS DIENIVATIVES 125)

coloured parts of manus, tail, pes and rhinarium, but not the ears, became deep

pink. They were still comparatively leggy and awkward; they climbed ahout

the netting more than adults but showed on agility at it. The male. having

siven evidence of rut, the dam was removed from the care.

At 10 weeks: 3 30 %.; 27 38 & At this time the pair made a grass nest

exactly as fabricated by the wiid born rats, and shared it. Regular observation

and weighing had to be abandoned at this point, but in the next six months

the young weathered their first summer successfully on the standard diet and

without water. They were somewhat tamer than wild caught specimens, but

the male always attempted to bite when handled. The pelage was now gener-

ally similar to that of the duller coloured adults, but less dense and glossy, and

with fewer guard hairs and correspondingly reduced grizzle.

At 87 weeks: The female was found dead, having delivered four premature

young; head und body, 136; tail, 130; pes 27-5; car, 19 « 11-5: weight 80 g.;

these dimensions ure still somewhat below the approximate means of adult wild

fernales, as selected by molar wear in the sequcl (infra).

The surviving male was mixed in with a wild caught group of both sexes,

but after resisting steady persecution for six months with varying success, he

was removed to a cage of his own where he vutlived the entire colony, dying

during w heat wave on January 13, 1939, when day temperatures rose to 113 deg.

in the shade; head and body, 151; tail, incomplete; pes, 27; ear, 20 * 12: wt.

145 g.; skull greatest length, 35:1, These values for head and body und weight

exceed the approximate means of the adults of the wild canght series, but sume

others, notably the pes. are much lower, though all fall within the range except

the weight. This exceeds the maximum for the wild caught group by JO per

cent. and was due to exeessive fat. The skull length barely attains the minimum

for the wild “adult” group subsequently measured (infra).

The death of this male at two years four months of age was almost certainly

Iremature und probably due to heat apoplexy, Though the skull characters may

vive been modified by captivity, they do not suggest an aged condition, when

compared with the oldest of the wild series. A life span for the species in

nature of three or our years seems probable-

2, DEFINITION OF A STANDARD POPULATION OF

R. GREYT CREYT GRAY, 1841

The material examined below, which is later used as a standard series for

assessing the status of other populations, was taken near the heads of the Cal-

lawonga, First, Boat Tlarbour, Tapanappa und Blacklellows Creeks in the

Weurien Peninsula at the southern extremity of the Mt. Lofty Range. That it

may be accepted as representative of the primary subspecies is indicated (within

the limitations inherent in such comparisons) by the consonance of the lectotype

with the range of variation now described and by the specific statement of

Thomas (igen) that Wood Jones’ donation from Mt. Compass was in agree-

ment with the lectotype; this locality being but x few miles north in the ranges

anal presenting very similar ecological conditions to those of the drumage of

the creeks named.

A. strict interpretation of the term “vicinity of Adelaide” might put the

type locality on the coastal Adelaide-Wakefield plain, which has some claim to

be considered as a disline! natural region, differing from the highlands fitty miles

te the south, which yielded the present material, in lower rainfall, higher mean

feed) W. UW. TINLAYSON

temperatures and, of course, in soils and vegetation. As will be shown later,

the few specimens which are certainly known frum this plain, show slight differ-

ences, and give colour to the vizw that the type locality les in the Hills district

to the south.

The Fleurieu series comprises 45 individuals representing an adequate range

of sexual, seasonal and age phases; approximately one half of it is in the form

Ps skins and skulls, with the rainainder aleohol preserved. ‘The sex ratio is

254 2229).

(1) EXTRBANAL CHARACTERS

Size sroall; the plase of the spectes under consideration being, one of the

smallest of Australian rats. Limbs and appendages slender and delicate and the

body build light and gracile, the dumpiness, which has been remarked (Wood

Jones, 1925), being due to posterior lengthening of pelage rather than to a

somatic character. The head (Pl. 3, Fig. A) is relatively large in comparisun

to body length and gencral bulk and has a well arched profle and but medium

rostral development. The ear is thin in substance, bluntly rounded and carricd

cunspicuously free from the head fur. The eye is large and prominent, and

under emotional stress is capable of a remarkable degree of protrusion.

The facial vibrissae are relatively very strongly developed in R. greyt; all

sets are well represented and the mysticials, yenals and supraorbitals in par-

tictdar are very fosk thongh slender bristles with extremely. attenuated tips. As

they are much subject to shortening by abrasion and breaking, the lengths

quated have been taken from a selected group of apparently undamaged

examples, and except for the mysticials which wlone have been used compara-

nvely, the maximum observed length only is quoted. ‘The counts have been

made on fully furred examples, which in the case of the smaller bristles, present

more diffeulty than in earlicr nude or part furred stages, sa that these numbers

are subject ta correction.

In the mysticial set, the shorter, anterior, members are white for the greater

part of their length, the remainder blackish brown with white tips; length in

adults ranges from 42-33 with an approximate mean of 46-7; the three longest

examples were supplicd by males, but the mean for females is almost as high

(46-U ef. 47-4), The genal set is most frequently reduced to a single bristle,

hut rarely two of almost the same length and set very closely together, may he

present; maximum 29 mm. Supraorbitals apparently normally two. though only

a sinvle bristle survives im some and a third very small member may be present

in others: these, with the yenals, have the same colour distribution as the longer

mysticials; maximum 32 mm, <A postoral papilla is strongly and consistently

developed at a site about 6 mm, behind the oral canthus and supports three

hristles, the longest (to 14 mm,) being dark at base and white tipped and the

ather two entirely white. The snbmentals are often diffeult to delimit as a

metliin group since numergus irregularly disposed bristles extend fram the

midline across to the angle af the mouth, where they are often longer than on

the name site: the longest nuted wis 7mm, and all are white to base. The

imferramals are also difficult to define in furred material owing to a tendency

of the median papilla to break up into two or even three separate papillac, cach

revided with sensory hairs so Thal a total oF six or more muy he present; Lhe

argest complement noted on the median site was four. and the maximum length

14 mim.: these, like the submentals, are all white to the base.

The manus (PI. 3, Figs. C and D) is slewder and narrow, with a length

from the base of the metacarpal pads to the summit of the apical pads ( excluding

RATTUS CREYE GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES Wi

claw) ranging in fully adult examples from £3-0-14-0 mm, and the breadth

transversely across the palm from the base of the 2nd digit from 4:5-5+0 mm.

yielding un supproximate mean breadth/length ratio of 0-37; the Srd digit tu

5-5 mm. anil its claw to 2-5 mm. as maxima. The digital formula (length oaly)

is 3>4>2>5>1 but 4>3 occurs rarely, and the 4th digit is always the

stontest. The claws are moderately developed, yellow horn coloured and with

a free projection about equal to the apical pads and lightly fringed with

bristles. The pollex is relatively well developed and its nail is large anu cun-

spicuous dorsally. The general colour of the palmar surface in life is pink;

the central portions are deeply creased hut not punctate nor granular, The

ereoves of the palmar surface. of the digits are deeply incised and the 4-3 semi-

annular ridges which they enclose are prominent and entire distally, but the

proximal two are commonly broken wp into scales, in a more decided fashion

than is usual in Australian Retius,

The pultnar pads are smooth and rounded in outline but are relatively large

and with bold relief; the surfaces are feebly striate. The interdivitals are

mounted on prominent folds of integument which in available illustrations

(Wood Jones (1925). Brazenoy (1936) op. cit.) ure not always distinguished

from the pads themselves, su that very different conditions appear to he attri-

buted to the species. The metacarpals vary considerably in shape and arca

and have extensiuns on tu the lateral aspects of the manus, which complicate

the overall appraisal under these heads. The outer metacarpal (bypothenar)

is always the longer and extends lower towards the carpus and in palmir aspect

is nsually twice as long as bread, and & pointed oval in shape. The inner meta-

carpal is shorter and broader and is sometimes equal and rarely greater in area

than the outer; its palmar portion is roughly an inverted U or bell shape, with

a depression between the arms and an accessory fold on the lateral aspect

towards the pollex, separated from the main portion by a distal notch. The

interdigitals arc somewhat more constant, the most frequent shape being an

inverted broad piriform for the median pad and inverted cardiform [or the

dst and 3rd. The 3rd interdigital has a small circular satellite pad at its postero-

external angle with a frequency of about 90 per cent., which, however, may be

reduced to a dependant heel or disappear altogether. In point of arca the pre-

vailing pad formula is; outer metacarpal > inuer metacarpal > 2nd interdigital

eu > Ist', but as shown above the metacarpals may be cqual, or the inner

te larger,

Neither median antebrachial ner anconcal vibrissae were traced on the

forelimb in the available material; (he ulnar carpals are 4-5 in number, arranged

in two groups, and are pure white to base with the longest of the set reaching

13 mm, as a maximum,

The pes, relative to head and body length, is one of the longest amongst

Australian species of Rattus, with an approximate mean value in adults of 19°7

per cent. of the head and body, and also one of the narrowest, the ratio oF

breadth across the sole fron the base of the Ist diuit, to the length, averaging

ebout 0-22. It tapers gently for most of its lenvth and hus a well constricted

calceancal purtions the 3rd digit reaches 7 min., ity claw 305 mm. and the hallux

4 min., as maxima. The digital formula is as in the manus and the 4th digit

again usually the stoutest; the claws sharp and delicate, coloured as in the

manus, but with longer fringing bristles which may exceed them by their own

length, Digital rings increased to 6 on the 2nd, 3rd and 4th and all except

the distal member divided into 2 (or basally into 3) large seales. The volour

1 The 2nd of the primitive pentaditctyl manus.

1a2 H, H. FPINLAYSON

of the sole is pale pink with the central portions sometimes darkened with an

mfusion oF slate, which, huwever, davs nut extend to the pads.

The planter pads ave strongly developed and more definitely striate than

in the manus, The inner metatarsal in this series is notable in being broader

than usual an generally lacks the Jong, drawn-out, comma-shuped tail, commun

in the genus; in shape it is an irregular oval narrowing proximally but with its

maximum breadth often more than half its length, The cuter metatarsal is

broad oval or nearly round and only one-quarter or less of the area of the inner.

The median interdigitals are regularly pirifurm and the laterals inverted cardi-

farm; the Ist with a slight depression towards the heel, and the 4th with 4 distinct

separate satellite pad at the postero-cxternal angle in 50 per cent. of cases only;

in the temainder, it may be represented by an accessory fuld or heel ar be

entirely absent (20 per cent.): much more rarely a heel or satellite may appear

al the base of the Ist interdigital. In adults, the most frequent size relation is:

inner metatarsal > 3rd interdivital > or = 3nd >4th > Ist > outer metatarsal:

this accounts for 85 per vent, of cuses, but it is characteristic of the species that

the lateral interdigitals are large with respect to the median and a conditiun

of subequality between all fuur may be reached; in two cases the median inter

digitals are larger than the inner metatarsal.

Caleaneal vibrissae wure nut traced,

The tail is slender and gently tapered, with attenuuted apex and no ter-

minal expansion. he relation of its Iength to that of the head and body ranges

from 85-110 per cent, with an approxfmate mean of 94-3 per cent. In the group

of seven species which have been chiefly used in these comparisons and com-

prising R. ereyi. assimilis, lutreola, villosissimus, colletti, norvegicus, and BR.

dlexandrinus, this mean is exceeded by the latter alone. In the entire serics of

R. areut from the Fleurieu Peninsula, the length of tail equals or exceeds that

of the head and hoedy in about 24 per cent. of cases and the distribution of the

freguency of this relation shows only slight differences betwoen ¢ und 2

(26 ef. ZI per cent.) and adults and subadults (22 of. 25 per cent,), so that the

variation in this feature fs very largely an individual one. Scale counts were

wot made upon animals in the ficld, but as the range observed in alcohol pre-

servexl material and in filled skins is identical, it is probable that the results

uvbtained are characteristic of this furm. The middorsal count in adults ranges

fim 12-14 per om., 13 scales haying the highest freqnency (54 per cent.) and

14, 38 per cent. Proximally, the dorsal count averages slightly less, while dis-

tally it may rise as high as 21 per cm, at the apex, In subadalt and immature

phases the count is decidedly higher, the middursal number ranging from 13-15

per em. with frequencies of 44 per cent. for L5 scales, 31 per cent. for 14 and

25 per cent. for 13. ‘he number of hairs per scale is normally three, but shows

cosiderable irregularity dorsally, especially towards the base, where it may

vary from one to three, The length of tail hairs is fram 2-25 scales middorsally

aid increases distally. The tail is decidedly darker above than below in 4

large majority of specimens, both scales and hairing contributing to the etfect,

but the degree of the difference varies widely and it may be almost as pale

above as below, but is sever darker below, Light coloured epidermal markings,

possibly traumatic in origin, are sometimes present and rarely as mmch as 20

mm, at the apex may be entirely white, both as to epidermis and hair.

The mammery formula in lactating females examined is 2-3 = 10, but in

subadults or quiescent adults, the nipples are very completely retracted and in

many af these the pectoral and sometimes the thoracte us well, could not be

traced by ordiniry macroscopic examination under a lens, but whether they

are completely suppressed as implied by Wood Jones (op. cit.) remains to be

RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES 133

shown. As mentioned above, in a female lactating in captivity for four young,

only four of the ten were functioning; two pectorals and two abdomino-inguinals.

The pectoral and thoracic nipples lie respectively just in advance and just behind

the insertion of the forelimb and upon lines which diverge posteriorly, the

thoracic being always more laterally sited. The abdomino-inguinals show con-

siderable variation in pattern due to changes in both the lateral and antero-

posterior intervals separating them. An evenly-spaced cresventic arrangement

(Text Fig. 1 A) is frequent, but a rectilinear form in which the 2nd and 3rd

6 © ° fo)

1] 1©) 6

1) © © ©

0} 10)

oOo oOo

Fig. 1.

Diagram showing extremes of variation in the mammary

pattern of R. greyi greyi (x 1-0 eu.).

are nearer both to the midline and to one another, than to the Ist, also occurs

(Text Fig. 1 B) as well as intermediate conditions. The B pattern is apparently

that noted by Tate (1951) in the form R. g. peccatus from West Victoria. The

intervals represented in the diagrams were measured with the limbs extended

laterally to the maximum. The first (lower abdominal) lies well in advance

of the insertion of the hind limb.

The testis is relatively very large and at its maximum development in the

scrotum has diameters of 23 and 14 mm. approximately and weighs about 2 g.;

it is as large as in the much bulkier R, lutreola of the same habitats, but a more

squat oval in shape. The scrotum is well furred except at the caudal extremities,

which are nude and have the epidermis pigmented dark gray. The epidermis

of the perineal site in the female is also darkened slightly, but the pigment is

134 Il. H. KINLAYSON

diffused and wot concentrated on the two distal sites us in the male, In adults

the genital tubercle has a free projection of about 8 mm, in both sexes-

Sexual variation in external characters except where noted in the avcount is

slight or largely obscured by individual variation.

(b) DIMENSTONS

The four chief dimensions quoted were obtained as follows: Head and

buely—This. is the total length of the dorsal contour, minus the tail length. Tail—

The length of the ventral surface of the tail from the posterior margin of the

anus ta apex of the last vertebra, excluding the terminal lair. The measure-

ment is made with the tail Hexed at right angles to the body. Pes—The length

uf che plantar surface from the extremity of the heel to the extremity of the

most distant apical pad, exchiding the claw, the digits being straightened and

in line with the metatarsal. Zar—Length from the lowest point of the traguid

natch to the apex of pinna:

The figures give the ranye and approximate mean for two overlapping age

eroups; (1) an adult plus aged group of 10 males and 6 females in which all

molar crowns have sustained sufficient wear to obliterate the pattern of indi-

vidual cusps and replace it by one of transverse lophs and in whicli rostral de-

velopment is marked and the zygomatic outline untapered, and (2) an advanced

subadult group of 9 males and 13 females in which all cusps show appreciable

wear and the rostral development is less. In the adult group the range and

approximate mean of the percentage relation of length of tail, pes, and car, to

that of head and body, follow the absolute dimensions. Head and body and tail

are to the nearest mm,; others to the nearest 0-5 inm,

1, Head and body, ¢ 138-159 (146-7), 9 139-155 (145-0); tail, 4 130-

133 (189-7), S4-7-110-0 (96-1) per cent, 9 127-146 (134-6), 83-9-L04-0

(925) per cent: pes, ¢ 27-32 (29-3), 17-2-22-2 (19--) per cent, 9 28-25°5

(28:2), 18:1-20-1 (19-4) per cent; car Jength, ¢ 20-22 (21-1), 13-3-15-8

(14:3) per cent, ?@ 19-21-5 (20-2), 13-1-14-6 (13-9) per cent.; eur breadth,

£ 11-135 (12-2), @ 11-13 (12-1); rhinarium to cye, ¢ 17-19 (18-4), 9 16-19

(17-9), eye to ear, § 13-35-16 (14:3), 2 14-16 (15-1); weight in grammes, 4

80-LI2 (92-7), 9 T0-00 (82-6).

2. Head und body, ¢ 190-146 (131-8), @ 129-145 (131-8); tail, g 1I5-

137 (125-()), 2 115-1385 (123-2); pes, @ 27-30-35 (28-5), 2 26-5-29 (27-8),

ear length, 4 19-21 (19:7), ? 18-21 (19-7); ear breadth, 2 10-14 (11-9), 9

10-13:5 (11-8); rhinarium to eye, ¢ 16-18 (17-0), 2 16-18 (16-9); eye to ear,

(133-15 (14-1), 9 18-15 (13-8); weight in grammes, g 56-85 (87-4), 9

51-75 (65-7),

Though there is a wide overlap in all dimensions between the sexes, it

would appear that in folly adult animals, the female is approximately equal to

the mule in head and body length, but is decidedly lighter when non-pregnant

(10 per cent.) and uverayes slightly shorter in pes, ear and tail. The enormous

example quoted by Wood Jones (1925, 304) with a head and body length of

186 mm. has no near counterpart in this series. The very low foot length of

26 inm. associated with it, suggests that the former may be oa typographical

enor.

(ce) PELAGH

The pelage is fne and soft and in prime condition is dense and copious and

middersally consists of Uiree piles: (1) a fine silky underfur of nearly uniform

diameter and 18 mm. long; the basal two-thirds is a deep slate (near Ridgway’s

RATCUS GREYT GRAY AND TUS DERIVATIVES a5

dark plumbeous) and the terminal one-third is broken up into three colour

bunds, successively dark brown black, a bright tan between ochraceous tuwny

and ochraceous orange, and the extreme tip again brown black; this pile is

both quantitatively and chromatically the most important clement in the pelage;

(2) # second pile may reach 25 mm. in Jength and is made up of much smaller

numbers of hairs with flat shafts which hraaden in the upper third of their

length; they are plumbecus at base, but with the terminal 6 mm. brown black

and the extreme tip buff or ivory: (3) a sparse admixture of guards whieh reach

350m, in length and darken from plimbeous tu brown black over their distal

half. Posteriorly the three sets of hairs may lengthen to 20, 30 and 45 mm.

respectively, and over the nimp and sides un imcreasing proportion of the latter

are tipped with white or ivory. :

The gencral colour effect dorsally is a fine almost uniform grivzle of rich

tan, brown black and buff or ivory which almost entirely phseures the basal

slate colour and when vwewed from it littl: distance approximates to Ridgway’s

cianamon brown in the warmest and lightest colonred individuals, and to bistre

in the coldest and darkest.

The sides are lighter than the back owing to a progressive weakening of

the subterminal band to a butty brown and reduetion in the overlay of black

tipped guards, but in most individuals the lateral surfaces remain distinetly

grizzled and the passage to the pale ventrum is abrupt. Mid-ventrally, there

are two piles; an undertur 10 mm, long with its basal § mm. a somewhat lighter

pluinbeous than dorsally and with the tips greyish white or pale buff and a

sparse intermixture of guards 15 mm, long which are slate with the distal flat-

jened 5 sim, white or near white. The basal slate shows through more than

on the dorsum and the general colour here is a wreyish white with a more om

less deeided wash of yellow or bulf over the belly. Gray (1841) singled out

this variation of the yellow tone of the ventrum in his original description; but

in the whole of the present series it is appreciable and sometimes decided over

the mid-belly, while the throat, chest and perineal arcas may remain grey

white. In a few exampics there is au invasion of the belly area just in advance

al the insertion of the hind limb, by the buff or hrown of the sides.

The facial areas and crown are paler aud more buffy than the back, Hugh

still well grizzled. The ear backs in dried material are usually darker than

the head, chiefly owing to the blackish pigmentation of the epidermis, the very

seant hairing being a pale brown externally and greyish white internally — in

a small proportion, liowever, greyish ear backs lighter than the head are

present. The outer aspects of the forelimb are greyer than elsewhere — about

Ridgway’s light drab, and long haired, and just above the carpus & conspicuous

dark brown black markiny is constantly developed, sharply contrasted with the

silvery white carpus and manus; the hairs of the latter, hawever, are usually

pale brown at base and there is sumetimes a very slight grizzling of all<dark

hairs over the metacarpus. The outer asprets of the hind limb are brows bHke

the sides, with a slight darkening ahove the caleancum sometimes developed,

and with the dorsum of the pes as in the manus.

The tail is thinly clad with short hairs closely adpressed mid-dorsally and

then fifting and lengthening slightly distally. Tn untaded pelage. the dorsal

surtaee is decidedly darker (both as to hairs and epidermis) than the ventral —

the tnid-dorsal hairs being near bistre darkening to near black at the apex, while

om the sides und beneath they are greyish white proximally and various shades

of weak brown, distally. However, as mentioned above, as a result of whut

are 10 doubt periodic changes in each Individual, dark strongly bicolor tails

and others whic are eynally pale on all surfaces, may be seen at all seasems.

136 H. Ho FINLAYSON

Variation of a strictly individual kind is well shown by the series and may

be scen in examples of cqually fresh and copious pelage, trapped at the same

time on the same site, In such cases it is due chiefly to marked differences in

the tone and length of the subterminal band of the first pile and to the length

und profusion of the black overlay of the second and third —the white tips of

the fatter are tuo sparse to have appreciable effect, In examples with a short

subterminal band of relatively weak colour (ochraceous buff) with a heavy

averlay of second pile and guards, dark blackish brown scarcely grizzled cuats

result, whereas, with a broad richly coloured band of ochraceous orange and

few guards, the coat becomes strongly rufescent and appears markedly grizzled,

in addition to these individual differences, there are others due to pro-

gressive fading and delapidation of the pelage, resulting in a general weakening

of the colour and a change of hue, caused by the showing through of the shite

basal colour zone of all three piles. This leads to pale fluffy coats of a slightly

avellaneous tinge, approaching wood brown, which is also more or less charac-

teristic of early immaturity, I am of opinion that this phase has unduly influ-

enced some existing descriptions of the species. Wood Jones, for example. in

emphatically repudiating Ogilby’s (1892) description, states. that there is na

“intense reddish” anywhere in the coat and that the smoky colour of the under-

fur shows through and subdues the whole. This. however, is not true of the

pelage at its best as described above, and it would be difficult to ayoid the

terms “red brown” and “blackish brown” in ordinary parlance, in defining such.

Although the area has a hot summer and comparatively sharp winter with

marked difference of mean day temperatures in February and July, seasonal

differences In the pelage are ata minimum. While the richest pelage of the

series was taken in Angust others of almost equal quality were seen in February

and May, and conversely, worn, short ane faded coats were obtained in all

three months, The Ume of renewal of the coat is evidently an individual matter

independent of seasonal conditions and following a cycle determined largely

by the time at which the rat was littered, No evidence of an orderly moult

procnelliig successively over different areas of the surface, with well marked

wrdaries between the old and new coats, could be detected; hut in two indi-

vidials taken in May, large areas of both dorsal and ventral surfaces, sirnul-

taneously, showed a shart replacing coat mingling with the base of the main pile.

Nu valid sexual differences in pelage could be traced.

(d) CRANIAL AND DENTAL CHARACTERS

Twenty skulls, all extracted from unimals of known external characters and

dimensions, have been examined and measured,

The skull (Pl. 1, Figs. A-D) is notable for its smoothly rounded outlines

and weak muscular impressions, which are retained without appreciable altcra-

tion into advanced age, ‘This gives it a distinctive appearance which at once

marks it off from other Australian species of Ratins, and recalls somewhat the

form of the larger species of Pseutomys s,s.

The muzzle is at moderate length but very narrow and with a marked ten-

dency to parallelism of its sides, The maximum width of nasals is always surb-

terminal, but Huetuates over a 20 per cent, range, with corresponding variation

in the overall shape of the bones which, however, never develop an abrupt ar

bulbxws expansion. The fronto-nasal suture is usually broad and square anid

the premaxilliary process may overlap it posteriorly or fall short, The zygomatic

outline is broad with some flattening at the mid point of the curve and with

RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND TTS DERIVATIVES 137

the maximum width always at the squamosal root, but in adults the middle

width is almost as great and it is only in distinctly subadult skulls that there

is any appreciable pusterinr taper of the arch, The interorbital. region tencls

to be tubular and smooth, and the supraorbital margins are not ridged, The

brain case is broad and smoothly rounded and temporal crests ave only slightly

developed or even quile absent. The lacrymals are large, and the anteorbital

fassae, though variable, are never strongly developed and are sometimes cun-

spicuously: smull,

In lateral aspect the dorsal profile is well arched but less so than in such

furms as A. culmorum and R. lutreola, The zygsmatie plate is shorter vertic-

ally than in A. assimilis, but is utherwise similar and its anterior margin) may be

either strictly vertical or with a slight concavity at base. Conflicting statements

have been made about the size und shape of the anteriur palatal foramina to

A, greyi and their relation to that of HB. axsimilis. In the present series the adult

condition is. that length is comparatively vonstant and always decidedly greater

than the molar rows. but width (like that of the nasals) is one oF the most

variable of dimensions, with a range of 15 per cent. or more—howeyer, in

relation to such species as B. culmorum and lutreola they could anly be described

as wide, and though the exact shape is variable, their combined aperture dues

not narrow posteriorly at all markedly as in assimilis and is somctimes ws wide

posteriorly as in the middle, The bullae are small with their length ahout equal

to that of the molar rows, bul they are relatively broad und well rounded,

Age changes in the skull are less marked than usual, but can generally be

recognised in the change in shape of the zygomatic arches aboye mentioned and

in the clongation of braincase and rastrum, Sexual diffecences are inappreciable

in the subadult group; in that of adults the largest example is from a very aged

mile und is disproportionately enlarged in relation Lo its somatic dimensions —

whetber females equally enlarged occur, the material is insufficient to determinc-

In the molars (PL 1, Figs. E and T), small but distinctly developed an-

terior cingulir cusplets can be made out on M! in about one-third of the im-

mature shally and vestiges of them persist in one or two adult dentitions. The

buceal element (T.3) of the first lamina of the same tooth is usually very com-

p'etely suppressed but is weakly indicated in a few examples, In the lower

molars tle interproximal accessory cusps of M, and Mg are always present in

unworn teeth, but are often very small and are frequently eliminated from

the adult dentition by weur. The rate of molar wear ts subject to much lvre-

tularity owing, no doubt, to varying amounts uf earthy abrasive ingested with

the food, and the crown pattern by itself is only a very rough guide to age.

There are several examples in the series of distinctly immature animals judged

by somatic and cranial characters, in whiel the cusps of all the laminae are

transversely linked hy broad bands of dentine.

The following figures vive in turn the range and approximale mean of the

skull measurements and molar rows for (1) hve males and two females in the

adult group as defined (supra), and (2) five males and four females in the

subadult praup;

Createst fength, 8 38:7-38°7 (36-7), & 35-8-36-9 (36-3), ¢ 33-0-05-0

(33-7), @ 32-6-34-3 (33/6); basal length, ¢ 31-0-34-3 (32-3), ¢ 31/8325

(32-0), 5 28-6-30-1 (20:1), @ 28-5-30-4 (29-5); zygomatic breadth, g 17-5-

18-9 (17-9, © 18-1-18-2 (18-15), & 16:9-17-5 (17:0), & 16+3-17-2 (16-9);

interorbital breadth, 4 5-0-3-7 (5:4), ¢4-85-1I (4:9), ¢ 5-055 (5-2), ¢

5-0-5-0 (8-0): nasals length, £13-2-14-5 (13-8), 9 33-8-14-0 (13-9), 4

12:2-13- (12-6), © IL-6-12-7 (12°1); nusals greatest brendth, 4 3-+3-4-1

(3-3), ¢ 3-8-3-8 (3-8), 3 3-2-3-9 (3:6), 9 3+3-3-45 (3:4); palatal [ength,

135 H, H, FINLAYSON

# 15°6-20-5 (19-3), @ 19-2-19-2 (19-2), # 17:5-18:1 (17°8), @ 17:3-18-2

(17+7)) anterior palatal foramina, Jength, ¢ 7+2-7:5 (733), 9

i 6°5-6°8 (6:7), % 65-7'0 (6:6); ditto, breadth, @ 2:3-2-7

2-4 (2-35), § 2-0-2-4 (2-2), 9 3:0-2-3 (2-2); bulla, leng

(6-3), 2 6:0-G-1 (6-05), ¢ 5°8-6:3 (6-0), 9 5:8-6-3 (6-1) Se

62-63 (6:26), © 5-8-5- (5-85), 4 5:-8-63 (6-1), 9 59-63 (61),

3. OTHER POPULATIONS OF [. GREYI

(a) MAINLAND DISTRICTS NORTH OF FLEURIEU PENINSULA

A group of ten specimens from hill tracts north of the Fleurien Peninsula

in the valleys of the Sturt and Onkaparinga, offer no appreciable distinction

from the standard series. Two examples are slightly shorter tailed and another

vives an extralimital value of 58 mm, for mysticial vibrissae.

Three female specimens from a mangrove swamp near the mouth of the

Gawler River about 20 miles north of Adelaide on the Adelaide-Wakefield plain

in a very different environment from the Hills scries, are of interest as showing

the first signs of significant differentiation. While in full agreement with the

standard series in external characters and pelage, they carry the shortening of

the tail a stage further (min. 75 per cent.) and are longer footed (29-29°5 mm.).

One of them provides the largest female skull from the South Australian main-

land, measured (greatest length 27-3) and the anterior palatal foramina are

longer and narrower (7-5-7-6 and 2:1-2'1), and the molar rows just below the

lower limit of the range (5°7-5-8) and the individual teeth uarrower than in

the standards.

I haye no relevant material on which to base an independent opinion. jas

to the extent of the westward extension of R, greyt greyi on the mainland, but

both Iredale and Troughton (1934, 72) and Tate (1951, 329) record it from

Pe. Lincoln ow Eyre Peninsula, Tate's position in so doing was only made

tenable by his willingness to accept Kangaroo Island as the type locality of the

form which he regarded as R, greyt uustrinus. But the few specimens from

Kangaroo Island which I have examined convince me that the form of R. greyt

which occurs there does not represent austrinus as defined by Thomas, and is,

in fact, very doubtfully separable from the typical Fleurien race on the opposite

shore of Backstairs Passage,

In spite of Thomas's assumption that his R. culmorum austrinus was “a

common form in South Australia in the 1840's”, it does not seem tu have found

its way into any local collections, and its origins are as obscure as when de-

scribed. But whether it came from Kangaroo Island er Kyre Peninsula, or

formerly occurred on both, its place, on a basis of described characters, seems

bi be definitely with culmorwm and not greyi, and it is not further considered

ere.

Tentatively and as a working bypithesis I accept the above opinion on the

range of R. greyi greyi, but the Gawler River specimens suggest that the case

may have been Jess simple than that.

(b) GREENLY ISLAND

This site is a stecp granite ridge with a peak of 750 feet at the eastern

end and two semidetached masses at the western end, lying about 19 miles

west-south-west of Point Whidbey on the west coast of Eyre Peniusula. The

RATTUS GREY! GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES L3y

greater part of the island surface consists of unbroken rock slides, but near the

summit and on the south slope where sume remnants of the original limestone

capping persest there is a stunted Fovest of Casuarina stricta trees and thiekets

of the same species in bush forn), tovether with Melaleucas, and Correas uxur

on broken areas of the north slope, There is a considerable small flora in suit-

ahle localities where soil has accumulated, including such genera as Alriplex,

Rhavocia, Frankenia and Calanerinnia.

The island is uninhabited and seldom visited. The writer made a six days

stay there in November, 1947, to investigate the local wallaby, tracks of which

had been seen by Wood Jones (1923), and found a form of Rattus greyi aliun-

dunt on the main mass of the island. It apparently docs not burrow and there

wre few parts of the island where it could indulge such a habtit exeept on 3

very limited scale, but there is ample ground cover in debris under the she-

vak timber and in the denser thickets and it evidently camps im such. shelter

und in rock crannies. It is much less sophisticated and shy than its mainland

relatives, und was frequently scen foraging about in the more open parts in

the late afternoons and at night it invaded the camp in numbers and cnuld be

freely inspected in a torch beam at a distance of a foot or sa—in the beam the

eye is blood red. [twas extremely noisy, ransacking all vamp gear and sampling

all provisions left unprotected. Although it must of necessity be largely vege-

tarian, it showed a strong partiality fur Hesh foods at the cump and multiated

wallahy carcasses left there. The stomach contents of thuse examined consisted

largely of tuberous vegetable material with seed case fragments and in Ewo

cases insects and remains of a (?) gecko.

The material on which the following account is based comprises 23 indi-

viduals, belonging to three collections all from the main island, two made per-

sumally in November, 1947, and February, 1949, respectively, and a third by a

party which included South Australian Museum personnel, in Decernber, 1947.

The sex ratio in the combined collection is 16 4; 7 2. During November and

December reproduction was evidently active, all males having enlarged scrotal

testes and some females Iuctating, though no young were taken; in February,

however, when only females were taken, their condition was quiescent, with

occluded vulvae and strongly retracted nipples.

Ectoparasites were present in large numbers and have been found by H-

Womersley to include two species of Heas, Xenytlopsis cheopis and Cerataphylles

fasciatus; two species of acarids, Laclaps nuttali Hirst and Haemaphysalis leacki

Aud., and the louse [Toplopleura bidentate, Ot endoparasites an extraordinarily

heavy stomach infestation of nematodes was found in several individuals and

these have heen tentatively identified by Mrs. [, M, Thomas as speeies of

Physaloptera and Protospirura. About one-third uf the specimens examined

showed patholugical conditions in the tail and manus and pes, with malforma-

tion of digits and ulceration of the pupillae of fuctul vibrissae, In spite of these

afflictions, however, the rats were commotily vigerots and well nourished, and

sometimes fat,

The Greenly Island rat has attained a considerable level of differentiation

both from that of the standard series of the Mleurien Peninsula and frora its

nearer neighbour R, sreyt murrayi Thos, of the Pearson Islands, abet 60 miles

to the norwest-

Tt is nearer the latter, especially in the more obvious characters of pelage.

but in other important respects is quite distinct and I propose to separate it

subspecifically us

140 H. H. PINLAYSON

RATTUS GREYI PELORI subsp. nov,

le may be diagnosed with respect to RB. g. murrayi, as follows:

A relatively large form, and when fully adult, thickset and bulky and with

powerful hands and feet. General size considerably exceedingly murrayt and

the tail and pes longer both absolutely and relative to head and body; the pes

much modified, broader and with structural differences noted helow; tail scales

finer; pelage still paler and more: grizzled, the ear backs lighter than the head,

nut darker, and the preciurpal bar conspicuous, In the skull the anterior palatal

foramina are shorter and the dentition less reduced,

The longest mysticial vibrissa in 13a patent undamaged examples gave

a range and approximate mean of 38-55 t 5). The car is thick in substance

and relatively broad with a B/L ratio of -63-:75 (:69), The manus is stouter

than in the Fleurieu series, the B/L. ratio averaging ‘42 as against +37, and

though the size sequence of the pads is the same, the individual pads are stouter

und mare squat and the metacarpals newly always subequal. The pes is also

nolably large and broad, the breadth ranying fram 7-8°5 and the B/L. value from

99.-97 (:95) as against -21--24 (-22). The pad sequence is much the seme,

but the inner metatarsal tends to be smaller and narrower, while the rest of the

pads, especially the interdigitals | and 4 are rounder, Fresh ot aleoholic speci-

mens of A, v. murrayi suitable tot accurate measurement have not been avail-

ahle, hut direet comparison of dried material of all three forms has shown that

the agreement of murrayl in manus and pes is with the standard Mleuriew series

rather than with that of Greenly Island and the above metrical comparison

of the two latter is inverted to give an approximate estimate of the difference.

The tail is stout and, by mainland standards, short although less so than in

murrayi, the mean percentaye of bead aud body length being S8 per cent. as

against 77 per cent. in the latter; the scale rows are constantly 15 per cm. mid-

dorsally in adults, rising to 17 in subadults, as against 12-13 in adults of murrayi.

The pelage is subject to much heavier wear than has been observed un the

mainland and, as a consequence, differences due to this factor are correspond-

inuly high. The November and December batches contain many thin and lax

coats, lurgely denuded of gourds on the sump and with a short replacement

coat showing basally here and there on the Aorbura, In February, however,

the pelage was prime and in point of density about equal to that of the Fleurien

series Gorsally, but always thinner ventrally, In spite of these differences, the

general colour range is less thar in the latter. The following notes are based

chielly on the prime pelage, Middorsally the three piles average 16, J8 and

20 jnm. in length, respectively, with guards on the pterian back from 40-45

mm. The subterminal band is 8 weak yellowish buff, sever brown nor rufous,

wud ts longer with less black or brown annulution and less overlay from the

suards. The general dorsal colour is a somewhat olivaceoust grey brown, near

Ricdgway's drab, yery uniform from the crown of the head to tail base in good

pelage but irregularly mottled with wear. and with a tendency in November

skins tu a warmer scapular and darker himbar area. The ear backs are paler

than the head in dried skins though net always appearing su in life, The sides

are cold drab merging imperceptibly with the ventrum which is pale plumbeous

hasally for three-quarters of its length and weakly tipped with ivory buff, the

genvral effect near drab grey. Manus and pes may be ymre white or feehly

svizzied with drab or brown and there is always a conspicuous dark precarpal

bur on the outer aspect of the forelimb. The tail is long-haired as in meerayi

with hairs 3-3-3 seales in length when not abraded, and rather erect; its colour

1A skin m the South An+tralian Museuni made up from alcohol after 12 vears dinnersion,

shaws marked changes from the fresh condition here described.

RATTUS GREY] GRAY AND CIS DERIVATIVES M41

variable but most frequently a pale drab on ull surfaces and with no durso-

ventral contrast.

In pelage R. g. pelori shows the same divergent trends from R. g. greyi us

R. g. murrayi does, but carries them a stage further resulting i inereased pallor,

weaker and yellower subterminal colour and more conspicunus dorsal grizzling,

especially on the head where the ear hacks arc lighter, not darker. In the five

skins of murrayi which have been used in the comparison the tail is much

darker on all surfaces than in, the new form but the standard series has shown

this character to be so unstable that T hesitate to advance it as a good distinetion.

Flesh. Dimensions—The following figures give in turn the range and approxi-

mate mean for five adult @ and five adult 9, and of the type ¢, Head and

body, 159-163 (162-8), 17-162 (154-0), 168; tail, 127-145 (135-7), 137-142

(139°7), 142; pes, 31-32 (31-3), 30-5-31:°5 (31-0), 31:5; ear length, 20-20:5

(20-2), 19:5-20 (19-4), 20-5; ear breadth, 13-15 (14-0), 13-14 (13-5), 13;

weight in grammes, 110-111 (110-5), 9-105 (98-8), LILO.

The adult skull is slightly larger than that of R. g. murrayi, but otherwise

ix in general agreement with it and in, particular shares (in, varying degree)

the three main distinctions of the Jatter from R. v. greyi as defined (supru), Le.,

slightly greater rostral length, slightly broader bulla, and decidedly reduced

molar rows. It differs from murrayd in a wider interorbital region, shorter an-

ferior palatal foramina and in a smaller degree of molar reduction, especially

noticeable in transverse diameters, which are scarcely below the Fleurieu stan-

dards. Other minor differences from R, grey! greyl of an average kind are

shown in the interparietal which in adults are smaller; in the zygomatic plate

which tends to be higher aud with a slightly different curvature of the free

margin and in the posterior margin of the palate which is evenly rainded and

not produced into 2 spur or promincnee at the palation.

Skull dimensions—The fallowing figures give, in turn, the range and ap-

proximute mean for five adult ¢, three adult ¥. and the type J: Greatest

length, 36-6-39-0 (37-6), 36-0-37-3 (36-6), 37°5; basal longth, 32¢1-39°6

(33-7), 32°0-83-0 (32-4), 34-0; aygomatic breadth, [8°5-19-G (18-4), 18-4-

IS-3 (18-47), 19-0; interorbital breadth, 5-5-5 +6 (5:56). 3-5-5-6 (6-57), Ava;

masals length, 14-2-14-8 (14-5), 13°7-14-5 (14-1), 14-8; nasuls vreatest breadth,

374-0 (3+8), 3-6-3°7 (3,87), 3-7; palatal length, 1$°6-20-7 (19-6). 19:0-19°8

(19-3), 20-1; anterior palatal foramina, length, 6-8-7-2 (7-0), 6:7-6-7 (6-7),

7-1; anterior palutal foramina, breadth, 2:3-2:6 (2:4), 2-2-2-5 (2-3), 2:5;

bulla length, 6-2-6-6 (6-4), 6-1-6:2 (6°17), 6-4; Ms % 565-9 (5-8), 5-5-

5-8 (5-7), 5-9.

Type—Adult male; South Australian Museum, registered number M.6264;

» fleld-made skin und prepared skull collected by the weiter in November, 1547,

on the north slope of dhe main mass of Greenly Island, at approximately 34°39°S.

lat. and 134°49’E, longt,

(ce) NORYH GAMBIER ISLAND

This islet of a few hundred acres, and about 150 feel high, lies about 2

nule and one-halt north of the much larger Wedge Island in the Cambier Group

a the mouth uf Spencer Gul€ at 35°08’S, lut, and 136°28°K., longt. approxi-

mately,

It is bolieved to be waterless and has never had human oceupition, but

long ago—possibly as early as 1820—goats were introduced and have persisted

ty fhe present time, and provide an attraction for fishing cutters in search vf

fresh meat. Originally, the central portions of the plateau were well grassed

with Denthonias avd supported groves of well-yrown Casuarina trees, ‘but 4s

142 H. H. PINLAYSON

a result of an erosion cycle which I have sketched elsewhere (1951), this area

has now been denuded to the limestone and only a narrow belt of bush vegeta-

tion remains surrounding it on the cliff tops. This vegetated zone is colonized

by mutton birds (Puffinus sp.) which burrow and by a local form of Rattus

greyi, which lives chiefly under the tangle of a sprawling bush, Nilraria schoberi,

The rat was formerly in very large numbers, and boat crews killed them in sport

by lifting up the tangle and sending terriers in after them. Although now much

reduced, it still seems to have a wood hold on these parts uf the island, but in a

shiwt daylight yisit in February, 1949, I sueceeded in trapping only three

among the limestone blocks of tlie cliffs on the sauth-cast coast.

These were two males and one female; one of ihe males with enlarged

scrotal testes, the other retracted and the female apparently reproductiyely

qniescent. A motile ectoparasite (? Hoplopleura) was noted, but not collected,

lixternally. this rat is somewhat intermediate between that of Greenly and

Pearson Isles. Ut is slightly smaller than the former and has a slightly longer

ancl narrower car, though still broad by mainland standards. The pes, although

sntaller, is of the same broad robust type, with similarly rounded though smaller

pads, Mysticial vibrissac range from 47-55 (50): the tail scales are coarser,

{3-14 per cm..and the tail hairs shorter, 2-2'5 scales lengtl), The tone of the dorsal

peluge is slightly warmer, but the general condition very similar; manus and

pes pure white as they are in a proportion of the Greenly rat,

blesh Dimensions of the two §, and one? are as follows: Head and body,

153-154, 132; tail, 123-136, 130; pes, 29-20, 27; ear length, 21-21, 21; ear breadth,

13-13, 14; weight in grammes, 100-105, 80,

The skull if regarded as tully adult, as the molar wear and zygomatic shape

suggest, is the smallest exumined in this work and as compared with that of

Creenly Island is weak, and fragile and lightly ossified. The nasals and rostrum

ure shorter and weaker, the bullac smaller, and the anterior palatal foramina

slightly fonger, but the molars are within the range and therefore comparatively

lyrge, m so small a skull.

Skadl dimensions of the two ¢ and one © are respectively; Greatest length,

$3°0-35+2, 35-2; basal length, 30-0-31-0, 31-4; zygomatic breadth. 17°5-17°7,

18'0: interorbital breadth, 5-1-5-3, 5-2; nasals length, 12-9-13-2, 13-0: nasals

breadth, 3-5-3+8, 3-5; palatal length, 17-9-18-6, 18-5: anteri¢r palatal foramina,

length, 7°2-7-2, 7:4; bulla, length, — 6-0, 5-9; Ms.1-*, 5-7-S3-8, 5-7.

~ Uf the charactets of the Gambier Island pupulation are reliably represented

hy these three specimens, it would appear to differ appreciably from that of

both Greenly and Pearson islands and, while neurer these, shows some links

with the mainland phase from the Gawler River, but with a marked reduction

in skull size. The cleurunces in characters, however, are so small that | have

not felt justified in basing another name upon so little material. and defer a

decision on its status until an adequate series can be assembled.

Evidence of varying value from miseellancous sources indicates that “native”

rats, presumably of the A. vreyt type, exist ar formerly uccurred on several other

islands off the South Australian coast, besides these already listed, including

the main islind of the North Neptune group, Hopkin’s, Taylor's, Eyre’s, Goat,

St. Francis and St, Peter's.

(d) SOUTILEWRSIERN VICTORIA

Bravenor (1936) repurted un a large series of R. greyi trom the Portland

district, which he compared with both “South Australian” &. greyt wud with

Victorian assimilis, and separated subspecifically from the former. Although I

agree with his chief findings the first of his comparisons was hampcred by

RATTUS CTMEY! GRAY AND TTS DERIVATIVES Ww

shortage of material and some emeudatiou aud amplification of both are called

for. The following notes are based upon a batch of twelve taken at_Heath-

mere in December, 1937, and on the east bank of the Glenelg River about 20

miles north-west of that place, in June, 1951. ‘These localities are only 1026

miles north of Portland in a similar environment and the material is regarded

as topotypical of R, ¢. peecatus.

In habits this form differs from R, vreit greyt of the Fleurieu Peninsula in

being 2 more consistent burrower; this was confirmed both at Heathmere and

om the Glenelg where jt was quite numerous, but I doubt whether burrows

were plentiful cnough to shelter the whole population, part of which probably

makes use of surface camps. In Decernber at Heathimere all adult males tuken

showed enlarged and scrotal testes and females were pregnant.

The range in dimensions shows a plus overlap in the chief items with means

averaging about 8 per cent, higher than in the standard series of BR. greyi eretii.

In relation to head and body, the tail and, to a lesser extent, the pes, are longer

in the female than in that farm, but this change is not shared by the male.

Ignoring the sexual diference, it would appear that the chief distinction in the

dimensions of the Victorian animal is in an increase of overall size and in a

somewhat nasrower var, Braxenor's means of 20 selected specimens are de-

cidedly below mine in ear and pes (and skull Jength also, sec infra) and his

sample prahably includes what is here regarded as a definitely subadult element.

I am unable to substantiate his finding that the female is necessarily smaller in

linear dimensions than the male, when fully adult as judged by skull characters,

nor is this the case with the standard series of R. x. greyi, and its use as a dif-

ferential character ygainst assimilis is, 1 think, invalid. The other metrical pru-

pusition which he uses differentially, ie, that in large specimens of greyi the

tail is relatively shorter than in small, 1 am unable to test adequately with

peecatus or assimilis, but it seems to work out in the standard series where

(ignoring sex) the six largest give a per cent. tail lenuth of 84-110 (91-6) as

against 93-110 (100-7) for the six smallest:

The manus and pes ure very similar to those of R. g. greyi, the former per-

haps a little heavier, hut the pes, unlike Chat of assimilis, even narrower, ‘Whe

pads are of the same type, with distinctly angular lateral interdigitals. The

mysticial vibrissae tange from 47-50 (49) and the tail scales are slightly coarser,

with 1-13 (12-6) per em, middorsally. The marmary pattem, discussed by

Tate (1051, 330) in connection with this subspecies, is not characteristic of

il, hut aeeurs (with variants) in A. g,. greyias well. (Supe. )

In the pelage characters of the body, the West Victorian series can he com-

pletely merged in that of the Fleuricu Peninsula; it does not yield any examples

of the vich coppery variants of the latter, but all its other phases can be closely

matched therein, and it offers nothing novel in tone, grivzling ar pattern; it

is certainly not darker as.a whole. On the dorsum of munus and pes the hairs

are always decidedly darkened al base and this leads to occasional grizzfing,

pirticuherly when the covering is sparse, and there arc two cases of all dark

hairs at base of the claws net noted in other groups. The precarpal bar is

usually fainter and sometimes lost, but an the inner aspect of the lower surface

uf the carpus there is frequently 4 tract of adpressed, contrasted) brown hairs

outlining the bases of the metacarpal pads. absent, or very feehly indicated, in

the Fleurieu series. The tail is usually appreciably darker above than below,

as in the latter, but there are equally striking varlations bath in its colar and

in the prominence of the scale rings. In worn peluge where replacement has

begun, there is a tendency for a darker lumbar patch to be isolated ay in the

November skins from Greunly Island.

l4t ft. UW. FINLAYSON

Flesh Dimensions—The following figures give in turn the range and appruxi-

mate mean for the dimensions of three @ und four ?, adult, Head and body,

152-169 (160-0), 153-166 (156-0): tail, 138-155 (149-0), 140-163 (154-7); pes,

31-5-33°5 (32-5), 30-32-5 (31-6); ear, length, 22-23 (29-5), 21-23 (22:5); ear,

breadth, 13-+6-13-8 (13+7), 13°8-15-0 (14-4); weight in grammes 1OU-130

(115-0), 85-130 (110-0),

The adult skull is larger than in R. greyi greyi, with the temale giving higher

values in most measurements than males. The range in the majority of items

shows a plus overlap with that of the standards with am average increase in the

means. of the order of 5 per cent. in most longitidinal dimensions. It is rela-

tively narrower zygomatically, with slightly longer rosttum and relatively shorter

tooth rows with broader molars. A notable nonmetrical distinction from the

primary form is to be found in the temporal crests, which are more strougly

Jeveloped and produced anteriorly on to the supraorbital margins which in

consequence are distinctly ridged,

Skull Dimensions — The range and approximate mean follow in turn for

four adult ¢, three adult 2. and a single anomalous stunted adult or aged ¢,

which gives values below the minima for the Fleurieu serics, and which cannot

be regarded as a anrmal intergrade between R. g. ereyi and peccatus;—Createst

length, 36-°9-38-5 (37-5), 37:7-38-8 (382), 34-0; basal length, 32-8-35-0

(33:8), 38+6-34-35 (33-9), 29-8, zygomatic breadth, 18-3-18+9 (18-5), 18°3-

18:7 (185). 17-3; interorbital breadth, 5-3-5:°5 (5-4), 5°3-5-5 (5-4), 5-1;

nasals length, 14-2-15-6 (14-8), 15-0-15-2 (15-1), 13-0; nasuls greatest breadth,

$'T4-O (3:9), 3-6:3-8 (3:7), 3-6; palatal length, 19-6-21°5 (20-2), 20°3-20°6

(20:4), 18-1; anterior palatal foramina, length, 7-3-8-0 (7-6), 7-9-6-0 (7-95),

6-8; anterior palatal foramina, breadth, 2:5-2:8 (2:6), 2:32:5 (2-5), 2-5;

bulla, length, 6-5-6-6 (6-55), 6-5-6-8 (6-6), 5-9; Ms.!-i#, 3-9-8-4 (B-L),

B'0-6-4 (6:3), 5-5.

Rattus greyi peccatus is undoubtedly a valid form, recognisuble beyond the

limits of the conventional 73 per cent, ulleeution, by metrical, pelage and cranial

characters. Tt is at present knuwn from ua very restricted area oF south-western

Vietoria at sea level, in ecological conditions appreciably different from those

of the South Australian highlands, which harbour the primary subspecies. To

what extent it interdiftuses with nssinilis to the vast and haw effective the

Glenely River is as a harrier to its westerly drift, are matters which awuit

further field work.

4, RATTUS ASSTMILIS GOULD

‘Lhe relationships of this species to R. ereyé peecates, ta which it hears

much extemal resemblanee, have been examined hy Brazenor (1936) in bru

outline with a large series of Victorian specimens, There is need, bewever,

fav a more detailed statement of its characters and range of variation before

these ean be regarded as well established. The material in hand is inadequate

for this, but for the purpose of a limited and provisional check, skins and skulls

mf soise 15 individualy are available. These belong to two batches personally

taken in January, 1928, on upper Ryan's Creek in the Tolmie district af north-

east Vietoria, and in December, 1925, at Hillas Brook in the Batlow district of

sonthern New South Wales. Both localities are highland sites, the seoond

above 3,000 feet. In addition, T huve examined miscellaneous specimens from

French Island in Westernport Bay, Victoria, and from Dorrigu and the Barring-

ton Tops in New South Wales. At the Ryan's Greek camp the species was plen-

RATIUS GREY] GRAY AND LYS DERIVATIVES 145

tiful dhough not at-all obtrusive and was first taken unintentionally in wallaby

und opussum snares tinder tree ferns in a wet gully and later was trapped with

bread baits in the undergrowth of dense wattle scrubs, At Hillas Brook it was

taken in the same way under bracken in more open valleys of big eucalypts,

duel ue few also in a barn where they had begun to raid potatoes in sacks — a type

ut depredation which R, greyé in South Australia never seems to attempt,

Whether this combined series is as homogeneous subspecitically as current

numenclature would imply, may be questioned but it suffices for a general

appraisal of the R. 2. peccatus-assimilis relation.

Dimensions of udults just overlap the maxima for those of peecatus, as

quoted above, in head and body, pes and ear, but the means are higher, de-

cidedly so (10-12 per eent-) in the case of the first, The means for tail length

are equal in the case of the males and Jower with the single female, Propor-

tionally to head and body, therefore, the pes and ear are slightly shortev than in

peceatus, and the tail markedly so, with a mean fur the two sexes of 83 per cent,

as against $5 per cent. in the latter; this finding is supported by the short-tailed

condition of the cotypes (80-84 per cent.). but conflicts with Brazenor's LUL

per cent. as 4 mean for 20 assimilis, No. weights are available, but would prob-

ably be much bigher than for any form of R. greys

In dried specimens both manus and pes appear to be much stouter than

in R, g, peoeatus, though the puds are of the same general type, Brazenor, huw-

ever (op. cit, Pl, XUV, 2d) fixures a somewhat more elongated inner meéta-

tarsal, Tu the manus the digital rings are increased to fi and, in the pes, to 8,

and they are less divided than in the forms of HW. greyi. Mysticial vibrissae in

five undamaged adults range from 59-67 (61), which js much longer than in

peccatus and the tail seales are slightly coarser, 11-12 (11-7) per om,

In peluge characters the gronp shows an extraordinary range of variation,

duc partly to phase, but partly to local or individual influences, and it is obvious

that until comprehensive series aré examined jlustrating the entire sequence

of the coat replacement, only tentative conclusions are possible under this head.

Bravenor (1936, 67) has already stated that the pelage of asyimilis is indis-

tinguishable from that of KR. greyi peccatus of the Portland district. So far as

ihe Victorian specimens of the present series are concerned, this is substantiully

true. The single French (sland skin is much richer coloured and more cupreous

in tone than any of my peceufas, Hongh i¢ van be matched in the Fleurieu Penin-

sula, and of the remainder it is generally true that the coat is somewhat mare

splnons dorsally, the darkening of manns and pes minre frequent, and the pre-

sence of the brown infravarpal tract more constant than in the latter. The pre-

carpal har is present in two skins only, The New South Wales examples from

Batlow and Dungog are appreciably distinet being colder in tone and with a

finer ticking.

Flesh Dimensions —Vour adult males and one adult female give the fal-

lowing values:—Head and body, 168-195 (179), 173; tail, 143-157 (150), 142;

pes, 33-35 (33-3), 34; eur lenvth, 22-24 (23-2), 23.

Skull size in these two groups is consistently much larger ut ull comparable

stuges of growth than in K. g. peccatus, The range in seven of the eleven dimen-

sions studied shows a plus clearance from that of the latter, with the means uf

the chief longitudinal dimensions 10 per cent. higher, and the overall superiurity

in size is still more iropressive in direct visual comparison. The chief depart-

ures from vopruportionality with peccatus as gauged by the percentage rela-

tion to the greatest length of skull, are; Shorter rostrum, shorter and much

narrower anterior palatal foramina (— 6 and — 25 per cent, respectively), shorter

bulla (— 10 per cent.), and longer molar tows (+ 14 per cent.).

146 MW, H, FINLAYSON

In nonmetrical cranial characters there is considerable variation and over-

lap, but the following may be noted as valid differential trends. In the nasals

there is a distal shift in the maximum width which leads to a straight, mure

wedge-shaped outline than is usual in any of the forms of R, greyi; the temporal

aud supraorbital ridges are similar in outline but more strongly developed; the

dorsal profile is straighter and less arched; and the posterior half of the anterior

palatal foramina is more narrowed und parallel-sided than the anterior, with

a characteristic change of shape.

One skull presents the anomaly of 4 paired interparietal (PI, 1, Fig. GC),

Skull Dimenstons — The values for seven adult males are as follows:—Great-

est length 40-0-43-1 (41-4); basal length, 35-3-39-1 (36-9); zygomatic breadth,

200-214 (20-8); interorbital breadth, 5+7-6:0 (5-9); nasals lengths, 15-0-17-0

(15-7): nasals greatest breadth, 4-1-4-5 (4-3); palatal length, 21-6-23-5

(22-5); anterior palatal foramina, length, 7:5-8-3 (7-9); anteripr palatal fora.

mina, breadth, 2°0-2°5 (2-3); bullae, length, f-2-f-7 (6:3); Ms.!-8, 7-0-7-6

(7-3).

5. INTERRELATION OF R. ASSIMILIS, 8, CREYI AND R. FUSCIPES

WATERHOUSE

Ellerman (1949) considered R. assimilis and R. greyi to be conspecific, a

view with which Tate (L951) evidently sympathised, though he did not give

effect to it in nomenclature. Though they are undoubtedly very closely re-

lated animals, a study of the two forms, which may be assumed ta be in contact

in mil-Western Victoria, has convinced me that the differences separating them

are more than subspecific and confirms me in the opposite soe older view.

Alt}umgh occasional specimens may transgress the limits of the three groups, a

more vr less clinal relation in general body size subsists between the east to west

serles, RB. assimilis (Passimilis), R. preyi peceatus, and R. greyi greyi, with a

much steeper gap between the first two tant, but this trend is not continued

into the offshore colonies of Eyre Peninsula wherc, in the case of BR. g. pelori

at least, u slight secondary enlargement has taken place.

These island forms, although well differentiated, have so many unmistak-

able links with the Fleurieu Peninsula population that their relegation to R.

greyi seems the only natural course. The: alternative allocation to RB, fuscipes,

which is regarded as having a modified representative on Mondrain Island on

the continental shelf of Western Australia, has some attractions on palaeogeo-

raphic grounds and is foreshadowed in the views of Ellerman (op. cit.),

rave not tested this de novo, but if the generally uccepted links of R, fuscipes

with R. lutreola are well founded (and they have been recently reaffirmed by

Tate (1951) with good material), it would seem to be strongly contraindicated,

None of the forms here considered show any convergence cranially to R. lutreola

as known in South Anstralia.

REFERENCES

Brazenor,. C. W., 1936, Meni. Nat. Museum, 10, pp. 88-9,

Counery, R., US87. Zanl. Jahrh., 2, p. 837.

Bunukmmas, |. R.. W41 “The Fandlies and Gonera of Living Radents”, 3. yo. 206.

Exvenaran, ar N48, hil, 3,

Pixeavsox, H. A, 1944. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc, Si Aust, 68, 2. pp. 210-204.

Eunuayson, H, H,, 1951. South Arstratio: Ornithologist, 20, 1, p, 4.

Garay, J, BE. 1841. In Groy, G., "Journal of two Expeditions of discovery in torth-awest awl

wostern Australia,” London, Appendix ©, p, 2.

Govrp, J., 1858. Proe. Zool, See, London, XXV, p. 241.

Graven, L., 1950, Jour, Roy. Suc, West, Aust. XXNIV. pp. 15-134.

PLATE 1

H. H. Fintayson

PLATE

FINLAYSON

II,

PLATE 3

FINLAYSON

II.

ul.

RATTUS GREY! GRAY AND 1TS DERIVATIVES 147

TrepALr, T., and Trouciton, E. te G., 1934, “Checklist of Mummals Recorded from Aus-

tralia,” Sydney, p. 74,

Jones, F. Woop, 1923. ‘Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust, XLVI, p. 94.

Jones, F. Woon, 1924. Ibid., 48, pp, 10-14.

Jongs, F. Woon, 1925. “Mammals of South Australia,” Adelaide, pp. 302-307, Figs. 210-211.

Ornmuy, J. D., 1892, “Catalogue of Australian Mammals,” Sydney, p. 108.

Srortamear, G. C., 1936. Proc. Zool. Soc, London, pp. 743-749.

‘lave, G. H. H., 1940, Am, Mus, Novit,, 1061, p. G,

Tate, G. H. H., 1951. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 97.

Tuomas, O., 1921. Ann, Mag. Nat, Hist., 8, VL, pp, 425-7.

Trosras, O., 1923. Thiel, 9, XI, p. 601.

Troucnton, E, Le G., 1937, Rec, Aust. Musenm, XX, 2, p. 189.

Troucnron, BE. te G,, 1920. Ibid., XIU, p, 119, Plates.

Ware, E. R., 1896. “Reports of Work of the Horn Scientific Expedition to Central Aus-

tralia,” 2, p. 401.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Puare 1

Fig, A. Dorsal aspect of the skull of an adult 4 of Rattus greyi greyi Gray from ihe Calla-

wonga Creck, Fleuricu Peninsula, South Australia (x 2-1). :

Fig, B. Lateral aspect of the samc (x 2-1),

Fig. C. Palatal aspect of the same (x 2+1).

Fig, D, Dorsal aspect of the skull of a subadult 4 of the same from the Boat Harbour

Creek,1 Fleurien Peninsula, South Australia (x 2-3).

Fig, E, Slightly ron ee upper molars of an immature 9 of the same from the same

ocality (x 7-1),

Fig. F. Well worn right upper molars of an adult of the same from the Yankalilla Greek,

Fleurien Peninsula, South Australia (x 7-4). ; ;

Fig. G. A paired interparietal bone in the skull of an aclilt 4 of Rettus assimilis, from

upper Kyan’s Creek, Volmie district of north-east Victoria (x 2-7).

FPuatre 2

Grass nests constructed by R. greyt greyi in captivity, with the builder in accupation.

Fig. A. A simple open type nest (x 0:4 ca.).

Fig, B. Part of a more elaborate domed structure showing the entrance near the base

(x 0-G ca.).

Pirate 3

Fig, A. Characters of the head of an adult g of R. greyi greyi from the Boat Harbour

Creek (x 1-5 ca.), ‘

Fig, B. Right pes of young adult 4 of the same from the same locality (x 2-4).

Fig, C, Right manus of same individual (x 3-0).

Fig, D, Oblique view of the uncalloused pads of the right manus of an immature 2 of the

same and from the same locality (x 4 ca.).

1 Two streams on the Peninsula bear this name; the onc Jowing west inte Investigator

Strait and the other south into Backstairs Passage: the latter is indicated.

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAEROTARSUS (ACARINA: SMARIDIDAE)

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

The egg, larva and adult male and female of Sphaerotarsus leptopilus, Womersley and Southcott,

1941, are described; the species was hitherto known only from the nymphal stage. The nymph and

adults were correlated on morphological characters. The two adults were captured under Eucalypt

bark, at Myponga, South Australia, in late December. The female laid eggs in January-February,

and these hatched to larvae during April-May. The larvae survived into June. Some observations

were made on the biology of the species. Attempts to rear the species beyond the larval sta e were

unsuccessful, as no suitable insect host could be found. Aspects of tie biology of the Smarididae are

discussed. The systematics of the adults and nymphs of the genus Sphaerotarsus, Womersley, 1936,

are revised.

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHARROTARSUS (ACARINA: SMARIDIDAE)

By R. V. Sourucorr

[Read 12 November 1959]

SUMMARY

The egg, larva and adult male and female of Sphaerotarsus leptopilus,

Womersley and. Southeott, 1941, sre described; the species was hitherto known

only from the nymphal stage. The nymph aud adults were correlated on

morphological characters.

The two adults were caplured under Eucalypt bark, at Myponga, South

Australia, in Jate December. The fornale laid eggs in January-February, an

these hatched to larvae during April-May. The larvae survived into June.

Sone observations were made on the biology of the species. Attempts to rear

the species beyond the larval slage were unsuecesstul, as no suitable insect

host could be found. Aspects of the biology of the Smarididae are discussed,

The systematics of the adults and nymphs of the genus Sphacrotarsus,

Womersley, 1936, are revised.

INTRODUCTION

In 1941 Womersley and Southeott reviewed the systematics of the Smari-

didac of Australia and New Zealand. Among new specics described was

Sphaerotarsus leptopilus, Womersley and Southcott, which was described from

a single nymph obtained by sweeping teatree (Melalenca halmaturorum,

F. v. M.) along the banks of the Hindmarsh River, Victor Harbor, South

Australia. That nymph was distinct from the other described post-Jarval stages

in the narrowness of the dorsal setae (idiosomalac), as well as in other

characters.

Some years ago the present writer captured two adult Smaridids at Myponga,

South Australia. Those adults were kept in the same tube, and both have been

identified finally, on morphology, as the adults of 8. leptopilus, At the time of

capture the male was identified as belonging to Sphuerotarsus, this recognition

being easy on account of the great enlargement of the fourth tarsus of the male,

but the female was not gencrically identified (if desired this can be done by

immobilizing them under one or more cover-glasses on a microscopic slide; they

can then be identified after examination with the high pawer of the microscope

for study of the eyes, crista, sensillae and dorsal setae; they suffer no damage

if carefully handled),

The female laid eggs in captivity, which hatched to laryae. Larvae belong-

ing to this genus have not been observed hitherto. I a recent monograph

(1960) of the systematics of the genera of the superfamily Erythraeoidea the

writer drew up a set of generic characters for larval Sphaerotarsus, using these

larvae,

It is proposed in the present paper to describe the adult male and female,

the egg stage, and the larva of Sphaerotarsus leptopilus. It is proposed also to

describe the experiment in detail and to remark on significant aspects of the

Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83.

159 HR. VY. SOUTHCOTT

Vig. 1—Sphaerotarsus. leptopilus Womersley and Southeott, 1941. A-F Adult female.

A, Entire, dorsal view, setae mostly omitted: B, Mouthparts, crista, eyes anc adjacent

setae (ventral view of palp on left); C-F dorsal idiosomal setae, Cin situ, showing

dorsal and lateral aspects, D. EB from below (optical section), F end view; G-I nymph,

dorsal idiosamal setae, C from above, H from below, I a longer seta (Figs, G-I based

on figures of Womersley and Southcolt, 1941). (All setae (C-1) to same suale on

left, the same as Tig, 2 A,)

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAERGTARSUS 151

biclozy of this mite secn in the experiment. Some aspects of the systematics

of the genus Sphaerotarsus will be discussed, and a revised key viven for the

separation of the post-larval active stages of the four known species,

Sphaerotarsus leptopilus Womersiey and Southeott, 1941

Figs. 1-4

Description of adult female (Fig. 1 A-I) [from specimen ACA 1504):

Colour orange, with brown setae, Idiosoma of the usual Smaridid form, Aat-

tened, clongate, slightly waisted and somewhat pointed anteriorly (ie, with a

short blunted nasus), Tdiosomal length 10704 to tip of nasus, idiosoma 590u

wide where widest.

Crista present, normal, with two sensillary areas. Anterior sensillary area

placed in a Y formed by the division of the anterior end of the erista; it carries

12 setae (scobalae), similar to the normal dorsal idiosomalae, 22-30, long, 7

of these are pigmented, the others unpigmented. Anterior sensillae slender,

clavate, with short ciliations along the entire length, these longer over the elon-

gate-spindle-shaped terminal club of the sensilla; anterior sensillae 24p, long,

Posterior sonsillary arca as feured (Fig. 1B); there is a central boss, samewhat

nndular, which forms a transverse oblong. The posteriur sensillae are set in the

central boss; they are clavate, ciliated along their entire Jength, the terminal

cluh as in the anterior sensillae, elongate-spindle-shaped; posterior sensillae

50, long. The crista continues some distance beyond the posterior sensillary

atéa, and in the specimen divides terminally as Agured into two short divaricat-

ing arms. Length of erista behind the centres of the posterior sensillae {PP

distance) approximately 175..

The standard data® are;

ASens PSens SBa SBp IsbD DS

Dy 50n 14y 7p B91. 20-28)

Eyes one ov each side. circular, 30. across. Eyes placed a little before the

midpoint of crista (ie. the midpoint between the centres of the anterior and

posterior cristal sensillae), Distance anterior sensillae-eye centres in the median

plane (OAS) 207u; distance between eye centres and midpoitit between posterior

cristal sensillac in the median plane (OPS) 184y,

Dorsal idiosomal setae typically Smaridid in type. They haye a strong

roughened dorsal flange, strongly convex, lanceolate, about one-half or two-

thirds the width of the seta, The dorsal flanye carries 4-5 irregular rows of

projections (modified ciliations), and frequently the dorsal flange bas a basal

excavation (these scobalae are similar to those of Mfirstiosoma novaehollandiae

(Womersley, 1936) from Now Zealand—see Womersley and Southeott, 194),

p. 71), Dorsal setae 20-28, long. Some setae are pigmented, others not, Those

on the anterior part of the dorsum of the idiosoma and particularly around the

crista are mostly unpigmented. Those of the posterior half of the dorsum of

the idiosoma ancl also of the more lateral uspects of the dorsum of the idiosoma

are mostly pigmented. The dorsal setae are somewhat longer at the posteriur

part of the tdiosoma.

Venter of idiosoma with bushy strongly ciliated idfosomalue of the usial

Smaridid type.

Genitalia normal for female, lacking internal chitinous armature (in the

preparation the ventral surface is not clearly seen, owing to its being mounted

°* For these terms and the descriptive terms for the setae used in this paper, see the

writers (1960) monograph on the Frythracoid genera.

152 Qt. V. SOUTHCOTT

normally, from the density of the dorsal idiosomal setation) (the sex of the

specimen also clearly recognizable from the norma] tarsus IV),

Legs as figured, of normal Smaridid appearance. Supraonychial tactile

setae present (scobalae = tactalae), but not unduly prominent. Leg I 1660

200

Vig. 2._ Sphaerotarstis leptopilus Womersley and Suuthaott, 1941, adult male. A, Same

dorsal setae near the posterior pole of the idiosoma, selected for display of various

aspects of the setae, the positions shown being in part due to the distortion of smount-

ing (to same scale as Fig, 1, C-1). B, Internal genitalia from above. to show chitin-

ized parts. C, Left leg IV, detached at the trochanterofeinoral joint.

Jong, IT 1020., HT 1105p, TV 1460. (all including coxae and claws). Tarsus I

228, long (excluding claws and pedicle) by 88, wide (height not available);

tibia 1 3204 long. Tarsus IV 135, long (excluding claws and pedicle) by 63,

high; tibia TV 807, long.

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAFROTARSUS IBS

Tarsal claws 2, normal, ciliated obliquely along their sides. Legs thickly

provided with setae of normal type (ie. scobalac); various other sensory setac

are also present on the legs. The anterior tarsi thickly provided distally with

short solenvidalae; a number of spinalae (“eupathidies”) are present upun the

middle segments (telofemora, genua, tibiae) of the legs.

Gnathosoma of normal Smaridid type, with extrusile palpi and mouth-cone,

with the normal sleeve or armilla. Palpi normal, as figured; sctac of palpi

comparatively slender.

Description of adult male (Fig. 2 A-C) (from ACA 1505): The general

appearance is as described for the female, the most significant points of dlffer-

ence being in the possession of the male internal genital armature, and the

secondary sexual character of the greatly enlarged tarsus 1'V. Other differences

are as detailed here,

Idiosomal Jength 855, maximum width 455,. The standard data are:

ASens —- PSens SHe SBp Isp DS

18. = 46. ssBn SiS SCtiCS(C(tité«éi BO

The erista extends only a short distance (324) behind the PSens; this is

much shorter than in the fernale.

Eyes une on each side, 27. across, OAS 166, OPS 148u: hence the eyes

are well anterior to the cristal intersensillary midpoint.

The dorsal idiosemal setae are somewhat more slender and regular than

those of the fenale, and resemble more closely those of the nymphal 8. lepto-

pilus. They are less pigmented than the pigmented female dorsal idiosamaluc,

and the dorsal Hange does not show the basal excavations. The dorsal flange

has 4-5 rows of spicules, fairly regular (Fig. 2A). Dorsal setae 14-90, long,

the opisthosomal dorsal ones being considerably longer than those placed more

anteriorly, and in fact the opisthosomal group forms almost a separate group

with a reasonably sharp line of differentiation,

Genitalia with the normal internal male apparatus (Tig. 2B),

Legs (except [V) similar to those of female; leg I 1210p lony, II 730,,

1! 7902, IV 1015p (all lengths including coxac and claws), Tarsus I 189 long

{exclusive of claws and pedicle) by 45 high by 56 across, Tibia 1 215% long.

Tarsus IV greatly enlarged as ustial, ovoid (see Fig, 2C), 173~ long (excluding

claws and pedicle) by 120 across, Leg setation as for female,

Gnathosoma as described for female.

Description of Egg (from those laid by ACA 1504): Colour orange-hrawn

until the deuteyim stage, then becoming deep red; smooth, spheroidal, 190-2302

teng by about 165, wide,

Description of Larva (Figs. 8, 4) (from ACA. 1504L2 principally, includ-

ing measurements, but description supplemented from ACA 1504L1). Colour,

red. Length of idiosoma (unengorged) 325), width 280u; animal 440. long to

the tip of the cheliceral blades. The idiosoma has the usual rather slender shape

of the larval Smarididae.

Dorsal scutum roughly a transverse trapezoid, but somewhat rounded

anteriorly, and posteriorly projecting in the median line into an acute poiitt;

hence almost stellate in outline (see Fig. 3); with two pairs of scutalae and

two pairs of sensillae,

154 R. V. SOUTHCOTT

1 (ah

! j

Fig. 3—Sphaerotarsus leptopilus Womersley and Southcott, 1941, larva, dorsal aspect.

NOTES ON 'THE GENUS SPHAERO'TARSUS 155

The standard data* of the two specimens used in the description are as

follow:

Specimen ACAIL504L29 ACAIS(41L1

AW 55 52

MW* — —

PW jA 68

SBat 11-5 10

sip 13 14

ASB 1 9

18D 34 3d

L 68 73

Ww 81 $2

A-P 22 16

AL gt 89

ML* _ —

PL 124 108

Atiens 27 32

Pens 60 5B

ASB/TSD -31 +26

DS 404-121 95-120

* Not available in tctrascutalate genera; listed here for the sake of completeness of

Standard Data table.

+ Strictly these are negative in Sphaervtursus and Clipeosoma.

blunted, AL thicker than PL and with coarser and more outstanding (bractate

ciliations. AL arise behind middle of anterolateral borders of the shield; P

arise inside the lateral angles of the shield. ASens. arise well antcrior to the

AL scutalue in the projecting anterior part of the scutum. ASens with adpressed

ciliations, and are slightly thickened in their distal part. PSens arise within the

posterior triangular piecc of the scutum. PSens longer than ASens, and with

adpressed ciliations; PSens parallel-sided except distally where they taper a

little,

Eyes one on each side, circular, 124 across, in the unengorged specimen

slightly behind the level of the PL scutalae.

Dorsal idiosomal setae long, strong, but are slender among larval

Smarididae,t tapering, pointed, and with adpressed ciliations.

Venter: between coxae I a pair of scobalae (the sternalae), long, pointed,

ciliated, 45), long; in the central area of the ventcr between coxae IT and TIT

a pair of slender tapering scobalae with adpressed ciliations, 50, long; well

behind coxae III, on the ventral opisthosoma, are 2 rows of more robust setae,

atranged 4, 2, similar to sternalae, 49-65, long, Each coxa with one seta

(coxala): that on I long, pointed, ciliated, 70, long; on II pointed, slender,

with faint adpressed ciliations, and 534 long; on UI more robust, pointed,

ciliated, 60, long.

Legs long and thin: [ 650, long, Il 625p, IIL 790, (all lengths including

coxac and claws). Each trochanter with one seta. Tarsus 1 thickened, fairly

short, 71p, long (excluding claws and pedicle) by 31, high.

Scutalac long, tapering, with barb-like ciliations, the setae ‘racat)

* See Southeott (1960) far definitions of these,

¢ These setae are broadened in Srnaris larval and in Clipeasoma copiclarum, Southcott,

1948, but are narrow in Glipeoxemm. jupiter, Southcott, 1960, and in Pilosoma pluto, South-

cott, 1960, to list larval Erythracoidea whose position within the Smarididac is undoubted.

156 kK. V. SOUTHCOTT

On the legs the following is the arrangement of the specialised setae:

trichohothvialae solenoidalac apinalae

(senisillae) (aolonidia) (@upathidies)

genu I 4d int.) 2 At

geou if) i) {)

genoa TIL 0 a "

tibia I (| at.) 4 0

tibia LU 0 1 if

tibia, TIL 0 a 1|

tursus L z 2 0

farsus LL 1 1 u

targus IIL 9 Tf) i)

* int. = intermediate type of sensilla, 4 aodified or transitional scobala.

} These show possibly faint internal solenization, ie, the development of the lielical

or banded strize characteristic of the solenoidalac. The solenvidalae and the spinaluae muy

be difficult to distinguish.

Further comment on the chaelotaxy of the legs: On tarsus I there is a

compound trichobothrial pit; such is not present on tarsus Il or Iff. Companala

present on tarsus I and tibia I, as figured. Vestigiala present on genu T and IT

as figured. Famulus (famala) present on tarsus I.

Tarsal claws: lateral (neolateral) claws identical, faleiform, with long

outstanding ventral ciliatious and adpressed dorsal ciliations, Neomedian claw

(empodium) falciform, more slender than the neolatcral, similarly ciliated.

Gnathosoma as figured. Chelae bases (“mandibles”) an ovoid mass, with

finely punctate chitin, and striated longitudinally [see Fig. 3). Cheliceral

blades simple. Galeala (galeal seta) curved, simple, 12, long. Hypostomal lip

present, delicate. Anterolateral hypostomala simple, 12, long, situated on a

chitinous thickening of the hypostome, 234 from midline and about 22 behind

the tip of the cheliceral fang. Posteromedial hypostomala stronger, pointed,

ciliated, 26. long, arising from a chitinous boss close to the anterolateral hypu-

stomala, but slightly interior and posteromedial to it.

Palpal setal forma 1, 1, 3, 6. No palpal coxala or trochanterala present.

Palpal supracoxala present, 4-5, long. The claw of the palpal tibia curves

anterolaterally, and has a short terminal split, 4. long, with little or no separa-

tion of the two elements. There is no projecting process from the ventral or

flexor aspect of the palpal tibial claw (which occurs in Clipeosoma), A stout

accessory separate conical tooth present ventrally at the base of the tibial claw,

We long by 7 wide, directed anteromedially.

The nymph (Fig. 1 G-L) was described in 1941 by Womersley and South-

eott, The dorsal setae are illustrated here (by figures based on those of

Womersley and Southcott, 1941) for comparison with those of the adults (female

in Fig, 1 C-F, male in Fig. 2A, all to same scale).

Locality, The adult male (ACA 1505) and the adult female (ACA 1504)

were both captured under bark of Eucalyptus sp, {not identified specifically,

but presumably it was Ewe. cosmophylla F. y. M., since it was a smooth-burked

species ) at Myponga, South Australia, on 3lst December, 1951, by the writer,

in Eucalyptus baxteri-Eucalyptus cosmophylla scrubland (the piece of scrubland

concerned has since become the Nixon-Skinner Reserve). ‘The larvae were reared

from eggs laid by the adult female in captivity (see under biology).

Biology. The two adults, taken as recorded, were placed immediately in a

ry tube, sealed with a cork. The only additional contents were water drop-

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAEROTARSUS 157

lets, which were given periodically for the mites to drink. The following account

of the remainder of the experiment is from my notes (somewhat contracted

and rephrased),

6th January, 1952, Mites are well. No eggs present. More water added,

27th January, 1952. The larget (female) mite was lying on her back, rather

shrunken (due to dehydration), clasping the apparently dead male. There were

no eggs in the tube. Further water was added.

94th February. The male unallered, dead, dry. The female is well but

shninken. “There is a chain of about 21 brown smooth spheroidal eggs in the

tube, which have obvionsly been laid by the larger Smayidid” (this was the

first oceasion on which the writer had ever seen eggs laid by uny Smaridid

mite, despite many attempts at rearing them over a number of years).

Qnd March. The large (female) Smaridid fecbie, shrunken, mostly lying

on her back, but waving her legs about w good deal. When righted by my

help the mite “walks a bit”. The mite soon managed to get tlself stuck in the

water, but on turning around, deank, Tt remained i an attitude of drinking,

and in about 5-10 minutes it had regained its normal form and was quite

plump again, At this stage if managed to get ftvelf stuck in the water again,

1 took it out of the tube to dry (this would have been done by placing it on

a picee vE blotting paper with a fine gable brush). “Aller an initial few minutes

of incoordination and possibly of flexor spasms it ran quite actively,” Tt was

then placed ina clean fresh tube in an attempt to stop its fonling the eggs with

mould. The dried male was removed from the tube of the eggs

16th Mareh. The eggs are beginning to sprout inoue filaments, so no

further water is to be added. The cygs are quite plump,

The udult fernale is lying on her back “in a tetanic: state’ Legs I are

extended, the others are flexed. Oveasionally one leg moves, and then flicks

back to the flexed position, SHIL under observation some minutes Jater the smite

flexed its left leg T to a right angle at the femorotibial joint, simultaneously

extonding right lee I. with the other legs remaining sermfeaed; all this while

the female was lying on her back. Water was added to the tube. (Note:

nq tood was proffered to the adult mites at any stage, and the only possibility

of their getting any food while in captivity lay in their attacking each other,

or the eggs after oviposition. Such behaviour, however, has not up ta the

present been observed in any Smarididae or other Erythraeoidea. )

23rd March, The eggs appear possibly very slightly shrunken, The other

tube containing the adult female is wet. The adult. female lies immobile, and

is beginning to sprout mould flaments. In her mouthparts a large amber globule

ot Hyuid is present. It was concluded she was dead, decomposing and rmouldly.

She remained thus, and was finally mounted through lactic acid to polyvinyl

aleohol medium on 8th May, 1952.

On 25th April, 1953, one ege was observed to be in the detrtoviim stage,

antl of the others it wax recorded they “nearly all Jook plamp and healthy”.

On Sth May (the nest observation) six larvae had hatched, the other czgs

rermyining wilutehed ‘and appewing healthy.

On 7th May 11 Jarvae were present in the tuhe, Two were removed for

mounting and study (ACA 1504 L1 and L2)

On 8th May the larvae in the tube appeared well. Two days later “about

3° of the larvae were stated to be “dead or look very poorly”. Insects obtained

from Heywood Fark, South Australia, were added to the tube Eo serve as

possible hosts for the larvae. during the afternoon and evening. Among insects

offered initially were various small Diptera, Hymenoptera and Homoptera,

including an unidentified Delphacid, as well as Psylloidea of the genera Spon-

158 R, V. SOUTHCOTT

Fig. 4.—Sphaerotarsus leptopilus Womersley and Southcott, 1941, larva, ventral aspect.

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAEROTARSUS Mia

dyliaspis, Eucalyptolyma and Cardiaspina. No pacusitizatiou was observed with

any of these lying insects, and the larval mites appeared to take only a

momentary interest in them (in general if a suitable insect host is provided tor

them larval Evythraeoidea will attack at onee, or within a very few minutes),

Later I added a number of Tractes sp. or spp. (Psocoptera) from under bark

of Eucalyptus camaldulensis, from Eust Parklands, Adelaide (10th May, 1952).

These Psocoptera were added since the only host that has been discovered so

far for an undoubted* larva of the Smarididae is this genus of Psocoptera

(recorded by Womersley and Southestt (1941)) for the larva of Smaris pro-

sninens (Banks, 1916). Since then the writer has seen other specimens of larval

Smaris from Troctes fram north Queensland (see below). (These insects have

been identified on the advice of yarious specialists, to whom.a number of insects

have been submitted, notably Mr. K. 1, Taylor of the Division of Entomology,

CS.LBR.O,, for the Psylloidea, and Dy, J. V- Pearman, of the British Museum, for

the Psocoptera, )

The farval Sphaerotarstes, however, took no interest in the Troctes.

On 12th May, 1952, 6 eges remaincd unhatched in the tube. Some of the

insects udded earlier remuined alive, Further living insects were added to

the tuhe on 12th and 13th May: further psyllids, a fly, an aphis, and although

the larval mites walked oyer the insects they made no attempt to parasitize

them.

On 14th May only one larva remained alive, Several eggs remained in the

tube, being recorded as “ruby red”, On 19th May one larva was running around

in the tube, and on 20th May the tube contained two living larvae. Only four

eges now remained unhatched. On 26th May four larvae were active and well

in the tube, The only insects remaining alive were the Troctes, but again wo

attempt to parasitize them by the mites was observed. Further imsects were

proffered to the larval mites, but none was accepted as a host.

On Ist June, 1952, one larva remained in the tibe. No further record

was tnade of this experiment until Ist August, 1952, when all the contents of

the tubes were dead and dry.

In summary, thercfore, the eggs are laid in late summer (January-February )

and hatch out in the late autumn or early winter (April-May). The egg period

lasts, therefore, approximately three months,

REMARKS ON BLOLOGY

The only other wndoubted Smaridid upon which any substantial observa-

tiuns have been made upon the lite history is Smaris prominens. The principal

details of the life history of that species were given by Womersley and South-

cott (1941). In a subsequent experiment done by the writer two adult females

of S, prominens (number ACA 1506), captured from under bark of Eucalyptus

leneoxylon, Heywood Park, Adelaide, South Australia, on 16th February, 1952,

were placed ina tube, One had died by the following day, The other remained

well and laid about 17 eggs in captivity, between 2nd and 16th March, The

exus were dark brown, smooth, spheroidal, 170-205» long by 100-125, across.

These eges did not hatch, passibly due to an infection with mould. Te is knewu

fram the earlier field observations that the larva is parasitic upon Trovtes in

April-May in the Adelaide region, hence it may he concluded that the ete

stage lasts about 1-3 months.

Tk may be remarked also that the writer has captured fwo further larvae

of S$, prominens at Kaban, nortl: Queensland (Map refereuce Palmerston 1:63360

* The status of Phanolophuy as a Smeridid is not absolutely certain (see Sonthcott,

1960). The hirva of this monptypic genus. P. vedipidarum, is an ectoparasite of lvcusts in

the: Mediterranwa region and in central Europe.

Lea KR. Vo SOUTHCOTT

269952- 270981), 24th August, 1944, specimens ACA 1633 A, B, parasitic upen

the Psucoptere Troctes sp. (nymph) (Troctidac) (A 190) and 2 nymph (A 191),

probaly of Pleroxanium kelloggi ( Rib.) (Lepidopsocidae) (= Tasmunopsocus

iforalis Hickman) (identifications by the kindness of Dr, J. V. Pearman, British

Museum; Dr. Pearman has given the foregoing synonymy and commented that

in the case of A 191 “Identification based on what is discernible [in the slide

muunt|; some distinctive features obliterated”; pers, comm., im lit., 1958).

In general it may be concluded that the life histories of the two Smaridids

studied, Smeris prominens and Sphacrotarsus leptopilus, are broadly compar-

able, with (in southem Australia) the features of summer oviposition and the

larval stage in eutuwmn-winter.

The attempt to find a suitable host for the larval Sphaervtarsus by trial

and crror was unsuccessful, and the larvae have never been captured parasitic

(or at all) in the field, [t is possible that they have a restricted inseet or other

arthropod host. The hosts offered had not come from the locality where. the

species has been captured, The recorded range for the species is the southern

end of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, the adults having been captured in Eucalyptus

baxteri-Kucalyptus cosmophylla forest. Tt should be noted that the genus

Sphaerotarsus is foun firly widely in Australia, so far having been recorded

(with a total of four species) fram South Australia, Victoria and New South

Wales (seé Womersley and Sontheott, 1941).

REMARKS ON THE SYSTEMATICS OF SPHAEROTARSUS

‘The study of the adults of 8, leptepilus allows some comment on the classi-

heation of the adults and nymphs of the genus. The writer sees no reasou to

doubt that the adults described are conspecific with each other and with the

nymph of S, leptopilus described earlier, The dorsal idjosomalac correspond

to each other reasonably well, allowiug for the tendeney ta elongation which

wcecurs in the Erythraecid nymphal fdinsomalae, The variation between the

setae of the male and the female described should be noted, both in the dursal

idjvsomal setae and in the cristal sensillae,

Ih the key of Womersley and Southcott (1941, p. 78) the aymph of

S. leptopilus was separated off in the first ciption by “Posterior sensillary setae

1:5 # as long as anterior” (i.c, the ASens/PSens ratio of °67) together with

other characters. The discovery of the adult staze with the ASens/Pens ratio

of 24/47 = -51 (female) and 18/44 = -3Y (male) inakes some alteration to the

key given necessary. At the present time, pending a full review of the genus

in Australia, it is proposed that the following will serve ta separate the adults

and nymphs of this purely Australian genus;

1 Posterior cristal sensillae up to 2:5 * as long as anterior. _,.-..,...,,.- 2

Postorior eristil sensillae 3-1) < as long as anterior, or more.,.,..,., .,.-4

2 The dorsal flange ef the dorsal idiosomal setae in outline @ narrow triangle,

apex pointing distally, and with “cross-bars” running out laterally; in the

nymph the dorsal setae are similar, and broad,,,-..,......000..2-..-.--

5. womersleyt Southcott 1946 (= §, ripicolus Womersley 1936, nom. invalid.)

The dorsal flange of the dorsal idiosomal seta not tapering, distally, and

without “cross-bars” running out laterally, In the adult the dorsal flange

is rugose, and either broad-linear or clongate-oval in outline; in the female

basal excavations may be present; in Lhe nymph the setae elongate arid

8 As in (3) of the key of Womersley and Southcott (1941, p. 78) for S. allmani

Womersley 1936 and S. ¢laviger Womersley and Southcott 1941,

NOTES ON THE GENUS SPHAEROTARSUS 161

REFERENCES

Banks, N., 1916. Acarians from Australian and Tasmanian ants and ant-nests, Trans. Roy.

Soc, §. Aust., 40, pp. 224-240.

Soutucorr, R. V,, 1946, On the family Smarididae (Acarina), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,

70 (3-4), pp. 173-178.

Soutucort, RK. V., 1948. Larval Smarididae from Australia and New Guinea, tbid., 72 (5-6),

pp. 252-264,

*Sourncott, R. V., 1960. Studies on the systematics and biology of the Erythraeoidea

(Acarina), with a critical revision of the genera and subfamilies (in the press).

WomensLey, H., 1936. Additions to the Trombidiid and Erythraeid Acarine fauna of Aus-

tralia and New Zealand, J. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool, 40 (269), pp. 107-121.

Womensiey, H., and Sovrscottr, R. V., 1941. Notes on the Smarididae (Acarina) of

Australia and New Zealand, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65 (1), pp. 61-78.

* Contains a full bibliography of the family,

A CONSIDERATION OF THE SPECIES PREVIOUSLY INCLUDED

WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS (A. CUNN.) DC.

BY PAUL G. WILSON

Summary

A key to and description of the species, varieties, and forms previously included under Helipterum

albicans is given. One new species (H. saxatile), and three new infraspecific taxa, all from Central

or South-eastern Australia are described. One specific (H. molle), and three infraspecific

combinations are made. All specimens cited from the following herbaria have been seen: State

Herbarium of South Australia (AD); Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide (ADW);

Botanic Museum and Herbarium, Brisbane (BRI) ; C.S.I.R.O. Div. of Plant Industry, Canberra

(CANB) ; Snowy Mountains Hydro-Electric Authority, Soil Conservation Section (COOMA) ;

Gauba Herbarium, Canberra (GAUBA) ; Geneva, De Candolle Herbarium (G-DC) ; University of

Tasmania (HO) ; Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew (K) ; National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL);

National Herbarium of New South Wales (NSW); Herbarium of Northern Territory, Alice Springs

(NT) ; State Herbarium of Western Australia (PERTH) ; Department of Botany, University of

Sydney (SYD).

A CONSIDERATION OF THE SPECIES PREVIOUSLY INCLUDED

WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS (A, CUNN.) DC.

By Paun G, Witson*

(Communicated by Hj. Eichler)

[Read 12 November 1959]

SUMMARY

A key to and description of the species, varieties, and forms previously in-

cluded under Helipterum ulhicans is given. One new species (17. saxatile), and

three sew infraspecific taxa, all from Central or South-eastern Australia are

described.

One specific (H. molle), and three intraspecific combinations ara made,

All specimens eited from the following herburia have been seen: State Her

baritom of South Australia (AD); Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Acle-

laid (ADW); Botanic Museum ind Herbarium, Brisbane (BRI); C.S1.R.0,

Diy. of Plant Iudusiry, Canberra (CANB); Snowy Monntains Ilydro-Electric

Authority, Soil Conservation Sect (COOMA); Gauba Herbarium, Canberra

(GAUBA); Geneva, De Candolle Herbarium (C-DC); University of ‘lasmania

(HO); Royal Botanic Cardens, Kew (K); National Herbarium of Victoria

(MEL); National Herbarium of New South Wales (NSW); Herbitinm of

Northern. Territary, Alice Springs (NT); State Herbariuin of Western Australia

(PERTH); Department of Botany, University of Sydney (SYD),

INTRODUCTION

De Candolle in his Prodromus 6:215 (1937), created under the genus

Helipterum « Section Leucochrysum, in which he placed four species, H.

incanum. (Wook,) DC., H. bicolorum A. Cunn, ex DC., H. albicans (A- Cunn.)

DC., and H. cotula (Benth.) DC. All these except for IL cotula. are. character-

ised among other points by having stipitate involucral bracts. H. cotula is

anomalous as its bracts haye broad short bases.

Mueller in 1859 united the first three and FH. brachyrrhynchum under H.,

incanum but revognized seven varieties, surae of which I have retained. Ben-

tham (and Jater authors) followed Mueller in recognizing unly one species, he

also included within it Helichrysum: molle DC., a species placed by De Candolle

in Helichrysum Section Blepharolepis, but it differs from the other members. af

that section in having a plumose, not barbate, pappus, and rightly belongs in

the section Leucochrysum of Helipterum. Subsequently F. von Mueller, R,

Tate, and later J. M. Black, included a further distinct plant within incanum,,

which I am describing as a new species, H, sexatile. This species is apparently

more closely related to Helichrysum. elatwm DC., from which it differs among

other puints in having a more plumose pappus,

George Don in 1938 placed H, incanum in David Don's genus Aphelexis

which us defined by D. Don is a purely South African group and possesses a

receptacle with “rigid, pointed paleae”, in H. incanuy the receptacle is naked.

The variation between the taxa within MHelipterum ulbicans appears from

the herbarium material to be continuous (except in the variety sraminifolium

which is at the moment represented by only a few collections), aud it is wp-

* State Herbarium: of South Australia, Adclaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, (1960), Vol. 33.

164 PAUL G. WILSON

parent that, except for the one variety noted, each taxon intergrades with one

or more of the other taxa, although, possibly due to geographical separation,

intermediates in all directions have not yet been found,

Two additional species have been described since De Candolle’s Prodromus

which are similar in capitula characters, Helipterum stipitatum F y M. and

H. fitzgibbonii F v M. From material scen these two species appear to be

invariable and show no signs of hybridization with any other species. IH. stipi-

taium is easily distinguished by its outer involucral bracts which are narrow and

stipe-like; H. fitzgibbontt by its glandular-hairy (not woolly) indumentum, and

its narrowly lanceolate, ciliate, outer involucral bracts.

Key to the “Helipterum albicans” group,

1. Leaves broadly oblong to obovate, sessile; margin wrinkled; plant somewhat shrubby.

H. saxatile

1 Leaves filiform to narrowly oblong or oblanceolate, or if obovate then petiolate and with

a smooth margin; plants at most with a woody perennial branching base.

2. Plant annual; achene densely and prominently papillose; intermediate bracts broadly

ovate to suborbicular, pale yellow; ards broadly linear to oblong or oblanceolate. ~

H. snolle

Plant perennial (or if annual then with narrowly ovate bracts and filiform: to narrowly

linear leaves); achene smooth to coarsely papillose; intermediate bracts from narrowly

lanceolate to ovate, or if deltoid then with red streaks,

3. Leaves obovate or oblanceolate, thick, plant densely lanuginose.

HW, albicans subsp. alpinum

3, Leayes filiform to narrowly oblong or narrowly oblanceolate, thin. Indumentin

variable.

4. Leaves with the 1pper surface glabrous, filiform, congested.

H. albicans subsp. albicans yar, graminifolium

4. Leaves lanate on both surfaces, filiform to lincur, narrowly oblong, or oblanceo-

late, congested or somewhat seattered,

5. Inner involucral bracts white.

6. Involucral bracts with the lamma (9-)10-15 mm. long, elliptic or

lanceolate (rarely obovate or ovate), leaves filiturm to linear, dise pale

greenish yellow. Tasmania and Grumpians of Victoria.

7. Lntesmediate involncral bracts with lamina elliptic, usually narrowly

so, rarely narrowly obovate or narrowly ovate, obtuse.

subsp. albiewns var. intenum {. incanum.

7. Intermediate involucral bracts lanceolate, wcnte or acuminate,

subsp, albicans var. incanum f. grampianum

6. Tavolucral bracts with the lamina from 5 to 10 mm, long, oblong to

ovate (or rarcly elliptic), uhtuse te seute, dise yellow. Leaves Siliform

to linear or narrowly oblanceolate, Mainland plant.

subsp. albicans var. incanum [. purpureo-album

5. Inner invohieral bracts yellow.

8 Intermediate inyolucral bracts ovate to ublong, obtuse to acute,

Outer bracts pale to dark brown; leaves filiform to linear: peren-

nial (or occasionally annual?).

subsp, albicans var, albicans

§. Intermediate involucral bracts broadly ovate to deltoid or orbi-

cular, apex rounded to acute.

9, Outer bracts dark brown or purple, often streaked, central

ones with the lamina broadly ovate to deltoid; leaves linear;

perennial, subsp. albicans var. buffalvensts

§. Outer bracts colourless ta pale brown, central ones with the

lamina broadly ovate to suborbieular, obtuse to rounded;

leaves broadly linear to oblong or oblanceolate; panel 1

. molle

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS

Fig. 1,—Welipterum. saxatile P. G. Wils. (Ising sm. Evelyn Downs): 1,

habit; 2, corolla; 3, achene; 4, an intermediate bract.

166 PAUL G. WILSON

Helipterum saxatile P. G, Wilson sp. noy.; H. albicans (A, Cunn.)DC. affinis

a foliis latis, marginibus undulatis pedunculis brevis, bracteis anguste ellipticis

iftert.

[H. stipitatum F y M. var., Mueller, Fragm. 10: 109 (1877).]

[H. incanum (non Glgee )DC.)—F. vy. Mueller, Trans. Roy, Soc. 8, Austral.

3: 134 (1880); Tate, Fl. Extratrop. S. Austral. 125 (1890), and in Rep. Horn

Exped. Bot. 3: 165 (1896),]

[H. albicans (non (A, Cunn.)DC,)—J. M. Black, Il. S. Austral. 624 (1929),

p.p.. and 2nd ed. 901 (1957) p.p-]

[H. incanum (Hook.)DC. var. irvineae F v M. in sched.]—Figs, 1, 3, 7(1).

Herba perennis fruticulosa dense ramosa ad 40 em alta; rami inferiores

lignosi ad 1:5 cm crassi. Caules annotinorum dense albido-lanuginosi ad 15

em longi, 2 mm lati. Folia sessilia oblonga vel anguste oboyata, apice obtuso

vel acuminato, apicnlato, ad 3-5 em longa, 0-7 (—1-1) cm lata, marginibus

undulatis, utrinque albido-lanata, Pedunculus terminalis, 1-8 cm longus, dense

lanuginosus pauci bracteatus; bractcae lineares vel filiformes 2-5 mn longac.

Involucrum Tenigphseieum ud 2 em latum, exterius album vel pallido-ubrum,

interius album. Bracteae laminarum basibus lanatis, exteriores sessiles anguste

oblongae, acutae ad 2. mm longae, interiores stipitatae, stipite viridi plano-

subulato 4-5 mm longo, lamina elliptica c, 6 mm longa apice obtuso basi

anguste cuneata; bractea intimae stipite lincari viridi c. 6 mm longi, lamina ovata

¢, 3 mm longa. Receptaculum planum c. 4 mm Jatum. Flosculi homogami;

corolla tenuis 6-8 mm longa, fauce vix tubo latiove, lobis acutis c. 0-8 mm longis;

antherae c. 2-5 mm Jongae basi setiferac. Styli rami c. 2 mm longi, apice

rotundati. Achaenia glabra, dense et minute papillosa, c. 2 mm Jonga. Pappi

setae 15-20, albae, brevissime plumosae, c. 6 mm longue.

Distribution—Central Australia, northern South Australia, eastern Queens-

land and north-eastern New South Wales.

Fig. 2—Distribution of Melipterum saxatile.

NogrHenn Ternrriory, Arltuoga or Clarayille, M, L. Benda (AD); near Harts Rane

Police Depot, 12 Sept. 1956, M, Lazarides 5976 (CANB):; Mt. Sonder, [1894], R. Tute (AD):

(MEL); Alice Springs-Standley Chasm, 11 Oct. 1950, Ganba G18 (GAUBA); or. Bond

Springs, 22 Apr. 1944, BR. E. Winkworth 201 (N’'T): Macdonnell Range-Queenslaod border,

1882, B. Flint (MEL); Gosse Range, 28 Ang. 1956, J. B. Cleland (AD): near Hermannshurg,

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS 167

24 Aog. 1956, G. Chippendale 2632 (NT holatype, NSW iso, CAND jso) and 22 Aug. 1556,

255t (NT); ihid., 26 Auy. 1956, G. Chippendale 2704 (AD); ibid, 13 Aum 1929, J, B.

Cleland 23 (AT); nv, Upilla Gorge (MeMilla Cr,|, [1.894], R. Tate (NSW); nr. Dorp Well

Siding, 3 Sept. 1856, CG. Chippendale 2716 (BW, NSW, GANB); 'Tobermorey Boomerang

paddock, 9 Sept. 1954, G. Chippendale 229 (BRL, AD); Finke, R., H. Kempe 409 (MEL);

ihid., 1879, I. Kempe 61 (MEL); Horse Shoe Bend (Mt. Engoordina), 24 Aug. 1931, &. H,

Tsing (AD); ibidi, Ho Kempe en. (AD), Henbury, 3. June 1935, J. B. Cleland (AD): to

wards Mt. Olga [1873], W. C. Gosse (MEL); Lilla Creek, near Old Crown, 17 Arig. 1955,

DB, Catley 1915 (NSW, NT, CANB): N.W. Anstralia, 1903, Mf. Bayedow 126. and 443 NSW)!

QUEENSLAND, Duehess Towuship, 2 Sept. 1953, M. Lazarides 4030 (CANB).

New Satori Wants, Barrier Range, Sept. 1889, J. TF. Iroine (AID); Corona Station,

Silverton, Sept, US89 und L890, J. By irvine (MEL); mt. Silyertou, Aug. L880, J. FF. Troine

(NSW); Mt. Brown, W. Bauerlen 415 (MEI).

Soeur Ausimauia. Evelyn Downs, Oodnadatta. 16 Sept. 1955, E. H. lying 3896 (NSW,

AD); thid., 16 Sept. 1955, E, H. Tinie (AID 95993004); thd, 3 Sept. 1955, EH Dxing,

3432 (AD); ibid., 17 Sept. 1952, 2. WL Tsing CAD): dbiel., Oct. 1950, 8. Ho bvinyt (ADT

thid., 26 Aug, 1954, Bi Ay Lsing 3739 (AD); ihied., 16 Sept. 1955, FB. If. Istng JAB1 (412);

thid., 22 Oct. 1055, E. IT. Ising (AT); Mt. Clarenen, L. 8. 2rancts (AD): Upper Arkaringa

Case 101 and 195 (k).

This plant is present in many herbaria under the name of Helipterum in-

conum yar. irvincae F y M., Mueller having thus labelled specimens sent to him

by Mrs. Jemima F. Irvine from near Silverton, south of the Burner Ranges,

NS.W., which he received in 1889 and 1890, In the Melbourne Herbartim

there is a specimen of this plant collected by William Christic Gosse in 1573

“towards Mt, Olga”, attached is a lengthy manuscript written by Mueller in

which he describes it as a new species of Helipterum and states that he is naming

it after Reynolds [Thomus Reynulds, Commissioner of Crown Lands 1872-73

and previously Treasurer and Premier of South Australia.] However, neither the

name “irvinede” nor “reynoldsii” appear to have been published. In L877

(Fragm. 1): 109) Mueller remarked on a plant collected between Alice Springs

and Charlotte Waters which he considered tu be a variety of Heliplerian stipi-

tatum having, however, lanuginose-tomentose lanceolate leaves, lanceolate not

subulate outer involucral bracts, and white inner bracts, apparently being

intermediate between Melichrysum and elipterum. There is a corresponding

specimen of H. saxetile in the Melbourne Merbarium collected by Christopher

Ciles in 1875 between Alice Springs and Charlotte Waters, én which Mueller

has made similar notes, presumably therefore his remarks in the Fragsuenta

were based on this collection. In 1890 Mueller, in passing, makes another note

on this species [Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Austual., 13: 170 (1890)] in which he cefers

to it as “the breader leaved form of H, incanum, with the usual lanuginous

vestiture, [which] penetrates also quite ag tar as the Tropic of Capricurn into

Central Australia®. It is, 1 fecl, fairly certain that although Mueller several

times considered describing this plant as a new varicty or species, he never

finally did so, That both Ralph Tate and J. M. Black also noted this plint and

confused it with H. albicans ts indicated in the literature cited abuve and was

made apparent by a study of the specimens in the herbaria of these auttars

(AD).

Hf, suxatile appears, as noted by Mueller, to be intermediate between Heli-

chrystem and Melipteruam. It is probably closely allied to Meltchrysena eletiume

A. Cuau. ex DC. and Helichrystim lanuginostim A. Cunn. ex LC. both of which

have similar involucral bracts and florets, but diter in haying smooth achenes

and pappis bristles «mly shortly denticulate. In H. saxatile the pappus bristles

ure nearer to those of A. albicans, Le., subplumose, however, the change from

168 PAUL G. WILSON

the denticulate bristle of Helichrystun lanuginosum to the sub-plumose bristle

of Helipterum albicans is not sharp and certainly not in itself a natural basis for

generic distinction, Although H, saxatile is not closely related to H. albicans,

they are considered together in this paper because of their constant associa-

tion and confusion in previous works.

k PAs name saxatile is given to the plant because of its growing in stony

abitats.

I should like to acknowledge my thanks to Mr. E. H. Ising, who has col-

lected both H. saxatile and IT, mollg fairly widely in South Australia; he felt

sure that these were two distinct species, drew my attention to the confusion,

and gave his collections and extensive notes to me for study.

Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.)DC. Prod., 6: 215 (1838); Ewart, Fl. Vict.,

1130 (1931).

Elichrysum albicans A. Cunn. in Field, Geog. Mem. N.S.W, 359 (1825),

asad Land, Cox's River, 9 Oct, 1822, A. Cunningham 71 (holo K, iso?

MEL),

Argyrocome albicans (A. Cunn,) O, Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 1: 308 (1891).

[Helipterum incanum (non (Hook.)DC. sensu stricto) — Hooker, Icones

PLt.318 (1841) as. to specimens cited; Bentham, Fl. Austral., 3: 643 (1867);

Bailey, Syn. Queensl. Fl, 251 (1883); Moore, Cens. Pl, N.S.W. 38 (1884); Mueller,

Key Syst. Vict. Pl. 33 (1885); Mueller, Sec. Syst. Cens. Austral. Pl. 136 (1889);

Woolls, Pl. Indig. and Nat. Neighb. Syd. 33 (1891); Bailey, Queensl. Fl. 831

wet Dixon, Pl. N.S.W. 192 (1906); Bailey, Compreh, Cat. Queensl. Pl. 266

1913?); Sulman, Wild. Fl. N.S,W. 2: 73 (1914); Maiden and Betche, Cens,

N.S.W. Pl. 203 (1916); Field Nat. Cl. Vict.. Cens. Pl. Vict. 68 (1923).]

A perennial herb (or occasionally annual ?), 12-45 em high, base branched

and often woody, sometimes decumbent, the older stems often covered with

brown scarious persistent leaf bases. Young stems sparsely to densely lanate,

vres,

te ep ee pe ee

‘

’

Fig. 3.—A, Distribution Fig, 4.—Distribution of

of Helipterum alhicans §, Helipterum albicans var.

gt uréo-ulbum; B, var. albicans.

uffuloensis; C, var.

graminifolium.

erect, leafy. Leaves more or less lanate at least below, scattered or congested

on the younger portions of the stems, filiform with revolute lamina, to linear,

narrowly oblong, or obovate, the base clasping, 2-5-10 cm long, 0-1-1 cm wide,

Peduncle terminal, sparsely to densely lanate, 5-20 em long, with a few scattered

scarions linear to filiform bracts. Capitulum solitary, terminal. Involuere 2-3

(-3) em wide, hemispherical, refexed in fruit. Outer bracts sessile, oblong to

ovate, with the apex obtuse to acute, intermediate ones stipitate with the lamina

deltoid to narrowly elliptic, apex rounded to acute, base woolly ciliate, truncate

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTEKUM ALBICANS 1é9

ly narrowly cuneate, 6-10 (-15) mm long, 2-5-4 (-6) mm wide, stipe subulate,

minutely papillose on the outer surface, to & mm long; innermost bracts with a

shurt lamina and a fattened scuriously winged stipe. Outer bracts purple,

brown, pale yellow, or colourless; fading with age, inner bracts yellow or wlute,

Dise pale greenish-yellow to bright yellow. Florets homogamous, Corolla

sparsely papillose on the outside c. 5 mm lang. with the tube 23 mm long,

wout narruwly campanulate 2-3 mm Jong, lobes ovate to lanceolate 0:3-1 mm

lung. Achene - oboyoid obscurely four angled, curved, smooth to verruculose,

2-3 mm lone. Pappus bristles 14-20, sub-plumose except at base, free, more or

less equalling the corolla in length,

subsp. alhicans.

Leaves Flitorm to linear. Corolla c& 5 mm long. Achene + simooth to

verruculose ar paupillose.

var. albicans,

H. incanum (WWook.) DC. var. flavidiceps F. v. M. Rep. Babbage’s Exped. 14

(1859). Type, “Subalpine plains on the Snowy River", F. y. Mueller (iso K,

holo MEL).

H, (neanum var, aurtceps Fv. M. Le

H. incanum var. filifolium F.v.M. Le, Type, Station Peak, You Yangs

Mes., rr. Geelany, Vietorig, F. v. Mueller (iso K, hala MEL),

[H. incanum (A, Cunn.)}DC, var, auriceps (F, v. M.) lewart, Fl, Viet, 1130

ter (combination not validly published )-|—Figs. 4, 7(3),

Plant perennial (or occasionally annual’), Leaves scattered or congested,

filiform to linear, lanalte. Intermediate involucral bracts with the lamina ovate

ta ublong or lanceolate, yelluw, 5-8 (-10) mm long, outer bracts pale tu dark

brown. Disc yellow. Achene smooth to coarsely verruculose,

Distribution. South-east Queensland, eastern New South Wales, central and

eustern Victoria.

Qurensuano. Canal Creek, 1882, Hartmann 769 (MEL); Bumet, C, Haly (MEL)

Conilamine, anon 854 (MEL): Hamsay, J. Margins (BRI); Warwick, Silverwood, 24 Aug.

1934, 8S, L, Lverist (BRI); ibid, Sept, 1922, C. T. White 1755 (BRL): The Summit, 22

Now. 1946, Kverist and Webb 1332 (CANB); Stanthorpe, ‘T. A. Bernays (BRI): a

Davidson 13 (BRI); ibid, F, M. Bailey (BRL); ibid.. Oct, LOLG, H. Wright (BRI); Upper

Mavintyre K., Oct. 1887, A. Butler (MEL): Severm R., ISTS, Hertmunn 46 (MEL, BRI).

New Souik Watts, Clarence BR. 1872, Wieex (MEL); Maryland, Mar, 1885, E.

Hickey 210 (MEL); Wilson's Dawnlall, Nay, 1904, J. L. Boarman ew) Boonoa Boonno-

Wilson's Downfall 9 Jan. 1956, M. Gray 8754 (CANB); Tenterfield, 22 May 1947. EB. FP,

Constable (NSW); {hid., Nov. 1874, waen, (MEL); Open Plains, New England, wnan, 30

(MEL); New England, 2000 ft. C. Stuart 55 (MTEL); New England, 1886, R. Collie (MEL);

Emmiuville, Oct. 1911, J, L. Boorman (NSW); ibid), Oct. 1944, W. Hartley (CANBY: Fhaid-

bury, 10 June 1953, Jessup ane Cray 148 (CANB): Copmanhurst, Oct. 1917, A, At. Ru 2

(NSW); Glen Innes, Dec. 1913, J. L. Boorman (BRU); ibid, Mar. 1917, J, Boorman (NS ;

Glen Elgin, Dee. 1915, J. Boorman (NSW); Guyra, 11 Jan, 1936, L. Fraser (NSW, SYD):

ibid... Mar. 1917, J. Boorman (NSW); Pleasant Hills, 1889, Fischer (MEL), Barraba, Sept.

1903, KR, D. Hay LL (NSW): Yarrowyck, 4 Afr, 1954, Jessup and Cray 2709 (CANB):

Ilead of Gwydir KR. 12 ‘Apr. 1843, Leichhardt (NSW) Armidale, 20 Jan. 1941)

Davies (SYD): ibid., 18 Jan. 1929, BF. MeDonald (ADW); tbid.. Perrott (MEL):

Walcha, 1884, A. R. Crawford 49 (MEL); Upper Macquarie &, Ovt, 188% 1M.

Cwrran (MEL); Scone, 1883, FP, C. Carter (MEL), ibid. 31 Aug, 1907, RB. H.

Cambaye 1691 (NSW); Blindford, 2 Oct, 1944, H. M. Rupp (NSW); Guongal, Sept. 1904,

{. L. Boorman (NSW); Dubbo, 1882, M. Curran (MEL), Hastings R,, Or, Beckler (MEL);

Mudgee, Woolls (MEL): Wingen, 30 Oct, 1908, R. M7. Cambaze (SYD), Lithgow, 2 Jan,

1936, .WV., LAP, and MLW, (SYD); Bowonfels, 2 Oct. 1904, A. A. Cambaye 1150

(NSW); Bathurst, 22 Apr, L889, Deane (NSW); Wallerawang, Dec, 1917, J. L. Boorman

(AD); Hartley Vale, Nov, 1913, A. A. Humilton (NSW); Jenolan Caves, Oct. 1890, W. F,

Blakely (NSW); Lidsdule-Wallerawang, 2 Jan, 1941, A.D.B. (SYD): Kirkuonnel State Forest,

22 Mar. 1947, G. W. Althofer (NSW): Forest Land, Cox’s B., 9 Oct, 1822, A. Cunningham

71 (Type of Helichrysum albicans A. Guow., MEL iso, K holo); ibid. S$. Go Hannaford

a?) PAUL G. WILSON

(NSW), Temora, Nov. 1916, J. W. Duyer 959 (NSW); Cavan, I. Galcerté (MEL):

Vass-Bavrowa, 30 nov, 1953, C. W. E. Moure 281 (NSW); Yass, 30 Nov. 1953,

Cc. W. E. Moore 2811 (CANB); Albwy, Oct, 1918, T. 2, Patterson 166 (NSW);

Table Top, I/. Beultie (MEL); Nail Can Will, 17 Set. T49. BL PL MeBarron salu

(AD, SYD); thid,, 22 Jan, 1949, £. J. McBarron 2995 bis (NSW), Braidwood, 3 Oct.

1908, A. WT. Gumbagze 2082 (NSW, SYD); ibid,, 3100 ft, Dec. 1684, W, Béterlen 252

(MEL), ibid., Feb. 1909, J, L. Boorman (NSW): Wagya Wagga, Hammond 1 (MEL);

ihid., 1888, J, R. Garland 18 (MEL); ibid. 1884, R. Thorn (MEL); Turobawumba, 8 Nov.

1819, BE. J. MeBarron 4001 (SYD): Lindsay station, 4 Nov, 1909, AR. Tl Cumbage (SYD);

iy eenanal F. ». Mueller (MEL): base of Mt. Kosciusko, Qet. 1887, F. p, Mueller

Vierorrs. Beechworth, 1891, Falck 21 (MEL); Rotherglen-Chiltera, 19 Oct. 1950,

Cc. W. E. Moore 1418 (GAND); Myrtleford, 1883, Dr. Lucas (MEL); Mt. Hotham, Jan,

1952, E, L, Robertyon 7290 (ADW); tbid., 1890, GC. French (MEL); Dippiind. 1983,

Howitt 66 and 447 (MEL): Australian Alps, 3000 ft,, 23 Oct. 1886, Stirling (7) 46 (MEL};

Qhico, 1882, Howitt 639 (MEL); Upper Murray R., 1886, C. French (MIEL); ibid. US88,

E, Rawes 39 (MEL); Upper Yarra, Aug. 1891, C. Wulter Nan NSW); Red Jacket Greek,

1874, Gavgurecich (MEL); Research, 12 Dee. 1047, Ganhu (GAUBA), Castleuname, 1891,

P. Doreen (NSW): Romsey, Moffat (MEL); Port Philhp, F.v. Mueller (MEL); Skiptun,

Wha 8 (MEL); Wimmera, Dall. (MEL); ibid, Curdic (MEL); Mealesville, 18 Oet, 1913,

K. Kelly (G-DC); ibid., C. Walter (G-DC, MEL); Little River, Fulligaw (MEL); Stutica

Peak, Fi 0, Mueller (K); You Yangs Mts, 3 Sept. 1906, A. GS. Cambell (G-DC},

This variety exhibits cowsiderable variation at the extremes of its distribu-

tion, both in its leaves and its involucral bracts, In the region south-west of

Melbuurne (the type locality of H. incanum var. filifoliem Fv M.). the leaves

are filiform. In eastern Victoria aruund Mt. Tlotham, they become thicker, per-

haps due to the influence of subsp. alpintyn, while in the westerly limnits of its

occurrence in New South Wales, they become flattened, and the plants smaller

suggesting hybridization with I. molle. The variation in colour and shape of

the invulucral bracts is also great. Thus plants from central Victoria have lanceo-

late bracts, in the east and north-east of New South Wales and Queensland and

they are narrowly ovate to oblong, while to the west they becume more broadby

ovite, again a tendency towards H. molle.

In Gippsland is found a form with pale yellow narrowly ovate intermediate

involucral braets and lincar to narrowly oblanceolate leaves, this represents Var-

flavidiceps F v M. described from the Snowy Kiver.

It scems probable that Mueller bad no precise plant in mind when he de-

scribed H. incanum var. auriceps, his description “involucral scales lanceolate.

yolden yellow” und “Australia Felix”, one of the regions of distribution vited,

would fit the central Victorian form of yar. albicans, but Mueller als mentions

it as Occurring in the “Northern parts of South Australia” where the only plant

in this group found is H. molle. ft is passible that Mueller was not satisfied

with his delimitation of the varieties of IM. albicans as described in Rep. Bab-

hage’s Exped,, for he does not appear ta have used the varietal epithets in Is

later publications,

var. buffaloensis P. G. Wilson var. nov, —Fiys. 3b, 7(4), 8(1)-

Iferba perennis suffrutescens. Bracteac involucri exteriares ovatae, rubro-

luscac, interiores late ovatae vel deltoidea, flavae, Corolla 3 mm longa. Achacnia

leviter verrucosa, vbovoidea, 3 mm longa,

A tall erect perennial herb to 43 em high, much branched, with the branches

ascending from a woody base. Leaves linear closely lanate, seattered alung

the stem when fowering. Outer involucral bracts dark reddish brown, often

streaked, the intermediate ones yellow with acute broadly ovate tu deltoid

laminae which are up to 10 mm tong and 6 mm wide. ,

Distribution Apparently confined to Ml. Buffalo.

SPECIES WITHIN HELIFTEBUM ALBICANS 71

Vieronta. Mt. Buffalo. 85 Dec, 1924, MacGillivray 1166 (NSW, ADW), 4,300 ft,

19 Jun. 1913, A IT. Cambage 3724 (NSW): Dec. 1902, Boucher (NSW); 4,000 ft, 9 Jan.

1950, H, C. E, Stewart (BRI); 3,000 ft, 10 Nov. 1955, Gauba (GAUBA, typr).

It differs from albicans in being a taller plant, and in the colouring and shape

of the involueral bracts, some collections from near Mt, Buffalo are, Loweyer,

intermediate between vur buffaloensis and var. albicans in this respect.

var, graminifolium P. G. Wilson var. nov. — Figs. 3c, 7(5). Herba perennis

inferne lignosa ad 30 cm alts, dense compacta, ramosissima; rani maturt hasihus

rigidis foliorum delapserum incrustati. Caulis armotinus dense foliatus, parce

lanatus. Folia filiformia ud 12 cm longa, marginibus revolutis, supra glabra

yena impressa, infra vena prominenti glabra aliter lanata, Pedunculus ¢ acilis

pauci bracteatus, apice versus lanatus, 8-15 cm longus, Involucrum hernis-

phericum, 2-2-5 em latum. Bractcac involucro extreme sessiles, oblangae vel

cllipticae, obtusac, scariosae, basi lanata, interivres stipitatae, stipite 3-3-5 mm

longo, lamina elliptica ad 7+5 mm longa obtusa vel acuta basi Janata; bracteie

intimae stipite anguste scarioso-alato c. 4 mm longo, lumina oblenga ¢c. 4 mm

longa. Bracteae exterioves pallido-fuscac vel _puniceae, interiores aurcac vel

flavae. Achaenia minute rugosa vel levii, tuegida, leviter curvata ¢, 2 mm longa.

Pappi setae 14-16, sub-plumosae, c. 4 mm longac.

Distribution. — Known only from the one district about 75 miles north-west

of Sydney.

New Sourn Wanrs. Clarence-Wolan Road, 31 Dee. 1039, W. I. Blakely, J, une W. J,

Buckingham 44378 (AD, NSW); ibid, 26 Feb, 1939, W. F, Blakely, J. and W. J. Bucking-

ham 3306 (AD isotype, NSW holotype); Wolgan Gap, 3.200 ft., 12 Apr. 1953, L, Johnson

(NSW); Wolgan K,, Nov. 1909, H, Deane (NSW).

This is a clearly distinguished variety noteworthy fur its closely revolute

leaves which are glabrous above and lanate beneath except fur the glabrous

midrib, and for the hard scale-like leaf bases on the old stems.

Lam grateful to Sydney Herbarium (NSW) for sending me all their material

of this interesting plant, and for the accompanying notes made on it by the

late W. I’, Blakely, whose manuscript epithet I haye adopted.

var, incanum (Hook.) P. G. Wi slgort var. et comb. nov,

Helichrysum incanum Hook, Bot. Mag, t. 2881 (1829). Type, Le tb 2881.

Helipierum incanum (Hook.) DC, Prod, 6: 215 (1838); Hovker, cones

Pl. t. 318 (1841) p.p,, as tu tab. and Taymanian plants cited; Mooker, Fl, Tasman.

t wy Rodway, Tasman, Fl, 85 (1903); Guilfoyle, Austral, Pl. 213

Wlge).

Aphelexis tncana (Hook.) G. Dun in Sweet, Hort. Brit, ed. 3. 379 (1839),

f. incanum,

Helizterum incanum vier. tricolor DC. Prod, 6; 215 (1538). (Name illegiti-

mate as the variety is based on Bot. Mag. t. 2881, the type figure of H. incanum

Hooks eae VE, Tasm. 1: 24 (1856): F. v. Mueller, Rep. Babbage's Exped,

no) Pp

[H. Sine var, purpureo-album Fv M. Lec. pan, not as to lectotype-]—

Figs. 50, '7(7).

A perennial herb 10-40 em high. Base branched and wandy, covered with

the persistent membranous bases of the old leaves. Branches erect, or slightly

decumbent in old plants, lanuginose when young, Leaves mare or less con-

tested, narrowly linear to filifurm with revolute margins, lanuginose, tu 12 um

fone Involucre hemispherical, 2-5 em. wide. Outer bracts oblong, sessile;

intermediate ones stipitate, the lamina elliptic, usually narrowly so (evcasionally

mirrowly ovate or obovate), apex obtuse, hase ovate to narrowly cuneate, 10-15

mm long, 24 mm wide; stipe subulate to 6 mm Jong. The outer 5-6 rows of

172 PAUL G. WILSON

inyolucral bracts with purple tips which become bruwn with age, the rest white,

Achene four angled, + smooth to coarsely verruculose, curved, 2-5-2-8 mm long.

Distribution.—Northern Tasmania.

Tassianta. Circular Head, 3 Nov, 1841, Milligan 551 (MEL, 101; ibid., 30 Jan. 1848,

Oakdun 115 (MEL); Circular Head Bluff, Sept. 1838, Gunn 18 (NSW), éhid., Sept. 1838,

Guin 442 (NSW); Punt, Norfolk Plains, 8 Dee, 1842, Gunn, 108 (NSW); Middlesex Plains,

300 tt, 19 Jan. 1842, Gunn 513 (MEL); ibid, Feh, 1924, L. 1, Linden (NSW); Serubby

Corner, Nay, 1848, Archer 71 (NSW): Cradle Mt-Moina, | eb. 1949, N. 1. Burhinee

4528 (CANB, HO). Without clefinite locality: H) Broten (MEL); Story 32. (MEL); C.

Stuart (G-DC, MEL); 1844, Guin 55 (MEL); Camn 108 (MEL, KR), 100, 124 (origin of

Teones digure) (KC), 1863 sn. (G-DC),

This form is restricted to northern Tasmania. It is similar to the south-east

Australian f.. purpurco-album which also has purple tipped outer involucral

bracts. In the: latter plant, however, the bracts are smaller. normally ovate to

oblong, usually acutely tipped, while the dise is of a deeper yellow colour.

W. J. Hooker in his deseription of H, incanum (Bot. Mag. 1. 2881) states

that the inner involucral bracts ave pale yellow or cream-coluured, the inter-

mediate ones. tipped with red, and the outer white, while De Candolle in his

Prodromus, under var, tricolor based vn the same figures in the Bot. Mag., de-

scribes the inner ones as white, intermediate yellow, and outer purple, which

statement is repeated hy Mueller in Rep, Babbage’s Exped. 14 (1859). [ have

nol sveitany specimens of Tasmanian plants with yellow bracts, although various

colour combinations sometimes occur on the mainland. The seed from whieh the

slant illustrated in the Botanical Magazine was grown, is suid to have come from

Tasmania, but no details are given, and I have not been able to find any cor-

responding specimen in the Kew Merbarium.

f, grampianum P.G. Wilson form, nov.—Figs, 5A, 7(§).

Rracteae involucri mteriores lanceolatac, acutae vel acuminatae 19-14 mm

longac, 4-5.mm Iatae. Folia filiformia, Janata,

Distribution.—The Grampian Region of Victoria.

ViewoutA, Mt, Emu, F. v. Mueller (MEL); Skipton Plains, 1860, W. J. Whan 39

(MEL holotype, NSW iso); Grampians, 1885, F. », Mueller (MEL); ibid., Wilhelmt (MEL):

Western Plain of Vietoria, 1857, Withelmt (MEL); “Loay Plains towards the Granipinns”,

anon, (MEL), Wiekhite, Nov, 1908, 2M. (MEL); “Interior of New Holland", 844,

Mitehell (MEL).

This variety has a very limited distribution as is indicated above, It ap-

pears from the collections available that there is no continuity of distribution

with the south-eastern form of f. purpurco-album, although intermediates occur

between £. graimpianem and the western Victorian form of f. purpureo-alhum.

It closely resembles the ‘Tasmanian Ff. incenium but has characteristic acutely

fancenlate reddish-brown involucral bracts.

f, purpurea-album (F v M.) P. G. Wilson form, et comb, nov,

H. ineanwm (Hook,) DC. var. purpures-album F vy M, Rep. Babhage's

ee (1859) p.p. Lectotype “Manervo Plains” [Monaro], 1855, F, v, Mueller

1EL).

H, dicalorum A, Ounn, ex DC. Prod. 6: 215 (1838). Type “Hills of the

Lachlan River” 33°4/2"'S.. 146°47°30’E., A, Cunningham, 31 July 1817 (halo

G-DC photo, iso K, MEL, BRI),

| A. incanum (Hook.) DC, var. tricolor (non DC. sensu stricto) — PF. v. M.

Rep. Bubbage’s Exped. 14 (1859) p.p.]

Lil. incanum (non ( Hook.) DC, sensu stricto) — Guilloyle, Austral. Pl, 213

(1910?) p.p.|—Figs, 3A, '7(6), 8(3)

Leaves fliform to linear or narrowly oblanceolate, Inyoluere 2-2-8 om

wide, Outer bracts pale brown to purple, intermediate bracts ahlong to ovate

(or rarely elliptic) obtuse to acute, 5-8 (10) mm long. Dise yellow,

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS 173

Distribution. — South-east New South Wales, south-west ard south-east

Victoria.

New Sourn Waxes. Gulgong, Barnard 89 (MEL); Dubbo, 29 Sept, 1911, J.B.

Cleland (AD); Mudgee, 1870, Taylor (MEL); Mudgee South, 16 Oct, 1953, M. Tindale

(NSW); Wellington, Oct. 1883, Betche (NSW); THll End, 3 Jan, 1925, MacGillivray 1172

Suet ADW); ibid,, Apr. 1885, J. Lauterer 25 (MEL); Bathurst, Apr, 1817, A. Cunning-

m (BRI); Trunkey, 18 Noy. 19L8, J. Boorman (NSW) Trunkey Cr., 22 Oct. 1951, K.

Mair (AD); Abercrombic district, Jan. 1936, J, Wiburd (NSW); Aberctombic Caves, Nov.

1918, J. Boorman (NSW): Lachlan R., July 1817, A. Cunninghame 302 (Type of A. bi-

colorum DC?) (BRI); Laggan-Tnena, 15 Oct. 1953, C. W. E. Moure 2682 (NSW, CANB);

Berrima, Apr; 1889, H, Deane (NSW); Goulburn, Sept. 1916, J. W. Diwyer $48 (NSW);

Bundanoon, 15 Apr 1947, M. Tindale (NSW); Oldbury [near Bertimal, L, Atkinson 16

(MEL); Midway rivulet, L. Atkinson 17 (MEL); Wingello, anon. (NSW); ibid., Feb, 1901,

and Dec. 1913, J. L, Boorman (C-DC), Tallong, 28 Out. 1933, E, Cheel (NSW); ibid., 1

Jan. 1935, O.D.E, (SYD); Yass district, Bango Quarry, 3 June 1940, A. A. Oxenford (NSW);

Yass-Gunning, 12 Oct, LO53, C. W, E. Moore 2629 (NSW, CANB); Tarago, 25 Sept. 1928,

A. Morris (ADW); Barbers Creek, Oct, 1899, IT. J. Rumsey (SYD); ihid., H, J. Rumsey

98 (NSW), ihid., Oct. 1898, J. IL. Maiden (BRI); Braidwood, 30 Oct. L908, A. A, Cambaze

2082 pp. (SYD); thid., 3200 ft, Jan. 1685, W. Bauerlen 363 and 390) (MEL); Marulan, 25

Oct. 1948, E. [. MeBarron 2436 bis (NSW, SYD); Cavan, I, 8, Calvert (MBL); Castlereagh

R., Woolls (MEL); Cobar, 1887, H. Andrae 342. (MEL), Port Jackson, anon. (MRL); New

Adaminaby-Cooma, 21 Jan. 1958, J, Thompson 48 (NSW); Cooma, 2 Nov. 1808, RB. H.

Cambage 2101 (NSW, SYD); Cooma district, Dec. 1896, anon. (AD); Nimmitabel-Cooma,

Dec, 1896, J. H. Maiden (NSW); Nimmitabel, Dec, 1916, J. Boorman (NSW, SYD), Kybesn,

5 Nov. 1908, A. H. Cumbage 2123 (NSW, SYD); Maneroo Plains [Monaro], 1855, F. wv.

Mueller (MEL Ieetotypc),

A.C:T, Nr, Mt. Majura, 24 Sept. 1950, C. W. E. Moore 1415 (CANB); Canberra, 1 Nov.

1949, Guubu (GAUBA); Ainslie-Duntroon, Oct. 1947, H, R. Brawne (CANB).

Vierorta. Tlamilton, Oct. 1900, HW. B. Williamson (BRT); Macarthur, Nov, 1896, H, 3B.

Williamson (NSW) thid., Nov, 1894, H, B. Williamson (MEL).

ser imeey

Fig, 5—A, Distribution of Fiy, G—Distribntion of Welipterum molle,

Helipterum albicuns £. gram-

pinnum: B, subsp. alpinum; C,

£. ineanum,

In the northern limits of its distribution this form has smaller capitula and

involucral bracts, and agrees closely, except for colour, with the eastern New

South Wales form of var, albicans, In ihe south, the capitula and involucral

bracts are larger although they do not reach the size of those found in f. tncanum.

the south-west Victorian plants have flat lincar leaves and white to pale-brown

outer involueral bracts, and grade to the east into £. grampianum.

74 PAUT, G. WILSON

In south-east New South Wales from Collector south ta Cooma occurs a

form with the euler involucral bracts brawn ta reddish brown, the intermediate

ones white. and the inner yellow fading to white with aye. This may be a hybrid

between £. albicans and £. purpuireo-albun. Collections of this form are: Collee-

tor, A, Hill 1003 (AD); Queanbeyan, M. Mueller and SM’, 2117 (COOMA);

‘net M, Mueller 780 and 780a (COOMA); Goulbum—Colleetor, Hj, Eichler

13312 (AD).

F. v. Mirctlcr gives the following description and distribution of var. pur-

pureo-album: “inner involucre scales white, outer ones purple or brown, Tas-

mania, Maneroo, Snowy River, Grampians, Clenele River, Bathurst, etc.” He

cites no specimens. [am here excluding hom pterpureo-album the Tasmanfan

and Grampian plants, and have chosen as a lectutype as specimen collected by

Mueller at “Maneroo” previvus to the publication of his variety.

subsp, alpinum (Fy M.) P. G. Wilson subsp. et comb, nov,

Helipterum incanum (Uovk.) DC. var. alpinum F vy M. Rep. Babbage’s

Fixped, 14 (1859). Type, “Summit of the Australian Alps” F, y. Mueller (isn K,

NSW, holo MEL),—Figs. 5B, 7(9), 8(2).

A decumbent perennial berb 10-24 em high; base woody, branching, coy-

ered with persistent membranous brawn leak bases. Young stems denscly

lanuginose, Leaves thick, congested, densely lanuginuse, obovate ta oblanceo-

late, with the apex obtuse to rounded, 2-5-6 cm long, 0:6-1 em wide. Pedunele

terminal lanuginose, 4-12 cm Iong. Involucte hemispherical, 2-6-4 em wide, with

numerous bructs, Outer bracts sessile, ovate to lanceolate, intermediate ones

with the lamina narrowly ovate, obtuse ta acute, 10-12-5 mm long, 4 mm wide.

The outer bracts pale reddish brown to pale brown, the intermediate white

und the innermost sometimes with a purple spet at the lamina base, Dise

yellow. Carolla 4-5-3 mm long, pappus setae subplumose 4-5-5-5 mm Jong,

Achene smonth, obscurely 4-angled, obavoid, slightly curved.

Distribution —The Australian Alps.

New Sovra Warnes. Mt, Kosciuske. Feb. 1946, PULA. (SYD); Jan. 1953, AL Ty

Hotchkiss (SYD); Feb; 1928, J. McLuckie 116 (SYD); Feb. 1927, P.B. (SYD): 7006 ft, 12

, 1957, C, L. Wilson 440 (NSW); Feb. 1954, G. W. Althofur (NSW); Doe. 1882, J,

Kretschinur (NSW); Dee. 1912, H. M. R. Rupp (NSW); Jun, 1901, C. H. Grove (G-DC,

MEL); 7200 tt, M.S. 23 (MEL); Jun. 1885, Van Lenderfeld (MEL); Jan, 1889, J. HN.

Maiden und W. Forsyth (MEL, AD); Jan, 925, J. MeLuckle and A. H. K. Petrie (CANH);

Nov, 1928, J. MeLuckie 116 (CANB): 7000 ft., 80 Jan, 1958, M. Mueller 78) and 7S8la

(COOMA); 6500 ft., 22 Jan, 1952, Gauba (GAUBA): Feb. 1901, R. Helms (AD): 7100 ft,

anon. (AD), 10 Dee, 1910, J, RB. Cleland (AD); Mt. Kosviusko, White's Creck, 6000 4.,

folynsun and Constable (NSW); Mt. Kosefusko Range, Jan. 1880, Findlay (MEL); Mt. Kos-

cinsxp, above Lake Albina, 6800 ft, 20 Jon. 1951, Johnson and Constable (NSW): Betts

Cump-Met. Koscinsko, 16 Feb. 1914, J. H, Maiden (NSW), Snowy Mts, Blue Jake, o, 6300

ft, & Feb. 1957, Bichlwr 13670 (AD); Snowy Mts., 7000 ft., Feb, 1890, W. Bauerlen 65

(MEL). Mt. Townsend, 7250 ft. 35 Mar, 1889, A. elms (NSW); Munyang Mts., 6-7000

ft, Jou. 1874, Boo. Mueller (MEL).

Vicranta, Mt. Hotham, Jan, 1900, J, H. Maiden (NSW), thid,, Jane 1899, C. Walter

(NSW, MEL, CANB); ibjd., Dec, 1914, A. J. Tudgell TB (MEL); thid., 1890, C. Frente

{MEL}, Bogong High Plains, nr. Mt, Nelso, ¢. 6300 ft, 13 Feb. 1958, Eichler 14845 (AD);

“Sout af the Australian Alps", Foo. Mueller (K isotype, NSW iso?, MEL holo),

subsp. alpinum X f. purpureo-album?

New Sourn Wates. Happy Jack's Plain, 4450 ft., 18 Jan. 1958, J. W. Viekery (NSW).

AGT, Tidbiobilla, $115 tt, 7 Nov. L911, R. H. Cambage (CANB, SYD); Mt, Franklin,

tL Feb, 1953, C. W. BE. Moore 2356 {CANE NSW), ibid,, 7 Feb. 1947, N. T. Burliidge 1711

(CANS); Brindabelly Range, ¢, 4000 ft, 24 Feb. 1950, BE. Gavinr s.n. (AD),

Vievouia, Dares High Plains, 1883, Mywittt (MEL); Delegete, 1982, Notwitt 575

(MEL).

This subspecies ts conspicuous because of its broad thick leaves and rela+

tively short peduncles (but when cultivated at luwer altitudes the peduncle

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS 175

becomes considerably longer). Towards the north, as far as Mt. Franklin, the

leaves become narrower and the capitula smaller, grading into the northern form

of £. purpureo-album. Similarly in south-eastern Victoria, in districts adjacent

to those where alpinum occurs, are found plants more or less intermediate be-

tween alpinum and the southern form of f. purpureo-album.

7 8 9

Fig. 7—Intermediate involucral bracts (outline only}: 1, Helip-

terum saxatile; 2, H. molle; 3, H. albicans var. albicans; 4, var. buffa-

loensis; 5, var graminiforlium; 6, var. incanum £. purpureo-album; 7,

f. incunum; 8, f. grampianum; 9, subsp. alpinum.

H, molle (A. Cunn. ex. DC.) P. G. Wilson comb. nov.

Helichrysum molle A. Cunn. ex DC. Prod. 6: 194 (1838). Type, Molle’s

sei Lachlan River, New South Wales, July 1817, A. Cunningham (holo G-DC

photo).

WG PAUL G. WILSON

Wattzla brachyrrliyyncha F v M, Linnaca, 25: 407 (April 1653), Type,

Cudnaka 'Kunyakal, Flinders Range, 5. Australia, F. v. Mueller (holo MEL).

Helipterum brachyrrhynchum (F v M.) Sond, Le, 517 (June 1853),

H, incanum. (Hook.) DC, var. brachylepis F v M. Rep. Babbage’s Exped.

5, Austral, 14 (1859). “Flinders Ranges, ete.” Presumably based on W,

brackyrrhynecha ov M. which was cited in the gencral synonymy under FH.

incanum by Mueller in the same paper.

[H_albieans (won (A, Cunn.) DC.) —]. M. Black. Fl. S, Austral, 624 (1929)

pp, aud 2nd ed. 901 (1957) p.p_] — Figs. 6, 12), 8(4),

An erect umual herb, 6-30 cm high, branching at the hase, Leaves seat-

tered, sessile, broadly linear to oblanceolate, lanate, to '7 em long and 0-7 em

wide, apex obtuse ta acuminate. apiculate, Involucre hemispherical, the outec

bracts broadly ovate, colourless to light yellowish brown ar tinged with light

ted when young, intermediate ones stipitate, the lamina gulden yellow 3-10 mm

long, broadly ovate ta swborhicular, apex rounded to obtuse, base rounded to

truneule. Achenes densely and prominently papillose, teltrangular, c. 3 mm long,

Distribution. —Southern central South Australia, south-west Queensland, west

and central New South Wales and north-west Victoria.

QUEENSLAND. Thargomindah, 1885. Spencer (MET); Cunnumulla, 22 July I4b, #.

Roe BIST (CANB): ibid., G Supt. 1947, G. W. Allen AGMG (CANB): CGanrwiuera, Sept. 1885,

t. Cotter (MEL).

New Souta Wares, Mort Grey, 20 Aug, 1950, N. A. Burges and N, GC. Beudle (SYD,

rego. L. Wenry 57 pp. (MEI); Barrier Hante, Sept. L821, MM. J. Collins (SYD); thid.. 1889,

OF febing (MWD); tid. 1893, H. Deane; ‘Silverton, Sepl. L484, anon. (MEL); Byrack

Sept, 1885. Lb, Betche (NSW); ibid,, Sept. 1883, anon. 7 (MEL); Broken Hill, 4 Oct. 1920,

A, Morris 437 (NSW, ADW); ibid., Aug. 1926, E. Cheel (NSW); Wileannia, 1886, B. Ken-

nedy 27 (MEL); ihid., 1885, BR. Kennedy (MEL); Warrigal, 11 Oct, «nan, 451 (NSW);

Mt. Tirown, Sept, 1698, anon, (NSW); Mt Manara, 20 Nov, 1956, 1. and J. Whaite 2105

(AD); Gulargiunbone, 27 Sept. 1952, A. S. MeKee 208 (SYD); Darling R., 14 Qet, 1860,

F. o. Mueller (MET); Tlogon K-Darling R., 1877, L. Morton (MEL); Darling [U-Lachlan R.,

Aug, 1855, J. Brickner (MEL), Hillstom, (889, Eeans (MEL); Warroo, Nov, 1939, K, Morris

(NSW); Booligal, Sept, 1887, A. Bell (MEL): Lower Rdwards R.. Wein (MEL): Castle-

reavh R., 1885, Brumby (MEL); Wentworth, Oct. 1887, J. Minchin (MEI.); Daylington

Point-May, 3 Sept, (930, CW. E. Moore 1549 (CANB); Moromdah, 5 Sept, (950, C.. WOE,

Moore 1360 (CANB); Trangie-Navromine, 3 Det. 1947: C0. W. E. Moore M375 (CANB);

Deniliquin, 21 Oct. 1945, C, WE. Mone (CANB): Jhid., Sept, 1945, W, M. Willoughby V7

(CANRB); Jevilderie, 21 Oct. 1950, CG, W. 8, Moure 1430 (CANB); Wanganella, Oet. 1903,

E, Offiewr (AD); ibtd., L, Kuentz (MEL).

Vierorm., Murray 1, anon. (MEL); Swan Hill, Cummon (MEL).

Sovutrr Austratta. Evelyn Downs, Ondnadatta, Oct. 9S), EL W. Ising 3973 (AD,

ADW); Wangiana, 7 Aug. 1931, J. B. Clofand (AD), ibid., L& Aug. 1933 aor 21 Aug, LBL,

Aug, 1899, Mux Kuch 465 (AD, NSW): Blinten, 10 Oct 1894, Wo. Ramball (AD):

Quorn, Sept. 1927) enon. (AD); Leigh's Creek (Copley), 15 Oct. 1917, Merb. J. MM. Black

(AD). Kingoonya, 23 Sept. 1920, EL 72. Tsing 185d (NSW, AD), Cockburn-Mingary, [6

Aug. 1931, A. Morris (ADW); ibid., 14 Aug. 1921, A. Morris 652 (BRI, AD); Pt. Pirie,

anon. (ALJ): Gladstunc, anon. (Al); Cawler Runyes, Aug. and Sept. 1912, White (AD);

Lake Cairdner, 18 Oct. LS58, P Wilson 589 (AD); Cudsaka [Kanyaka], F. Mueller (MEL);

Speover Gulf-Mt. Elbe, EB. Giles (MEL); Central §. Australia, anon. (AD).

Ausraauia. “Nov. [all austr. inter”, F.u. Mueller (MET).

This. species exbihits considerable variation in the shape af the inyolucral

bracts iind in the papillosity of the achenes, In specimens from the mure

northern districts the bracts are deltoid to sub-orbicular with sounded apices,

while iu the southern districts they hecome ovate and obtuse. Towards the

easterly limits af its clistribution forms intermediate between H. molle and H.-

SPECIES WITHIN HELIPTERUM ALBICANS 177

albicans var. albicans are found, but the typical South Australian plant and the

typical New South Wales form of HH. albicans are so distinct that specific de-

limitation seems warranted.

It may be distinguished by its flaccid oblong to oblanceolate leaves, its

normally golden-yellow involucral bracts which are normally deltoid in shape,

the normally dense papillosity of its achenes and its annual, not perennial, nature.

I should like to thank Mr. R. Schodde for his help, while visiting the Mel-

bourne Herbarium he made notes and drawings for me of the type of Helipterum

incanum var. brachylepis.

Fig, 8—Achenes: 1, Helipterum albicans var, buffaloensis; 2, subsp.

alpinum; 3, £. purpureo-album; 4, H. molle.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Besides those persons and institutions mentioned in the text, I should like

to express my thanks to the Curators of those Herbaria, indicated in the Sum-

mary, for the loan of specimens, and to Mr. L. Dutkiewicz for kindly preparing

the drawing of H. saxatile and of the achenes in Fig. 8.

ON SOME STRUCTURAL DEVELOPMENT IN THE CENTRAL PART OF

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN

BY H. WOPFNER, PH.D

Summary

Newly discovered structures outcropping in the central part of the Great Australian Artesian Basin

are described. They are situated in the extreme north-east corner of South Australia and the

adjoining area in Queensland. The structures, which are developed in sediments of lower Upper

Cretaceous age, consist of a half-dome in the south (Cordillo Uplift) from which two lines of

anticlines develop, one to the north and a second one to the north-east. Each line comprises several

huge anticlines with "closure" between them. The Nappamilkie anticline and the Betoota dome are

the most prominent structures of the western development (trend approximately north), whilst Mt.

Howie anticline, Curalle dome and Morney anticline form the eastern line (trend approximately N.

30°E.) The individual closure of the structures is of the order of 400 feet to at least 600 feet. The

dips on the limbs of the anticlines range from 2 degrees to 20 degrees. The two lines of anticlinal

development are divided by the north-plunging Haddon syncline and its northern continuation, the

Farrars syncline. The folding movements were initiated in Upper Cretaceous time, and probably

reached a climax during the early Tertiary. Transcurrent movements in the deep-seated "basement"-

rocks are thought to be responsible for the folding.

ON SOME STRUCTURAL DEVELOPMENT IN THE CENTRAL PART

OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN

by H. Worrnen, Prr,D.*

[Read 9 April 1959]

SUMMARY

Newly discovered structures outcropping in the central part of the Great

Australian Artesian Basin are Hosoi They arc situated in the extreme

north-east corner of South Australia and the adjoining area in Queensland.

The structures, which are developed in sediments of lower Upper Creta-

ceous aye, consist of a half-dome fr the south (Cordille Uplift) from which iwo

lines of anticlines develop, one to the north and a second one: to the north-east.

Each line comprises several huge anticlines with “closure” between them.

The Nappamilkie anticline and the Betoota dume are the most prominent

structures of the western development (trend approximately north), whilst ML.

Howie anticline, Curalle dome ond Morey untichne form the eastern line

(trend approximately N. 30°E.), ‘The individual closure of the structures is of

the order of 400 feet to at loxst 600 feet. ‘Lhe dips on the limbs of the anti-

clines range from 2 degrees to 20 degrees.

The two lines of anticlinal development are divided by the north-plungiug

Haddon syncline and its northern continuation, the Farrars syncline.

The folding movements were initiated in Upper Cretaceous time, and

probably reached a climax during the early Tertiary. “Trauscurrent movements

in the deep-seated “basement”-racks are thought to be responsible for the folding.

INTRODUCTION

More than 30 years ago, R. Lockhart Jack, visiting Cordillo Downs Station,

observed indications of a large, dome-like structure ocenpying the extreme

north-east corner of South Australia, In 1925 and 1930 he published several

cross-sections through the southern and south-western part of the arca. These

cross-sections were based mainly on water-bore logs and the correlations were

based on similarities of water analyses within the different watcr-bearing

horizons.

Since then, Jack’s observations were almost forgotten and were given only

passing reference in later geological literature.

In the course of petroleum exploration on behalf of SANTOS Ld., R. C.

Sprigz, Managing Director of Ceosurveys of Australia Limited, used this in-

formation to select the Cordillo area as a possible prospect. Early in 1957, the

anthor was sent to Cordillo Downs to obtain first-hand information, and a short

sround and air reconnaissance was carried out. Parts of south-western Queens-

lund were also included in this reconnaissance. Jack's. observations were found

to be basically correct in so far as the southern devclopment was concerned,

but the domeike Cordillo structure further north proved to sub-divide into

two major lines of anticlincs. Moreover, three additional large elongated domes,

the Betootu dome, the Curalle dome and the Morney anticline, were discovered

across the Quecnsland border,

Several domes and anticlines were revealed in subsequent aerial surveys,

The most important of them are: the Innamincka dome, situated between Inna-

mincka and Lake Pure (Sprigg, 1958); the Orientos structure, a dome-like

* Geusurveys of Australia Limited.

Trans, Hoy. Sac. S. Aust. (1960), VoL. 82.

180 H. WOPFNER

upwarp north of Orientos station; seyeral complex anticlines which form the

McGregor Ranges between Wilson Creek and Cooper Creek; the Mooraberry

anticline north of the Betoota dome; the Turret Hill anticline north of the

Morney anticline.

Later in 1957, the Cordillo area was mapped in detail, and reconnaissance-

investigations were carried out on the Betoota and Curalle domes.

The present paper is concerned only with the geological structures about

Haddon Corner. The area dealt with is shown in Figs. 1 and 2,

ALICE Sprincs »

LOCALITY PLAN

SHOWING CORDILLO-BETOOTA AREA

SALE o ‘400 MILES

Plan prepared by Geosuirveys of Aust. Ltd’ PC. 22-458 SAN 2}7

Fig. 1.—Locality plan, showing boundary of Great Australian Artesian Basin and

area described.

PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GENERAL GEOLOGICAL FEATURES

The structures described in this article lie in the central part of the Great

Australian Artesian Basin, in the extreme north-east of South Australia and in

the bordering region of south-west Queensland. The area is bounded by lati-

tudes Bene a 27°00’S., and by longitudes 140°15’E. and 141°15’E. (see

Figs. 1 and 2).

The country is undulating, and is dominated by table-topped hills and large

flats covered by gibbers formed in the breakdown of siliceous duricrust. In the

northern part, the flanks of the anticlines form NNE-SSW trending cuestas, with

their slopes also covered with gibbers. The structures form the watershed be-

tween the Diamantina River and the Cooper Creek, The climate is arid with

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN 181

Lake

Yarma

Yamma

Providenct

26° 20°

27*00'

CONTOUR PLAN SHOWING

STRUCTURES OF THE CORDILLO-BETOOTA AREA

Contours based on duricrust phantom

herizan,. Contour interval 100 Feet

H.Wopfner Ph.D Dian prepared by Geosurveys Aust Lid, AC 22-4:58 SAN 216

182 H. WOPFNER

an average annual rainfall of about 6 inches. Sandy deserts oceupy the low-

lying great plains.

Most of the stratigraphic members expused at the surface belung to the

Winton formation of lower Upper Cretaceous age, most probably Cenomanian.

Only the uppermost part of the Winton can be observed in outcrop, the maximum

exposure being about 350 to 700 feet. The sediments ure muinly sandstones,

siltstones, mudstones and shales, thinly bedded in the lower section, but occur-

ring in thick banks in the wpper development. Plant fossils (Brachiphyllum,

Elatoctadus, etc.), carbonaceous shales and thin coal seams are common. In

the lowest exposed zones, layers and lenses of calcareous sandstone, interbedded

with partly concretionary, and sandy, or marly limestones occur, This cal-

eareous horizan is hencefurth referred to as the “Betoota limestone horizon”.

At two outcrops of Betoota limestone, ripple marks with ortholiombic swmmet-

tical features (wave ripples) were observed.

Within sandstones and siltstones, current bedding is very commun, Para-

diagenetic slumping is common throughout the whole sequence.

In several places, particularly on the limbs of the anticlines, the Cretaceous

is overlain by conglomerates, grits and torrentia] bedded sandstones. Apart from

silicifiedl wood no fossils have been found, but generally these sediments are

regarded as lower Tertiary. The contact between the Cretaceous and the Ter-

ttury shows a slight crosional discantormity including cut-and-fill effect. Only

along the south-east limb of Morney anticline has an angular unconformity of

2 degrees been observed (see Fig. 4).

The top layers of the sediments (Cretaceous and/or Tertiary) are strongly

kaolinised and bleached. Below the bleached horizon a mottled zone is de.

veloped. The thickness of this altered horizon (bleached and mattled) varies

between 100 and 250 Feet. The bleached horizon is capped by a hard and highly

siteified crust, commonly known as duricrust. The duricrust averages a thick-

ness Of 15 to 30 feet. The time of formation of the durienist is uncertain, but

it hus to be placed after the Tertiary sediments were deposited.

In synclines and generally in structural depressions, the duricrnst is over-

lain by red, nodular laterite and lateritised sands, Their maximum observed

thickness is 120 feet in the Haddon syneline, At several localities a thin con-

giomeratic hed, built up by well-rounded pebbles of duricrust (diameter |

tu 2 inches), is present between the duricrust and the laterite.

; In low situations the laterites are covered by sand-dunes and recent river

silts,

THE FOLD STRUCTURES

Approaching Cordillo Downs from the south, one notices a remarkable

change in Jandseape. The sand-dunes which predominate the flat country

give wuy sharply te large stony plains (gihher-plains) rising gently ta the north.

These gradually lead on to o strongly dissected region of table-topped hills.

Comparable features will be observed when the area is approached cither from

the west across Rainbow Plain or from the east. This sudden change has its

reason in the geological structure of the area, The gently rising, gibber-covercd

slopes vepresent dip slopes of the southern-most part of a large area of wpwarp-

ing, Ginguaviesl dips of 3 degrees to 4 degrees tn the west, south and southy-

cast mark this southern part of the structure. The beds rise from 220 ft, M.S.L

at Cardillo to about 650 ft, M.S.L. north of Needle Will, where wu steep, ENE-

WSW trending escarpment forms the southern margin of the valley ot Pravi-

dence Creck (compure Fig. 3, cross-section L). The escarpment gradually re-

duces its height towards the west and finally disappears under the alluvial

THE GHEAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESLAN BASIN 143

deposits of Rainbow Plain, To the east it swings into a NNE-direction, and

there forms the eastern edge of the valley of Haddon Creek and its tributarics.

At the latitude uf Providence Creek, the structure, which so far has the

simple form of a hall-done, divides into two distinct anticlines. The western

structure is hencefurth referred tu as Nappamilkie uplift and has u general

northern trend, whilst the eastern structure, now referred ks as the Mt. Hotele

anticline, trends 3U tu 35 cdeurees east. The intervening syncline is the Haddon

syneline (see Figs, 2 and 3, section 2),

There are indiealions ia suggest o minor fault line alomg Providence Creck The

southern part would upper ia be the dowuthiewn sidle, gad Fhe amaint of throw focreases

frou east to wost, However, the ameunt of fonfting would oot excced about 30 feet in total.

The Nappamilkie uplift forms a broad, Hit-tyopped, upwarped area, its main

development being situated between the meridians L40°42’T, and 140°44’E. Tt

cumprives two anticlinal culminations, a western one with in axial trend af

NS°E, and another in the east, trending N20°K. Both culminations are con-

nected hy an extremely shallow syncline, which deepens gradually towards its

northern end (see Fig, 2). Limb dips average 2 to 8 degrees to the west and

12 ta 20 degrees on the castern limb. ‘The two anticlinal culminations have an

obvious plunge to the north.

The western limb af the structure forms gibber-covered dip slopes whieh ure drained

by several systams of consent stream channels (Dooucoonara, Koonabera and Nappa»

anitkie Crecks), Tn the southern zone, between Providence and Koanabera Creeks, the

beds show a constunt dip af 2° to 26°W. North of Koonabera Creek, particularly within

the drainage area of Nappamilkie Creek, the dips ow the flank of the structure attain 8°W,..

but fatten to about E+ W, further west, The strike is about N.S°R,, except in the extreme

northern portion of the limh where it iy N.20° to 25°K., and dips are at 4°W, Thr apex

of this western anticline is roughly marked by the watershed between Nappamilkie Creek,

Koouabera Cretk and Dooncoonara Creek, flowing westwards, and the castwards drainiog

evecks Fiblic, Kuchumba anc Haddon, The culmination at about 700 fl. M,S.L. is marked

by the star-like divergence af the Nappanvikie-, Kuehumba- and Haddon Creeks. Prom

this area of culmination, the long axis, trending N.S°E., plunges al about 2° (o the north.

and %° to the south, Again, in the extreme northern part of the anticline, the plunge in-

creases to 4°, Forming a shallow closure, fn this extreme northern portion the erosion

removed most of the castern limb of the anticline, eutting well back heyond the apex into

the western flank. In this area, the beds af the eastern limb slow a general slirvelion of

N.Y W.. and. dip 4°E. (sew Fig, 2), -

South of the headwaters of Kuchumba Creek the castorn linb has a dip of 2°, but sean

Aluttens out to near horizontal position, Ya the cast, a slight reversal of dip is indicated

(& fo LoW.). The central parts of these Aat-lying beds form the Large Lamamour Plateau

(sce Fig. 3, Suotiun 2), ;

On fhe eastern margin of the Lamamour Plateau (north of the riilns af Haddon hame-

stead) strang shearing plince bave been observed. The main zone of sheariug trends about

N,35°E, Several irregular fractured zones cross the coain one st angles hetween 30 and

50 degrees. aul very much resemble the pattern bf feather joints, “All shear yvones arc

vetlical av neay vertical and aneven. Well developed shekensites are prominent along all

of them Jind seme antoclastic breccias are present, These and other indications suggest minor

faulting slong the direction N.35°E. with a downthruow uf Ue eastern part of abont 20 feet

nnd casing Hips of up to 129W. (compare Vig. 3. Section 2).

Kast of this shear zone the beds rise with an average dip of 2° to the eastern

upwarp. The axis of this eastern culminution trends N.20°E, In the worthern-

must part of this anticline, the axis plunges 4 to 6 degrees north, Towards the

vouth the anticline becomes subdued and finally fuses with the western iwuli-

cline into a large uplifted tableland. intensively dissected by crecks. Between

the site of addon Dinwns homestend anc Kuchumba Plain, most of the central

part of the anticline has been eroded and only the extreme castern limb has

been preserved. Tt forms a very prominent ridge, about 16 miles long, on the

west side of [addon Creck, Trending in the general NNE.-direction, the beds

exposed along this ridge show dips of 12° to 20°K. (see Fig. 5 and Pi. 1, Hig, 1).

SIZ WYS BSR) kd PIT eieweny po S4aninnos7 Ay pRMdud Veg OYg J2UIIOK

Ajun aouetereuuodss piouaue Uo paseq € wipes

Aanuns jerudesBodo pur yeaBaoas pajiowp uc paseq oz 4 | BUBLIDIG,

SO WH

VIHV VLOOL3G-OTTIGYOD JHL NIHLIA

SISYZAVYL G3LD3I13S NOW

SNOLLD3S SSO4D

UOTOY auOYsaWI] EYPOIAg

—

—_—

4ssnadying

QNd937

€ 3M

FI6N 24 "Pele AD sud.

{88,92 9 76 PoNWET ajewno.ddy

3Wod, ONIesDD ‘

' .

NOLS

VW Tan

FoZZiN I-Q 'R66N GO Suoprang

SF 092 FA fe BPP He? Reuse

SNIVJILNV BIMOH LA ORY SINT WdoYN

= ~ 902

der “0 — por

waa) 9)eadu -

HIS MORNIYE, 007 1334

NOLLI36

aeueq =>

BNIISNAS NODGYH TVSiG —- 3800RYT

SNIVSILNY SPNOH LA 241739 aon TN

TePL/N IG FSH AD suDy22IK7

YtPOS. Saji 3) 4 Sp4EYS (oy225- ayesry yo pur wayson) a

LIP oSz (UONIIG wJooyag yO pur sez) q 72 aA] PreEU/tOIddy

SNITDIINY FTIWEND GNY VL0O.ag

NOILI3S

YAVA THY, SVT

ANID | AWsENS

Se ed

XU] SNORT

ANITHILNY, VLOOLIE

po! 1338

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN 185

This relatively steep dipping limb forms the eastern limit of the Nappa.

pra uplift. It dips into » well-developed structural depression, the Haddon

syncline,

4 The Haddon syncline is strongly assymetrical. The western limb dips 12°

to 20°E,, whilst along the eastern limb an average dip of 24° to 4°W. is fairly

persistent (see Fig. 3, Section 2, also Fig. 6). The axial trend is N.30°E. and

shows a continuous phinge of 2°N. Due to the steady rise of the long axis to-

wards the south, the Haddon syncline becomes less pronounced in its southern

extension and flattens out completely after becoming level with the broad Cor-

TERTIARY

UNCON FORMITyY — > —= — 2" o 9 a a Ay -& Pas o

5 a

CRETACEOUS

Fig. 4.—Scarp-section on the south-east lanb of Morncy dome showing angular

unconfornit Tbipawen Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments,

Cretaceous laip 6°): 1. White and purple shales; 2- White feldspatic sandstone;

3. White: kaolinitic shale; 4. White feldspatic sandstone; 5. White kaolinitiv silt-

stone.

Tertiary (dip 4°): 6. Grey grit; 7, Fawn, coarse, torrential-bedded sandstone;

8. Pebble conglomerate; 9. Whitish to light brown gritty sandstone; 10. dense,

highly silicified, coarse sandstone, “duricrust”.

dillo uplift (see Fig. 2). This gentle rise to the south is very well demon-

strated by the progressive surfacing of certain stratigraphic members, exposed

along the centre of the valley of Haddon Creek,

A comparatively narrow, but distinct structure is developed east of Haddon

syncline, It is called Mt. Howie anticlme after the highest morphological point

within the area occupied by it. Similar to the Nappamilkie uplift, the Mt. Howie

anticline consists of a major anticline on the west, and a smaller, lower anticline

on the east, The two anticlines are divided by a very shallow syncline (see

Fig. 3, Section 2). The western limb of the main anticline dips 2° to 4°, the

eastern limb about 3°. The eastern anticline has 14° to 2° west-dip and about

3° east-dip. The long axis trends approximately N.30° to N,35°E. and plunges

with 2° to the north, forming a good closure in the northern part of the strac-

L5G H. WOPFNER

ture. The north-phinge of the western anticline seems to be slightly steeper

than that of the eastern anticline, Towards the south a minor local closure of

about 40 feet might be present, but generally the Mt. Howie anticline fuses with

the broad Cordillo uplift. The culmination of Mt, Howie anticline is reached

i the Viclwity of Mt. Howie (800 ft. M.S.L.) and the amount of structural

relicf is 440 fect in relation to the Haddon syncline and 450 feet in comparison

with the plains south-east of the structure,

Neither the Nappamilkie uplift nor the Mt. Howic anticline have an obvious

individual closnré in their southern parts. They finally fuse together to the

half-lume of the Cordillo uplift which forms the common clusure for both of

them tavards south. This gives the whole strueltural unit the shape of a hand,

four of its fingers spread out radially between north and north-east,

As mentioned previously, the western unticline of the Nappamilkie uplift

forms a shallow closure ut its northem end. This structural depression is also

murphologically expressed, At the latitude of the border fence (near 10-mile

gate) the eastern limb of this structure descends below the present plane of

alluvial sedimentation and is hidtlen under alluvial clays and deiftsand. Approxi-

mately $ to 10 miles north of the border fence Fhis eastern wing emerges Fram

beneath the sand-dunes, and gradually gains elevation to form the eastern limb

ot the Betoota dome (see Fig. 2).

The Betoota dome is a simple, ellipsvidal-shaped dome with near “orthor-

hombic” symmetrical features. The trend of the long axis is about N-IN°E. On

either direction from the domal culmination, distinctive plunges of 1° to 2°,

slightly inéreasing towards the extreme northern and southern end of the dome,

are observed. Both the western and the castern limbs have dips of 3° to 5°.

In places, the dip on the western limb might be slightly more. Centrally, over

ihout 4 to 7 miles in width, the roof of the Betoota dome has been eroded,

leaving only two north-south trending cuestas on either side, nosing together

at the ends. The cuesta which is built by the castern limb, forms a west-facing

escurpinent, uninterrupted for nearly the whole length of the structure. The

western limb, though also forming an escarpment, has becn more deeply eroded

and dissected, particularly in its northern half. This may indicate that the

western limb of the anticline is slightly steeper-dipping than the ecasiern one.

Ou its extreme northern outcrop, the Betoota dome causes a deviation of Farrars Creek.

This creek, previously following a south-westerly course, is deviate inte a due easterly

divyection. On the nerth-western-most edge of the dome, the eresiim hy Farrars Creek has

eut into the structure, isolating a few low, north-west dipping hills. After passing beyond

the dome, Farrars Creck retums to its old come,

The length of the Betouta dume is about 35 miles, and the maximum width

approximately 8 to 12 miles. The maximum structural relief of the dome (situ-

ited at a latitude of about 25°41" te 25°45’S. ) is 500 fect,

From the Retoota dome going east, drittsand and alluvial Hats dominate

the conntry. This type of country fs very typical of structural depressions and

persists for about 20 miles. It represents the northern extension of the Haddon

syiicline. As far as is knuwn, this northern part af the Haddon syneline forms

a wide, but rather shallow, trough, apparently with its long axis nearly harizontal,

Miner warping parallel with the strike of the long axis could be present. North

of Planet Downs a rise nf the synclinal axis is indicated (see Figs. 2 and 3,

Section 3).

Tn the east, the northern extension of the Haddon syneline is bordered by

a row of low, NNE.-SSW, trending hills, which ure the eroded remnants vf the

strongly dissected western limb of the Curalle doine. This dome is the must

prominent structure within the whole arca. It is situated north of the Mt, Howie

anticline and continues in the same trend. Broadly speaking, the Curulle dome

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN AHTESIAN BAST LAT

is a simple. elongated structure broadening markedly in its northern extension.

The general symmetrical features are “moriclinic”. The surface expression af

the structure is very good. The eastern limb, which dips at 2° to 7°, forms a

large eucsta with a pronounced escarpment facing west and trending in a NNE.-

SSW. direction, The maximum height of the scarp is 500 feet above the plain,

in places pussibly more, The maximum elevation is approximately 900 teet

above MS.L. This range is also known as Beal Range.

The western limb dips 12° to 23°W., the steepest dips being situated at

about 26° south latitude. The strike along the southern part of the western

limb is varving between N.5°W, and N.30°R. (see Pl. 1, Fig. 2 and Pl. 2, Fig, 1).

‘Two recently excavated water-dams, exch situated just east of the strongly eroded

remnants af the western limb provide excellent exposures of stra. Laght grey coloured

shales interbedded with carbonaceous shales exhibit the wesl-dipping structure very elearly.

The dips are 14°W, in the southern exposure, and ID°WSW. in the northern one.

About @ miles north-east of Planct Downs the strike of the western limb swings

into a westerly direction (about N.40° to 50°W,), causing a considerable widening of

the dame in the north. The dip also Hattens to 2°-4°S, Alter continuing in this westerly

strike for about 4 to 5 miles, the remnants of the western limb become covered by alluvial

sediments.

I a mayoer similar to the western limb, the eastern limb also Hattens in its. northern

virt, and south of Lake Cuddapan shows a slight dip reversal from 24°K, to 1k°W, It

cms a small, strongly disseated hump aud leads to a bulging af the limb towards the enst,

Tho final east-dip in this part ix 16° (see Fip. 2),

The long axis of the Curalle dome trends approximately N,30°E. umd has

an obvious phinge in its southern part. In its northern extension it is possible

that the axis tekes a more northerly trend. The northern plunge of the long

axis is 2", In its southernmost part, the Curalle dome Hattens out slightly (limb-

dips 2° ty 3°) und finally plunges 2° south, forming a good closure towards the

Mt. Howie anticline.

The uverall length of the Curalle dome is about 40 miles. In the south

the structure in outcrop is 10 to 12 miles wide, whilst in the uorthern part the

width is betwee 14 and 18 miles. The meximurn structural relief at the surface

is at least HU) feet.

A shallow depression (approximately 250 feet) separates the Curalle dome

frum the Morney anticline which follows to the north (sce Fig, 2), The Moruey

anticline is a huge ellipsoidal-shaped structure wath slightly “monoclinic” sym-

metrical features. ‘The limbs dip with 2° to 3° to the west and 2° to 6° te the

vast (see Fig. 4). The trend of the long axis is N.35°R, aud the maximum struc-

tural relief abont 500 to 600 feet, The Momey anticline is about 55 miles lang

and on its broadest part 30 miles wide.

Local drainage palterns have been strongly influenced hy the geological

structure. Here. as elsewhere in the basin, it is clearly evident that streatns

which originated on the steeper limb (having the stecptr gradient) haye the

Ureater crosional energy. These creeks on the steeper limb of the structures were

originally “consequent” streams, but in view of their greater crasional capacity,

licadwater erosion led ty measure of encroachment and capture across the anti-

cline. On most of the anticlines, the centre has heen completely eroded out by

these streams, Now they arc superimposed streams, draining through narrow

gaps in the remnants of tlie steeper limb (see Pl. 2, Fig. 1), They expanded their

catchment areas well beyond the axis of the structure, capturing the headwaters

of streams of the flatter limb. In several places one can observe the old creek-

bed of deserted “consequent” streams of the flatter limb, Billed with gravel and

alluvial sand, dismembered [rom the oppastte stream pattern un the escarpment

whine leads down to the drainage srea of the creeks originated on the steeper

dip slope-

188 H. WOPFNER

The creeks on the flatter limb continue as consequent streams and usually

retain shallow channels. For instance, on the Curalle dome, it has been esti-

mated that about 80 per cent. of the area is drained toward the steeper western

limb and only 20 per cent. toward the flatter eastern limb.

The big structural depressions, as, for instance, the Haddon- and the Farrars

syncline, act as depositional troughs for the drainage systems of the broad uplifts.

Debris from the structural highs still gets deposited in the structural lowlands

(e.g. Rainbow Plain, Lake Cuddapan, Lake Yamma Yamma) which surround

the anticlines.

Generally, the extensive control of the drainage pattern by the fold struc-

tures suggests compurative. geomorphic youth of the structures.

SUBSURFACE GEOLOGY

Very little subsurface information concerning all of these structures is. yet

available. Lockhart Jack (1925 and 1930) correlated all available bore informa-

tion for the southern part of the area, but within the northern part of the struc-

tures only a few water bores have been sunk. These water bores only yield

information on the position of the duricrust.

#0il and “gibbers}

subsequent

rete laterite

—a¥

CROSS SECTION THROUGH THE WESTERN

UMB OF HASDON SYNCLINE

23 sa

WEENCAL & HeRimanTtAL

SAN 2/14

Fig: 5—Section through the western limb of Haddon syncline (also castern limb

of Nappamilkie anticline), approximately six miles north of Haddon No. 4 bore,

showing the stratiwaphic sequence and the position of strata,

A few pastoral bores off the east limb of the Curalle dome show that the

duricrust sabrierses underneath the present surface and consequently is now

covered by “post-duricrust” sediments. Duricrust was struck at 100 feet below

surface level in Long-Hole Well, situated un the eastern shore of Luke Cadda-

pan, and at 97 feet in Bloodwood Bore, 4 miles ENE, from Long-ITole Well, In

Murphy's Bore, approximately 4 miles due north of Lake Cuddapan, duricrust

was encountered at 50 feet. The continuation of the east-dip of the Curalle

dome below the present surface level is further demonstrated by a few bores

surrounding Lake Yamma Yamma. Apparently the duricrust reaches its deep-

est position on the north-side of thé lake, where it is reported at a depth of 280

feet in Duck-Hole Bore.

To supplement surface observations, five shallow structural bores were

drilled by SANTOS im 1957. The bores were drilled on the apex and on the

‘g “BLY

Bre Fee OL} yeyesny sO SAIAaNSOSD AG TIaVIII VIG! Bante HORT

"961 NYS

OO 2 SZ DNIDTAIG QLENOWE PO ebZ DNiaYED JILENOVA

NOZIHOH Band VAN

audyseun,

Bate sMoaeucaue2 LN tat S2TyUNE 4e€su Aide 2 UO QAR B29 ZeN FUE Ion HERI SSS T= oa

aieus, FNVTIUAK FOAL FNIINAS = NOCOKH :

sua spurs Wes WUTLYN AO1TaB NOLLS35 ra

awe 4a34 BWw3S ALNOZIdOn :

econ CORZ ‘S00! ¥. ‘ a

onNaos1 9 g

VS OBlvagIoWta FIWIS TWSHLNIA AAOSyY NOWDAS a3) wid TWVHaAD i

‘sa020 OL

4S08L OL = a

SrstL = SEL 2UWNU ea LIB +8518 SUOUEBUT]

SSL 9 auoispurs

“EEL. HL auarspueg 9 Ge RL Asan Apues

=| 163 {8 aullkpueg oo

LOB 985 4e BUD WERWH Ons FES

PEL“ PSO RS ey FUORI

quoypurs Agus SS

= =r

eS FT 0e7 MEISPUER

Bot purg PUe seus Aputs

Zuois, Due:

sIeUG Apue’

sued uw eBey ae Hg, ,aeuES oO

282 VET SETH eES fe SunEo]

Bos Dr ce ie sucepURS

(eS PAM GAs 4B sed OF)

ae PHEW

——

SIS-105 4 ouoyepues

S*E-Q1E BUDYEPUTS A!

Ser-S0y Mojapies OF!

Humbe EnmaZWaCT] w PUES aH wTUG kbs

Bir - fOr WolspuRS

BIE- OLE DUCTEPURR

SIE-,00% PudisDUrE A.

Ges Qed Um seus Asu6-enig

ayes hourg ¥ suajspuRs coz

seGeay “CUED Yim. aieNg, Kaub-anig

BUES AHH ME AUOINORY pdUNO|O2ZLI8)

syed un Apwes 9 smomeunqies aeus Abang ¢

DMR AVI (att

RRSP, MORPUES PUBS FAY) PUR aTRG ApuS-arig

Bue RLOMPAyY AUB ania MUS pow *

seus Apurg pur au{EpuTs cor!

SwauiBery yensaung pur seus haub-amg

SIZ. OOF DOISGUEE <

sebeuy TED ym auTpeRy OF

swradery erioung Yi miaepny dnd Jub isnyatana

OL a9. HUOKEDL a ay_isns

Souta Aveyg fue auorspues nn pue LaNpnn mys ee — ASTIN Ove aun spUES oO Ng PS EUS BAYLM!

om Cree [| stung pur jos ° ‘

pucyspaw Ames, ——— musing BEE Sigg [OS | ‘ —_ ——_— ——

auaepue. - —_-—— Misa

4anusung pue iL

”

oO .5S7 ISH len == (BE TSW fon oS SIL TSN ZN 20 JOF Va Den n

S2IOH LONS DIWSIZS WOU BNOCG PeN ONY ZN

Ndamlagd ,AsNerend, 30 NOVLISod NO NOUYWXOAN!

VSYV SNMOQ NOGGYH SNOlLVY1SYxHOD 3YO9d

1 Iv, WOPFNER

western limb of Mt. Tlowie anticline and across Haddun syneline. ‘The position

ef bores Nos. 1 to 4 is shown in Fig. 6. Bore No. 5 is not shown in this plan

and was situated about 4 miles south from No, 1. The bores proved the con-

tinuity of the particular structures to a depth of at least 750 feet (see Fig. 6).

As a marker horizon, the ‘ippesogt section of the “Betoota” Limestone

horizon was used. As mentioned previously, this zone has a very widespread

occurrence for it is exposed in the ventres of the Betoota and the Curalle domes

as well as im the centre of the Morney anticline,

‘The calcareous beds oceur at an average stratigraphic depth of 7O0 feet and are inecr-

bedded with green, friable, medium-graincd sandstones, The thickness of the individual

limestime bed varies between 6 inches and 2 feet 6 inches, and usually two to four limesteme

heds were struck. The author is aware of the possibility that some of the thinner calcareous

beds quiwht be sey lenses with limited luteral extension. but the whole zone. itself repre-

sents a type of sedimentation with definite calcareous tendencies, Far more thin normal far

the dominantly clastic sediments of the Winton Formation. According jo ay analysis,

carried out by A, Grasso, Geosurveys of Anst. Ltd., the hard ealeareous Leds haye an average

compasition of 47 per cent. valcium carbonate, 33 per cent, pelitic materiil and 20 per ecnt:

finepsamunitic material. Due to a high content of dark minersls in the sand-fraction (mainly

horubleade .and biotite), these sandy limestones have a rather unusual and charucteristic

appearance.

A second marker horizon, a hard pyritic pelite, was struck between 1352

feet and 1357 feet in No. 1 bore and between 935 feet and 942 feet in No. 5

bore. This sediment is built up of ininute, interlocking crystals of pyrite sus-

pended in a very fine-grained clayey matrix. Both No. land No. 6 bores are

situated on the crest of Mt. Howie anticline and the different position of the

pyritic band corresponds with the north phinge of the anticlinal axis of 14 to 2

egrees. ‘

A preliminary seismic survey, undertaken by the Bureau of Mineral Re-

sources, showed that at least the east-dip of the sayne structure is still present

at a depth of 6500 feet (Smith, 1958).

DISCUSSION

Concerning the origin of these structuyes, cousideration of the nature of the

sedimentary system comprising the basin is essential. The Great Australian

Artesian Basin, as a Mesozoic structure, way an epicemtineutal development

which has experienced no orogenic deformation.

in marginal areas, reflected structures due to sedimentary “draping” ef-

fects aver old, pre-Mesozoic morphological highs are quite common, Examples

of reflected structures have been observed along the Peak and Denison Ranges

and recently at Oodnadatta (Wopmer, 1957), This explanation can hardly be

applied to the structures described above, situated in the cental part of this deep

hasin. The seismic survey by the Bureau of Mineral Resources, for example,

indicates probably 8000 feet of Mesuzvic sediments in the Haddon syncline

(Smith, 1958). Such a thick sedimentary blanket would even out all but the

most extreme morphological features of buried ald relief, Rather it is felt, it

must be assumed that the only forces which could create structures of the ob-

served type within this part of the Great Austealian Artesian Basin, would be

af the epeirogenctic type.

Fpeiragenetic forces could have acted either as normal uplifts or as differen-

hel movements along planes of dislocation both in vertical and/or transenrrent

direction. As regards these latter possibilities, pre-existing dislocutiim planes

iu Lhe basement could have been re-activated, with the movements transferred

tu the nverlying younger sediments.

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN Iyl

While the movements within the mare rigid rocks of the basement weuld

be expressed in straight dishication planes (vertical or horizontal) the over-

lying, more pliable Mesozoic rocks (in particular the Cretaceous) would tend

to absorb some of these stresses: e.g. a normal fault in the basément would be

extensively modified and/or compensated through the several thousand feet

of overlying sediments, and be expressed on the surface by a monoclinal fold,

Depending on the type of movements and their directions, various patterns of

deformation can be predicted. The marphology of the contact between the

rigid “basement” and the pliable “basin” sediments, and also internal inhomu-

gencities within the pliable sedimentary body itself may alsv influence the final

structural pattern.

For the following reasons, i.c. the epicontinental character of the Great

Australian Artesian Basin, the gathering of the axial trend within the north-

east sector and the en-cchelon arrangement of the anticlinal axes (see Fig, 2),

the author favours transcurrent movements as having been the cause of ¢

fold-structures, Though he realises that the stage of our knowledge om this

particular matter is still incomplete and sketchy, he would like to present the

following working-hypothesis. for discussion.

Transcurrent movements within the basement following a general north-

east, suth-west direction with the north block translated relatively to the north-

cast, would introduce a retational strain that could produce the present struc-

tures, Within the rigid basement this shearing strain would develop two sets

of shearing planes. One of these sets lies closer to the direction of the shearing

couple Han the other, and the main slip would occur along these planes (in

pur case approximately N,70°E, initial stage).

As the thick blanket of Mesozoic sediments is weaker and much more

pliable than the “basement”, it reacts differently upon deformation, Instead of

developing differential shearing planes, folding occurs in en-echelon pattern,

whereby the axial trend lies at a right angle to the direction of maximum com-

pression. The maximum compression will be perpendicular to the longest axis

uf the strain ellipsoid. (A very rough experiment, whereby a layer of putty was

sheared on two boards, produced folds nearly identical with the structures

concerned, The experiment was repeated several times and yielded the same

results each time. )

In the initial stage the axis of the stvain ctlipseid is approximately 45° to

the direction of the shearing couple (in our case about north), bel as the amount

al transcurrent movement increases the angle between the direction of the

couple and the longest axis of the strain ellipsoid becomes more acule, It may

be assumed, therefore, that the structures with the closest trend to north are

those which were initiated first, while the anticlines with more north-easterly

trend originated at a later stage. If this hypothesis is correct, it would mean

that the Nappamilkic and the Betoota antielines are those which were initiated

first, Following this first stage of warping the developing anticlines presented

a mure rigid body than (he surrounding mmwarped sediments. Therefore, the

originally established trend remained constant, even the amount was still in-

creasing and the longest axis of the strain ellipsoid moving constantly east of

north. With continued movement. other parts of the sediments were fulded

but along a more easterly tread (Mt. Howie, Curalle und Morney anticline),

while the southern extensions of both anticlinal lines fused together to the

Cordillo hulf-come.

In the marginal areas of the basin the sedimentary cover of the basement

was tow thin to compensate the shear movements and single shear planes may:

be expected to pass through into the Mesozoic sediments. The foregoing out-

192 H, WOPRFNER

line would presumably explain the restriction of actual folding of cover sedi-

ments to the central, thicker portion of the Great Australian Artesian Basin-

There are severai reasons for selecting north-east, south-west transcurrent

movements, Firstly, this is the most favourable direction to explain the observed

trend of the anticlines. Secondly, the north-east, south-west direction is a pre-

ferred direction of geological features, not only within the Great Australian

Artesian Basin itself, but also within its surrounding older rocks.

The age of the folding can only be established within a rather wide time-

limit. At the stage of our present knowledge we have to assume that the

sediments of the Winton Formation have been deposited in the lower Upper

Cretaceous, most probably in Cenomanian time. The Winton is overlain dis-

conformably by grits and torrential bedded sandstones thought to be Lawer

Tertiary in age.

The Tertiary sediments are usually most preminently developed on the

limbs of the anticlines and towards the synclines. In several instances the Ter-

tiary wedges out completely towards the crest of the anticlines, Within the

area described by this paper the Tertiary beds are folded disconfortnably (un-

conformably in the case of Morney anticline) with the underlying sediments

af the Winton Formation.

The oldest, unfolded beds, following on top of the Tertiary grits and sands

(usually “duricrusted”) are laterites and Jateritised sands, These, in turn, are

overlain by trayertinus, alluvial clays and silts and sand-dunes. The travertines

and sand-dunes are considered to be of Quarternary age which would suggest

that the laterites ure of late Tertiary age. Assuming that the dating of the grits

and torrential bedded sandstones as Tertiary is correct, the ahove-mentianed

observutions would give evidence that the folding movements have been

initiated not later thun in Upper Cretaceous. time (post-Cenomanian).

Subsequently, the Cretaceous sediments were exposed to erosion, but be-

came covered again, this time by fresh-water lakes, and the coarse Tertiary

grits and sandstones were depusited. While this sedimentation was still well

in progress, folding movements were renewed and probably reached a climax

in lute Eocene to Oligocene time.

Together with vertical uplifts, this last phase finally displaced the water

cover into large depressions whereof Lake Eyre, Lake Gregory and several other

low-lying salt pans are the last remnants.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to express his thanks to Mr. J. L. Bonython, Chairman

ol the SANTOS Board, for the permission to publish this article, and also to

Mr. R. C. Sprigg, Managing Director of Geosurveys of Australia Limited, for

the opportunity to investigate the area. The author was assisted in his field

investigations by W, G. Swindon, B.Se., 5. M. Rowe, B.Sc., A, Hess, B.Se., and

R L. Chase, B.Se., all of Geosurveys uf Australia Limited. An intensive air

reconnaissance was carried out by R- O. Brunnsechweiler, Ph.D., and the author.

Particular appreciation is accorded to Mr. R, B. Beckwith, Manager of Cor-

dilla Downs Station, for his valuable assistance during the field operations.

H. Worrnen Puate 1

Fig. 1.—The western limb of the Haddon syncline about one mile north of Maddon

No, 4 bore, looking south. The top layers are strongly silicified, Dip 15°R,

(Photo H. Wopfner, )

ak. Fe Best

Fig. 2—Part of the western limb of Curalle dome, north of Goppacunda Well,

looking south, Dip 16°W. (Photo H, Wopfner.)

H, Worrner PLATE 2

Fig. 1—The strongly eroded western limb of the Curalle dome seen from the

air. The widening of the dome towards narth can be clearly observed in the

top left of picture. The high searp, built up by the eastern limb of the anticline

(Beal Range), is in the right far background. Direction of view, NNE. (Photo

H. Wopfner. )

THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN 193

REFERENCES

Grarssner, M. F., 1956. Erdél-Aufschlufarbeiten in Australien, Erdél-Zeitschr., Heft 2,

Vienna.

Jack, R. L., 1925. Some Developments in Shallow Water Areas in the North-East of South

Australia, Geol. Survey South Australia, Bulletin No. 11.

Jack, R. L., 1930, Gcological Structure and other Factors in Relation to Underground Water

Supply in Portions of South Australia, Geol. Survey South Australia, Bulletin No. 14.

Morr, W. D., 1952. Oil in Queensland, Qneensland Gov. Mining Journal, October.

Smiru, E. R., 1958. Notes on Seismic Survey at Haddon Downs, South Australia, unpublished

report, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Melbourne.

Sprice, R. C., 1958. Petroleum Prospects of Western Parts of Great Australian Artesian Basin,

Bull. Amer. Assoc, Pet. Geol., 42, p. 10.

Wurrenouse, F. W., 1948. The Geology of the Channel Country of South-Western Queens-

land, Bureau of Investigation, Technical Bulletin No. 1.

Worrnen, H., 1957. The Geology of the Area West and North-West of Oodnadatta, Final

Report for 1956 on Work Carried out on Behalf of SANTOS Ltd. (unpublished).

NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY C. D. BOOMSMA

Summary

A revision is made of the geographical locations of a number of species of the genus eucalyptus in

South Australia.

NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GC. D. Boomsma*®

[Read 18 August 1959]

SUMMARY

A revision is made of the geographical locations of a number of species

of the genus eucalyptus in South Australia.

INTRODUCTION

Owing to the amount of clearing for agricultural settlement that has taken

place of recent years in South Australia, it is almost inevitable that many of

the original occurrences of trees of the genus eucalyptus will eventually be

known from the records only, rather than from actual sites, The following notes

deal with new observations on the geographical oceurrence of a number of

species of the genus,

Of recent years very little material, if aay, has been collected in South

Australia of E. eudeomoides, E. ewartiana, E. gongylocarpa, E. pachyphylla,

E, oldfieldii, and EF, viridis.

E, albens Migq.

Only two trees have been located near Wirrabara township, in the type

arca, which agrée with the type description. However, there are many

which agree with the description of E. hemiphloia, amongst the cammonly

occurring greybox, HZ. microcarpa, It has been suggested by Pryor (personal

communication) that mixed type material formed the basis of the descrip-

tion of E. albens.

. anceps (R. Br.) Blakely

On the south side of Torrens Gorge, Hd, Onkaparinga, approximately three

miles east of Athelstone, a sinall outlier of 10-12 stems, C, Boomsma, 1947.

. baxteri (Benth) Maiden and Blakely

1, A stunted small tree to 30 ft. high, mature leaves with long acuminate

point, bud has a conical operculum, and typical exsert valves to capsule.

Mt, Kitchener, R, V, Woods, 1954 (personal communication). This may be

the most northerly occurrence of this species.

2. A stnnted small tree to 30 ft. high, Sec, 42, Hd. Waitpinga, now cleared.

Mature leaf wider and thicker than type, fruit larger than type, 15 mm.

x 15 mm. C. D. Boomsma, 1950.

behriana F. v. M.

Collections were made from Curtwillia Creek, Cowell, D. Smith, 1956;

Wanilla, W. C. Johnstone, 1956; Stockport in the lower north, C. D.

Boomsma, 1957: and Mt. Woodfarde, the far north, J. J. Johnsen, 1955.

. ealycogona Turez

Small island inliers, Sec. 140, Hd. Howe, Southern Flinders Ranges. C. D.

Boomsma, 1949.

* An officer of the Woods and Forests Department.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1960), Vol, 83.

196 c. D. BOOMSMA

E. camaldulensis Dehn

Although a generalised occurrence by Burbidge in Trans. Roy, Soc, 1947,

includes “water courses throughout §.A,”, and by Black, 1957, includes “all

over $.A. except the dry creekless area north of the Great Bight”, an area

of 20 acres, half mile east of Minlaton, Boomsma, 1949, is the only knewn

occurrence on Yorke Peninsula, and a larger area occurs at Polda, Eyre

Peninsula, in the Hds, Sqnire, Tinline and Ulipa, R. French, 1956 (personal

communication ),

E. cladocalyx F, v. M. (Figs, 3 and 4)

Three genetic variants showing some characteristics of E. camaldulensis

and E. cladocalyx were noted in Chapmans Gums Swamp, Wanilla, Eyre

Peninsula, W. C. Johnstone, 1951; C. D. Boomsma and Pryor, 1958,

The form and shape of FE. cladocalyx yaries in the three areas of natural

oveurrence, yery crooked to stunted tree to 35 ft. high on Eyre Peninsula;

with an improvement in straightness and increase in height on Kangaroo

Island to tal) shaft-like trees. to 90 ft. high in the Southern Flinders Ranges.

No natural stands haye been found agrecing with the description of the

horticultural variety nana.

E. cneorifolia D.C.

1. Two small ridge top outliers on lateritic soil in Sec. 381, Hd. Encounter

Bay, haye now been cleared.

2. A recently observed occurrence nearby on a friable sandy soil 5 miles

south-west of the Back Valley P.O. on Rivington Farm. J. G. Wood, 1959;

in the University of Adelaide, Werbarium.

E. concinna Maiden and Blakely

Along the E,-W. transcontinental railway line, Whynbring, J. Johnson, 1955.

E. cosmophylla F. v, M,

In areas between two associations, E, obligua and E. cneorifolia, on Kan-

garoo Island, and E. obliqua and E. fasciculosa on Fleurieu Peninsula, speci-

mens with more than three buds per umbel, and atypical bud characters,

C. D. Boomsma, 1947,

E. dumosa A. Cunn

Smooth budded specimens are found in eastern localities of South Australia,

but specimens which are not smooth budded are usually referable to other

species.

E. elaeaphora F. v. M.

Small tree to mallee, 10-15 ft. high, on the upper slopes and summit

of two peaks in Elders Range surrounding Wilpena Pound, G. Gross, 1953,

and R. French, 1957 (personal communication); I. Brooker, 1959,

E_ gamophylla F. y. M,

While this species is best known by its perfoliate juvenile foliage, the

intermediate foliage, not often secn, is sessile, to shortly petiolate, opposite,

to alternate and lanceolate 1-5—2 cm. x4—6 cm. Mature foliage not

seen. Mann Ranges, J. Johnson, 1955.

E. gillit Maiden

No specimens have been located by me, in the vicinity of Wirrabara during

the period 1945-1958 which is in the type area, Its most southerly occur-

rence appeats to be Biblianda Station, J. Johnson (personal communica-

tion).

lead

NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 197

. intertexta R. T. Baker

Mature foliage, robust, coriaceous, avate-lanceolate 7-10 om. * 2-5—4 cm.

fruits about twice normal size. Mt. Moulden, Blyth Ranges, J. Johnson,

1955; R. L. Crocker, 1956.

. jugalis Naud

Probably a “nomen dubium”, Pryor (personal communication), but not

E. leucoxylon var. pauperita, J, E. B, Throughout the high rainfall parts of

the Southern Flinders Ranges, scattered individuals or small groups up to

50 trees having intermediate characteristics between a box and a gum. They

could be genetic variants of E. leucoxylon and a box, the common box

is E. microcarpa, C. D. Boomsma, 1947,

. largiflorens F. v. M.

Several restricted disjunct occurrences either on swamps or along flood

plains to water-courses far removed from the large securrence along the

Murray River. Mingary Creek, Oakvale Station, and Kalkaroo, J, Johnson,

1953; Halbury, C. D. Boomsma, 1956,

. macrorryncha F. v. M.

A genetic variant, a single tree with level valves to the fruit, Sevenhills.

Pryor and Boomsma, 1953.

». microtheca F.v. M,

Large broad-lanceolate foliage, Everard Park. J, B, Cleland, 1954. A num-

ber of specimens with enclosed valves examined by L, Johnstone, 1958,

were stated to be genetic variants of E. microtheca. Mann Ranges, J.

Jolmson, 19595.

, obliqua L’Herit

Stunted tree to mallee-like, 10 ft. high, fruit with level, to exsert valves.

Ridge Road, Parawa, C. D. Boomsma, 1946.

. odorata Behr and Schl.

Lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate intermediate foliage predominates on trees on

the west facing lower slopes of the Mt. Lofty Range, while the lanceolate

to narrow lanceolate mature foliage is characteristic of the northern areas

to form variety angustifolia, Blakely

. oxymitra Blakely

Widespread in the vicinity of the far north-western ranges, J. Johnson,

1955; R. Crocker, 1956 (personal communication ).

. pauciflora Sieb

Genetic variants from Sec. 574 Hd. Caroline, N. Lewis, 1952,

pileata Blakely

Occasional specimens have been collected from the far north, J. Johnson,

1955; R. Crocker, 1956 (personal communication),

. pyriformis Turcz

Fruits nearly smooth, Bulgunnia Station, J, Johnson, 1952,

. rubida Dean and Maiden

A disjunct occurrence of only a few acres in Sec. 304 Hd, Yankalilla, It is

adjacent to the E. obliqua and E. fasciculosa associations. C. D, Boomsma,

1947.

. rugosa R, Brown and Blakely

Ilybrid swarms in the Hundred of Coonarie, Yorke Peninsula; and Fishery

Bay, Eyre Peninsula, C. D. Boomsma, 1947; and Boomsma and Pryor, 1958.

198 C. D. BOOMSMA

E. terminalis F. y. M.

The forms with narrow lanceolate mature leaves, and ovate-globular thick

walled fruits with a constricted orifice, usually only a few per umbel at

maturity, are referable to E. dichromophloia F. vy, M., L. Johnstone, 1958.

Observed by J. Johnson in Musgrave, Mann and Tompkinson Ranges,

E. uncinata Turez [

Because specimens are rarely collected, if at all, in South Australia, this

species could be regarded as endemic to Western Australia,

E. viminalis Labill (Figs. 1 and 2)

The rough barked coastal form has been known to occur on Eyre Peninsula

since 1951, but verification was not made until 1958 by Pryor and Boomsma.

The occurrence is typical for the species being confined to the lower

slopes and bottoms of valleys in undulating country on terra-rossa soils,

Several hundred trees were seen distributed over Mickera Station, Hd.

Sleaford, where it is known as the Mickera Gum.

E., vitrea R. T, Baker

Ts now regarded to have a hybrid origin, so it is not surprising to record

a wider range of characters than in the original description. L. Johnstone,

1952; Pryor, 1955 (personal commumication).

E. websteriana Maiden

A new record for South Australia, Single specimen of three dozen mature

leaves, eight buds and one capsule, Mature foliage bunched together, sub-

glaucous, ovate, obovate to obcordate or emarginate. Petioles, young

branchlets, peduncles and pedicels glaucous, Buds and influrescence agree

with the original description. Capsule larger, 14-0 * 0-8 mm., broad dise

gently rising to the base of the small triangular exert valves. Mt, Wood-

roofe, 3,000 feet altitude. J. B. Cleland, 18/4/59, State Herbarium 95, 951,

132. Determined by S, T. Blake, 18/6/1951, Maiden refers to cultivated

seedlings. ex Tarcoola blocks P. 381, Vol. VIIT, Pt. 5.

A New Record for South Australia

A mallee, mature leaves somewhat oblong-lanceolate, widely spaced, al-

ternate, long acuminate point, petiolate, uel venation indistinct, size 7-5

em, * I-1—1-S cm. Fruit shortly pedicellate, axillary umbels, on short

compressed peduncle, cupular shape 7 mm. * 7 mm. with raised rim 2

mm. wide, valyes short, exserted and subulate. J. Johnson, 1955; R. Crocker,

1956; Lothian and Hill, 1958.

REFRRENCES

Brack, J, M., 1943-57. Flora of South Australia. Govt. Printer, Adelaide, 2nd Ed.

Bunurince, N, T., 1947. Key to the South Australian species of the genus Eucalyptus L’Merit.

Trans. Roy. Soe. §. Aust.. TL (2), pp, 137-67, 1947.

Maton, J. H., 1903-25, A critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus, Govt. Printer, Sydney.

Puate 1

©. D, Boomsma

“BEETEBE A

Sc6T “Wag ‘BNsUILAY Noto] y

Oo) sypUUIA “oy

"(ULIOZ [R}SPO

'gg6T “Jdog

‘ynsumag aidq ‘erayory "F “Sty

O} IEMs ULIO} payooio A]ssoid pue ye ayl[-xoq

ysnor Surmoys *( WUOF [Rseoo) syMUWIA “y|—T] “BIq

PLATE 2

C. D. Boomsma

'9c6] “Weg ‘rms

ula, OLA] UTPHIP\A “lays paysoy pur todey ydusqe

BUIMOYS “BUpAIsS UWos-jjos xlyooopujza “y—p “Buy

“SS6T “dag ‘FNsueg mA ‘ETUR AA SasseaS

par ojos myaqgyy “nunjdnuas naoyleoyguoy

aie ATOJSIOpUN ayy ut saigeds payeposse uoy

“PULOF PUrTpooM YRuULARSg ‘xfij~pooppja “~q~—e “BLY

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA NO. 1

BY G. M. CHIPPENDALE

Summary

A new name is proposed, Borreria hillii (syn. Spermacoce scabra Ewart). Amended descriptions

are given for two species, Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies and Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely.

Additional notes are given for several species, and ten species including two naturalised species are

given as new records for Central Australia.

CONTRIBUTIONS FO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

No. 1

By G. M, Cutprennare®

[Read 8 October 1959]

SUMMARY

A new name is proposed, Barreria hillit (syn. Spermacoee scahra Ewart).

Amended descriptions are given for two species, Bassia spinosa Ewart et

Davies and Eucalyptus gangylocarpa Blakely.

Additional notes are given for several species, and ten species meluding

two naturalised! species are given as ew reeards for Central Australia.

Isonrackian

Isvetes muellert. A. Br. Top of Ayers Rock in rock pool, D. E, Symon,

14/6/1953 (ADW 9715),

This is a new record for Central Australia, and was brought to my notice

by Mr, David Symon.

GRAMINEAE

Eriachne armitii F. Muell. This species was omitted accidentally in the

Check List in last years Transactions (Chippendale, 1959).

PROTMACEAE

Hakea arborescens R. Br. One mile east of Kurundi H.S., Neville Forde,

11/5/1957 (NF 821), A new record for Central Australia,

CHENOPODIACEAL

Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies. Subshrub to 30 cm. high, grey, tomentose

with branching hairs on stems and leaves, branches often tanzled, more or less

pracumbent. Leaves sessile, narrow, oblanceolate or obtuse, 10 mm. to 14 mm.

long, 2 mm, to 2-5 mm. wide near apex. Flowers solitary, axillary. Fruiting

perianth tube 2 mm. long, attached firmly to stern, mostly with 4 spines, one to

4 mim. long, two shorter divergent at base, the fourth spine often shorter again,

Seed vertical or slightly oblique to summit of perianth.

Lander Creek, G. F, Vill, 15/6/1911 (G.F.A. 346, Holotype, seen on loan

from Melbourne Herbarium), 10 miles cust of Central Mount Wedge HS. R. E.

Winkworth, 1/7/1954 (Herb. Aust.f REW 383). Five miles cast of Alice Springs,

R. A. Perry. 5/3/1953 (Herb. Aust, RAP 3232), Twenty-five miles west of Haast

Bluf Settlement, R. B. Winkworth, 9/6/1954 (IIerb. Aust. REW 317). Fifteen

iniles south-west of Alice Springs, R. E. Winloworth, 7/5/1954 (Herb, Aust.

REW 262). Three miles south of Angas Downs, M. Lazarides, 9/10/1956 (Herb.

Aust, ML, 6183).

The above is an amended description, as the species is not well known, and

wus not seen by R. H. Anderson at the time of his revision of the genus Bassiar

(1923). Examination of fragments of the holotype showed that G, F. Hill's

specimen was affected by insects, and it was these affected parts which were

* Bolanist, Animul Industry Branch, Department of Territories, Alice Springs, N,T.

+ The official abbreviation [or the herbariwn in Canberra, cited as “Herb. Ausi.”, is GANB,

Trans, Roy, Soc. S, Aust, (1960), Vol, 83,

200 G, M, CHIPPENDALE

described by Ewart and Davies as “fruiting perianths connate into a hard mass

of about half-inch diameter”. Mr. Burns and Mr. Neboiss of Melbourne Museum

agree that the hard masses are “indeed galls caused by insects, possibly fies”.

The affinities of this species are with B, quinquecuspis F. Muell., and not

with B, paradoxa (R. Br.) F. Muell. as originally stated by Ewart and Davies.

Tt is sometimes a common species in mulga scrub, and is alsa found on some

low caleareous hills, and in sandy soil on croded flats with scalded patches.

AIZOACEAE

Trianthema thynchocalyptra F. Muell. Twenty-four miles south of Barrow

Creek township, R. A. Perry, 3/9/1955 (Herb, Aust, RAP 5350).

This is a new record for Central Australia, and the collector's note states

“prostrate mat plant, with pink flowers”.

PaAPILIONAGEAE

Daviesia chordophylla Mcissn. Twelve miles north-cast of Narwietooma

HLS,, M. Lazarides, 15/9/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML 5991). A new record for Central

Australia,

MiIMOSACEAE

Acacia torulosa Benth. Four miles north of Wauchope, Neville Forde,

8/11/1956 (NF 695), A new record for Centra] Australia,

CAESALPINIACEAE

Cassia curvistyla J. M. Black. 14-2 miles south-east of Tanami, G, Chippen-

dale, 3/5/1958 (NT 4267); 17 miles north-east of Lake Mackay, G. Chippendale,

17/6/1957 (NT 3412),

These recent records, together with the two localities quoted by Black with

his uriginal description (1938) help to show the distribution of this little-

collected species. These records were all in sandy soil in Triodia sp. communi-

ties, in one case in lateritic sand, and in one other case in an area of burnt

Trivia sp. It seems most likely that this species extends over most of the arid

area north and south of Tanami.

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE

Zyvophyllum iodocarpum F, Muell. Twelve miles south-west of Tempe

Downs H.S., M. Lazarides, 4/10/1956 (Ilerb, Aust. ML 6120). This is a new

record for Central Australia, with the collector’s note: “common in undulating

area with low hills and Acacia estrophiolata”.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Petalostigina quadriloculare F, Muell. var nigrum Fwart et Davies. Five

miles north of Kurundi Station, M. Lazarides, 28/8/1956 (Herb, Aust. ML 5866).

Five miles south of Wauchope, R. E, Winkworth, 21/3/1955 (IIerb, Aust, KEW

962), Two miles north of Wauchope, R. E, Winkworth, 22/3/1955 (Herb. Aust.

REW 979). Ten miles north of Murray Downs HLS., R. E. Winkworth, 29/7/1954

(Herb, Aust. REW 522). Seventeen miles west of Rockhampten Downs turn-off,

Barkly Highway, G, Chippendale, 14/8/1955 (NT 1533). Forty-one miles south

of Waye Hill HLS., G. Chippendale, 11/7/1956 (NT 2204). Muckaty turn-off,

Stuart Highway, C. Chippendale, 11/3/1955 (NT 1075).

The description of this variety by Ewart and Davies states: “Fruit black,

X-inch diam., glabrous, seeds smooth, dark brown”. Examination of fragments

of the varietal types seen on Ioan from Melbourne Herbarium showed that all

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 201

of the aboye specimens were vegetatively identical with these types, A sug>

gestion that the original description of the fruit of this varlety may be faulty

was checked at Melbourne Herbarium by Miss H. Aston, and it seems clear

that the deseriptions were made from fruits which were not in a perfect state.

The blackness was due to age, as was also the glabrousness. There were no

collector's notes. In the specimens quoted above, the fruit is quotex! in the field

as being “apricot-ycllow” and “orange-yellow”, and the capsule is silky pubescent

when immature, and appears to lose some of this pubescence with age. A fur-

ther specimen in Melbourne Herbarium, matching G. F. Hill’s No, 387, eol-

lected by J. McDouall Stuart, North Australia, lat. 20°20’, had a collector's

note stating, “Small, bitter, orange-coloured fruit”.

This species is sometimes known as Strychnine Bush in the Northern

Territory,

MaLVACHAE

Sida platycalyx F. Muel). ex Benth, Fl, Aust. i.L97, 1863.

Synonyms:

S. inclusa Benth. Fl. Aust. 7.197, 1863.

S. podopetalu F. Muell. et R. Tate in Trans. Roy. Suc. South Australia, 13,

$4-109, 1889-1890.

4 won pedatum Ewart in Ewart et Davies FI, Northern Territory, p. 182.

917,

The case for the synonymy of 8. inelusa was accurately made hy White

(1922). In the case of S. podopetala, the authors separate it as having “nurrower

leaves, hy the calyces being not provided with very prominent ridglets and

further by the petals emerging beyond the calyx”. In describing $, platycalyx.

Bentham states; “Petals broad, shorter than calyx”, but more than. likely he did

not sec adequate material. He only quotes “Sturts Creek”... In dried specimens,

the buds of this species sometimes give the impression of being mature flowers,

but in the field the species varies greatly in the size of leaves on the same plant,

and also according to season conditions and habitat. The petals are at length

longer than the calyx. The ridges on the calyces is also a variable factor. 'Tiet-

ken’s specimens from Glen Helen, June, 1889, und Warman Rocks, 10/6/1889,

wml a specimen from Ipilla Gorge, James Range, were examined on loan from

Adelaide Nerbarium.

A type of Abutilon pedatum seen on loan from Sydney Herbarium had

been correctly determined by Miss Neridah Ford as 8. platycalyx.

MYRTACEAE

Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely. Near King Creek, 234 miles soith of

George Gill Range, G. Chippendale, 27/6/1959 (NT 6326). Twenty-eight miles

north of Lake Amadeus, G. Chippendale, 28/6/1959 (NT 6343). “Sandy slope

at Lake Amadeus, G. Chippendale, 29/6/1959 (NT 6390). Ten miles south-

west of Glen Edith, G, phippendale. 24/6/1959 (NT 6274).

No description of the buds of this specics appears in literature, and the

following description is made from the above specimens:

Umbels axillary, slightly deflexed, 3-9 flowered, but mostly 4-7 Rowers

peduncles terete 10-15 mm. long, buds pruinose 3-3-5 mn. diameter, pedicels

4-6 mm. long, eperculum hemispherical, truncate at summit with faint ratlizting

bidlges, 1-0-1+6 mm. high, tube short conical 2-0-3-5 mm. mostly 3-0-3+5 mim.

ong,

This species is common in aeolian sands in Triodia pungens associati

which are west of the settled areas in Central Australia. ; _—

202 G. M. CHIPPENDALE

SOLANACEAE

Solanum melanospermum F. Muell. Stirling bore, 20 miles south of Barrow

Creek Township, R. A. Perry, 3/9/1955 (Herb. Aust. RAP 5349). This is a

new record for Central Australia.

RUBIACEAE

Borreria hillii nom. nov.

Spermacoce scabra Ewart in Flora of the Northern Territory, p. 260, 1917.

Ewart’s specific epithet had been used previously in Borreria by K, Schum., 1895.

CUCURBITACEAE

Cucumis myriocarpus Naud. Temple Bar Creek, eight miles south-west of

Alice Springs, G, Chippendale, 22/1/1959 (NT 5327). This is an addition to

the naturalised plants of Central Australia.

CoMPposiITAE

Vernonia cinerea (L,) Less. var. lanata Koster in Blumea I No. 3 (1935), 408.

This was recorded as V. cinerea in last year’s Transactions (Chippendale, 1959).

Erigeron bonariensis L., Alice Springs, G. Chippendale, 3/4/1958 (NT 4151),

This is an addition to the naturalised plants of Central Australia.

Fig. 1—Buds of Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely.

(Twig is natural size.)

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 203

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The assistance of interstate botanists is gratefully acknowledged. Figure 1

was drawn by Mr. D. J. Nelson.

REFERENCES

Anperson, BR. H., 1923. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii, part 3 (1923). “A Revision of the

Australian Species of the Genus Bassia”.

Brack, J. M., 1938. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 354. “Additions to the Flora of

South Australia, No. 37”.

CuipreNDALe, G. M., 1959. Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 82 (1959), pp. 321-338. “Check

List of Central Australian Plants”.

Ewant, A. J., and Davies, O. B., 1917. The Flora of the Northern Territory.

Weis C. T., 1922. Queensland Agric. Journal, 17-18 (Jan., 1922), 34-5. “A Western

urr’,

HENRY KENNETH FRY, D.S.O, M.D., B.SC., DIP.P.H.

1886-1959

Summary

HENRY KENNETH FRY, v.s.c., M.D., B.S,, BSC., DIP.P.H.

1886-1959

H. K. Fry was elected a member of this Society in 1923, became a member

of its Council from 1933 to 1938, and was President for the last year of this period,

Dr. Fry graduated at the University of Adelaide in Science in 1905 and in

Medicine in 1908, In 1909 he was awarded the Rhodes Scholarship and pro-

ceeded to Oxford, where he gained the B.Sc. degree in 1912 and the Diploma in

Public Health. His post-graduate study was in the subject of Anthropology.

Returning to Australia in 1913, he joined the Northern Territory Health

Service and in the Territory found an outlet for his training in anthropology

through his interest in the Australian aboriginal.

After serving for some time in the far north, he took up private practice

but continued in his academic leanings and in 1934 gained his degree of M.D

in the University of Adelaide and was also made a Fellow of the Royal Australian

College of Physicians. During the later years of his life, he served as Medical

Officer of Health for the City of Adelaide.

Dr. Fry always maintained an active interest in anthropology and for many

years was a member of the University Board for Anthiopologioal Research. He

took part in a number of University field expeditions to Central Australia — in-

cluding those to Hermannsburg, Cockatoo Creek, Mount Licbig, the Granites,

Ernabella and Yuendumu., He was especially interested in social anthropology

and made a special study of some aspects of the social structure of Central

Australian tribes, on which subject he published a number of recognised authori-

lalive papers.

Most of his anthropological papers are contained in the Transactions of this

Society, his main works being:

1931 A table showing the Class Relations of the Aranda.

1932 Genealogical studies of Anstralian tribal systems.

1931+ Kinship and descent among the Australian aborigines.

1950 Aboriginal Social Systems.

A major anthropological contribution, “Fear in Primitive Society”, was published

by the Anthropological Society of South Australia as No, 1 of its Occasional

Publications (1938). He was among the foundation members of this Society.

Kenneth Fry will always be remembered for his quiet, friendly personality

and for the patient tenacity with which he applicd himself to his chosen problems

of study.

T.D.C.

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE

YEAR 1958-59

Summary

LIST

Oct., 1958.

Nov., 1958,

Apr., 1959.

May. 1959.

June, 1959.

July, 1959.

Aug., 1959.

Sept., 1959.

OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1958-59

Mr. K. H. Nortucore: “The Problems of Classification, with Special

Reference to Soils”.

Mr. L, W. Parkin; “Geological Progress in South Australia in the

Post-war Period” (Presidential Address).

Dr. K. Tuomson: “Rugiri, a newly discovered ceremonial site in

the Western Desert, Northern Territory”.

Dr. J. N. Buacx: “Light, Climate, Leaf Area and the Growth of Plant

Communities”,

Sma Ronap FisHer: “Tobacco and Lung Cancer”,

Dr. A. F. Birp: “The Physiology of Root Attraction in Plant Parasitic

Nematodes”,

Mk. D. E. Symon: “The History and Domestication of Subterranean

Clover”.

Dr. D. J. Surron: “Palaeomagnetism”.

BALANCE SHEET

Summary

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED )

Receipts and Payments for Year ended 30th September, 1959.

£ ed,

To Balance, 1/10/50 698 18 3

», Subscriptions 359 17 5

», Government Grant 1,750 0 0

» Sale of Publications, ete. 431 12 1

>» Rent of Rooms .. MN wl * 5 2 0

>> Interest—

Endowment Fund £239 11 7

Savings Bank of

S.A, he ie 44 14 §

—————._ 284 6 3

£3,729 16 §

By Printing and Eubtiehing. Volume 82,

Reprints, etc.

> Library Assistants

» Printing and Stationery ea

» Postage and Duty y Stamps, etc.

» Cleaning .. .

> Insurance ..

» Lighting

» Sundries

» Balance—

Savings Bank of

5.A., Rundle St. £598 8

Less Outstanding

Cheques 43 15

Audited and found correct.

Adelaide, 5th October, 1959.

F. M. ANGEL

N. S. ANCEL, A.U.A, Com.

ENDOWMENT FUND

Receipts and Payments for Year ended 30th September, 1959.

» 2,678 13

554 13

£3,729 16

Hon,

{ Auditors,

& s. d.

To Balance, 1/10/58 . 6110 0 0

>, Interest—

Inscribed Stock .. £234 1 7

Gas Co. <i 510 0

239 11 7

£6,349 11 7

By Revenue A/c

» Balance—

Cwealth Inscribed

Stock... . £6,010 0

S.A. Gas Co. Bonds 100 0

6,110 0

£6,349 11

Audited and found correct.

been inspected in the hands of the Treasurer.

F. M, ANGEL \ Hon.

N. 8, ANGEL, A.U.A. Com. Auditors.

Adelaide, 5th October, 1959.

The Stock has been verified by certificate and the Gas Co. Bond has

H. WOMERSLEY, Hon. Treasurer.

WAWoorcrerH

tt)

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror, Waiter Howcnin, F.G.S,

1930 Joun McC. Buacx, A.L.S.

1931 Pror. Sta Douctas Mawson, O.B.E., D.Sc., B-E., F.B.S,

1933 Pror, J. Burton Crenanp, M.D.

1935 Pror, T. Harvey Jonnston, M.A. D.Sc.

1938 Puxor. J. A, Prescott, D.Sc., F.A.C.I.

1943 Hersenr Womenstey, A,L.S,, F\RE.S.

1944 Puor,.J. G. Woon, D.Se., Ph.D.

1945 Cecm T. Mapican, M.A., B.E,, D.Sc., F.G.S.

1946 Henoent M. Hare, O.B.E.

1955 LL. Kerres Wanp, 1.5.0,, B,A,, B.E,, D.Sc,

1956 N. B. Trypate, B.Sc,

1957 C. §. Pren, D.Sc.

LIST OF FELLOWS

AS AT 30th SEPTEMBER, 1959.

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

‘Transactions. Those rorked with a dagger (¢) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note,—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrears,

Date of

Date of Honorary Honorary Fetiows

Election Election

1895 1949 *Crevanp, Pror. J, B., M.D., Dashwood Road, Buanmont, §.A.—Verco Medal,

1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28, 1940.41; Vice-

; President, 1926-27, 1941-42,

1913 1955 °Osnorn, Prov, T. G. B., D.Se., St. Mark’s College, Pennington Terrace,

North Adelaide—Couwncil, 1915-20, 1922-24; Vice-President, 1924-25,

1926-27; President, 1925-26.

1912 1955 *Wanv, L. K., 15.0. B.A. B.E., D.Se., 22 Northumberland Street, Heath-

pool, Marryatyille, S.A—Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; Vice-President,

1927-28; President, 1928-30.

Date of Ww:

Election FELLows

1946, “Apspm, Prov, A. A. M.D., D.Se.. Ph.D., University of Adelaide,

1955. °Anece, K., Dr, Phil. (Marburg), Dr.Phil.Nat, (Tartu-Dorpat), M.Se. (Riga), 42

Kildonan Road, Warradale Park, S.A.

1959. Arrken, P., B.Sc., South Australian Museum, North Terrace., Adelaule, S.A,

1927, “ALDERMAN, Prog. A. R., Ph.D., D.Se., F.G.S., Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide—Couneil, 1937-42, 1954-57.

1951. Annrexson, Mas. S. H., B.Sc, 31 Lakeman Street, North Adclaide.

1935. *AnpREewantiHa, H. G., M.Ag.Sc,, D.Se., Zoology Dept, University of Adelaide —

Council, 1949-50; Vice-President, 1950-51, 1953-53; President, 1951-52.

1935. *ANDREWAHTHA, Mas. H. V., B.Agr.Sc., M.Sc, (nee H. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

1958 Baurn. F. H,, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T,

1950. Brex, R. G., B.AgSe., R.D.A., Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, via Mount Gambier, SA.

1932. Becs, P. R., D.D.Sc., L,D.5., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

R J. D.Se, F.A.C.1,, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide.

> AS.AS.M., M.I.MLM., 36 Woodcroft Avenue, St. Georges, S.A.

. , M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1950. Bonnin, N. I, M.B., B.S., F-R.C.S. (Eng.), F\R.A.C.S,, 40 Barnard Street, North

BonytHon, Sm J. Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide.

1945. “*Boomsara, C. D., M.Sc., B,Se.For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A.

1950,

1930,

1957,

195¢).

1944,

1931.

1933,

1945.

190g,

1958.

159,

1927,

1951.

1958.

1958,

1959.

1954.

1953,

1927,

1435,

1939,

1943,

1sd4.

1922.

LIST OF FELLOWS aig

~ Bagores, es H. M,, Dept, of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Na.

» Adelaide.

Burek, W, G,, BA. o/v Country Lending Service, Public Library, South Austrailia

“Humans, Mes N. T., M.Se, C.5.0B,0., Diy, Plant Industry, P.O. Box Lvy, Can-

yerra, ACL,

Burvon, R. S., D-Se., Physics Dept., University af Adelaide—Conneil, 1946-99,

Burine, [., 51 Richmond Road, Westbourne Park, $.A,

SCamPuriL, Prom T. D., D.D.Se., DSe., 24 Lynington Street, Tusinare, S.A—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45: Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35.

Carnopus, B. B., R.D-Gen., St. Mark’s College, North Adelaide, S.A,

Canter, A. N., B,Sc,, 7 Madeline Street, Burwood, E,13, Victoria.

*CurrEnvAue, G. M., B.Sc., Lindsay Avcnue, Alice Springs, N.T.

a le MB... BS,, 7 Walter Street, Hyde Park, Adelaide, §.A—T'seasuret,

Cioran, EB, A, Hydroelectric Connnission, Hobart, Tus,

Coutiryen, F. 8., Coology Department, University ol Queensland.

*Corron, B. C,, F.10Z,8., J.P, S.A, Museum, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide—Couneil, L045.

46, 1948-49; Vice-President, 1949-50, 1951; President, 1950-51; Programme Sec-

retary, 1959-

Crawrorp, A. H., B.Sc... Dept. of Mines, Adelaide.

Day, B., Ph.D., S.A. Museum—Prozramme Seeretary, 1957-59,

Adelaide, S.A,

Deranp, GC, M.. MB. B.S... D.P.H,, D.T.M., 29 Gilbert Street, Goodwoed, S.A.—

Council, 1949-51, 1954-39: Vice-President, 1951-52, 1953-54; President, 1952-53,

Dix, EB, V,, Box 12, Aldgate, S.A. ;

Doub, K, M., M.Ag.Se.. Wuite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide.

Dunrnor, P, fh, G., WSe, 13 Walton Ave. Clearview, S.A,

Dunstonr, 8. M. Li. M.B. B.S., 170 Puynehiim Road, St. Peters, Adelaide.

Dwvyzr, J. M., MLB. BS., 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh, S.A.

*akniny, Miss C. M.. M.Sc. F.LS., University of Adeluide—Couneil, 194348,

"Epmonps, 8, J,, BA MSe, Ph.D., Zoology Departmant, University of Adelaidi—

Council, 1954-55; Frogramme Seeretiry, 1955-56; Seoretury, 1956-57.

*Rngquisr, A. G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg. 5,A—Couneil, 1949-53,

“Eicuewr, H,, Drrernat. State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, Adelaide,

Mevorr, D, B.. B.Sc, Dept, of Zoolozy, University, North ‘Verrace, Adelaide, S.A,

“Finvrayson, H. H., JOS Ward Street, North Adelaide—Conneil, 1937-40.

Yisimn RB. H., 21 Seaview Road, Lynton, South Australia.

*Fonpes, B. G,, Ph.D, HGS. 9 Flinders Road, Millerest, S.A.

Forn, A. W., F.LGS,, A.C.C,S,, 380 South Terrace, Bankstown, N.S.W,

Torve. N., Dip.Foe,, éS1RO., Canberra, A.C.T-

Grisow. A, A. A.W.A.S.M., Mines Department, Adelaide.

*Grarssneg, M, F,, D.Se,, oo Geolozy Department, University of Adelaide—Council,

1933-54; Vice-President, 1958-59.

Gonrrry, FF, K., 5 Robert Street. Payneham, South Australia.

{Gornsack, H., Coromandel Valley, S.A.

Green, Miss L, M A., B.A M.Sc,, Dept. of Anatomy and Histology, University.

Adelaide, S.A.

Gnoss, CG, FL, M.Su. South Anstralian Musenm, Adclide—Sevretury, 1950-53.

Guppy, D. J., B.Se., ¢/o WA, Petroleum Co., 251 Adelaide Terrace, Perth, W.A,

*Harte, H. M., O.B-F., c/o S.A. Museum, Narth Terrace, Adelnide—Verrv Medal,

1946; Cawneil, 1951-34, 1950-53, 1956; Vice-President, 1954-36, 1937-048; Presi-

dent, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-50, 1953-56.

Tars,, 9, R,, Téa Tree Gully, §.A.

{Hancocr, N. 1, 3 Bewdley, 66 Beresford Road, Rose Bay, NS.W-

"Hansen, 1. V., BA, Queen Elizabeth Sehoul, Crediten, Devan, England.

*Hanpy, Mus. J. B. (nec A. C. Beckwith), M.Se., Box 63, Sutitlitoa, Tas.

Hanns, J. R., B.Sc, c/o Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1). Adelaide,

Havnacn, J. F., B.Se,, 64 Pleasant Avenue, Clandore, S.A.

Herriot, R. 1, B.AgrnSo., 49 Halsbury. Avenuc, Kingswood, S.A.

Hocxwe, L. IL, Kauri Parade, Seacliff, S.A,

H,. D.Se.. & Vardon Street, Seacombe Gardens, 5A,

132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, S.A.

S., J.P. 238 Payneham Road, Puyneham, $.A-

S.AS.M,, 10 Bellevne Place, Unley Park—Crunesil, 1OS7-59

Horwtirz, H, G, Db.

*Hossretp, P. S,. Ph.D.

Hunarg, D. S. W., M.P

*Hurtron, J. T., BiSe., a,

‘

210

Hate of

Election

1928.

1d5.

1550.

1957

1558.

1954,

1939,

1uda.

1933,

1922.

1958.

1948,

193],

1953,

J939,

16%.

1920.

T95u,

1443.

TA4R

1945,

1951,

1852.

1934.

1958.

1991,

1933,

1925,

1938,

1936.

1957.

1944,

1945.

1930.

SSB,

15937.

1944,

1929.

1936.

LIST OF FELLOWS

Trout, P., 1d Wyatt Road, Burnside, S.A,

°Jessuy, R, W,, M.So,, Division of Plant Industry, €.S.0R.0., P.O. Box 109, City,

Canberra, A.C,T.

*Jouns, R. K,, B.Se., Depurtrnent of Mines, Adelaide, S,A,

Jounson, B., B.Se.Agr., Ph, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Na. 1), Adelaide,

*Jornsos, W,, B.Sc, (Honx.), 33 Ryau Avenue, Woodville West, S.A

Kears, A. L., BE, 44 LeFevre Terrace, North Adelaide,

TR RSEAR, or M,, Ph.D,, MLB, F.R.G.5., Khakhar Buildings, GP Tank Road, Bom-

ay, India,

*King, D., M-Sc., ¢/a Commercial Bank of Australia, King Willian St., Adelaide, S.A,

*Kureman, A, W.,_PhD.. Dept. of Geology, University of Adelaide—Seenstury, 1945-

48: Vice-President, 1948-49, (950-51; Prevident, 1949-50.

Lennon, G. A. M.D., B.S., F.B.C.P., c/o. Elder's Trustee and Executor Co. Lid.,

37 Currie Street, Adelaide, 51A,

Linpsay, TY, A., LLO Cross Road, Highgate, 8,A.

Lorman, T, K. N., N.D.IT, (N.Z.), Director, Botanic Carden, Adelaide—Treavurer,

1952-53; Council, 1953-57; Vice-President, 1957-58; President, 1988, (959,

“Lupsxook, Mrs, N. A. M.A, PhD., DLC, F.G.$., Department of Mines, Adelaide

—Council,, 1958-59,

Marnzer, D, A, B.Sc. (Hons.), Waite Institute (Private Mail Bay, No. 1), Adelaide,

Mausuatn, T, J., MAgrSe, Ph.D. C.8...8.0., Division of Soils (Private Mall Bag,

No, 1), Adelaide—Councll, 1948-52.

Martm, Miss H. A., 43 Dunrobin Road, Brighton, $.A.

Mayo, Sov Heasent, LL.B, O.C., 19 Marlborough Strect, Cullege Park, S.A,

Mayo, G. M, E., B.Ag.Sc,, Ph.D,, 146 Melbourne Street, North ‘Adelaide.

McCanrruy, Miss D, F., B.A., B.Se., 17 Brookside Ave, ‘Tranmere.

MeQui nies, ‘i N., M.B.E., B.Sc,, B.Agr.Se., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Ruse-

wotthy, 5S A,

i*Mives, K. R., D.Sc. B.G.S§., 11 Church Road, Mitcham, S.A.

Mines, J. A. R,, M.A.. M.D., B.Chir. (Cant.), University of Otago, N,Z

Minwe, K. Li, F.C.A., 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A,

Minciam, V. H., 30 Wainhouse Street, Torrunsville, S.A.

Minas, RK, G., B.Sc,, 5 Myrtle Rd, Seaclift, S.A,

Mire FP, J., South Australian Museum, Novth ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A —!'rewvurer,

1959-.

Mirenenp, Puor. Sir M. L,, M-Sa, ¢/o Elder's Trustee and Execntor Qo. Ltd, 37

Curie Street, Adeluide.

{MircHELL, Pror, Sin W., K.C.M.C,, M.A,, D.Se., Fitzroy Terrace, Prospeet, SuA.

Moontouser, F, W,, M-Se., Chief lospector of Fisheries, Simpsim Builetings, Gawler

Place, Adelaide.

*Mountronp, C, P., 25 First Avenue, St. eters, Adelaide,

“Muse, Ivan A., B.Se.. (Hons.), Dept. of Mines, Adelaide:

Musnecn, J, W., Engineering and Water Supply Dept., Victoria Square, Adelaide

Ninwes, A, R., B.A., R.D.A., 62 Sheffield Street, Malvern, SiA.

*Nontucote, KL, BAgrSe., ADAS., C.S.LK.0,, Division of Snils, Private Mall

Bay, No. 1, Adelaide,

Ocxrnpen, G. P., B.A., 108 Hockey Stroct, Whyalla South, S.A-

O'Duusecoin, E. S., B.Sc. 9 Vinall Street, Dover Gardens, S.A,

*Pargm, 1, W., M.S, A/S.T.C., Mines Dept,, Adelaide — Sweretany, 1953.56,

Vice-President, 1956-57, 1958-59: President, 1957-38.

Parxinson, K, J.. B.Sc, Birelwood, SA.

Pauiy, A. G., M.A., B.Se., 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate, $.A.

*Piver, O, S., D,Se., C.8,1.8.0., Division of Soils, Private Mail Bag, No 1, Adolaide—

Verco Medal, 1957; Council, 1941-43; View-President, (943-45, 1946-47: Pree

sident, 1945-1946,

Powntr, J. K,, B.Sc, Waile Institute {Private Mail Bag, No. |), Adcdaide. SUA,

§Parscorr, Pror. J. A. C.B.E., DSe., FRAGT, FURS, 82 Cross Road, Myrtle

Bank, S.A.—Vereo Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30. 1935-39; Vice-President,

1930-32; President, 1932-33; Editor, 1055-.

*Prncie, Miss L. A. B., Box 878, G:P.O., Adelaide.

*Pryon, L, D., M.Sc, Dip.For,, 32 La Perouse Street, Griffith, Canberra, A.C.T-

*Rattican, J. I,, MSe., Box 229r. G.P.0.. Melbourne, Vivtoria,

RicemaAn, D. §., M.Sc., B.Agr.Se.. €,5.L8.0., Division of Biochemistry, Adelaide.

Rrepe., W. R., B.Se., e/a Scripps Institution of Oceanography. Dept. of Valoean-

tology, University of California. La Jolla, Galifornia, U.S.A,

LIST OF FELLOWS all

Date ol

Election

1997, Rex, G. B.,. 42 Woymouth Avenue, Glandore, S.A,

1953, Kocurs, Pror, Wi PR. PRD, PAA, Zoology Dopartment, University uf Adeluide.

1951, Rowx, S, A. 32 Shelley Street, Firle, $A.

1950. Rupp, Prov. Ti, A,, BSe,, A.M., University of Adelaide, S.A,

Wal. Russeun, L. D., efo Adelaide Boys’ High School, West Termec, Adelaide, S.A,

T45. Byotitn, J. B., Old Penalo Mstate, Penola, S.A,

1933. Souwnmmms, M., M.B. B.S., 175 North Terrace, Adelaide,

1959. ScHonpe, K., 23 French Strect, Netherby, S.A.

195). Scorn, T. D., M.Sc. S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S\A,— Programme

Secretary, 1953-54, 1996-57; Seeretory, 1957-59.

1957. SHARMAN, G. B., B.Sc., Department of Zoology, University, North Yerrace, Adelalde,

S.A.

1925, *Sreanun, H., Part Elliot, S.A,

1996. "Smear, K., D.Se., Wisheries Research Div., €,S.1.R.0,. Division of Misheries and

Ocrauography, University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A.

1954. Stutrmreuw, AR. C., BiSe., e/o Department of Mines, Adelaide,

1934. Semsrcecp, R, C,, 57 Canterbury Avermie, Trinity Gardens, S.A.

1925. tSaurn, 54 Tom Basu, Rt. B.A,, 25 Currie Street, Adelaide:

i94l. *Sanns, T. L, BiSe., Dept, of Geography, University of Sydney, N.S.W.

1941. °Sourucerr, R. V.. M.D., B.S., D.T.M. & Il, 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, SA—

Corneil, 1949-51, 1952-53, 1987-. Trewsurer, 1951-32; Vige-Pregident, 1933-54,

1955-56; President, 1954-55,

i936, Sournwoon, A, BR. M.D, MLS. (Adel,), M.R.C.P., 170 North Terrace, Adeltide.

17. *Sercer, R. L., PHD., Botany Depattnent, University of Adelaide—fSoimcil, 1951-52,

1958-59; Procramme Secretary, 1959-53.

1956, +°S price, R. C., MSc. 5 Baber Street, Somerton Park:

1951, Stesusan, Rev. W. RL 8 Blairgowrie Roacl, St. Georves, S.A,

137. Srunuinc, M. B., BeAg.Se., Horticultaral Branch, Department af Azticulhiie, Box

9OLE, G.P.O., Adeliide.

Idd. °Spry, A. H., M.Sc., Geology Department, University of Tasmania,

laide—Veren Medal, 1959; Council, 1952-54; Vice-President, 1954-55, 1958-57;

President, 1955-56,

1955, Swarm, C. D., M,B., B.S.. 220 Esplanade, Largs North, §,A,

1932. Swas, D.C,, M.Sc., Waite Institute {Private Mail Bag. No. 1), Adelaide—Swernraryy,

1940-42; Vice-President, 1946-47, 1948-49; Presidlent, 1947-45; Couneil, 1953-58.

1951. Swinsx, P., M.Ag.Se., 11 Wall Street, Norwood, 8.A,

1994, Syaions, 1, G., 55 Marray Street, Lower Mitelion, S.A—Editar, 1947-55, Cine,

1955-58. ;

1958, Tayion, D. J., Dept. of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Nu 71),

Advlwide, S.A,

1929, *Tayron, J. K, BA M.Se., C.S.1.1.0., Division of Sails, Private Mail Bag, Ne, 1,

Aclelaide—Cauneil, 1940-43, 1947-50; Llbrartan, 1951-52; Viec-Presidlent. 1952-

53, 1M54-55: Prevident, 1953-54; Counuil, 1955.

1955. Trarcnen, D,, B.Sc,, Department of Minus, Adelaide,

1948, °Tnosas, & M., M.Sc, (Wales), Department of Zoology, University af Adrlalle—

Secretary, 1948-50; Coancil, 1950-53; Vice-President. 1955-56, 1957-58: Mresident.

1956-57; Assistant Eclitor, 1958-.

1988. *Trioxras, Mrs, 1, M. (nee P, M. Mawson), M,Se... 18 Dunhice Ave., Brizlitun, S.A,

1957. ‘Tnostas, J., B.Sc., Woodleigh Road, Blackwood, S.A,

1940, *4'Hoarrsaw, Cart. J. M., 135 Military Moaad, Semaphore Sonth, §-A-

1959; Tromsow, B. P.. M.Sc. 33 Oaklands Road, Parkholme, §.4,

1923. “Tinpane, N. Bi, B.Se.. South Australian Museusa, Adelaide—Vercoa Meddul, 1956;

Secretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47; Vice-President, 1947-48, 1949-50; President,

1948-49. Librarian, 1952-.. :

1955, “Tucker, B. M., B.Sc., C.S.1.8,0;, Division of Soils, Private Mall Bag, No. 1, Adolaide.

1959, ‘Twipane, C. R., Ph.D. MSe., Dept. of Geovraphy, University, North Terrace,

Adelaice, S.A.

W950, "Tyten, M. J. Dept. of Physiolosw, University, Adelaide, 8.4,

1950, Verret, J. T., Box 92, Port Lincoln, S.A.

1953. Watrastan, Tl. A. B.A. MLA. PhD., Wayne State University, Doetrait, Michigan,

U.S.A,

1954, Wess, B, P., MSc, Mines Dept, Rundle Street, Adelaide,

1954, Werns, C. B., B.Ag.Sc., Broadlees, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, S.A,

1946. *°Wuirrnr, A, W.-G., M.Sc., Mines Department, Adelaide.

212

Date of

Election

1950.

1946.

1938.

1933.

1954.

1944.

1923.

1957,

1949,

1944.

LIST OF FELLOWS

WiiaMs, L. E., “Dumosa,” Meningie, S.A.

*Witson, A. F., D.Sc., Dept. of Geology, University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A.

*Wirson, J. O., 42 Wilson Terrace, DaCosta Park, Glenelg, S.A.

*WomersLey, H., F.R.E.S., A.L.S. (Hon. causa), S.A. Museum, Adelaide — Verco

Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43, 1945-47: President, 1943-44;

Vice-President, 1944-45; Rep. Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, 1945:

Treasurer, 1950-51, 1956-59.

*Womers.ey, H. B. §., Ph.D., Botany Department, University of Adelaide.

Womerscey, J. §., B.Sc., Dept. of Forests, Lae, New Guinea.

*Woop, Pror. J. G., D.Sc., Ph.D., F.A.A., Botany Dept., University of Adelaide—Verco

Medal, 1944; Council, 1938-40; Vice-President, 1940-41, 1949-43; Rep. Fauna and

Flora Board, 1940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 1944-48.

Woons, R. V., B.Sc., Mt. Crawford, S.A.

Yeates, J. N., A.M.LE., A.M.I.M.E., Highways and Local Government Dept.,

Adelaide.

Zoumer, W. J., Dip.For., F.L.S. (Lon.), 7 Rupert Street, Footscray West, W.12, Vict.

GENERAL INDEX

Summary

GENERAL INDEX

Names printed in italics as separate entries indicate that the forms are new to science,

Absolute Gravity Values, Determina-

tion of the, on the Summits of a

Number of Prominent Hills in the

Mount Lofty Ranges: I. A. Munnne = 119

Acarina, (Some) trom Australia and

New Guinea Paraphagic upon Mil-

lipedes and Cockroaches and on

Beetles. of the Family Passalidae;

H, Womersley ‘d a of 31

Adelaide Systern, Maynesite of the:

Petrography and Descriptive strati-

graphy: B. G, Forbes 1-9

Aeolian Landforms: The Sand Ridge

Deserts of South Australia and,

Related, of the Quatemary Arid

Cycles: "D. King: 99

Amphibolurus adelaidensis (Gray);

Observations on the Diet and Size

Variation of, on the Nullarbor

Plain: M. J. Tyler - . I

Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis be 92

Arhynchite hiscocki _. a - 90

Bluck, J. Nv: The Relationship be-

tween Uhimination and Global

Radiation 83-87

Boomsma, C. C.: Notes on the Genus

BR neal, ats in Sofia 4 Austraha .. 195-198

Borreria hillii a 7 » 202

Central Australia, Contributions to

the Flora of: G. M. Chippendale 199

Central Australia, the Charnockitic

Granites and Associated Granites of — 37

Charnnckitic (The) Granites and As-

sociated Granites of Central Aus-

tralia 37

Chippendale, G. M.: Contributions to

the Flora uf Central Australia 199-203

Classificatory Systems of Kinship:

H. K. Fry 11

Consideration (A) of the Spccies

Previously Included with Helip-

deruen albicans (A, Gunn.) DC:

P, Wilson... 163

Cormiathen ta the Flora of Goniral

Australia: G, M. Chippendale 199

Cotton, Bernard C.: Distorted Cow-

ries . 109-110

Cowrics, Distorted: B. G. Cotton. LO9

Dict and Size Variation of Amphi-

bolavas adelatdensis (Gray) on

the Nullarbor Plain: M. J. Tyler .. 111

Evhiuroidea; Some Australian Echin-

roids; $. J. Edmonds , p 89

Kelipta alatocarpa be wa rr 77

Edmonds, S$. J.: Some Australian

Eohiuratds (Eechiurvidea) - _. 89-98

Eucalyptus, Notes on the Genus in

South Australia; C, BD. Boomsma . 195

Finlayson, H, H.: On Rattus greyi

Cray and its Derivatives 123-147

Finlayson, H. Hi: Nomenclature of

Notomys (Muridaue) in the Lake

Eyre Basin L 79-82

Flora of Central Australia, Contri-

butions to the: G, M. Chippendale 199

Torbes, B. G.: Magnesite of the Ade

aide System! Petrography and De-

scriptive Stratigraphy 1

Fry, H. K.; Classificatory: Systems of

Kinship : 11-19

Fry, Henry Kenucth, An ‘Appreciation 204

Creat Australian Artesian Basin, on

Some Structural Deyelopment in

the Central Part of the: Hi

Wopfner 179

Helipterum albicans (A. c er DC.,,

« Consideration of the Species Pre-

viously Inclided with: P. CG,

Wilson i = 163

Helipterum saxatile vs a _ 166

Heterocheylus lombardinti sie pal

Kinship, Classificatory Systems of;

H. kK. Fry 11

King, D.: The Sand Ridve Deserts of

South Australia and Related

Aeolian Landforms of the Quatern-

ary Arid Cycles... 5 2 99-108

Laelaptoseius navae-zelandiae 31

Lake Eyre Basin, Nomenelature of

Notomys (Muridae) in the: H. H,

Finlayson ta ae - . 79

Leptolaclaps (Acarina, Mesostig-

mata), New Records of Species

from Australia and New Zealand:

H, Woinersley 25

Magnesite of the Adelaide System

Petrography — and Descriptive

Stratigraphy: B. G. Forhes 1

Melville, R.: An Aberrant Species of

Eulipta from Australia ; 717-18

Mount Lofty Tanges, Determination

of the Absolute Gravity Values on

the Summits of a Number of Pro-

minent Hills: 1, A. Mumme w L119

Miumme, T. A.: Determination of the

Absolute Gravity Values on the

Summits of a Number of Promi-:

nent Hills in the Mosnt Lofty

Ranges . »2 119-121

214 GENERAL INDEX

Netomys (Muridac), Nomenclature

of, in the Lake Eyre Basin; H. H.

F inlayson 79

Nullarbor Plain, Ohservations on the

Diet and Size Variation of Amphi-

holurus adelaidensis (Gray) (Rep-

tilia, Agamidae); M. J. Tyler ~~ 111

Ochetostoma australiense =. 93

On Some Structurat Developments

in the Central Part of the Great

Australian Artesian Basin: H.

Wopfner .. . . he . LT9

Pristolaelaps obovata —... - 33

Rattus greyi and its Derivatives:

If. I. Finlayson h 123

Rattus greyi pelori 140

Relationship (The) Betw ein Tlu-

mination and Global Radiation:

J. N. Black = = a 83

Sand Ridge Deserts of South Aus-

tralia and Related Aeolian Land-

forms of the Quaternary Arid

Cycles; D. King 99

Southcutt, R. V.; Notes on the. genus

S phaeratarsus (Acarina, Smutri-

didae ) 149-161

Sphacratarsus, Notes on the Genus:

» ¥, Southcott - . . 149

Thalassema sydniense ...

Tyler, M. J.: Observations on the

Diet and Size Variation of Amphi-

holurus adelaidensis (Gray)

Wilson, A, F.; The Charnaockitic

Granites and Associated Granites

of Central Australia

Wilson, Paul G.: A Consideration of

the ‘Species Previously Included

with Helipterum albicans (A.

Cunmn,) DC. ;

Wopfner, H.: On. Some Structural

Development in the Central Part

of the Great Australian Artesian

Basin , z

Womersley, ‘HL: A New Genus and

Species, Laelaptoseius novae-

zelandiae from New Zealand (Aca-

rina, Aceosejidae )

Womersley, H.; A Second Species of

Pristolaelaps (Acarina, Laelapti-

dae) from Australia .. 7

Womersley, H.: New Records of

Species of Leptolaelaps (Acarina,

Mesostigmata) from Australia and

New Zealand

Womersley, H.: Some Acarina from

Australia and New Guinea Para-

phagic Upon Millipedes and Cock-

roaches and on Beetles of the

Family Passalidae i.

111-117

37-76

163-177

179-193

31-32

. 33-35

25-29

_ 21-24

6 ete ee enn Q

- i ae wpb mn yl RCS i Bu

- a ha By > * s - 2

CONTENTS

B. G. Forses: Magnesite of the Adelaide hae Petrography and De-

scriptive Stratigraphy Sete ile cma) gaze. a rae ag

H. K. Fry: Classificatory Systems of Kinship... ms

H. WomenstEy: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paobaats

upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family

DENCE EN Mogae TM tou rend Pk AE te tae a

H. Womerstey: New Records of Species of frolcelans (Acarina, Meso-

stigmata) from Australia and New Zealand... mmm

H. Womerstey: A New Genus and Species Laelaptoseius novae-

zelandiae from New Zealand (Acarina, Aceosejidae) 0 em

H. Womerstey: A Second Species of Pristolaelaps VES “‘Eaclaptidad)

from Australia See AE ecm eR es ee eet e 2,

‘A. F. Wuson: The Chamnockitic Biabiies and ASS Giants of

Centrale Anstralia 8s. ie ee ed ae as

R. Metvixe: An Aberrant Species of Eclipta from Australia ee gees

H. H. Frtayson: Nomenclature of Notomys (Muridae) in the Lake Eyre

Basin. | Set Spe cca Re ee rai Sea

J. N. Brack: The Ralatioashtp pores Whumination Sal Global Radiation

S. J. Evmonps: Some Australian Echiuroids (Echiuroidea ) xs

D. Kine: The Sand Ridge Deserts of South Australia and Related Aeolian

Landforms of the Quaternary Arid Cycles... ~~. ms

Brernarp C, Corton: Distorted Cowries Duce 2 eaten ant ees

M. J. Tyter: Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of ‘Ate hibolahes

adelaidensis (Gray) (Reptilia, Agamidae) on the Nullarbor Plain ....

I. A. Mumme: Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the

Summits of a Number of Prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges

H. H. Foxtayson: On Rattus greyi Gray and its Derivatives =.

R. V. Sourucotr: Notes on the Genus Sphaerotarsus (Acarina, Smarididae)

Pau. CG. Wison: A Consideration of the Species Previously Included

within Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.) DC... s...

H. Woprner: On Some Structural Development in the Central Part of the :

Creat Australian Artesian Basin’. 0 ok nee

C. D; Boomsma: Notes on the Genus Eucalyptus in South Australia...

CG. CurepenpALE: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 1...

Henry Kenneth Fry, D.S.0., M.D., B.S., B.SC., DIP,P.H., 1886-1959 __......

List of Lectures, 1958-1959" oe ie ae eat

Falance-Gheebc paar 2 aie eee Seay i a lr aces he 72h. alt

Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco ‘Medal and List of Fellows, 1959...

eee tee aa ee eee ee ee econ TE